MVC-FD100-FD200 L 2 e L3 Ver 1.4

MVC-FD100/FD100H/FD200/FD200H
SERVICE MANUAL US Model

Level 2 Canadian Model
MVC-FD100/FD200
AEP Model
UK Model
MVC-FD200
Ver 1.4 2003. 09
E Model
Australian Model
Japanese Model
MVC-FD100/FD200
Brazilian Model
Photo: MVC-FD200 MVC-FD100
This service manual contains information for Japanese model as well.
When the machine needs to be repaired,

please refer to page 7 to discriminate the
type of CCD.
On the FC-89 board FC-89 board

This service manual procides the information that is premised the Schematic diagram ................................... Pages 4-11 to 4-30
circuit board replacement service and not intended repair inside the Printed wiring board ................................. Pages 4-43 to 4-46
FC-89 board. Electrical parts list .................................... Pages 6-9 to 6-15
Therefore, schematic diagram, printed wiring board and electrical
parts list of the FC-89 board are not shown. The above-described information is shown in service manual
The following pages are not shown. Level 3.
SPECIFICATIONS
System Flash Operating temperature Storage temperature Dimensions (Approx.)

Recommended recording 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F) −20°C to +60°C (−4°F to 38.4×20.6×70.8 mm
Image device distance (ISO set to AUTO): +140°F) (1 9/16×13/16×2 7/8 inches)
6.64 mm (1/2.7 type) Storage temperature
0.5 m to 2.0 m (1 2/3 feet to –20°C to +60°C (–4°F to Dimensions (Approx.) (w/h/d)
Color CCD
6 2/3 feet) +140°F) 125×39×62 mm (5×1 9/16× Mass (Approx.)
Effective pixels number 2 1/2 inches) (w/h/d) 70 g (2 oz)
of camera Dimensions (Approx.)
Input and Output 142 × 104 × 77 mm (5 1/2 × Mass (Approx.)
MVC-FD100: Accessories
Approx. 1 228 000 pixels
connector 4 × 3 inches) (w/h/d) 280 g (10 oz)
VIDEO OUT AC-L10A/L10B
MVC-FD200: Mass (Approx.)
Approx. 1 976 000 pixels Minijack 645 g (1 lb 7 oz) NP-F330 battery AC power adaptor (1)
Video: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω, (including NP-F330 battery pack Power cord (mains lead) (1)
Lens USB cable (1)
3× zoom lens unbalanced, sync negative pack, floppy disk and lens Battery type
cap, etc.) NP-F330 battery pack (1)
f = 6.4 – 19.2 mm (9/32 – USB jack Lithium ion
mini-B VIDEO connecting cable (1)
25/32 inches) Maximum output Shoulder strap (1)
(41 – 123 mm AC-L10A/L10B voltage
LCD screen AC power adaptor Lens cap (1)
(1 5/8 – 4 7/8 inches) when DC 8.4 V
Lens cap strap (1)
converted into a 35 mm still LCD panel Power requirements Mean output voltage
6.2 cm (2.5 type) CD-ROM (SPVD-008 USB
camera) 100 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz DC 7.2 V Driver) (1)
F = 3.8 – 3.9 TFT (Thin Film Transistor
Rated output voltage Capacity Operating instructions (1)
active matrix) drive DC 8.4 V, 1.5 A in operating 5.0 Wh (700 mAh)
Exposure control
Automatic exposure Total number of dots mode Operating temperature Design and specifications
123 200 (560×220) dots 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
White balance Operating temperature are subject to change
Automatic, Indoor, Outdoor, 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F) without notice.
General
Hold
Application
Data system Sony battery pack NP-F330
Movie: MPEG
Still: JPEG, GIF (in TEXT
mode, Clip Motion), TIFF
(supplied)/F550 (Optional)
Power requirements
7.2 V
DIGITAL STILL CAMERA
MPEG
Recording medium Power consumption
Floppy disk: (During shooting and
LCD backlight is on)
3.5-inch 2HD MS-DOS MVC-FD100: 3.5 W
format (1.44 MB) MVC-FD200: 3.6 W
“Memory Stick”
SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT

À LA SÉCURITÉ!
COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED
LINE WITH MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFIÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0
AND IN THE PARTS LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE SUR LES DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE
OPERATION. REPLACE THESE COMPONENTS WITH DES PIÈCES SONT CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ
SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS APPEAR AS DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE REMPLACER CES COM-
SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS PUB- POSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈCES SONY DONT LES
LISHED BY SONY. NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU
DANS LES SUPPLÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.
SAFETY CHECK-OUT
After correcting the original service problem, perform the following
safety checks before releasing the set to the customer.
1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-sol- UNLEADED SOLDER
dered connections. Check the entire board surface for solder Boards requiring use of unleaded solder are printed with the lead-
splashes and bridges. free mark (LF) indicating the solder contains no lead.
2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are (Caution: Some printed circuit boards may not come printed with
“pinched” or contact high-wattage resistors. the lead free mark due to their particular size)
3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly transis-
tors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point them : LEAD FREE MARK
out to the customer and recommend their replacement. Unleaded solder has the following characteristics.
4. Look for parts which, though functioning, show obvious signs • Unleaded solder melts at a temperature about 40 ˚C higher than
of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and recom- ordinary solder.
mend their replacement. Ordinary soldering irons can be used but the iron tip has to be
5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified. applied to the solder joint for a slightly longer time.
Soldering irons using a temperature regulator should be set to
6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing about 350 ˚C .
• Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270 ˚C Caution: The printed pattern (copper foil) may peel away if the
during repairing. heated tip is applied for too long, so be careful!
• Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of • Strong viscosity
the circuit board (within 3 times). Unleaded solder is more viscous (sticky, less prone to flow) than
• Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when sol- ordinary solder so use caution not to let solder bridges occur
dering or unsoldering. such as on IC pins, etc.
• Usable with ordinary solder
It is best to use only unleaded solder but unleaded solder may
also be added to ordinary solder.
–2–
• Floppy disk that can be used by the MVC-FD100/FD200

• Size : 3.5-inch
• Type : 2 HD
• Capacity : 1.44 MB
• Format : MS-DOS format
(512 bytes × 18 sector)
(FD can be formatted by the MVC-FD100/FD200)
Table for differences of function

MVC-FD100H MVC-FD200H
Model MVC-FD100 MVC-FD200
(Note 2) (Note 2)
US, Canadian, US, Canadian,
Destination US US
E, Australian, J AEP, UK, E, J
Effective pixels number
Approx. 1228 k pixels Approx. 1976 k pixels Approx. 1228 k pixels Approx. 1976 k pixels
of camera
CD-379 CD-390 CD-379 CD-390
CD board (Note 1) CD-390 CD-390
(TYPE PA) (TYPE SO) (TYPE PA) (TYPE SO)
Note 1: Type of CCD imager is different according to the CD board in MVC-FD100.
Refer to page 7 to discriminate the type of CCD.
Note 2: MVC-FD100H/FD200H are the same as MVC-FD100/FD200 (US model) except packing materials.
Therefore, information about MVC-FD100/FD200 (US model) in the text is applied.
–3–
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page Section Title Page
SERVICE NOTE ................................................................... 6 4-5. Parts Location ............................................................... 4-58
Self-diagnosis Display .......................................................... 8

5. ADJUSTMENTS
1. GENERAL
1-1. Adjusting Items when Replacing
Introduction .............................................................................. 1-1 Main Parts and Boards .................................................. 5-2
Identifying the Parts ................................................................. 1-2 5-1. Camera Section Adjustments ........................................ 5-3
Preparing the Power Supply ................................................... 1-2 1-1. Preparations Before Adjustment ................................... 5-3
Setting the Date and Time ....................................................... 1-3 1-1-1. List of Service Tools ................................................. 5-3
Inserting a Floppy Disk ............................................................ 1-4 1-1-2. Preparations ............................................................. 5-4
Inserting a “Memory Stick” ...................................................... 1-4 1-1-3. Discharging of the Flashlight Power Supply ............ 5-4
Recording Still Images ............................................................ 1-4 1-1-4. Precautions .............................................................. 5-6
Recording Moving Images ...................................................... 1-6 1. Setting the Switch .................................................... 5-6
Playing Back Still Images ........................................................ 1-6 2. Order of Adjustments ............................................... 5-6
Playing Back Moving Images .................................................. 1-6 3. Subjects .................................................................... 5-6
Viewing Images Using a Computer ......................................... 1-7 4. Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box ....................... 5-7
Image File Storage Destinations and Image File Names ....... 1-9 1-2. Initialization of B, D, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data .................... 5-8
Viewing Images Using “ImageMixer” ...................................... 1-10 1-2-1. Initialization of D Page Data .................................... 5-8
Before Performing Advanced Operations ............................... 1-12 1. Initializing D Page Data ............................................ 5-8
Various Recording ................................................................... 1-14 2. Modification of D Page Data .................................... 5-8
Various Playback ..................................................................... 1-17 3. D Page Table ............................................................ 5-9
Editing ..................................................................................... 1-18 1-2-2. Initialization of B, E, F, 7,9 Page Data ..................... 5-10
As an External Drive ................................................................ 1-20 1. Initializing B, E, F, 7 ,9 Page Data ........................... 5-10
Additional Information ............................................................. 1-21 2. Modification of B, E, F, 7,9 Page Data ..................... 5-10
Troubleshooting ....................................................................... 1-22 3. B Page Table ............................................................ 5-10
Warning and Notice Messages ............................................... 1-23 4. E Page Table ............................................................ 5-10
Self-diagnosis Display ............................................................. 1-24 5. F Page Table ............................................................ 5-11
LCD Screen Indicators ............................................................ 1-24 6. 7 Page Table ............................................................ 5-13
7. 9 Page Table ............................................................ 5-14
1-3. Video System Adjustments ........................................... 5-15
2. DISASSEMBLY 1. Video Sync Level Adjustment ....................................... 5-15
2. Video Burst Level Adjustment ....................................... 5-15
2-1. Cabinet (Rear) Block Assembly .................................... 2-1 1-4. Camera System Adjustments ........................................ 5-16
2-2. USB Connector Block ................................................... 2-2 Data Setting During Camera System Adjustments .............. 5-16
2-3. FC-89 Board .................................................................. 2-2 Picture Frame Setting ........................................................... 5-17
2-4. FDD ............................................................................... 2-3 Check on the Oscilloscope ................................................... 5-17
2-5. FDD Block Assembly ..................................................... 2-3 1. HALL Adjustment ........................................................... 5-18
2-6. Lens Block Assembly .................................................... 2-4 2. Flange Back Adjustment
2-7. PK-61 Board .................................................................. 2-5 (Using the Minipattern Box) .......................................... 5-19
2-8. LCD Module ................................................................... 2-5 3. Flange Back Adjustment
2-9. The Way of Disassembling the FDD ............................. 2-7 (Using the Flange Back Adjustment Chart and
2-10. Circuit Boards Location ................................................. 2-15 Subject More than 500 m Away) ................................... 5-20
4. Flange Back Check ....................................................... 5-21
5. F No. Compensation ..................................................... 5-22
6. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment .................................... 5-22
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
7. Light Value Adjustment .................................................. 5-23
8. Mixed Color Cancel Adjustment .................................... 5-24
3-1. Overall Block Diagram .................................................. 3-1 9. Auto White Balance Standard Data Input ..................... 5-24
3-9. Power Block Diagram 1 ................................................. 3-17 10. Auto White Balance Adjustment ................................... 5-25
3-10. Power Block Diagram 2 ................................................. 3-19 11. Auto White Balance 5800K Check ................................ 5-26
12. Auto White Balance 3200K Check ................................ 5-27
13. Color Reproduction Adjustment .................................... 5-28
4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND 14. Color Reproduction Check ............................................ 5-29
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 15. CCD White Defect Compensation ................................ 5-30
16. CCD Black Defect Compensation ................................. 5-31
4-1. Frame Schematic Diagrams ......................................... 4-3 17. Strobe White Balance Adjustment ................................ 5-32
Frame Schematic Diagram (1/2) ................................... 4-3 18. CCD Linearity Check ..................................................... 5-33
Frame Schematic Diagram (2/2) ................................... 4-5 1-5. LCD System Adjustments ............................................. 5-34
4-2. Schematic Diagrams ..................................................... 4-7 1. LCD Initial Data Input .................................................... 5-35
CD-379 Schematic Diagram ......................................... 4-7 2. VCO Adjustment (PK-61 Board) ................................... 5-36
CD-390 Schematic Diagram ......................................... 4-9 3. Black Limit Adjustment (PK-61 Board) ......................... 5-37
PK-61 (MODE SWITCH, VIDEO OUT) 4. Bright Adjustment (PK-61 Board) .................................. 5-37
Schematic Diagram ....................................................... 4-31 5. Contrast Adjustment (PK-61 Board) ............................. 5-38
PK-61 (LCD DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR) 6. VG Center Adjustment (PK-61 Board) .......................... 5-38
Schematic Diagram ....................................................... 4-33 7. P-SIG Level Adjustment (PK-61 Board) ....................... 5-39
PK-61 (BACK LIGHT DRIVE) Schematic Diagram ...... 4-35 8. V-COM Adjustment (PK-61 Board) ............................... 5-40
FU-159 Schematic Diagram .......................................... 4-37 9. White Balance Adjustment (PK-61 Board) ................... 5-41
4-3. Printed Wiring Boards ................................................... 4-39 1-6. System Control System Adjustments ........................... 5-42
CD-379 Printed Wiring Board ....................................... 4-39 1. Battery Down Adjustment .............................................. 5-42
CD-390 Printed Wiring Board ....................................... 4-41 2. ZOOM Center Adjustment ............................................. 5-43
PK-61 Printed Wiring Board .......................................... 4-47 3. Alignment Check (FDD Unit) ......................................... 5-43
FU-159 Printed Wiring Board ........................................ 4-51 5-2. Service Mode ................................................................ 5-44
4-4. Waveforms ..................................................................... 4-53 2-1. Adjusting Remote Commander ..................................... 5-44
–4–
Section Title Page

1. Used the Adjusting Remote Commander ..................... 5-44
2. Precautions upon Using the Adjusting
Remote Commander ..................................................... 5-44
2-2. Data Process ................................................................. 5-45
2-3. Service Mode ................................................................ 5-46
1. Setting the Test Mode ................................................... 5-46
2. Bit Value Discrimination ................................................ 5-46
3. Switch Check (1) ........................................................... 5-46
4. Switch Check (2) ........................................................... 5-46
5. Switch Check (3) ........................................................... 5-47
6. LED Check .................................................................... 5-47
7. Self Diagnosis Code ...................................................... 5-47
6. REPAIR PARTS LIST
6-1. Exploded Views ............................................................. 6-1

6-1-1. Cabinet (Front) Section ............................................ 6-1
6-1-2. Cabinet (Front) Assembly ........................................ 6-2
6-1-3. FDD Block Section ................................................... 6-3
6-1-4. Cabinet (Rear) Section ............................................ 6-4
6-1-5. Cabinet (Rear) Assembly ......................................... 6-5
6-1-6. Lens Block Section ................................................... 6-6
6-2. Electrical Parts List ........................................................ 6-7
* The color reproduction frame is shown on page 151.
–5–
SERVICE NOTE
• NOTE FOR REPAIR When remove a connector, don’t pull at wire of connector.
It is possible that a wire is snapped.
Make sure that the flat cable and flexible board are not cracked of
bent at the terminal.
Do not insert the cable insufficiently nor crookedly.
When installing a connector, don’t press down at wire of connector.

Cut and remove the part of gilt

which comes off at the point.
(Be careful or some pieces of
gilt may be left inside)
[Discharging of the FLASH unit’s charging capacitor] Discharging the Capacitor

Short-circuit between the positive and the negative terminals of
The charging capacitor of the FLASH unit is charged up to the charged capacitor with the short jig about 10 seconds.
maximum 300 V potential.
There is a danger of electric shock by this high voltage when the R: 1 kΩ/1 W
battery is handled by hand. The electric shock is caused by the (Part code:
charged voltage which is kept without discharging when the main 1-215-869-11)
power of the MVC-FD100/FD200 is simply turned off. There-
fore, the remaining voltage must be discharged as described be-
low.
Preparing the Short Jig

To preparing the short jig. a small clip is attached to each end of a
Capacitor
resistor of 1 kΩ /1 W (1-215-869-11).
Wrap insulating tape fully around the leads of the resistor to pre-
vent electrical shock.
1 kΩ/1 W
Wrap insulating tape.
–6–
[CCD type discrimination] (MVC-FD100 only)
Note: About CD board, FC-89 board and CCD imager, discrimi-

nate CCD type on the machine, and replace the same type.
• Discrimination method by adjusting remote commander. • Discrimination method by CD board (Board name check).
Checking method: – CD-379 Board (Side A) –

1) Select page: 6, address: 03
2) By checking the data value of display data, the type of CCD
can be discriminated.
CD-379: TYPE PA
Data CCD Type

15 TYPE PA
17 TYPE SO
– CD-390 Board (Side A) –
CD-390: TYPE SO
–7–
[Description on Self-diagnosis Display]
Note : The “Self-diagnosis” data is backed up by the coin lithiumbattery.

The data will be lost and initialized when the coin lithium battery
is removed.
Display Code Countermeasure Cause Caution Display During Error

Change the disk and turn off the main
C:32:01 Defective floppy disk. DRIVE ERROR
power then back on.
• The type of floppy disk that cannot be
Replace the floppy disk or “Memory used by this machine, is inserted.
Stick”. (Such as 2DD) DISK ERROR
C:13:01
Format the floppy disk or “Memory • Data is damaged. MEMORY STICK ERROR
Stick” with the MVC-FD100/FD200. • Unformatted disk or “Memory Stick”
is inserted.
Flash LED
Checking of flash unit or replacement of Abnormality when flash is being
E:91:01 *1 Flash display
flash unit charged.
Flashing at 3.2 Hz
E:61:00
Checking of lens drive circuit When failed in the focus initialization. —
E61:10
Note : The error code is cleared if the battery is removed, except defective flash, unit.
*1: When the flash charging failed, Page: D, Address: 67, Data: 04 are written.
After repair, be sure to write Page: D, Address: 67, Data: 00.
[Power supplying Method]
Use the AC power adaptor (AC-L10A) when supplying the power to this set.
–8–
SECTION 1 This section is extracted from MVC-
GENERAL FD100/FD200 instruction manual.
.
Regulatory Information no guarantee that interference will not occur
WARNING in a particular installation. If this equipment NOTICE FOR THE
Declaration of Conformity does cause harmful interference to radio or CUSTOMERS IN THE UNITED
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do
Trade Name: SONY television reception, which can be KINGDOM
not expose the unit to rain or Model No.: MVC-FD100 determined by turning the equipment off and
moisture. A moulded plug complying with BS 1363 is
Responsible Party:Sony Electronics Inc. on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
fitted to this equipment for your safety and
Address: 680 Kinderkamack the interference by one or more of the
For the Customers in the convenience.
Road, Oradell, NJ, following measures:
U.S.A. Should the fuse in the plug supplied need to
07649 USA — Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
be replaced, a 5 AMP fuse approved by
Telephone No.: 201-930-6972 — Increase the separation between the
ASTA or BSI to BS 1362, (i.e. marked with
equipment and receiver.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC or mark) must be used.
— Connect the equipment into an outlet on
Rules. Operation is subject to the following a circuit different from that to which the If the plug supplied with this equipment has
two conditions: (1) This device may not receiver is connected. a detachable fuse cover, be sure to attach the
cause harmful interference, and (2) this — Consult the dealer or an experienced fuse cover after you change the fuse. Never
device must accept any interference received, radio/TV technician for help. use the plug without the fuse cover. If you
including interference that may cause should lose the fuse cover, please contact
undesired operation. The supplied interface cable must be used
your nearest Sony service station.
with the equipment in order to comply with
Declaration of Conformity the limits for a digital device pursuant to
Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules. For the Customers in
Trade Name: SONY Germany
Model No.: MVC-FD200
Responsible Party:Sony Electronics Inc. For the Customers in the Directive:EMC Directive 89/336/EEC.92/
This symbol is intended to U.S.A. and Canada
alert the user to the presence Address: 680 Kinderkamack 31/EEC
of uninsulated “dangerous Road, Oradell, NJ, This equipment complies with the EMC
07649 USA RECYCLING LITHIUM-ION regulations when used under the following
voltage” within the BATTERIES
product’s enclosure that Telephone No.: 201-930-6972 circumstances:
may be of sufficient Lithium-Ion batteries are • Residential area
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC recyclable. • Business district
magnitude to constitute a Rules. Operation is subject to the following
risk of electric shock to You can help preserve our • Light-industry district
two conditions: (1) This device may not environment by returning your (This equipment complies with the EMC
persons. cause harmful interference, and (2) this used rechargeable batteries to standard regulations EN55022 Class B.)
device must accept any interference received,
This symbol is intended to the collection and recycling location nearest
including interference that may cause you.
alert the user to the presence undesired operation. Attention for the Customers in
of important operating and For more information regarding recycling of Europe
maintenance (servicing) CAUTION rechargeable batteries, call toll free
instructions in the literature This product has been tested and found
You are cautioned that any changes or 1-800-822-8837, or
accompanying the compliant with the limits sets out on the
modifications not expressly approved visit http://www.rbrc.org/.
appliance. EMC Directive for using connection cables
in this manual could void your Caution:Do not handle damaged or leaking shorter than 3 meters (9.8 feet).
If you have any questions about this product, authority to operate this equipment. Lithium-Ion batteries.
you may call: The electromagnetic fields at the specific
Sony Customer Information Center Note: CAUTION frequencies may influence the picture of this
1-800-222-SONY (7669) This equipment has been tested and found to TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT camera.
The number below is for the FCC related comply with the limits for a Class B digital USE THIS POLARIZED AC PLUG WITH
matters only. device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC AN EXTENSION CORD, RECEPTACLE OR
Rules. These limits are designed to provide OTHER OUTLET UNLESS THE BLADES
reasonable protection against harmful CAN BE FULLY INSERTED TO PREVENT
interference in a residential installation. This BLADE EXPOSURE.
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. However, there is
2 3
Be sure to read the following

Do not shake or strike the camera
In addition to malfunctions and inability to Introduction
before using your camera record images, this may render the floppy
Operating instructions disks or the “Memory Stick”s unusable or Check images after recording
Before operating the unit, please read this image data breakdown, damage or loss may
occur.
Recording still images:
manual thoroughly, and retain it for future page 18
reference. LCD screen, finder (only models
As you read through this manual, buttons Playing back still images:
with a finder) and lens page 24
and settings on the camera are shown in • The LCD screen and the finder are
capital letters. manufactured using extremely high- Deleting images (DELETE):
e.g. Press DISPLAY. precision technology so over 99.99% of page 75
Trial recording the pixels are operational for effective use.
Before you record one-time events, you may However, there may be some tiny black
want to make a trial recording to make sure points and/or bright points (white, red, Capture images with your computer
that the camera is working correctly. blue or green in color) that constantly You can copy images onto your computer and view and modify images or attach
appear on the LCD screen and the finder.
images to e-mail on your computer using the supplied USB cable and application
No compensation for contents of These points are normal in the
manufacturing process and do not affect software.
the recording
The recorded images cannot be the recording in any way. Viewing images using a computer: page 27
compensated if recording or playback • Be careful when placing the camera near a Recording still images for e-mail (E-MAIL): page 61
cannot be performed due to a trouble of your window or outdoors. Exposing the LCD
camera or recording medium. screen, the finder or the lens to direct
sunlight for long periods may cause
Notes on image data compatibility malfunctions.
of the “Memory Stick”
• This camera conforms with the Design rule Do not get the camera wet
for Camera File system universal standard When taking pictures outdoors in the rain or
established by the JEITA (Japan under similar conditions, be careful not to
Electronics and Information Technology get the camera wet. If moisture
Industries Association). You cannot play condensation occurs, refer to page 83 and
back on your camera still images recorded follow the instructions on how to remove it
on other equipment (DCR-TRV890E/ before using the camera. Records a moving picture
TRV900/TRV900E, DSC-D700, DSC- The digital still camera can record a moving picture for maximum 60 seconds. Your
Back up recommendation camera does not record sound.
D770) that does not conform with this
To avoid the potential risk of data loss,
universal standard. (These models are not Recording moving images: page 23
always copy (back up) data to a disk.
sold in some areas.)
• Playback of images recorded with your When the camera is used for long
camera on other equipment and playback periods
of images recorded or edited with other Note that the camera body may become hot.
equipment on your camera are not
guaranteed.
Precaution on copyright
Television programs, films, video tapes, and
other materials may be copyrighted.
Unauthorized recording of such materials
may be contrary to the provision of the
copyright laws.
Select from various recording modes
Creating Clip Motion Files: page 59
Recording text documents (TEXT): page 62
Recording still images as uncompressed files (TIFF): page 63
4 5
1-1
Getting started
Identifying the parts w;

See the pages in parentheses for details of operation.
Getting started
1 7
Attaching the
2 shoulder strap
3 qa
4 wa
qs
8 ws
5 wd
qd
wf
9 qf
wg
6 0 qg
wh
qh
wj
A Self-timer lamp (21) G Lens qj
qk wk
B Flash (22) H Lens cap (supplied)
ql wl
C Shutter button (18, 23) I VIDEO OUT jack (73)
D Zoom lever (20) J DC IN cover/DC IN jack (10, 13) K Photocell window for LCD T Hooks for strap
E Photocell window for flash screen
U POWER ON/OFF (CHG)
Do not block while recording. The LCD screen becomes brighter (Charge) lamp (10)
when exposed to sunlight.
F Tripod receptacle (bottom V Access lamp (18, 19)
surface) L LCD screen
W DISK EJECT lever (16)
Use a tripod with a screw length of M PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector
less than 5.5 mm (7/32 inch). You (48) X POWER switch (14)
cannot firmly secure the camera to
tripods having longer screws, and N LCD BACKLIGHT switch (20) Y Floppy disk slot (16)
may damage the camera. O (Flash) button/ Z “Memory Stick” cover/
“Memory Stick” slot (17)
(Flash) lamp (22)
wj USB cover/USB jack (29)
P FOCUS button (64)
wk Battery cover (9)
Q PROGRAM AE button (65)
wl MS /FD (“Memory Stick”/floppy
R DISPLAY button (21) disk) selector
S Control button (48)
7 8
Preparing the power supply Charging the battery pack

When the camera is turned on, you cannot charge the battery pack. Be sure to turn off
the power of the camera.
Installing the battery pack
Getting started
Your camera operates only with the NP-F330 (supplied)/F550 (optional)

“InfoLITHIUM” battery pack* (L series). See page 86 for more information about
“InfoLITHIUM” battery pack.
2 To DC IN jack
1 1 2 3 2 AC-L10A/L10B
2 AC power adaptor
1
Battery
eject lever
1 Power cord
(mains lead)
1 Open the battery cover. 3

Slide the battery cover in the direction of the arrow. Battery pack
To a wall outlet (wall socket)
2 Install the battery pack.

Press and hold the battery eject lever and then insert the battery pack with the v
mark facing toward the battery compartment.
1 Insert the battery pack into your camera.
3 Close the battery cover.
2 Open the DC IN cover and connect the AC power adaptor to the DC
IN jack of your camera with the v mark facing up.
To remove the battery pack
Open the battery cover. Slide the battery eject lever rightward, and remove the 3 Connect the power cord (mains lead) to the AC power adaptor and
then to a wall outlet (wall socket).
battery pack. The POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp (orange) on the right of the LCD screen
Be careful not to drop the battery pack when removing it. lights up when charging begins. When the POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp goes
off, full charge is completed.
After charging the battery pack

Disconnect the AC power adaptor from the DC IN jack on your camera.
Battery eject lever Battery remaining indicator

The LCD screen on the camera shows the remaining time for which you can still
* What is “InfoLITHIUM”? record or play back images.
“InfoLITHIUM” is a lithium ion battery pack which can exchange information such as battery This indication may not be entirely accurate depending on the conditions of use and
consumption with compatible video equipment. “InfoLITHIUM” L series battery packs have the
the operating environment.
mark. “InfoLITHIUM” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between
10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F).
9 10
1-2
NP-F330 (supplied)/F550 (optional) battery pack STILL mode recording/playback when using “Memory Stick”s
When you record images in an extremely cold location or using the LCD screen, the NP-F330 (supplied) NP-F550
operating time becomes short. When using the camera in an extremely cold location,
place the battery pack in your pocket or other place to keep it warm, then insert the Battery life Number of Battery life Number of
battery pack into the camera just before recording. When using a pocket heater, take (min.) images (min.) images
Getting started
care not to let the heater directly contact the battery. Continuous
Approx. 80 Approx. 1600 Approx. 170 Approx. 3400
recording*
Auto power-off function Continuous
If you do not operate the camera for about three minutes during recording, the camera playback**
turns off automatically to prevent wearing down the battery pack. To use the camera
again, slide the POWER switch down to turn on the camera again. Approximate battery life and number of images that can be recorded/played back at a
temperature of 25°C (77°F) with a fully charged battery pack, 640×480 image size
Note on the POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp during charging and in NORMAL recording mode.
The POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp may flash: ∗ Recording at about 5-second intervals when using a floppy disk, or at about 3-second intervals
when using a “Memory Stick”
• When a malfunction occurs in the battery pack.
The POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp does not light up: ∗∗ Playing back single images continuously at about 2-second intervals
• When the battery pack is not installed properly.
MOVIE mode recording when using floppy disks
Charging time NP-F330 (supplied) NP-F550

Battery life (min.) Battery life (min.)
Battery pack Full charge (min.) Continuous recording Approx. 85 Approx. 180
NP-F330 (supplied) Approx. 150
NP-F550 Approx. 210 MOVIE mode recording when using “Memory Stick”s
Approximate time to charge a completely discharged battery pack at a temperature of NP-F330 (supplied) NP-F550
25°C (77°F). Battery life (min.) Battery life (min.)
Continuous recording Approx. 90 Approx. 190
Battery life and number of images that can be recorded/played back
Approximate time that can be recorded at a temperature of 25°C (77°F) and 160×112
image size with a fully charged battery pack.
STILL mode recording/playback when using floppy disks
Notes
NP-F330 (supplied) NP-F550
• The battery life and number of images will be decreased when using at low temperature, using
Battery life Number of Battery life Number of the flash, turning the power on/off frequently, or using the zoom.
(min.) images (min.) images • The capacity of the floppy disk or the “Memory Stick” is limited. The above figures are as a
guide when you continuously record/play back by replacing the floppy disk or the “Memory
Continuous Stick.”
recording* • If sufficient battery remaining time is indicated but the power runs out soon, fully charge the
Continuous battery so that the correct battery remaining time appears.
Approx. 80 Approx. 2200 Approx. 170 Approx. 4800 • Do not short the DC plug of the AC power adaptor with a metallic object, as this may cause a
playback**
malfunction.
• Do not use the DC plug of the AC power adapter in a dirty state. Wipe off any dirt with a dry
cotton wool bud. Using the DC plug in a dirty state may prevent correct charging.
11 12
Using the AC power adaptor Setting the date and time

When you first use your camera, set the date and time. If these are not set, the
CLOCK SET screen appears whenever you turn on your camera.
Getting started
POWER ON/OFF
(CHG) lamp
1
AC-L10A/L10B 1
AC power adaptor
To DC IN jack 2–8
Control button
Power cord
(mains lead)
2
1 Press and hold the green button and slide the POWER switch in the
direction of the arrow to turn on power.
1 Open the DC IN cover and connect the AC power adaptor to the DC The POWER ON/OFF (CHG) (green) lamp lights up.
2 Press v on the control button.
2 Connect the power cord (mains lead) to the AC power adaptor and The menu bar appears on the LCD screen.
Using your camera abroad

EFFECT FILE CAMERA SETUP
For details, see page 85. SELECT OK MENU BAR OFF
When using the AC power adaptor 3 Select [SETUP] with B on the control button,
Be sure to use it near a wall outlet (wall socket). If a malfunction occurs, disconnect then press the center z.
the plug from the wall outlet (wall socket). VIDEO OUT
/LANGUAGE
CLOCK SET
BEEP
LCD BRIGHT

SELECT CLOSE
4 Select [CLOCK SET] with v/V on the control button, then press the
center z.
VIDEO OUT CLOCK SET Y/M/D

/LANGUAGE 2002 1 1 M/D/Y
CLOCK SET 1 2:0 0:0 0AM D/M/Y
BEEP
LCD BRIGHT
2002 / 1 / 1 12 : 00 AM ENTER
CANCEL
SELECT OK SELECT OK
13 14
1-3
5 Select the desired date display format with Inserting a floppy disk
v/V on the control button, then press the
center z. CLOCK SET Y/M/D
Select from [Y/M/D] (year/month/day), [M/D/Y] M/D/Y

D/M/Y
(month/day/year), or [D/M/Y] (day/month/year). 2002 / 1 / 1 12 : 00 AM ENTER 2
Getting started
CANCEL
SELECT/ADJUST OK
6 Select the year, month, day, hour or minute

item you want to set with b/B on the control
button. CLOCK SET
The item to be set is indicated with v/V.
Y/M/D
M/D/Y
D/M/Y
2002 / 1 / 1 12 : 00 AM ENTER EJECT lock DISK EJECT lever 1

CANCEL
SELECT/ADJUST OK
7 Set the numeric value with v/V on the 1 Check that the write protect tab is set to the recordable position for
recording.
control button, then press the center z to
enter it.
After entering the number, v/V moves to the next
CLOCK SET Y/M/D
M/D/Y
Recordable/erasable
item. If you selected [D/M/Y] in step 5, set the
D/M/Y
2002 / 7 / 1 12 : 00 AM ENTER
Unrecordable/unerasable
time on a 24-hour cycle. CANCEL
SELECT/ADJUST OK
8 Select [ENTER] with B on the control button,

then press the center z at the desired
moment to begin clock movement. CLOCK SET
2 Insert the floppy disk until it clicks.
Y/M/D
The date and time are entered. M/D/Y

D/M/Y
2002 / 7 / 4 10 : 30 PM ENTER
CANCEL
Usable floppy disks
SELECT OK
• Size: 3.5-inch
• Type: 2HD (1.44 MB)
To cancel the date and time setting • Format: MS-DOS format (512 bytes × 18 sectors)
Select [CANCEL] with v/V/b/B on the control button, then press the center z. Notes
• Do not insert the media other than the floppy disks described above.
• You cannot use the optional MSAC-FD2M/FD2MA Floppy Disk Adaptor for Memory Stick.
• If the access lamp is lit, data is being read or written. Never remove the floppy disk, turn off
the power, or change the setting of the MS/FD selector while the access lamp is lit. Otherwise,
the image data could be damaged or lost.
Removing the floppy disk

While sliding the EJECT lock to the left, slide down the DISK EJECT lever.
15 16
Basic operations B Recording
Inserting a “Memory Stick” Recording still images

See page 85 for details about “Memory Stick”. Still images are recorded in JPEG format.
Slide the POWER switch down to turn on the power and insert a floppy disk or a
“Memory Stick” in your camera.
Getting started
1 2 3
3, 4
“Memory Stick” cover
Access lamp
1 Open the “Memory Stick” cover.
1 2
2 Insert the “Memory Stick.”
Insert the “Memory Stick” with the B mark facing toward the “Memory Stick”
slot as illustrated until it clicks.
1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to STILL.
3 Close the “Memory Stick” cover.
2 Select the recording media using the MS/FD selector.
MS: When recording on the “Memory Stick.”
Removing the “Memory Stick” FD: When recording on the floppy disk.
Open the “Memory Stick” cover, then push the “Memory Stick” once lightly.
3 Press and hold the shutter button halfway down.
Notes The image has not been recorded yet at this time. The camera automatically
• Insert the “Memory Stick” firmly until it clicks, otherwise a message such as “MEMORY adjusts the exposure and focus in accordance with the subject and recording
STICK ERROR” will be displayed. conditions. When the camera finishes the automatic adjustments, the AE/AF
• If the access lamp is lit, data is being read or written. Never remove the “Memory Stick,” turn lock indicator z stops flashing, then lights up and is followed by beeps,
off the power, or change the setting of the MS/FD selector while the access lamp is lit. and the camera is ready for recording.
Otherwise, the image data could be damaged or lost. If you release the shutter button, the recording will be canceled.
• You cannot record or edit images on a “Memory Stick” if the write-protect switch is set to the
LOCK position. AE/AF lock indicator (green)
Connector flashes t lights up
Write-protect LOCK
switch
Label space
The position and shape of the write-protect switch may differ depending on the types of
“Memory Stick” used.
17 18
1-4
4 Press the shutter button fully down. Adjusting the brightness of the LCD screen
The shutter clicks. “RECORDING” appears on the LCD screen, and the image
will be recorded on the floppy disk or the “Memory Stick.” When Adjust the brightness with the [LCD BRIGHT] item in the menu settings (page 56).
“RECORDING” disappears from the LCD screen, you can start the next This adjustment does not affect the brightness of the images recorded on the floppy disk
recording. or the “Memory Stick.”
B Recording
RECORDING
RECORDING LCD BACKLIGHT switch
To turn off the LCD backlight

Set the LCD BACKLIGHT switch to OFF to save the battery.
For the number of images you can record on a floppy disk or a

Using the zoom feature
“Memory Stick”
See page 58.
Notes
• When recording bright subjects, the color of the LCD screen may change after the
AE/AF is locked. However, this will not affect the recorded image. Zoom lever
• While the image is being recorded on a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick,” the access
lamp lights. When this lamp is lit, do not shake or strike the camera. Also, do not
turn the power off, not change the position of the MS/FD selector, or not remove T side: for W side: for wide-
the battery pack/floppy disk/“Memory Stick.” Otherwise, an image data breakdown telephoto angle (subject
may occur and the floppy disk or the “Memory Stick” may become unusable. (subject appears farther
• When you press the shutter button fully down at once, the camera starts recording appears closer) away)
after the automatic adjustment is complete. However, the recording cannot be
carried out if the flash is required for the recording and the lamp (page 8) is
flashing.
If you cannot get a sharp focus on a close subject
Checking the last recorded image (Quick Review) Slide the zoom lever to the W side and move closer to the subject until the focus is
sharp (page 64).
You can check the last recorded image by clearing the menu bar from the screen
(page 49) and pressing b on the control button.
Minimum focal distance to the subject
To return to the normal recording mode W side: About 25 cm (9 7/8 inches)
Press the shutter button lightly, or select [RETURN] with b/B on the control button T side: About 80 cm (31 1/2 inches)
and then press the center z. To record even closer subjects, see page 64.
To delete the image
1 Select [DELETE] in the Quick Review screen using b/B on the control button
and press the center z.
2 Select [OK] using v/V on the control button and press the center z.
19 20
Digital zoom function Select on the LCD screen using b/B/v/V on the control button and press the
This camera has a digital zoom function. center z.
Digital zoom enlarges the image by digital processing, and it starts to function when The (self-timer) indicator appears on the LCD screen, and the subject is recorded
the zoom exceeds 3×. approximately 10 seconds after you press the shutter button. The self-timer lamp
flashes until the subject is recorded.
W T
To cancel the self-timer

The T-side of the bar shows the To cancel the self-timer, press v on the control button to display the menu bar and
digital zooming zone. select and press the center z on the control button to clear on the LCD
B Recording
screen.
Using digital zoom
• The maximum zoom magnification is 6×. Recording images with the flash
• Digital zooming deteriorates the picture quality. When digital zoom is not
necessary, set [DIGITAL ZOOM] to [OFF] in the menu settings (page 54). The initial setting is AUTO (no indication). In this mode, the flash is automatically
activated when the surroundings are dark. To change the flash mode to other than
Note AUTO, press (Flash) several times until the desired flash mode indicator appears
Digital zoom does not work for moving images. on the LCD screen.
The indicators on the LCD screen during recording

Press DISPLAY to turn on/off the indicators on the LCD screen. See page 97 for a
detailed description of the indicators.
(Flash)
Each time you press the button, the indicator changes as follows.
(No indication) t t t t (No indication)
Auto red-eye reduction : The flash strobes before recording to reduce the red-
DISPLAY eye phenomenon.
Forced flash : The flash strobes regardless of the surrounding brightness.
No flash : The flash does not strobe.
Notes You can change the amount of the flash light with [FLASH LEVEL] in the menu
• You cannot turn off the (self-timer) indicator and some of the indicators used in advanced settings (page 54).
operations.
• The indicators on the LCD screen are not recorded. Notes
• The recommended shooting distance of the built-in flash is 0.5 to 2.0 m (1 2/3 to 6 2/3 feet)
when [ISO] in the menu is [AUTO].
Using the self-timer • Attaching a conversion lens (optional) may block the light from the flash and the shadow of the
lens may be recorded.
When you use the self-timer function, the subject is recorded approximately 10 • Auto red-eye reduction may not produce the desired red-eye reduction effects depending on
seconds after you press the shutter button. individual differences, the distance to the subject, if the subject does not see the pre-strobe, or
Self-timer lamp other conditions.
Shutter button • The flash effect is not obtained easily when you use forced flash in a bright location.
Control button
21 22
1-5
B Playback
Recording moving images Playing back still images

Moving images are recorded in MPEG format. Your camera does not record sound. Slide the POWER switch down to turn on the power and insert a floppy disk or a
Slide the POWER switch down to turn on the power and insert a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick” in your camera.
Access lamp
3
B Recording
2 3, 4
Control button
1 2
1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to PLAY.
The last recorded image (still or moving) appears on the LCD screen.
1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to MOVIE. 2 Select the playback media using the MS/FD selector.
MS: When playing back images in the “Memory Stick.”
FD: When playing back images in the floppy disk.
FD: When recording on the floppy disk. 3 Press v on the control button to display the menu bar on the LCD
screen.
3 Press the shutter button fully down.
4 Select the desired still image with the "b/B"
“REC” appears on the LCD screen, and the moving image is recorded on the control button. 60min 6/8
floppy disk or the “Memory Stick.” Press v/V/b/B on the control button to select
640
If you press the shutter button momentarily "b/B" on the LCD screen, then press b/B.
The image is recorded for 5 seconds. The recording time can be set to 10 or 15 "b: To display the preceding image.
seconds with [REC TIME SET] in the menu settings (page 53). B": To display the next image.
If you hold the shutter button down INDEX DELETE
SELECT
FILE TOOL SETUP
FILE BACK/NEXT
The image is recorded while the shutter button is held down for up to 60
seconds. However, when [IMAGE SIZE] in the menu settings is set to
When the menu bar is not displayed
[320×240], the maximum recording time is 15 seconds (page 57).
You can directly select and play back the image with b/B on the control button.
Notes
Adjusting the brightness of the LCD screen, zooming or using the self-timer • You might not be able to correctly play back images recorded with this camera on other equipment.
• You may not be able to play back images whose image sizes are larger than the maximum
See pages 20 to 22. image size that can be used with this camera for recording.
LCD screen indicators during recording LCD screen indicators during still image playback
Press DISPLAY to turn on/off the indicators on the LCD screen. Press DISPLAY to turn on/off the indicators on the LCD screen.
These indicators are not recorded. See page 97 for a detailed description of the indicators. See page 98 for a detailed description of the indicators.
23 24
Playing back moving images 5 Select the B (playback) button on the B (playback)/
LCD screen with v/V/b/B on the control X (pause) button
Slide the POWER switch down to turn on the power and insert a floppy disk or a button, then press the center z.
“Memory Stick” in your camera. The moving image is played back. 60min 160 6/8
0:05
During playback, B (playback) changes to X
(pause).
Access lamp INDEX DELETE FILE TOOL SETUP

SELECT OK
Playback bar
2 3–5
Control button
To pause playback
B Playback
Select X (pause) on the LCD screen with v/V/b/B on the control button, then press
the center z.
1
You can directly select the image with b/B on the control button, and play back the
image by pressing the center z. When you press the center z during playback,
1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to PLAY. playback is paused.
LCD screen indicators during moving image playback
2 Select the playback media using the MS/FD selector.
MS: When playing back images in the “Memory Stick.” Press DISPLAY to turn on/off the indicators on the LCD screen.
FD: When playing back images in the floppy disk. See page 98 for a detailed description of the indicators.
3 Press v on the control button to display the menu bar on the LCD
screen.
4 Select the desired moving image with the "b/B"

control button.
Moving images are displayed one size smaller 60min 160 6/8
than still images.
Press v/V/b/B on the control button to select
"b/B" on the LCD screen, then press b/B.
"b: To display the preceding image.
B": To display the next image. INDEX DELETE
SELECT
FILE TOOL SETUP
FILE BACK/NEXT
25 26
1-6
Viewing images using a • When you copy an image to the camera from your computer, which was modified with
retouching software and was converted to another file format, the “FILE ERROR” message
computer may appear and you may be unable to open the image.
• Depending on your application software, only the first frame of the Clip Motion file may be
You can view or edit image data recorded with your camera using software installed played back.
in your computer. You can also attach the image data to e-mail.
Communications with your computer (for Windows only)
Communications between your camera and your computer may not recover after
Viewing images using a floppy disk drive recovering from Suspend or Sleep.
Example: For Windows Me users • Microsoft, Windows and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
1 Turn on your computer and insert a floppy disk in the floppy disk • Macintosh, Mac OS and QuickTime are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Apple
drive of your computer. Computer, Inc.
• All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of
B Playback
2 Open “ My Computer” and double-click “ 3 1/2 Floppy (A:).” their respective companies. Furthermore, “™” and “®” are not mentioned in each case in this
manual.
3 Double-click a file to be viewed. • In this manual, the Windows 2000 Professional is referred to as “Windows 2000”, and
Windows Millennium Edition is referred to as “Windows Me”, and Windows XP Home Edition
See “Image file storage destinations and image file names” (page 38) for
and Windows XP Professional are referred to as “Windows XP.”
details.
It is recommended that you copy a moving image file to the hard disk of your
computer before viewing it. If you view the file directly from a floppy disk, the
image may break off.
Viewing images on Windows
Recommended computer environment
Viewing images on a computer using the USB cable OS: Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows 2000 Professional,
Windows Millennium Edition, Windows XP Home Edition, Windows XP
This section describes the method for viewing images on a computer using the
Professional
supplied USB cable.
The above OS must be installed at the factory.
The USB cable is used to connect the camera to a computer so that operations can
Operation is not assured in an environment upgraded to the operating systems
be performed on image files recorded in a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick” from the
described above.
computer.
CPU: MMX Pentium 200 MHz or faster
In order to use the USB cable, a USB driver must be installed in the computer
The USB connector must be provided as standard.
beforehand.
Windows Media Player (recommended) must be installed to play back moving
Be sure to also refer to the operation manuals for your computer and the application
pictures.
software.
Notes
Viewing images on Windows: page 28 • If you connect two or more devices that use USB to a single computer or use a hub, operation is
Viewing images on Macintosh: page 34 not guaranteed.
Notes on using your computer: page 37 • Some USB devices may not operate if they are connected to the computer at the same time as
your camera.
Notes • Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments mentioned
• Data recorded with your camera is stored in the following formats. Make sure that applications above.
that support these file formats are installed on your computer.
—Still images (other than TEXT mode, uncompressed mode, and Clip Motion): JPEG format
—Moving images: MPEG format
—Uncompressed mode still images: TIFF format
—TEXT mode/Clip Motion: GIF format
• Depending on your application software, the file size may increase when you open a still image
file.
27 28
Before operation
General procedure for viewing images
If you are using Windows 2000, log in as an administrator and then install the USB
Step 1 Installing the USB driver to the computer (page 29) driver.
Perform this step only when you view images on your computer for the
first time. 1 Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.
Close all applications you are running on your computer.
Step 2 Connecting your camera to your computer using the USB cable
(page 30) 2 Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your
computer.
Step 3 Viewing images on Windows (page 32) The title screen appears after a moment.
For Windows XP users
You do not have to install a USB driver. Windows XP recognizes the camera as a
drive as soon as it is connected it to the computer using the USB cable. Begin the
procedure from Step 2.
B Playback
The operation below is explained using Windows Me. The window screen and
operation method may be different depending on the type of OS.
Step 1 Installing the USB driver to the computer

Before connecting your camera to your computer, install the USB driver to the If the title screen does not appear
computer. The USB driver is included with the application software in the CD-ROM 1 Double-click “My Computer” on the Desktop.
which is supplied with your camera. 2 Double-click the CD-ROM (“ImageMixer (E:)*”).
∗ The drive symbol ((E:), etc.) may differ depending on your computer.
For Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows 2000, and Windows Me
users 3 Click “USB Driver” on the screen.
Do not connect your camera to your computer yet. Be sure to The “Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Sony USB Driver” window
complete installation of the USB driver before connecting your appears.
camera to the computer. If you connect the USB cable first, you will
be unable to install the USB driver properly. 4 Follow the on-screen messages to install the USB driver.
See “If the Removable Disk does not appear” (page 33) for corrective measures if the 5 Eject the CD-ROM from the computer.
USB cable was connected before installing the driver and the driver software could
not be installed correctly.
6 Select “Yes, I want to restart my computer now” and click “Finish.”
Your computer restarts and you can connect your camera to your computer.
Step 2 Connecting your camera to your computer using the USB

cable
You can connect your camera to your computer after Windows is loaded.
1 Insert a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick” in your computer and set

the MS/FD selector in accordance with the media you have
inserted.
29 30
1-7
2 Connect the AC power adaptor to your camera and turn on your Step 3 Viewing images on Windows
camera.
You can view the images recorded in your camera while the camera is connected to
your computer.
3 Use the supplied dedicated USB cable to connect the USB jack
(mini-B) on your camera to the USB connector on your computer.
1 Open “My Computer” on Windows and double-click the newly
recognized drive “Removable Disk” (E:)*.
The folder in a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick” is displayed.
Computer If “Removable Disk” is not displayed, see “If the Removable Disk does not
appear” (page 33).
2 Select an image file to be viewed from the folder and double-click

the file.
To the USB To the USB jack
B Playback
connector USB cable (supplied) Push the connector in further information.
as far as it will go.
Viewing an image of a floppy disk
“USB MODE” appears on the LCD screen of your camera. Desired file type Double-click in this order
When you connect the camera for the first time, the operation automatically
starts to allow your computer to recognize the camera. Be sure to wait until the E-mail image “E-mail” folder t Image file
operation finishes. Other files Image file
See “If the Copy Wizard appears” (page 33) if you are using Windows XP.
Viewing an image of a “Memory Stick”
Cautions
• If you connect your camera to a computer with two or more USB jacks, do not connect Desired file type Double-click in this order
any other USB device excepting a keyboard and/or mouse.
• If you have a desktop computer, use the USB jack on the rear panel of the computer.
Still image “Dcim” folder t “100msdcf” folder t Image file
Moving image* “Mssony” folder t “Moml0001” folder t Image file*
Clip Motion
When you disconnect the USB cable from your computer, image
“Dcim” folder t “100msdcf” folder t Image file
when you remove a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick” from the
camera being connected to the computer using the USB E-mail image
cable, and when you switch the MS/FD selector TIFF image “Mssony” folder t “Imcif100” folder t Image file
(uncompressed)
For Windows 2000, Windows Me, and Windows XP users
∗ Copying a file to the hard disk of your computer before viewing it is recommended. If
1 Double-click the “Remove hardware” icon displayed at the lower you view the file directly from a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick,” the image may break
right of the desktop screen. off.
2 Click “Sony DSC” and click “Stop.”
To copy the image data to your computer
3 Confirm the drive to be removed and click “OK.” Open a folder that contains the image data to be copied, and drag and drop the image
4 Click “OK.” data to the “My Documents” (example) folder.
5 Perform operations such as disconnecting the USB cable. Caution

If you copy an image with the same filename to the same folder in your computer, a
For Windows 98 and Windows 98SE users confirmation message for overwriting the original image data will appear. If you
Perform only step 5 above. want to delete the original image and copy an image you want to drag and drop, click
“Yes.” If you want to keep the original image, click “No” and change the filename of
the image you want to drag and drop.
31 32
If the Copy Wizard appears (for Windows XP users) 3 If there is a device indicated with a question mark, delete it.
Use the following procedure to copy an image data from your camera to your 1 Click “ Sony DSC” or “ Sony Handycam”.
computer. 2 Click “Remove.” The “Confirm Device Removal” screen appears.
3 Click the “OK” button.
1 Click “Copy pictures to a folder on my computer using Microsoft
Scanner and Camera Wizard,” and then click “OK.” 4 Turn off your camera and disconnect the dedicated USB cable from
the camera and computer.
2 Follow the instructions displayed on the screen to copy an image.
5 Install the USB driver provided on the supplied CD-ROM.
Select “My Documents” (example) as the copy destination.
To copy another image, click “Finish”, disconnect the USB cable, and connect it See “Step 1 Installing the USB driver to the computer (page 29).”
again. Then, repeat the procedure in the Copy Wizard screen.
If the Removable Disk does not appear Viewing images on Macintosh

Delete a driver registered unintentionally while your camera is connected to your
B Playback
computer. See “Step 2 Connecting your camera to your computer using the USB Recommended Computer environment
cable (page 30)” for the connecting method. Perform all steps below to install the
USB driver properly. OS: Mac OS 8.5.1/8.6/9.0/9.1/9.2, Mac OS X(v10.0/v10.1)
1 Open “Device Manager” on your computer. However, note that the upgrade to Mac OS 9.0/9.1 should be used for the
For Windows 2000 users: following models.
Select “My Computer” t “Control Panel” t “System” open “Hardware” tab, — iMac with the Mac OS 8.6 factory pre-installed and a slot loading type
and then click “Device Manager.” CD-ROM drive
For Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me users: — iBook or Power Mac G4 with the Mac OS 8.6 factory pre-installed
Select “My Computer” t “Control Panel” t “System” and click “Device Mac OS X(v10.0/v10.1) users can use a USB connection only when a
Manager.” “Memory Stick” is used.
2 Check whether a USB driver is already installed. QuickTime 3.0 or newer must be installed to play back moving pictures.
Notes
• If you connect two or more devices that use USB to a single computer or use a hub, operation is
not guaranteed.
• Some USB devices may not operate if they are connected to the computer at the same time as
your camera.
• Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments mentioned
above.
1
2 General procedure for viewing images
Step 1 Installing the USB driver to the computer (page 35)
Perform this step only when you view the images on your computer for
the first time.
1 Click “Other Devices.” Step 2 Connecting your camera to your computer using the USB cable
2 Check for “ Sony DSC” or “ Sony Handycam” with a question mark.
(page 36)
Step 3 Viewing images on Macintosh (page 36)
33 34
1-8
For Mac OS 9.1/9.2 Mac OS X(v10.0/v10.1) users

You do not have to install a USB driver. Macintosh recognizes the camera as a drive
cable
as soon as it is connected it to the Macintosh using the USB cable. Begin the
procedure from Step 2. See page 30 for the procedure to connect your camera to your computer using the
USB cable.
When you disconnect the USB cable from your computer,
Before connecting your camera to your computer, install the USB driver to the when you remove a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick” from the
computer. The USB driver is included with the application software in the CD-ROM camera being connected to the computer using the USB
which is supplied with your camera. cable, and when you switch the MS/FD selector
Drag and drop the floppy disk or the “Memory Stick” icon into the recycle bin and
1 Turn on your computer and allow the Mac OS to load. then perform operations such as disconnecting the USB cable.
2 Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your For Mac OS X(v10.0) users
B Playback
computer. Turn off your computer first and then perform operations such as disconnecting the
The CD-ROM window (Pixela ImageMixer) appears. USB cable.
3 Double-click the “Setup Menu” icon in the CD-ROM window.

Step 3 Viewing images on Macintosh
The “PIXELA ImageMixer for Sony” appears.
your computer.
For Mac OS X(v10.0/v10.1) users
You can use only a “Memory Stick” with a computer running Mac OS X(v10.0/
v10.1). Even if you insert a floppy disk, Mac OS X(v10.0/v10.1) cannot recognize it.
To use data saved on a floppy disk, copy it to a “Memory Stick” first (page 77).
1 Double-click the newly recognized icon on the desktop.

The folders in a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick” are displayed.
4 Click “USB Driver” button (folder button).

2 Select and double-click the desired image file from the folder.
The folder containing the six Sony USB driver related files opens. See “Image file storage destinations and image file names” (page 38) for
further information.
5 Select the following two files and drag and drop them to the
system folder. When the message is displayed, click “OK.” Viewing an image of a floppy disk
• Sony USB Driver
• Sony USB Shim Desired file type Double-click in this order
E-mail image “E-mail” folder t Image file
6 Restart your computer. Other files Image file
35 36
Viewing an image of a “Memory Stick” Image file storage destinations

Desired file type Double-click in this order and image file names
Still image “Dcim” folder t “100msdcf ” folder t Image file
Image files recorded with your camera are grouped in folders by recording mode.
Moving image* “Mssony” folder t “Moml0001” folder t Image file* Images in a floppy disk and ones in a “Memory Stick” have different file names. The
Clip Motion meanings of the file names are as follows.
image
“Dcim” folder t “100msdcf ” folder t Image file
E-mail image When using floppy disks
TIFF image “Mssony” folder t “Imcif100” folder t Image file
(uncompressed) sss stands for any number within the range from 001 to 999.
f stands for one of the following characters below.
you view the file directly from a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick,” the image may break
B Playback
off.
S: Still image file recorded at 640×480 size
F: Still image file of more than 640×480 size
V: Moving image file recorded at 160×112 size
To copy image data to your computer W:Moving image file recorded at 320×240 size
T: Still image file recorded in TEXT mode
Open the folder that contains an image data you want to copy, and drag and drop the
C: Clip Motion file recorded in NORMAL mode
image data to the hard disk icon.
M:Clip Motion file recorded in MOBILE mode
The image file is copied to the hard disk.
For Windows Me users (The drive recognizing the floppy disk
Notes on using your computer is [A:].)
Storage destination containing still image,
Floppy disk and “Memory Stick” moving image, TEXT mode image and Clip
• Be sure to format a floppy disk and a “Memory Stick” using your camera (page 81). Motion image data
You cannot format a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick” from a computer connected
using the USB cable. Folder containing E-MAIL mode image data
• Use the DOS/V format 2HD type floppy disk. A computer cannot correctly
recognize a floppy disk other than this type.
• Do not compress the data on the “Memory Stick.” Compressed files cannot be
played back on your camera.
37 38
1-9
When using “Memory Stick”s

Location File Meaning
3 1/2 Floppy MVC-sssf.JPG • Still image file recorded normally ssss stands for any number within the range from 0001 to 9999.
[A:] • Still image file recorded in E-MAIL
mode (page 61) For Windows Me users (The drive recognizing the camera is
[D:])
MVC-sssf.411 • INDEX display file
This file can only be played back on
your camera. Folder containing still image recorded in
MVC-sssf.MPG • Moving image file normal mode, TEXT mode image and Clip
Motion image data
MVC-sssf.GIF • Still image file recorded in
— TEXT mode (page 62) Folder containing E-MAIL mode and TIFF
— Clip Motion (page 59) mode image data
B Playback
MVC-sssf.THM • Index image file recorded in
Folder containing moving image data
— TEXT mode (page 62)
— Clip Motion (page 59)
E-MAIL MVC-sssE.JPG • Small-size image file recorded in
folder E-MAIL mode (page 61) Folder File Meaning
100msdcf DSC0ssss.JPG • Still image file recorded normally
• The numerical portions of the following files are the same. • Still image file recorded in
— An image file recorded in E-MAIL mode and its corresponding small-size — E-MAIL mode (page 61)
image file — TIFF mode (page 63)
— An image file recorded in TEXT mode and its corresponding index image file
CLP0ssss.GIF • Clip Motion file recorded in NORMAL
— An image file recorded with Clip Motion and its corresponding index image file
mode (page 59)
• INDEX display files recorded in the TEXT mode or Clip Motion mode are played
back only on this camera. CLP0ssss.THM • Index image file of Clip Motion file
recorded in NORMAL mode
MBL0ssss.GIF • Clip Motion file recorded in MOBILE
mode (page 59)
MBL0ssss.THM • Index image file of Clip Motion file
recorded in MOBILE mode
TXT0ssss.GIF • Still image file recorded in TEXT mode
(page 62)
TXT0ssss.THM • Index image file of still image file
recorded in TEXT mode
39 40
Folder File Meaning Viewing images using

Imcif100 DSC0ssss.JPG • Small-size image file recorded in
E-MAIL mode (page 61) “ImageMixer”
DSC0ssss.TIF • Uncompressed image file recorded in
TIFF mode (page 63) Installing “PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony”
Moml0001 MOV0ssss.MPG • Moving image file recorded normally
You can easily view a still image and/or moving image recorded by your camera
The numerical portions of the following files are the same. using the “PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony” provided on the CD-ROM
— A small-size image file recorded in E-MAIL mode and its corresponding image supplied with your camera.
file The system requirements of your computer are indicated in the operation manual
— An uncompressed image file recorded in TIFF mode and its corresponding supplied with the CD-ROM.
image file Before operation
— An image file recorded in TEXT mode and its corresponding index image file If you are using Windows 2000 and Windows XP, log in as an administrator and then
B Playback
— An image file recorded with Clip Motion and its corresponding index image file install the USB driver.
Tips 1 Turn on your computer.
The digital still camera saves recorded images as digital data. The format of the Close all applications you are running on your computer.
saved data is called as the file format. The formats that can be used with this
camera are as follows: 2 Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your
computer.
JPEG format The title screen appears after a moment.
Most digital still cameras, operating systems of computers, and browser
software adopt this format. This format is able to compress files without If the title screen does not appear
appreciable deterioration. However, if the image is compressed and saved on 1 Double-click “My Computer” on the Desktop.
repeated occasions, the image will deteriorate. This camera records still images 2 Double-click the CD-ROM (“ImageMixer (E:)*).
using the JPEG format for normal recording. ∗ The drive symbol ((E:), etc.) may differ depending on your computer.
GIF format 3 Select “PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony” in the title screen.
Using this format, the image will not deteriorate even if the image is compressed For Windows users
and saved on repeated occasions. This format limits the number of colors used
to 256 colors. This camera records still images using the GIF format in Clip
1 Click “PIXELA ImageMixer” and install the software in
accordance with the instructions displayed on the screen.
Motion (page 59) or TEXT mode (page 62).
After confirming the information in the “Readme.txt” screen displayed at
TIFF format the end of installing process, close this screen and click “Finish.”
Stores shooting images without compression, so the image does not deteriorate. If you are using Windows XP, skip steps 2 to 4 below. Go to
Most of operating systems and applications correspond to this format. This step 4.
camera records still images using the TIFF format for the TIFF mode (page 63).
2 Click “DirectX” in the title screen.
MPEG format The “Microsoft DirectX8.0 Setup” screen appears.
This format is very typical for moving images. This camera records moving
images in the MPEG format during the recording. 3 Click “Yes.”
The “DirectX(R) Setup” screen appears.
4 Click “Install.”
The installation starts. When the installation finishes, click “OK” and
restart your computer.
41 42
1-10
For Macintosh users 2 Start “ImageMixer” on your computer.

Click the button of the language (such as English) of the version to be installed
in the title screen and then install the software in accordance with the For Windows users
instructions displayed in the screen. Open the nested windows in the following order: “Start” t “Program” t
“Pixela” t “ImageMixer” t “PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony”.
4 Remove the CD-ROM from the computer. For Macintosh users
Click “PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony” in the installed folder.
“ImageMixer” starts and the main screen is displayed.
To copy image data to your computer using “ImageMixer”
Use the following procedure of “PIXELA ImageMixer” to copy a still image or
moving image data recorded in your camera.
The procedure below is explained using screens displayed by Windows. You can
copy the image using a similar procedure for Macintosh also.
B Playback
Cautions
• Sometimes an displayed image may be interrupted when you view it on your computer using 3 Click the Capture Environment displayed on the left edge of the
the USB cable. screen.
• The screen display of your camera is not copied to your computer. The screen for copying an image is displayed.
If you encounter a trouble 4 Select a folder that contains an image to be copied.

Close “ImageMixer” and restart it to retry. Click the Import File Mode button displayed on the left of the screen and
select a folder that contains an image to be viewed from the folder list window.
A list of the images stored in the selected folder is displayed in the file
1 Prepare your camera and computer. thumbnail list window.
If the image is stored in a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick” set in your camera,
1 Turn on your computer. select “Removable Disk (E:)*”.
2 Insert a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick” in your computer and
Import Folder list Thumbnail list Capture Preferences
set the MS/FD selector in accordance with the media you have
File Mode window window button button
inserted.
button
Album list
3 Connect the AC power adaptor to your camera and turn on your window
camera.
4 Connect your camera to your computer using the USB cable.
“USB MODE” appears on the LCD screen of your camera.
43 44
5 Click the Preferences button at the top right of the screen. Viewing images using “ImageMixer”
The “Capturing/Recording Preferences” screen appears.
You can use “ImageMixer” to view the image copied to your computer.
1 Click the Album Environment button in the main screen or

image copy screen.
Select an album that contains an image you want to view.
The screen for viewing images appears.
Album File Menu
Environment button
button
B Playback
6 Select a folder in which the copied image is stored.

Click “Browse” for “Destination of Captured/Recorded Files” and click “My
Documents” (example) in the “Browse for Folder” screen that is displayed.
Then, click “OK.”
After you finish the setting, click the button at the bottom right of the
screen.
7 Click an album in the album list window.

Select an album in which you want to save a file.
2 Double-click the image to be viewed.
8 Click to select an image to be copied to your computer. The selected image is displayed.
You can select two or more images by clicking the images while holding down
the Control key for Windows (Option key for Macintosh).
To return to the image list display screen
9 Click the Capture button at the upper right of the screen.
Click the close button displayed on the upper right of the screen.
The image is copied to your computer.
You can also copy the image by dragging and dropping it from the file
thumbnail list window to the album. To print the image
1 Click an image to be printed in the image list display screen.
2 Click the File Menu button and click “Print” on the displayed
menu.
The “Print Layout Settings” screen appears.
3 Set the layout.
Set the layout you prefer. Normally, click the Print Image Only button under
the screen.
4 Click the print setup button at the lower right of the screen.
The “Print Setup” screen appears. Set the paper size and printing direction and
click “OK.”
45 46
1-11
Advanced operations
5 Click the print button at the lower right of the screen.
The “Print” screen appears. Click “OK.” Before performing advanced
The image is printed.
operations
If the image is not printed
Confirm whether the printer setting is correct. This section describes the basic control methods that are frequently used for
See the operating instructions supplied with your printer for further information. “Advanced operations.”
Viewing the on-line help of “PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony”

How to use the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector
You can find detailed information about procedures and functions of “PIXELA
ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony.” The PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector selects whether you can use your camera to
record or play back and edit images. Set the selector as follows before starting to
B Playback
For Windows users operate your camera.
1 Click the Help button at the upper right of the screen. PLAY STILL MOVIE
The “ImageMixer Help” screen appears.
2 You can access the information you want from the table of PLAY: To play back or edit
contents or click a link displayed in blue characters (site address). images
STILL: To record still images
and Clip Motion images
For Macintosh users MOVIE: To record moving
images
Use your web browser to open the manual.html file in the folder in which
ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony is installed.
To close the on-line help

Click the button for closing the window of “PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for
Sony”
How to use the control button
The control button is used to select the buttons, images and menus displayed on the
If you have any questions about “PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0
LCD screen of your camera and modify the settings. The operation methods that are
for Sony”
frequently used for “Advanced operations” are described below.
ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony is a trademark of PIXELA corporation.
Refer to the information web site at: “http://www.imagemixer.com”.
Select Set (enter)
47 48
Turning on/off the operation buttons (menu bar) on the LCD screen
How to change the menu settings
Press v to display the menu bar Some of the advanced operations for your camera are executed by selecting menu
on the LCD screen. items displayed on the LCD screen with the control button.
INDEX DELETE FILE TOOL SETUP
Press V to clear the menu bar SELECT OK MENU BAR OFF
from the LCD screen. Menu bar
Note 1–3
You cannot clear the menu bar on the INDEX screen (page 70). Control button
Selecting items or images on the LCD screen

PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector
1 Press v/V/b/B on the control

Before performing advanced operations
button to select the item you

want to set or the image you 1 Press v on the control button to display the menu bar.
want to display. The menu bar appears as follows according to the position of the PLAY/STILL/
The color of the selected item or the MOVIE selector.
frame of the selected image INDEX DELETE FILE TOOL SETUP STILL/MOVIE PLAY (single mode) PLAY (INDEX mode)
changes from blue to yellow. SELECT OK MENU BAR OFF
2 Press the center z on the

control button to enter the
item. VIDEO OUT
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to execute /LANGUAGE

CLOCK SET MVC–001F 2002 7 4 10:30PM
each function. BEEP
LCD BRIGHT
EFFECT FILE
SELECT OK
CAMERA SETUP
MENU BAR OFF
INDEX DELETE FILE
SELECT OK
TOOL SETUP
MENU BAR OFF
DELETE FILE
SELECT
TOOL SETUP
SINGLE DISPLAY

SELECT CLOSE
2 Select the desired item with v/V/b/B on the

control button, then press the center z.
The color of the selected item changes from blue to
The “Advanced operations” section of this manual refers to yellow, and when you press the center z, the settings VIDEO OUT
/LANGUAGE
NTSC
CLOCK SET
selecting and entering items by the above procedure as that can be set for its item are displayed. BEEP
LCD BRIGHT
“Select [item name].” Note INDEX DELETE FILE

SELECT OK
TOOL SETUP
The displayed items are changed according to the position

of the MS/FD selector.
3 Select the desired setting with v/V/b/B on the control button, then
press the center z.
To cancel the setup

Press V on the control button repeatedly until the LCD screen returns to the menu bar
display in step 1. To clear the menu bar, press V again.
49 50
1-12
Menu settings Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/

Menu items that can be modified differ depending on the positions of the PLAY/ MOVIE selector
STILL/MOVIE selector or the MS/FD selector. The LCD screen shows only the FORMAT OK Formats a “Memory Stick.” Once you PLAY
items you can operate at the moment. Initial settings are indicated with x. (When the format the “Memory Stick,” all of the STILL
MS/FD data, including protected images are MOVIE
(self-timer) selector is deleted. Be sure to check for images
set to MS.) before you format a “Memory Stick.”
Records with the self-timer (page 21).
CANCEL Cancels formatting of a “Memory
EFFECT Stick.”
Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/ FILE SERIES Assigns numbers to files in sequence STILL
MOVIE selector NUMBER even if the floppy disk or the “Memory MOVIE
Stick” is changed. Note that file
P. EFFECT SOLARIZE Sets the image special effects (page 69). STILL numbers are not in sequence between a
B&W MOVIE floppy disk and a “Memory Stick.”
SEPIA x NORMAL Resets the file number that starts from
NEG.ART 001 or 0001 each time the floppy disk or
x OFF the “Memory Stick” is changed.
DATE/ DAY & Sets whether to insert the date and time STILL CLIP Sets the image size and number of STILL

TIME TIME into the image (page 69). MOTION frames for creating GIF format
DATE animation (page 59).
x OFF 160×120 Up to 10 frames can be recorded.
(NORMAL)
80×72 Up to 2 frames can be recorded.
FILE
(MOBILE)
Item-1 Item-2 Setting Description PLAY/STILL/ CANCEL Cancels Clip Motion.
MOVIE selector
IMAGE MVC-FD100 Selects the image size when recording STILL
DISK FORMAT OK Formats a floppy disk (page 81). PLAY SIZE x 1280×960 still images.
TOOL Once you format a floppy disk, STILL (When the
all of the data, including 1280(3:2)
(When the MOVIE MS/FD
MS/FD protected images are deleted. Be 1024×768
selector is 640×480
selector is sure to check for images before set to FD.)
set to FD.) you format a floppy disk. MVC-FD200
CANCEL Cancels formatting of a floppy x 1600×1200
disk. 1600 (3:2)
1600 (ECM)
DISK OK Copies all data stored in a floppy 1024×768
COPY disk to another disk (page 79).
640×480
CANCEL Cancels the disk copy.
CANCEL Goes back to the [DISK TOOL]
item.
51 52
Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/ CAMERA

MOVIE selector
Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/
IMAGE MVC-FD100 Selects the image size when recording STILL MOVIE selector
SIZE x 1280 (FINE) still images.
ISO 400 Selects the ISO film speed. When STILL
(When the 1280(3:2) F recording under dark conditions or
MS/FD 200
1024 (FINE) 100 recording a fast-moving subject, use a
selector is 640 (FINE) high-number setting. To record high-
set to MS.) x AUTO
MVC-FD200 quality images, use a low-number
x 1600 (FINE) setting. (You can select this item only
1600 (3:2)F when the PROGRAM AE function is
1024 (FINE) canceled or spot light-metering mode is
640 (FINE) set.)
IMAGE 320×240 Selects the MPEG image size when MOVIE DIGITAL x ON Uses a digital zoom. STILL
ZOOM
SIZE x 160×112 recording moving images. OFF Does not use a digital zoom.
REC MODE TIFF Records a TIFF (uncompressed) file in STILL SHARPNESS +2 to –2 Adjusts the sharpness of the image. STILL
addition to the JPEG file when the MS/ The indicator appears (except when
FD selector is set to MS. the setting is 0).
WHITE IN DOOR Sets the white balance (page 68). STILL
TEXT Records a GIF file in black-and-white.

BALANCE OUT DOOR MOVIE
E-MAIL Records a small-size (320×240) JPEG
file in addition to the selected image HOLD
size. x AUTO
x NORMAL Records an image using the normal FLASH HIGH Makes the flash level higher than STILL
recording mode. LEVEL normal.
REC TIME 15 sec Selects the recording time for moving MOVIE x NORMAL Normal setting.
SET 10 sec images. LOW Makes the flash level lower than normal.
x 5 sec EXPOSURE +2.0EV to Adjusts the exposure before recording. STILL
–2.0EV MOVIE
SLIDE INTERVAL Sets the slide show interval. PLAY
SHOW x 3 sec/5 sec/10 sec/30 sec/1 min
(Only in TOOL
PLAY REPEAT A slide show can be repeated. (When
(single) using the floppy disk, a slide show is up Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/
mode) to approx. 20 minutes.) MOVIE selector
x ON/OFF COPY FD t FD Copies the image to a floppy disk. PLAY
START Starts the slide show. (When the FD t MS Copies the image to a “Memory Stick.”
CANCEL Cancels the slide show settings or MS/FD
selector is CANCEL Cancels copying of the image (page 78).
execution.
set to FD.)
PRINT ON Marks the still images to be printed PLAY
MARK (page 80). COPY MS t MS Copies the image to a “Memory Stick.” PLAY
(When the MS t FD Copies the image to a floppy disk.
x OFF Unmarks the print mark of the still MS/FD
images. selector is CANCEL Cancels copying of the image (page 78).
PROTECT ON Protects images against accidental PLAY set to MS.)
erasure (page 74).
x OFF Releases protection of images.
53 54
1-13
Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/ Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/

MOVIE selector MOVIE selector
RESIZE MVC-FD100 Changes the recorded image size in PLAY BEEP SHUTTER Turns on the shutter sound only. (The PLAY
(When the 1280×960 PLAY (single) mode (page 76). shutter sound is heard when you press STILL
MS/FD 1024×768 the shutter button.) MOVIE
selector is 640×480 x ON Turns on the beep/shutter sound (when
set to FD.) CANCEL you press the control button/shutter
MVC-FD200 button).
1600×1200 OFF Turns off the beep/shutter sound.
1024×768
LCD Adjusts the LCD screen brightness PLAY
640×480 BRIGHT using −/+ on the LCD screen. STILL
CANCEL
MOVIE
RESIZE MVC-FD100 Changes the recorded image size in PLAY
(When the 1280 (FINE) PLAY (single) mode (page 76). INDEX (Only in PLAY (single) mode)
MS/FD 1024 (FINE)
selector is Displays six images at a time (PLAY (INDEX) mode).
640 (FINE)
set to MS.) CANCEL
MVC-FD200 DELETE (Only in PLAY (single) mode)

1600 (FINE) Setting Description PLAY/STILL/MOVIE
1024 (FINE) selector
640 (FINE) OK Deletes the displayed image. PLAY
CANCEL
CANCEL Cancels deleting of the image.
SETUP
Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/ (Return) (Only in PLAY (INDEX) mode)
MOVIE selector Returns to PLAY (single) mode.
DEMO x STBY/ON Displayed only when you use the AC STILL
OFF power adaptor in STILL or MOVIE MOVIE
mode. When [ON] is selected, a
demonstration will start if you do not
operate your camera for about 10
minutes. To stop the demonstration, turn
off your camera.
VIDEO NTSC Sets the video output signal to NTSC PLAY
OUT mode (e.g., the U.S.A., Japan). STILL
PAL Sets the video output signal to PAL MOVIE
mode (e.g., Europe).
/ x ENGLISH Displays the menu items in English. PLAY
LANGUAGE /JPN Displays the menu items in Japanese. STILL
MOVIE
CLOCK — Sets the date and time (page 14). PLAY
SET STILL
MOVIE
55 56
B Various recording When the MS/FD selector is

The number of images or the time that you can record on a floppy disk or a
“Memory Stick” (8 MB)
set to MS
Setting the image size 1600 (FINE): 2.0 mega pixels MVC-FD100
(IMAGE SIZE) 1600 (3:2)*
Number of images to be recorded or time*1)
1024 (FINE): 0.8 mega pixels Image size Usage
640 (FINE): 0.35 mega pixels Floppy disk “Memory Stick”
(FINE): The images recorded on 1280×960 Printing in post card size Approx. 6 Approx. 12
a “Memory Stick” have a higher 1280 (3:2) Printing in 3:2 ratio Approx. 6 Approx. 12
picture quality. The size of a file
1024×768 Home page, etc. Approx. 10 Approx. 20
1 that can be recorded on a
2, 3 “Memory Stick” is also larger 640×480 Attaching to e-mail Approx. 30 Approx. 48
than that of a floppy disk. Approx. 80 sec.
(ECM): The picture quality is 320×240*2) Viewing on computer Approx. 15 sec.
(Approx. 15 sec.)*3)
1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE
lower, but more images can be
selector to STILL or MOVIE. Approx. 320 sec.
recorded. If picture quality is 160×112*2) Attaching to e-mail Approx. 60 sec.
2 Select [FILE] and then more important than the number
[IMAGE SIZE] from the menu. of images to be recorded, select MVC-FD200
[1600×1200].
3 Select the desired image size. Number of images to be recorded or time*1)
* Your camera will record an Image size Usage
Still image sizes: image using a 3:2 ratio so that it Floppy disk “Memory Stick”
• MVC-FD100 matches the horizontal and 1600×1200 Printing in size A4 Approx. 4 Approx. 8
When the MS/FD selector is vertical ratio 3:2 of print paper.
set to FD 1600 (3:2) Printing in 3:2 ratio Approx. 4 Approx. 8
Therefore, there will be no
B Various recording
1280×960: 1.2 mega pixels margin when the image is printed 1600 Recording a large
1280 (3:2)* Approx. 8 –
in the print paper. Please note (ECM) number of images
1024×768: 0.8 mega pixels that the top and bottom of the 1024×768 Home page, etc. Approx. 10 Approx. 20
640×480: 0.35 mega pixels recording range displayed on the
640×480 Attaching to e-mail Approx. 30 Approx. 48
When the MS/FD selector is LCD screen (horizontal and
set to MS vertical ratio 4:3) is cut off when Approx. 80 sec.
320×240*2) Viewing on computer Approx. 15 sec.
1280 (FINE): 1.2 mega pixels the image is recorded in your (15 sec.)*3)
1280 (3:2)*F camera. Approx. 320 sec.
1024 (FINE): 0.8 mega pixels 160×112*2) Attaching to e-mail Approx. 60 sec.
Moving image sizes: (60 sec.)*3)
640 (FINE): 0.35 mega pixels
320×240, 160×112 *1) When REC MODE is set to NORMAL.
• MVC-FD200 *2) Image size of a moving image.
When the MS/FD selector is *3) The maximum recording time in continuous recording.
set to FD
1600×1200: 2.0 mega pixels Recording time and number of images to be recorded
1600 (3:2)* The recording time and the number of images to be recorded may differ from the
1600 (ECM) above values depending on the recording conditions.
1024×768: 0.8 mega pixels
Notes
• If you try to record 55 images or more on a floppy disk, even if the remaining disk capacity is
sufficient, “DISK FULL” appears on the LCD screen and you cannot record any more images.
• If you try to record 3001 images or more on a “Memory Stick,” even if the remaining memory
capacity of the “Memory Stick” is sufficient, “NO MEMORY SPACE” appears on the LCD
screen and you cannot record any more images.
• When the TEXT mode is selected, the number of images that can be recorded will be the same
as that of [1600×1200] even if you select [1600 (ECM)] for image size.
57 58
1-14
Notes
Tips
Creating Clip Motion 4 Record the image for the first
• Reading and writing data takes more time
The size of the image is indicated by the frame.
Files than normal image recording.
pixel unit. The higher the number of 160 6
2/10 • Due to the limitations of the GIF format,
pixels, the more information is included.
Clip Motion is an animation function the number of colors for Clip Motion
So, an image that is saved using a large
images is reduced to 256 colors or less.
number of pixels is suitable for a large- that plays back still images in
Therefore, the picture quality may
format print and one that is saved using a succession. Clip Motion images are deteriorate for some images.
smaller number of pixels is suitable for played back on this camera at • The file size is reduced in MOBILE mode,
attaching to an E-mail. Normally, an approximately 0.5 s intervals. The so the picture quality deteriorates.
image is recorded in the ratio of four to
images are stored in GIF format, which • GIF files not created on this camera may
three to fit the monitor ratio. This camera
can also record the image in the ratio of is convenient for creating home pages 5 Record the image for the next not be displayed correctly.
three to two to accommodate the most or attaching images to an e-mail. frame.
common printing paper size. This is the Image recording can be repeated
same ratio as the one used in photo- 4, 5 up to the maximum number of
developing shops. recordable frames.
The frame images are
automatically recorded on the
floppy disk or the “Memory Stick”
1 when you select [FINISH] or after
2, 3 recording the maximum number of
frames.
1280×960 1280 (3:2)
1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE To stop Clip Motion creation
selector to STILL.
B Various recording
Select [RETURN] after step 3.
2 Select [FILE] and then [CLIP Note that if you record even one frame,
MOTION] from the menu. you cannot stop Clip Motion creation.
3 Select the desired mode.
The number of Clip Motion frames
160×120 (NORMAL) that you can record on a floppy
Clip Motion of up to 10 frames can disk or a “Memory Stick” (8 MB)
be recorded.
Image size Number of images
This is suitable for use on home
pages, etc. Floppy disk “Memory Stick”
80×72 (MOBILE) 160×120 Approx. Approx.
Clip Motion of up to 2 frames can (NORMAL) 7* 40*
be recorded. 80×72 Approx. Approx.
This is suitable for use with (MOBILE) 54** 400**
portable data terminals.
∗ When recording 10 frames per Clip
CANCEL Motion file
This cancels the creation of Clip ∗∗ When recording 2 frames per Clip
Motion. Motion file
59 60
MVC-FD200 MVC-FD200
Recording still Image size Number of images Recording text Image size Number of images*
images for e-mail documents (TEXT)
Floppy disk “Memory Stick” Floppy disk “Memory Stick”
(E-MAIL) Text is recorded in GIF format to
1600×1200 Approx. 3 Approx. 8 1600×1200 Minimum Minimum
The E-MAIL mode records a small- provide a clear image. 4 24
1600 (3:2) Approx. 3 Approx. 8
size (320×240) image at the same time 1600 (3:2) Minimum Minimum
as a still image. Small-size images are 1600 Approx. 7 – 3
(ECM) 5 26
convenient for e-mail transmission,
etc. Images in E-MAIL mode are 1024×768 Approx. 8 Approx. 1600 Minimum –
recorded in the JPEG format. 20 (ECM) 4
640×480 Approx. Approx. 1024×768 Minimum Minimum

3 1 11 54
22 43 2
640×480 Minimum Minimum
28 121
To return to normal 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE
recording mode selector to STILL. ∗ The maximum number of recordable
1 Select [NORMAL] in step 2. images depends on the document
2 2 Select [FILE], [REC MODE],
condition, such as the amount of text
and then [TEXT] from the
portions.
menu.
To return to normal
selector to STILL. 3 Record the image.
recording mode
2 Select [FILE], [REC MODE], Select [NORMAL] in step 2.
and then [E-MAIL] from the
B Various recording
The number of images that you

menu. Notes
can record on a floppy disk or a
3 Record the image. “Memory Stick” (8 MB) in TEXT • If the subject is not evenly illuminated, you
mode may be unable to record a clear image.
• Writing and reading data take more time
MVC-FD100 than normal recording.
The number of images that you • When TEXT mode is selected, you cannot
can record on a floppy disk or a Image size Number of images* use the PROGRAM AE function.
“Memory Stick” (8 MB) in E-MAIL Floppy disk “Memory Stick”
mode
MVC-FD100 7 36
Image size Number of images 1280 (3:2) Minimum Minimum
8 40
Floppy disk “Memory Stick”
1280×960 Approx. 5 Approx.
11 54
12
1280 (3:2) Approx. 5 Approx.
28 121
12
20
640×480 Approx. Approx.
22 43
61 62
1-15
MVC-FD200
Recording still Image size Number of images Recording images in Setting the distance
images as macro to the subject
1600×1200 1
uncompressed files Use this mode when you record a small The focus is automatically adjusted.
1600 (3:2) 1
(TIFF) subject such as flower or insect from This function is useful when you
This mode simultaneously records still To return to normal close up. record a subject by presetting the
images in both TIFF format recording mode recording distance in accordance with
(uncompressed) and JPEG format the distance to the subject or the auto
Select [NORMAL] in step 3. focus does not work well.
(compressed) when using a “Memory
Stick.” Notes
Since this mode records images • JPEG images are recorded using the image
without compressing data, the quality size selected in the [IMAGE SIZE] menu
1
of picture will hardly deteriorate. Use (page 57). Images are automatically 2
this mode when you want to print recorded using the image size [1280×960]
unless [1280 (3:2)] is selected for MVC- 1
images with photograph picture
FD100.
quality. selector to STILL or MOVIE. 2
Images are automatically recorded using
4
the image size [1600×1200] unless [1600
(3:2)] is selected for MVC-FD200.
2 Press FOCUS repeatedly
until the (macro) indicator
• Writing data takes more time than in appears on the LCD screen. selector to STILL or MOVIE.
normal recording. With the zoom lever set to the W
side, you can shoot a subject that is
until a sharp focus is
2 about 3 cm (1 3/16 inch) away achieved.
1
B Various recording
3 from the lens surface in macro The 9 (manual focus) indicator
mode. appears on the LCD screen. You
can select from six focus settings:
1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE (macro), 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 3.0 m,
selector to STILL. To return to normal 7.0 m, and ∞ (infinity).
recording mode
2 Set the MS/FD selector to MS.
Press FOCUS repeatedly until both the
3 Select [FILE], [REC MODE], and 9 indicators disappear. To reactivate auto focusing
and then [TIFF] from the Press FOCUS repeatedly until both the
menu. Notes and 9 indicators disappear.
• You cannot record images in macro with
4 Record the image. the following PROGRAM AE modes: Notes
—Landscape mode • Focal point information may not
—Panfocus mode completely show the correct distance. Use
The number of images that you • You cannot record images in macro if the the information as a guide.
can record on a “Memory Stick” indicator appears. • Focal point information does not show the
correct distance when attaching the
(8 MB) in TIFF mode
conversion lens (optional).
MVC-FD100 • If you shoot a subject within 0.8 m
(31 1/2 inches) while the zoom lever is set
Image size Number of images to T side, you cannot get a clear focus. In
1280×960 1 such cases, the focal point information
flashes. Move the zoom lever to the W side
1280 (3:2) 2 until the indicator stops flashing.
• You cannot use this function if you have
selected the Panfocus mode in the
PROGRAM AE function.
63 64
Tips
Using the PROGRAM Spot light-metering mode Under normal recording conditions, the
AE function Select this mode when there is camera automatically makes various
backlight or when there is strong adjustments, such as those for the focus,
contrast between the subject and iris, exposure, and white balance, as it
the background, etc. Position the shoots. However, you may not be able to
point you want to record at the spot carry out your desired shooting
depending on shooting conditions. The
light-metering cross hair. PROGRAM AE function provides you
with near-optimum adjustments to suit
1 LCD screen your shooting situation.

selector to STILL. Spot light-metering
cross hair
2 Press PROGRAM AE
repeatedly to select the
desired PROGRAM AE mode.
To cancel PROGRAM AE
Twilight mode Press PROGRAM AE repeatedly until
Suppresses the blurring of colors the indicator on the LCD screen goes
of a bright subject in a dark place out.
B Various recording
so that you can record the subject Notes

without losing the dark atmosphere • You can focus only on distant subjects in
of the surroundings. Landscape mode.
• In Panfocus mode, the zoom position is set
Twilight plus mode to the W side and focus is fixed.
Increases the effectiveness of the • When you record in Twilight plus mode,
we recommend that you use a tripod to
twilight mode function. prevent shaking.
• Set the forced flash when you use the
Landscape mode flash in the following modes:
Focuses only on a distant subject to – Twilight mode
record landscapes, etc.
– Twilight plus mode
– Landscape mode
• You cannot use the PROGRAM AE
Panfocus mode function when the moving or still image of
Changes the focus quickly and TEXT mode is recorded.
• The ISO film speed is set to AUTO when a
simply from a close subject to a PROGRAM AE function other than the
distant subject. spot light-metering mode is set.
65 66
1-16
Tips To reactivate auto adjustment

Adjusting the Normally, the camera automatically
Adjusting the white Select [AUTO] in step 3.
exposure adjusts the exposure. If the color of the balance (WHITE
BALANCE) Tips
(EXPOSURE) image is too dark or bright as shown
The image is affected by the lighting
below, we recommend that you adjust the
exposure manually. When recording a When the white balance mode is set to conditions. The image looks blue under
backlighted subject or a subject in the AUTO, your camera automatically sets sunlight in the summer, and looks red
snow, set the exposure toward +, and under mercury lamps. Human eyes can
white balance in accordance with the resolve these problems. However, the
when recording a subject with extremely
bright illumination such as a spotlight, set recording conditions and adjusts the camera cannot resolve the problem
it toward –. balance of all colors in an image. If without making adjustments. Normally,
1 you want to fix the recording
2, 3 the camera adjusts automatically, but if
Set the exposure toward + conditions or record an image in the image appears in strange colors, we
specific lighting conditions, you can recommend that you change the white
set the desired white balance mode. balance mode.
selector to STILL or MOVIE.
2 Select [CAMERA] and then
[EXPOSURE] from the menu.
3 Select the desired exposure
1
value. 2, 3
Set the exposure toward –
Adjust the exposure value while
checking the brightness of the
background. You can select values 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE
ranging from +2.0 EV to −2.0 EV selector to STILL or MOVIE.
B Various recording
in steps of 1/3 EV.
[WHITE BALANCE] from the
Note
menu.
If a subject is under extremely bright or dark
situations, or the flash is used, the exposure
3 Select the desired white
balance setting.
adjustment may not be effective.
IN DOOR (n)
• Places where the lighting
condition changes quickly
• Under bright lighting such as
photography studios
• Under sodium or mercury lamps
OUT DOOR ( )
Recording a sunrise/sunset, night
scene, neon signs, or fireworks
HOLD (HOLD)
Retains the adjusted white balance
value
AUTO (No indicator)
Adjusts the white balance
automatically
67 68
B Various playback To display the next

Recording the date Enjoying picture (previous) index screen
and time on the still effects (PICTURE Playing back six Select v/V at the lower-left on the
image (DATE/TIME) EFFECT) LCD screen.
images at once
4 (INDEX)
Displays the previous index
screen.
Displays the next index screen.
1
2, 3 1 To return to normal playback
2, 3 (single image)
1
1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE 2 • Select the desired image with the
selector to STILL. control button.
1 • Select (Return).
2 Select [EFFECT] and then Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE
[DATE/TIME] from the menu. selector to STILL or MOVIE.
1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE Note
3 Select the date and time. 2 Select [EFFECT] and then selector to PLAY. When viewing an image recorded in Clip
[P. EFFECT] from the menu. Motion or TEXT mode on the INDEX
DAY & TIME 2 Select [INDEX] on the LCD screen, the image may appear different from
Superimposes the date, hour, and 3 Select the desired mode. screen. the actual image.
minute. Six images are displayed at once
SOLARIZE (index screen).
DATE The light contrast is clearer and the Only the first frame of Clip Motion
B Various recording
Superimposes the year, month, and picture looks like an illustration. files is displayed.
day.
B&W
OFF The picture is monochrome (black
Does not superimposes the date and white).
and time.
SEPIA
4 Record the image. The picture is sepia-toned like an MVC-001F 2002 7 4 12:30PM
DELETE FILE
SELECT
TOOL SETUP
SINGLE DISPLAY
The date and time do not appear on old photograph.
the LCD screen during shooting. This shows the position of the
NEG.ART currently displayed images relative
These appear during playback
The color and brightness of the to all the recorded images.
only.
picture are reversed as in a
negative. The following marks are displayed
on each image according to the
OFF image type and settings.
Does not use the picture effect : Moving image file
function. : E-mail file
2002 7 4 : Print mark
- : Protect mark
To cancel picture effect TEXT: TEXT file
Notes Select [OFF] in step 3. TIFF: TIFF file
• When [DATE] is selected in step 3, the CLIP: Clip Motion file
date is imposed in the order set by the (No mark): Normal recording (no
CLOCK SET item (page 14). settings)
• The date and time are not imposed onto
Clip Motion images.
69 70
1-17
Notes To cancel the slide show

Enlarging a part of the • You cannot trim moving images, still Playing back the still Select [CANCEL] in step 2 or 3.
still image (Zoom and images recorded in Clip Motion, TEXT images in order
mode, or uncompressed images.
trimming) • Zoom scaling is up to 5× regardless of the (SLIDE SHOW) To skip to the next/previous
original image size. image during the slide show
• The quality of enlarged images may be This function plays back the recorded Select \b/B\ at the lower-left on the
3 deteriorated. still images one after another. LCD screen.
• The original data is left even if you enlarge This function is useful for checking the
the image. recorded images or for presentations, Note
1 • The enlarged image is recorded as the etc. The interval setting time may vary
4 newest file. depending on the image size.

selector to PLAY.
1
2 Display the image to be 2, 3
enlarged.
3 Zoom in/out the image with

the zoom lever. 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE
The zoom scaling indicator selector to PLAY.
appears on the LCD screen.
2 Select [FILE] and then [SLIDE
4 Press the control button SHOW] from the menu.
repeatedly to select the Set the following items.
desired portion of the image. INTERVAL
v : The image moves downward You can select from 1 min (one
V : The image moves upward
B Various playback
minute), 30 sec (30 seconds),
b : The image moves rightward 10 sec (10 seconds), 5 sec
B : The image moves leftward (5 seconds), or 3 sec (3 seconds).
REPEAT
To return to the normal size ON: Plays back images
Zoom out with the zoom lever until the continuously in a loop until
zoom scaling indicator ( ×1.1) [RETURN] is selected (the slide
disappears from the screen, or simply show stops automatically after
press the center z. approximately 20 minutes* when
the image is played back from a
To record an enlarged image floppy disk).
(trimming) OFF: After all images have been
1 Enlarge the image. played back, the slide show ends.
2 Press the shutter button. The image ∗ The slide show does not end until all
is recorded at 640×480 size and the the images are played back, even if it
image on the LCD screen returns to takes more than 20 minutes.
the normal size after recording.
3 Select [START].
The slide show begins.
71 72
B Editing
Viewing images on a 2 Select [FILE], [PROTECT],
and then [ALL] or [SELECT]
TV screen Preventing accidental from the menu.
You can play back the recorded images erasure (PROTECT)
by connecting your camera to the TV.
3 When you select [ALL]
This function is used to prevent any Select [ON].
Before connecting your camera, be All the images in the floppy disk or
valuable images that you have
sure to turn off the TV, connect the the “Memory Stick” are protected.
recorded from being erased
VIDEO connecting cable, and turn on
accidentally. When you select [SELECT]
the TV.
The - (protect) indicator appears on Select all the images to be
Set the TV/VIDEO protected images.
switch to protected with the control button,
“VIDEO”. Note: then select [ENTER]. The selected
If you format a floppy disk or a “Memory
images are protected.
To VIDEO Stick”, all images are erased even when they
INPUT jack are protected.
VIDEO
connecting
cable 0001-0006/0040
(supplied) SELECT
PROTECT
OK
ENTER CANCEL
1
2, 3
To VIDEO OUT jack To release protection
If you selected [ALL] in step 2, select
In single mode [OFF]. If you selected [SELECT] in
1 Connect the VIDEO step 2, select the images to be
connecting cable to the unprotected with the control button,
B Various playback
VIDEO OUT jack of your selector to PLAY, then then select [ENTER].
camera and to the VIDEO display the image to be
INPUT jack of the TV. protected.
2 Turn on the TV and start
playback on your camera. 2 Select [FILE], [PROTECT],
and then [ON] from the menu.
The playback image appears on the
The displayed image is protected
TV screen.
and the - indicator appears.
Note
• You cannot use a TV that has an antenna To release protection
(aerial) connector only. Select [OFF] in step 2.
• When viewing a still image on the TV, the
black band may appear around the image.
In INDEX mode

selector to PLAY, then
display the INDEX screen.
73 74
1-18
To cancel changing the size

Deleting images 3 When you select [ALL] Changing the Select [CANCEL] in step 3.
Select [ENTER].
(DELETE) All the unprotected images are recorded still image
size (RESIZE) Notes
You can delete the images that are no deleted. • You cannot change the size of images
longer required. When you select [SELECT] Use this function when you need a recorded in TEXT mode, moving images,
Protected images cannot be deleted. small-size image to attach it to an uncompressed images, or Clip Motion
Select all the images to be deleted
images.
with the control button, then select E-mail. The original image is retained • When you change from a small size to a
[ENTER]. The (delete) even after resizing. The resized image large size, the picture quality deteriorates.
indicator appears on the selected is recorded as the newest file. • If you resize the recorded still image, the
images and these images are space remaining on a floppy disk or a
deleted. “Memory Stick” will decrease.
1 • You may not be able to resize a recorded
2, 3 still image if there is insufficient space
remaining on a floppy disk or a “Memory
Stick.”
In single mode 1 • You cannot resize the recorded still image
2, 3 to an image size of 3:2.
0001-0006/0040
1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE SELECT

DELETE ENTER CANCEL
OK
• If you resize a 3:2 size recorded still image
to another size, a black band will be
display the image to be 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE displayed above and below the resized
image.
deleted. selector to PLAY, then
To cancel deleting display the image of which • You cannot resize the recorded still image
you want to change the size. in the index screen.
Select [CANCEL] in step 2 or 3.
2 Select [DELETE] and then
[OK] from the menu.
The image is deleted. Note 2 Select [TOOL] and then
If there are files on the “Memory Stick” [RESIZE] from the menu.
with names having the same last 4 digits as
the file name of the image to be deleted, 3 Select the desired size.
these files are also deleted at the same time. • MVC-FD100:
In INDEX mode
When the MS/FD selector is
set to FD
1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE 1280×960, 1024×768, 640×480
B Editing When the MS/FD selector is
set to MS
1280 (FINE), 1024 (FINE),
640 (FINE)
[ALL] or [SELECT] from the
menu. • MVC-FD200:
set to FD
1600×1200, 1024×768, 640×480
set to MS
1600 (FINE), 1024 (FINE),
640 (FINE)
The resized image is recorded,
then the display returns to the
image display before resizing.
75 76
4 Select the media that the In INDEX mode 5 When you select [ALL]*
Copying images image will be copied onto. Select [OK].
(COPY) • When the MS/FD selector is ∗ [ALL] can be selected only when
set to FD. selecting [FD t FD] or [FD t
Copies images to another floppy disk
or “Memory Stick.” FD t FD MS].
Copies to the floppy disk
When you select [SELECT]**
FD t MS 1
In single mode Select all the images to be copied
Copies to the “Memory Stick” 2 6 with the control button. The
• When the MS/FD selector is 3, 4, 5 mark appears on the selected
set to MS. images and then select [ENTER].
MS t MS ∗∗ When selecting [MS t FD], the
Copies to the “Memory Stick” 1 Select the media using the
necessary number of floppy disks
MS/FD selector.
MS t FD appears after selecting [ENTER].
1 Copies to the floppy disk Select [OK] again.
2 5 2 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE
3, 4 When you select [FD t MS] or display the INDEX screen. 6 Insert or change the floppy
[MS t FD], the camera disk or the “Memory Stick”
automatically starts copying if the following the messages on
1 Select the media using the
floppy disk and “Memory Stick”
3 Select [TOOL], and then the LCD screen.
MS/FD selector. [COPY] from the menu. “RECORDING” appears. When
are inserted.
copying is completed,
2 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE 4 Select the media that the “COMPLETE” appears.
selector to PLAY, then 5 Insert or change the floppy image will be copied onto.
To end copying, select [EXIT].
display the image to be disk or the “Memory Stick” • When the MS/FD selector is
copied. following the messages on set to FD.
the LCD screen. FD t FD
“RECORDING” appears. When To continue copying the
3 Select [TOOL], and then
Copies to the floppy disk image to other floppy disks
[COPY] from the menu. FD t MS or “Memory Stick”s
“COMPLETE” appears. Copies to the “Memory Stick”
To end copying, select [EXIT]. After “COMPLETE” appears in step 6,
• When the MS/FD selector is select [CONTINUE] and repeat step 6.
set to MS.
To continue copying the MS t MS When selecting [MS t FD], if the
B Editing
image to other floppy disks Copies to the “Memory Stick” amount of total images that will be
or “Memory Stick”s MS t FD copied is too large to copy to one
After “COMPLETE” appears in step 5, Copies to the floppy disk floppy disk, the images will be copied
select [CONTINUE] and repeat step 5 using multiple floppy disks.
above.
To cancel copying partway
Select [CANCEL].
77 78
1-19
Notes
• You cannot copy uncompressed images. Copying all the 4 Insert another floppy disk. Selecting still images
• You cannot copy the image that is bigger “RECORDING” appears. When
than 1.4 MB.
information on your copying is completed, to print (PRINT MARK)
• You cannot copy the images that the total floppy disk (DISK “COMPLETE” appears. You can mark a print mark on still
amount of the images is bigger than COPY) To end copying, select [EXIT]. images recorded with your camera.
1.4 MB. If “NOT ENOUGH MEMORY”
appears or flashes on the INDEX You can copy to another disk not only This mark is convenient when you
screen, cancel some images to copy and try the images you have recorded with have images printed at a shop that
To continue copying to other conforms with the DPOF (Digital Print
again. your camera but also various files you floppy disks Order Format) standard.
• If you eject and insert the floppy disk or have created in other software with
the “Memory Stick” without selecting After “COMPLETE” appears in step 4,
[EXIT] after “COMPLETE” appears, the
your computer. select [CONTINUE] and repeat steps 3
image will be copied. and 4 above.
• The number of floppy disks that is needed
Notes
for copying is as a guide, which is • Once you carry out DISK COPY, all
information saved on the recipient floppy To cancel copying partway
displayed when selecting [MS t FD].
disk is erased to be replaced by newly Select [CANCEL]. 1
written data including the protected image 2, 3, 4
data. Check the contents of the recipient Note
disk before copying the disk. If you eject and insert the floppy disk
• Be sure to use the floppy disk that has been without selecting [EXIT] after In single mode
formatted by this camera to carry out “COMPLETE” appears, DISK COPY will
DISK COPY (page 81). be carried out onto the floppy disk.
selector to PLAY and display
1, 4 the image you want to print.
3 2 Select [FILE], [PRINT MARK],
1 and then [ON] from the menu.
2 The (print) mark is marked on
the displayed image.
1 Set the MS/FD selector to FD, To unmark the print mark

then insert the floppy disk to
be copied. Select [OFF] in step 2.
B Editing
2 Select [FILE], [DISK TOOL], In INDEX mode

[DISK COPY], and then [OK]
from the menu.
“DISK ACCESS” appears. 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE
3 When “CHANGE FLOPPY
DISK” is displayed, eject the
floppy disk. 2 Select [FILE], [PRINT MARK],
“INSERT FLOPPY DISK” and then [SELECT] from the
menu.
appears.
3 Select the images to be
marked with the control
button.
79 80
Notes
4 Select [ENTER]. Format • Format the floppy disk or the 4 Open “My Computer” on
The marks on the selected “Memory Stick” only using this Windows and check the icon
images change from green to When you format a floppy disk or a camera. You cannot format the “Removable Disk,” then use
white. floppy disk or the “Memory Stick” the camera as an external
“Memory Stick,” all data stored on the drive.
floppy disk or the “Memory Stick” will using a computer via the USB cable.
be deleted. Check the contents of the • When you format, be sure to use a fully
charged battery pack or the AC power Note
floppy disk or the “Memory Stick” • When using Windows 2000, Windows Me,
adaptor as the power source.
before formatting. or Windows XP, see also page 31.
• The drive symbol ((D:), etc.) may differ
0001-0006/0100
Note depending on your computer.
B As an external drive
PRINT MARK ENTER CANCEL
SELECT OK
Even if images are protected, these images • If you are using Mac OS X(v10.0/v10.1),
will be deleted. you can use only a “Memory Stick” with a
Using the camera as computer running Mac OS X(v10.0/
To unmark selected print v10.1). Even if you insert a floppy disk,
marks an external drive of a Mac OS X(v10.0/v10.1) cannot recognize
Select the images to be unmarked in computer it. To use data saved on a floppy disk,
copy it to a “Memory Stick” first
step 3 with the control button, then 1 Once you connect the camera to a (page 77).
select [ENTER]. 2 computer using the USB cable, you
3 can use the camera as a floppy disk/
To unmark all the print “Memory Stick” drive of a computer.
marks Install the USB driver to the computer
Select [FILE], [PRINT MARK], 1 Select the floppy disk or the
beforehand (page 29).
[ALL], and then [OFF] from the menu. “Memory Stick” using the
MS/FD selector.
The marks on all images are For Windows 98, Windows
removed. 98SE, Windows 2000,
2 Insert only the floppy disk or
Windows Me and Windows
the “Memory Stick” you want
To print out using the FVP-1 to format. XP Users
Mavica Printer Be sure to insert only the media
Set PRESET SELECT SW to PC on you want to format. 1 Select the drive type using
the printer. the MS/FD selector on this
camera.
Notes
3 Select [FILE] from the menu.
When used as the floppy disk
• When formatting a floppy disk
B Editing
• You cannot mark moving images, Clip drive, set the MS/FD selector to
Select [DISK TOOL],
Motion images or images recorded in FD.
[FORMAT], and then [OK] from
TEXT mode. When used as the “Memory Stick”
the menu.
• If you mark an image recorded in TIFF drive, set the MS/FD selector to
mode with a print mark, only the • When formatting a “Memory MS.
uncompressed image is printed, and the Stick”
JPEG image recorded at the same time is Select [FORMAT], and then 2 Connect the AC power
not printed. [OK] from the menu. adaptor and turn on the
camera.
To cancel formatting 3 Connect the camera to the

Select [CANCEL] in step 3. computer using the supplied
USB cable.
81 82
1-20
Additional information • Avoid getting liquids on the floppy If moisture condensation occurs
On battery pack
disk. Immediately eject the floppy disk, then
Precautions • Be sure to use a floppy disk case to turn off the camera and wait about an • Use only the specified charger with
ensure protection of important data. hour for the moisture to evaporate. the charging function.
• Even when you use a 3.5-inch 2HD Note that if you attempt to record with • To prevent accident from a short
On cleaning floppy disk, image data may not be moisture remaining inside the lens, you circuit, do not allow metal objects to
recorded and/or displayed depending will be unable to record clear images. come into contact with the battery
Cleaning the LCD screen
on the using environment. In this terminals.
Wipe the screen surface with a On AC power adaptor
case, use a disk of other brand. • Keep the battery pack away from
cleaning cloth (optional) or an LCD
cleaning kit (optional) to remove • Unplug the unit from the wall outlet fire.
fingerprints, dust, etc. On operating temperature (wall socket) when you are not using • Never expose the battery pack to
the unit for a long time. To temperatures above 60°C (140°F),
Cleaning the camera surface Your camera is designed for use disconnect the power cord (mains such as in a car parked in the sun or
Clean the camera surface with a soft between the temperatures of 0°C to lead), pull it out by the plug. Never under direct sunlight.
cloth slightly moistened with water, 40°C (32°F to 104°F). Recording in pull the power cord (mains lead) • Keep the battery pack dry.
then wipe the surface dry. Do not use extremely cold or hot places that itself. • Do not expose the battery pack to any
any type of solvent such as thinner, exceed this range is not recommended. • Do not operate the unit with a mechanical shock.
alcohol or benzene as this may damage damaged cord (mains lead) or if the • Do not disassemble nor modify the
the finish or the casing. unit has been dropped or damaged. battery pack.
On moisture condensation
After using your camera at the • Do not bend the power cord (mains • Attach the battery pack to the camera
seashore or other dusty locations If the camera is brought directly from a lead) forcibly, or place a heavy object securely.
Clean your camera carefully. cold to a warm location, or is placed in on it. This will damage the cord • Charging while some capacity
Additional information
Otherwise, the salty air may corrode a very damp room, moisture may (mains lead) and may cause fire or remains does not affect the original
the metal fittings or dust may enter the condense inside or outside the camera. electrical shock. battery capacity.
inside of your camera, causing a Should this occur, the camera will not • Prevent metallic objects from coming
malfunction. operate properly. into contact with the metal parts of
the connecting section. If this On the built-in rechargeable
Moisture condensation occurs happens, a short may occur and the lithium battery
On floppy disks easily when: unit may be damaged.
• The camera is brought from a cold Your camera is supplied with a built-in
To protect data recorded on floppy • Always keep metal contacts clean. rechargeable lithium battery installed
location such as a ski slope into a
disks, note the following: warmly heated room. • Do not disassemble the unit. to retain the date/time and various
• Avoid storing floppy disks near • The camera is taken from an air- • Do not apply mechanical shock or settings, regardless of the setting of the
magnets or magnetic fields such as conditioned room or car interior to drop the unit. POWER switch. The built-in
those of speakers and televisions. the hot outdoors, etc. • While the unit is in use, particularly rechargeable lithium battery is always
Otherwise, permanent erasure of disk during charging, keep it away from charged as long as you are using your
data may result. How to prevent moisture AM receivers and video equipment. camera. The battery, however, will get
• Avoid storing floppy disks in areas condensation AM receivers and video equipment discharged gradually if you do not use
subject to direct sunlight or sources When bringing the camera from a cold disturb AM reception and video your camera. It will be completely
of high temperature, such as a place to a warm place, seal the camera operation. discharged in about one month if you
heating device. Floppy disk warping in a plastic bag and allow it to adapt to • The unit becomes warm during use. do not use your camera at all. Even if
or damage may result, rendering the conditions at the new location over a This is not a malfunction. the built-in rechargeable lithium
disk useless. period of time (about an hour). • Do not place the unit in locations that battery is not charged, it will not affect
• Avoid contact with the disk’s surface are: the camera operation. To retain the
by opening the disk shutter plate. If — Extremely hot or cold date and time, etc., charge the battery if
the disk’s surface becomes the battery is discharged.
— Dusty or dirty
blemished, data may be rendered — Very humid
unreadable.
— Vibrating
83 84
Charging the built-in rechargeable Notes necessary, depending on the design of

lithium battery: • It is recommended that you make a backup the wall outlet (wall socket) [b]. About “InfoLITHIUM”
• Connect your camera to house copy of your important data. battery pack
current (mains) using the AC power • Do not remove the “Memory Stick” while
adaptor supplied with your camera, reading or writing data. AC-L10A/L10B What is the “InfoLITHIUM” battery
and leave your camera with the • Data may be damaged if: pack?
—you remove the “Memory Stick” or turn
power turned off for more than 24 The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack is a
off your camera while reading or writing
hours. data. lithium-ion battery pack that has
• Or install the fully charged battery —you use the “Memory Stick” in a functions for communicating
Watching the playback picture on information related to operating
pack in your camera, and leave your location subject to the effects of static
TV conditions between your camera and
camera with the power turned off for electricity or noise.
• Do not attach any other material than the If you want to view the playback the AC adaptor/charger (optional).
more than 24 hours.
supplied label on the labeling position. picture on a TV, you need a TV having The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack
• When you carry or store the “Memory a video input jack and a video calculates power consumption
If any problem occurs, unplug your Stick,” put it in its supplied case. connecting cable.
camera and contact your nearest Sony according to the operating conditions
• Do not touch the terminals of a “Memory The color system of the TV must be
dealer. Stick” with your hand or a metal object.
of your camera and displays the
the same as that of your digital still remaining battery time in minutes. If
• Do not strike, bend or drop the “Memory camera. Check the following list:
Stick.” you use the AC adaptor/charger
• Do not disassemble or modify the NTSC system (optional), it will calculate and display
On “Memory Stick”s “Memory Stick.” Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, the operation time and charging
• Do not allow the “Memory Stick” to get Central America, Chile, Colombia, completion time also.
“Memory Stick” is a new compact, wet.
Ecuador, Guyana, Jamaica, Japan, Charging the battery pack
portable and versatile IC recording • Do not use or keep “Memory Stick”s in
locations that are: Korea, Mexico, Peru, Surinam, • Be sure to charge the battery pack
medium with a data capacity that Taiwan, the Philippines, the U.S.A.,
—Extremely hot such as in a car parked in before you start using your camera.
exceeds a floppy disk. “Memory Stick” Venezuela, etc.
the sun or under the scorching sun. • We recommend charging the battery
is specially designed for exchanging —Under direct sunlight.
and sharing digital data among PAL system pack in an ambient temperature of
—Very humid or subject to corrosive
“Memory Stick” compatible products. gases. Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, between 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F)
Because it is removable, “Memory Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, until the POWER ON/OFF (CHG)
“Memory Stick”, , “MagicGate lamp goes out, indicating that the
Stick” can also be used for external Germany, Holland, Hong Kong,
Memory Stick” and are Hungary, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New battery pack is fully charged. If you
data storage.
trademarks of Sony Corporation. Zealand, Norway, Poland, Portugal, charge the battery pack outside of
There are two types of “Memory “MagicGate” and Singapore, Slovak Republic, Spain, this temperature range, you may not
Stick”s: general “Memory Stick”s and are trademarks of Sony Corporation. Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand, United be able to efficiently charge the
“MagicGate Memory Stick”s that are Kingdom, etc. battery pack.
equipped with the MagicGate* • After charging is completed, either
PAL-M system
copyright protection technology. disconnect the AC power adaptor
You can use both types of “Memory Using your camera Brazil
from the DC IN jack on your camera
Stick” with your camera. However, abroad PAL-N system or remove the battery pack.
because your camera does not support Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay
Power sources
the MagicGate standards, data
You can use your camera in any SECAM system
recorded with your camera is not
country or area with the supplied Bulgaria, France, Guiana, Iran, Iraq,
subject to MagicGate copyright
battery charger within 100 V to 240 Monaco, Russia, Ukraine, etc.
protection.
V AC, 50/60 Hz. Use a commercially
∗ MagicGate is copyright protection available AC plug adaptor [a], if
technology that uses encryption
technology.
85 86
1-21
Effective use of the battery pack • The E mark indicating there is little
• Battery performance decreases in remaining battery time sometimes Troubleshooting
low-temperature surroundings. So, flashes depending on the operating
the time that the battery pack can be conditions or ambient temperature If you experience trouble with your camera, first check the following items. Should
used is shorter in cold places. We and environment even if the your camera still not operate properly after you have made these checks, consult your
recommend the following to use the remaining battery time is 5 to 10 Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. If code displays (C:ss:ss)
battery pack longer: minutes. appear on the LCD screen, the self-diagnosis display function is working
— Put the battery pack in a pocket (page 95).
How to store the battery pack
close to your body to warm it up,
• If the battery pack is not used for a
and insert it in your camera
long time, do the following Symptom Cause and/or Solution
immediately before you start
procedure once per year to maintain
taking shots. Your camera does not • You are not using an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack.
proper function.
— Use the large capacity battery
1. Fully charge the battery. work. t Use an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (page 9).
pack (NP-F550, optional). • The floppy disk is not inserted properly.
2. Discharge on your camera.
• Frequently using the LCD panel or 3. Remove the battery from your t Eject the disk, and insert it again (page 16).
frequently operating the zoom wears camera and store it in a dry, cool • The battery level is too low. (The indicator
out the battery pack faster. We place. appears.)
recommend using the large capacity
battery pack (NP-F550, optional).
• To use the battery pack up on your t Charge the battery pack fully (page 10).
camera, leave the POWER switch to • The AC power adaptor is not connected securely.
• Be certain to turn the POWER switch on in PLAY mode until the power
to off when not taking shots or t Connect it securely to the DC IN jack and a wall
goes off without a floppy disk or a outlet (wall socket) (pages 10, 13).
playing back on your camera. “Memory Stick” inserted.
• Procure spare batteries that can last • The malfunction occurs inside the camera.
two or three times longer than the Battery life t Turn off the power, and turn on after one
expected recording time. Also, make • The battery life is limited. Battery minute, then check that the camera works
a trial recording before you record capacity decreases little by little as properly.
the actual images. you use it more and more, and as Your camera cannot • The PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector is set to PLAY.
time passes. When the battery
• Do not expose the battery pack to record images. t Set it to STILL or MOVIE (pages 18, 23).
water. The battery pack is not water- operating time is shortened
considerably, a probable cause is that • No floppy disk is inserted into your camera.
resistant. t Insert a floppy disk (page 16).
the battery pack has reached the end
Remaining battery time indicator of its life. Please buy a new battery • The tab on the disk is set to the unrecordable
• If the power goes off although the pack. position.
battery remaining indicator indicates • The battery life varies according to t Set it to the recording position (page 16).
that the battery pack has enough how it is stored and operating • No “Memory Stick” is inserted into your camera.
power to operate, charge the battery conditions and environment for each t Insert a “Memory Stick” (page 17).
pack fully again so that the indication battery pack. • The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is
on the battery remaining indicator is set to LOCK.
correct. Note, however, that the
t Set it to the recording position.
correct battery indication sometimes
will not be restored if it is used in The picture is out of focus. • Your camera is not in macro recording mode when
high temperatures for a long time or you shoot a subject that is about 3 to 25 cm
left in a fully charged state, or the (1 3/16 to 9 7/8 inches) away from the lens.
battery pack is frequently used. t Set the macro recording mode (page 64).
Regard the remaining battery time t Move the zoom lever to the W side.
indication as the approximate
The resizing function does • You cannot resize moving images, text images, Clip
shooting time.
not work. Motion images, and uncompressed images.
87 88
Symptom Cause and/or Solution Symptom Cause and/or Solution

You cannot display a print • You cannot display print marks on moving images, The moving image breaks • You are playing back the file from the floppy disk
mark. text images and Clip Motion images. off when you play back an or the “Memory Stick.”
The picture is noisy. • Your camera is placed near a TV or other
image on a computer. t Copy the file to the hard disk of the computer
equipment that uses strong magnets. and then play back the file from the hard disk
t Move your camera away from the TV, etc. (page 32).
The picture is too dark. • You are shooting a subject with a light source Your camera cannot delete • The image is protected.
behind the subject.
an image. t Cancel the protection (page 74).
t Adjust the exposure (page 67). The power turns off • With the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector set to
• The brightness of the LCD screen is too low. suddenly. STILL or MOVIE, if you do not operate the camera
t Adjust the brightness of the LCD screen for about three minutes while the power is on, the
(page 20). camera turns off automatically to prevent wearing
down the battery pack.
The flash does not work. • The flash is set to .
t Turn on the camera.
t Set the flash to (no indication), , or
• The battery pack is discharged.
(page 22).
t Replace it with a fully charged battery pack.
• The camera is in one of the following PROGRAM
AE modes: Twilight, Twilight plus, or Landscape. The image does not • The VIDEO OUT setting of your camera is
t Cancel the PROGRAM AE function or set the appear on the TV screen. incorrect.
flash to (pages 22, 65). t Change the setting (page 55).
• The PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector is set to The slide show function • The slide show function stops after about
MOVIE. stops automatically. 20 minutes when using a floppy disk.

t Set it to STILL. t To continue the slide show, select [START]
The date and time are • The date and time are not set correctly. again (page 72).
recorded incorrectly. t Set the correct date and time (page 14). You cannot use the • Your camera is set to TEXT mode or the PLAY/
Vertical streaks appear • This is called the smear phenomenon. PROGRAM AE function. STILL/MOVIE selector is set to MOVIE.
when you are shooting a t This is not a malfunction. t Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to STILL
very bright subject. and change the setting (pages 53, 54).
The zoom does not work. • PROGRAM AE is set to the Panfocus mode. The macro function does • PROGRAM AE is set to the Panfocus mode.
t Cancel the Panfocus mode (page 65). not work. t Cancel the Panfocus mode (page 65).
Digital zoom does not • You cannot use digital zoom when recording
work. moving pictures.
• Digital zoom is set to [OFF].
t Set digital zoom to [ON] at the menu.
The image is in • You shot the image in TEXT mode.
monochrome. t Cancel the TEXT mode (page 62).
• The picture effect is set to B&W.
t Cancel the B&W mode (page 69).
The image cannot be t Consult the computer or software manufacturer.
played back on a
computer.
89 90
1-22

Your computer does not • The battery level is low. The indication of the • You are using the camera for many hours under
recognize your camera. t Use the AC power adaptor (page 13). battery remaining time is extremely hot or cold temperatures.
• The camera is turned off. not proper, or the power is • The battery pack is dead.
immediately turned off t Replace the battery pack with a new one
t Turn on the camera. even if the battery
• The USB cable is not connected firmly. (page 9).
remaining indicator
t Disconnect the USB cable, and connect it again indicates that the battery • The battery level is too low.
firmly. Make sure that “USB MODE” is level is sufficient. t Install the fully charged battery pack (pages 9,
displayed on the LCD screen (page 30). 10).
• The USB connectors on your computer are • A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery
connected to other equipment besides the keyboard, time.
the mouse, and your camera. t Charge the battery pack fully (page 10).
t Disconnect the USB cables except for the ones The POWER ON/OFF • A malfunction has occurred in the battery pack.
connected to the keyboard, the mouse, and your (CHG) lamp flashes when t Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized
camera. charging a battery pack. Sony service facility.
• The position of the MS/FD selector is not set to the
proper position for the media being used. The POWER ON/OFF • The AC power adaptor is not connected.
t Set the MS/FD selector to the proper position. (CHG) lamp does not light t Connect the power cord firmly to a wall outlet
up when charging a (wall socket) (page 10).
• The USB driver is not installed. battery pack.
t Install the USB driver (page 29). • The battery pack is not installed properly.
• For Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows t Install it properly (page 9).
2000 and Windows Me users • Charging of the battery pack is complete.
Since the camera is connected to a computer using
the USB cable before installing the USB driver, the
drive is not recognized properly by the computer.
t Delete the drive which is not recognized
properly, then install the USB driver. For details,
see the procedure on page 33.
Battery packs
Symptom Cause and/or Solution

The battery pack cannot • The power of the camera is turned on.
be charged. t Turn off the power of the camera (page 10).
The battery life is short. • You are recording/playing back images under
extremely cold temperatures.
• The battery pack is not charged enough.
t Charge the battery pack fully.
• The battery pack is dead.
t Replace the battery pack with a new one.
91 92
Message Meaning
Warning and notice messages
IMAGE SIZE OVER You tried to play back images with an
Various messages appear on the LCD screen. Check the corresponding descriptions image size larger than the maximum
in the following list. playback size of this camera.
INVALID OPERATION You are playing back a file that was
Message Meaning created on equipment other than your
DRIVE ERROR There is trouble with the disk drive. camera.
SYSTEM ERROR Turn the power off and on again. for “InfoLITHIUM” battery only The battery is not the “InfoLITHIUM”
type.
NO DISK No disk is inserted.
- The image is protected.
NO MEMORY STICK No “Memory Stick” is inserted.
The battery level is too low. When the
FORMAT ERROR • The floppy disk loaded is not MS-DOS remaining time is about 5 to 10 minutes,
formatted (512 bytes × 18 sectors). E may flash depending on the battery
• Failed to format the “Memory Stick.” pack used, operating conditions, or the
• The Floppy Disk Adaptor for Memory environment.
Stick is inserted.
MEMORY STICK ERROR The inserted “Memory Stick” cannot be
used with your camera, or the “Memory
Stick” is damaged or not inserted
correctly.
DISK PROTECT The tab on the disk is set to the

unrecordable position.
MEMORY STICK LOCKED The write-protect switch on the
“Memory Stick” is set to the LOCK
position.
DISK FULL The disk is full.
NO MEMORY SPACE The capacity of the “Memory Stick” is
not sufficient to record images.
NO FILE No image is recorded in a floppy disk or
a “Memory Stick.”
FILE ERROR Trouble has occurred during playback.
FILE PROTECT The image is protected.
DISK ERROR A 2DD floppy disk is inserted, or there is
trouble with the disk.
DIRECTORY ERROR A directory with the same name already
exists.
NOT ENOUGH MEMORY The remaining capacity of the floppy
disk or the “Memory Stick” is not
enough to copy the image.
93 94
1-23
Self-diagnosis display LCD screen indicators

Your camera has a self-diagnosis display. This
function displays the camera condition on the The indicators during recording
LCD screen with a combination of a letter and
four digits of numbers. If this appears, check the
following code chart. The code informs you of the
camera’s current condition. The last two digits 1 qa
(indicated by ss) will differ depending on the
state of the camera. 2 qs
3 qd
Self-diagnosis display
• C: ss: ss 4 qf
You can correct the problem by 5 120min 1024 3:2 10 qg
yourself. REC 0:03
• E: ss: ss 6 +1.0EV
DATE
5s qh
Contact your Sony dealer or local 7 qj
authorized Sony service facility. SOLARIZE
8 ISO100 qk
Code Cause and/or Corrective Action 9 ql
C:32:ss
• There is trouble with the disk drive. 0 SELECT OK MENU BAR OFF w;
t Turn the power off and on again.
C:13:ss
• An unformatted floppy disk or A Sharpness indicator O Remaining disk capacity/
“Memory Stick” is inserted. Remaining memory capacity
t Format the floppy disk or the B Focus mode indicator/Macro indicator
“Memory Stick.” (page 81) indicator
: Floppy disk
• A floppy disk or a “Memory Stick” not C Battery remaining indicator : “Memory Stick”
compatible with this camera is inserted.
t Change the floppy disk or the D Flash level indicator/Flash P Recording time indicator
mode indicator
“Memory Stick.” (pages 16, 17) Q Self-diagnosis function
E:61:ss • A camera malfunction that you cannot E PROGRAM AE indicator/Zoom indicator/Recording time
E:91:ss repair has occurred. indicator indicator
t Contact your Sony dealer or local F White balance indicator R Self-timer indicator
authorized Sony service facility and
inform them of the 5-digit G DATE/TIME indicator S Spot light-metering indicator
indication. (example: E:61:10) H Picture effect indicator T Menu bar and guide menu
If you are unable to rectify the problem even if you try corrective actions a I ISO film speed indicator They appear by pressing v on the
few times when C:ss:ss is indicated, contact your Sony dealer or local control button and disappear by
authorized Sony service facility. J EV level indicator pressing V.
K AE/AF lock indicator
L Recording mode/Clip Motion
indicator
M Image size indicator
N Number of recorded images
95 97
The indicators during still image playback
120min 1024 11/12

1
2 6
3 7
4 8
5 MVC-011F 2002 7 4 12:00AM 9
A Protect indicator/Zoom scaling : Floppy disk

indicator : “Memory Stick”
B Print mark indicator G Number of stored images on a
C Recording mode/Clip Motion floppy disk or a “Memory
indicator Stick”
D Image size indicator H Image number
E File name* I Recording date of the playback
F Remaining disk capacity/ image*
Remaining memory capacity ∗ When the menu bar is displayed, this
indicator indicator disappears from the screen.
The indicators during moving image playback
120min 160 6/8

0:10 6
1
7
2
8
3
9
4
0
5 INDEX DELETE FILE
SELECT OK
TOOL SETUP
MENU BAR OFF
A Moving image file indicator F Remaining disk capacity/

B Image size indicator Remaining memory capacity
indicator
C Playback button/pause button
: Floppy disk
B is displayed during stop, and X
during playback. : “Memory Stick”
G Counter
D Image searching buttons
H Image number/number of
E Menu bar and guide menu
stored images on a floppy disk
or a “Memory Stick”
I Playback image
J Playback bar
98
1-24
1-24E
SECTION 2
DISASSEMBLY
• This set can be disassembled in the order shown below.
MVC-FD100/FD200
2-1. CABINET (REAR) BLOCK

ASSEMBLY (Page 2-1)
2-2. USB CONNECTOR BLOCK 2-5. FDD BLOCK ASSEMBLY 2-7. PK-61 BOARD
(Page 2-2) (Page 2-3) (Page 2-5)
2-3. FC-89 BOARD 2-6. LENS BLOCK ASSEMBLY 2-8. LCD MODULE
(Page 2-2) (Page 2-4) (Page 2-5)
SERVICE POSITION
2-4. FDD
(PK-61 BOARD AND LCD PANEL)
(Page 2-3)
(Page 2-6)
2-9. THE WAY OF DISASSEMBLING SERVICE POSITION

THE FDD (FC-89 AND CD-379/390 BOARDS)
(Page 2-7) (Page 2-4)
Note: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.
2-1. CABINET (REAR) BLOCK ASSEMBLY

1 Two screws (M2)
6 Cabinet (rear) block assembly
5 Two screws (M2)
2 Screw (M2)
3 Two screws (M2)

7 Flexible board
(CN801)
4 Screw (M2)
2-1
2-2. USB CONNECTOR BLOCK
1 Screw (M2)
2 Flexible board (CN682)
3 USB connector block
2-3. FC-89 BOARD
7 Connector
(CN002) 6 Connector
9 Two screws (M2) (CN001)
5 Connector
(CN301)
qa FC-89 board
8 Two screws (M2)
1 Flexible board
(CN701)
2 Two flexible board
(CN702, 703)
3 FP-465 flexible board

(CN101)
0 Claw

(CN184)
2-2
2-4. FDD
1 Three screws (M2)
3 FDD
2 FC bracket
Note: Be sure to read “2-9. THE WAY OF DISASSEMBLING

THE FDD” on page 2-7 when disassembling the FDD.
2-5. FDD BLOCK ASSEMBLY
4 Two connectors
(CN001, 002)
3 Connector
(CN301)
5 FDD block
assembly

(CN101)
2 FP-464 flexible board (CN184)
2-3
2-6. LENS BLOCK ASSEMBLY
1 Tapping screw
2 Lens block assembly
[SERVICE POSITION (FC-89 BOARD AND CD-379/390 BOARDS)]

: Contacting surface
AC power
AC IN
adaptor
CD-379 board (FD100: TYPE PA)
CD-390 board (FD100: TYPE SO/FD200)
FC-89 board
Cabinet (rear)
block assembly
Cabinet (front)
block assembly
FDD unit
Stand
Lens block assembly

Stand
Adjustment remote
Stand commander
CPC-12 jig
(J-6082-436-A)
2-4
2-7. PK-61 BOARD
4 Flexible board
(CN902)
9 PK-61 board
5 Flexible board
(CN851)
7 Three tapping screws
3 Connector
(CN702)
2 PK shield case assembly
LCD knob retainer

S709
1 Tapping screw
6 FP466 flexible board

(CN701)
Note: When installing PK-61 board, connect S709 with

LCD knob retainer.
2-8. LCD MODULE
5 LCD module
4 Cold cathode
fluorescent tube
1 Two tapping screws
3 BL retainer
2-5
[SERVICE POSITION (PK-61 BOARD AND LCD PANEL)]

LCD panel
Insulating sheet Cold cathode

fluorescent tube
PK-61 board
AC power FC-89 board

AC IN
adaptor
Cabinet (front)
block assembly
CPC-12 jig
(J-6082-436-A)
Adjustment remote
commander
2-6
2-9. THE WAY OF DISASSEMBLING THE FDD
Disassembling the FD-02H
(1) [Entire view before starting

disassembling]
(2) [Removing the top cover]

Remove the 2 screws from the front
and the rear respectively, totaling 4
screws. Start removing the 2 screws
from the front.

Then remove the 2 screws from the
rear.
2-7

Caution: The spring of the door of the
disk insertion slot is engaged with the
top cover. Be careful not to lose the
spring when removing the top cover.
(5) [The view after the top cover is

removed]
(6) [Removing the cassette

compartment]
How to remove the cassette
compartment: Hold the head arm of the
side-1 with fingertips and raise it
upward.
Hold the cassette compartment and
raise it in the slant angle as shown by
the arrow in the picture.
Caution: When raising the head arm,
apply the holding force in the direction
of up/down only. Never apply any force
in the direction of right/left as shown in
the picture. When removing the
cassette compartment, be careful not
hit or damage the head tip with the
cassette compartment. Be careful not
to raise the head arm too high. (Raising
the head arm too high, deforms the
spring that is inserted in the head arm.)
2-8
(7) [Cassette compartment]

The 2 pins are inserted in only an end
of cassette compartment. So, be
careful not lose the 2 pins.
(8) [Checking foreign material in

the transport motor]
Remove the transport motor cover (on
the rear of the FDD). The transport
motor cover is fixed by the 2 screws.
Because the recess the screw is small
and the screw is fastened into the
aluminum chassis, be careful not to
damage the recess.

Caution: Check to see that there is no
foreign material in the transport motor.
Check also that an end of the torsion
coil spring is engaged with the lead
screw as shown.
2-9
(10) [After completion of

disassembling]
Check that any foreign materials exist
inside the machine. Check that the
cover is not deformed. Check that the
cassette compartment is not
deformed.

disassembling]
Check to see that the flexible board
has no scar.
Check that the flexible board is not
folded and not twisted. Check also
that the gimbal is not deformed.
Check that the head tip is not peeled
off.
Gimbal
2-10
Reassembling the FD-02H

(12) [Reassembling]
Attach the transport motor cover.
Tightening torque: 1kgf•cm±10%
(13) [Attaching the cassette

compartment]
Raise the head arm and insert the
cassette compartment in a slant
angle.
Because there are POM supporting
studs (not visible in the picture shown)
beneath the head arm, the cassette
compartment must override
exceeding the studs.
(14) [Attaching the door]

Attach the door spring to the shaft in
the center of the door and insert the
shafts at the both ends of the door into
the grooves of the chassis.
2-11
(15) [Method of raising the head

arm]
Caution: Apply force in the up/down
direction only,
Never apply force in the direction
shown by the arrow in the picture.
(16) [Correct position of the flexible

board]
Be sure that the flexible board is
placed on top of the cassette
compartment. (As shown in the arrow
in the picture.)
Be sure that the flexible board is not
twisted.
(17) [Attaching the top cover]

Start attaching the screws to the front.
Tightening torque: 1kg•cm±10%
Refer to the separate document "Top
Cover Attachment SOP".
2-12
(18) [Attaching the door spring]

Insert an end of the spring into the
hole of the top cover. (Hole that is
shown in the picture)
(19) [Confirming the coupling of

top cover and cassette
compartment]
Confirm that the hole of the cover is
engaged with the shaft on the cassette
compartment.
(20) [Checking the flexible boards]

Check that the 3 flexible boards are
coming out. Check that the 3 flexible
cards are free from scars and are not
damaged.
2-13
[Notes when attaching the top cover]
1. Be careful not touch the grease that is coated at the 8 locations as shown below.
8 locations
2. When attaching the top cover to a drive, be careful that the FPC of S1 must not be caught into the drive. Observe that the FPC of
S1 must not be caught into the drive, by observing the position of FPC through the hole of the top cover as shown below. Also be
careful that the 6-pin FPC must not be caught into a drive at the same time.
OK NG OK
This line of the top cover is a guideline.
The 6-pin FPC must not be caught into a drive
3. Be sure not to forget to engage an end of the shutter spring in this hole.
The hole in which an end of the shutter spring is engaged.
4. When tightening the screws, there is an order tightening the screws. Follow the order as shown below.
(Tightening torque: 9.8N•cm(1.0kg•cm)±10%)
1 2 3 4
2-14
2-10. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION
FC-89
FLASH UNIT
FU-159
CD-379 (FD100: TYPE PA)

CD-390 (FD100: TYPE SO/FD200)
PK-61
Board Name Function

CD-379 CCD IMAGER
CD-390
FC-89 CAMERA PROCESS, CAMERA DSP, VIDEO, MEMORY, LENS DRIVE,
SH DSP, USB I/F, MS SOCKET, FDD INTERFACE, FDD CONTROL,
HI CONTROL, DC/DC CONVERTER
FU-159 DC IN
PK-61 MODE SWITCH, VIDEO OUT, LCD DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR,
BACK LIGHT DRIVE
2-15 E
SECTION 3
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM
FD100: TYPE PA FD100: TYPE SO / FD200

FC-89 BOARD
CD-379 CD-390
BOARD BOARD
IC702 IC704
ADDERESS BUS
LENS
IRIS
DATA BUS
16 16 FDD REC/PB AMP, FLOPPY
METER IC102 IC301
IC201 IC101 CONTROL FDD DATA STEPPING FDD DATA DISK
CCD OUT S/H, AGC, CAMERA (FC-89 (8/10)) MOTOR DRIVE
DATA BUS 12 DSP 14 3
CCD CCD A/D CONV. DRIVE UNIT
IMAGER IMAGER (FC-89 (1/10)) (FC-89 (2/10)) (FC-89 (7/10))
CAM SO, XCAM SCK

16
IC505 MC XRD
16M MC XWE1
FLASH ROM
M M H M (FC-89 (6/10))
20 PK-61 BOARD (1/2)
IC501 IC702
H1, H2 IC101
MC CAM,
TIMING SHOCK DETECT
V1A, V1B, V2, V3A, SH DSP
ADDERESS BUS
FOCUS ZOOM GENERATOR 16 16 (PK-61 (1/3))
V3B, V4, VSHT, RG IC506 (FC-89 (5/10))
SENSOR SENSOR (FC-89 (1/10))
16M SDRAM
DATA BUS
(FC-89 (6/10)) 12 20
IC182
CN681
DRIVE + IRIS
MSHUT ON MS
(MECHA SHUTTER) MS DIO, MS BS, MS SCLK
DRIVE SOCKET
(FC-89 (4/10))
IC508 CN201
IC303 EEPROM
16 DATA BUS 16 (FC-89 (6/10))
FP-335 FLEXIBLE USB
64M SDRAM BOARD
(FC-89 (3/10)) IC681 D+ USB D+
IC184
IC186 14 ADDRESS BUS 14 USB I/F
USB DATA
CAM SO, XCAM SCK

IC185 (FC-89 (6/10)) D– USB D–
DRIVE− EVR
(FC-89 (4/10)) PE DAC LEVEL 1, 2
(D/A CONVERTER)
CNTC
CAM SI, CAM SO, XCAM SCK

IRIS DRIVE (FC-89 (4/10))
HALL+ HALL AD
HALL AMP
HALL AD PK-61 BOARD (2/2) J781
V OUT ON
IC901 VIDEO OUT
Z SENS RST Z SENS RST Y OUT Y OUT
VIDEO AMP VIDEO OUT
F SENS RST F SENS RST C OUT C OUT
(FC-89 (3/10))
HI SO, HI SI, XHI SCK

PANEL Y
IC183 PANEL R-Y
PE EN1, PANEL B-Y
(FC-89 (4/10))
PE DIR1A, PE DIR1B
ZOOM MOTOR
DRIVE BZ901
PE EN0, BEEP IN
PE DIR1A, PE DIR0B BUZZER
FOCUS MOTOR
DRIVE
IC651 TG CLK
STRB ON
MC CLK
CLOCK GEN. USB CLK STRB AIN
X651 (FC-89 (1/10))
HALL AD
FDC CLK
CAM SO, XCAM SCK PANEL Y VR

STRB ON
PANEL R-Y IC901 VG LCD901
STRB AIN
PANEL B-Y LCD VB
FLASH DRIVE
(PK-61 (2/3)) COLOR
UNIT LCD
STB CHARGE STB CHARGE BEEP IN IC904
MONITOR
XSTB FULL XSTB FULL IC902 LCD TIMING
HI SO, HI SI, XHI SCK HI SO, XHI SCK (EVR) GENERATOR
D/A CONVERTER (PK-61 (2/3))
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK FU-159 BOARD
IC404 (PK-61 (2/3))
(1/2) IC406 BL LEV
HI EEPROM Q856
ZOOM ZOOM SW AD BL HIGH
FDD P 5V CONTROL
SWITCH ( FC-89 (9/10)) BL UNREG SWITCHING ND801
FDD 4.9V ( FC-89 (9/10))
IC001 CAM 15V
FU-159 BOARD DC A 4.9V SHUTTER XRS ON1, XRS ON2 IC851 T851
(2/2) CONTROL PANEL 13.2V
SWITCH IC405 DC/DC CONTROL
INVERTER
(FC-89 (10/10) TRANS
PANEL 4.9V TIMER (PK-61 (3/3))
RST SIO, RST SCK CLOCK
D 3.2V BT701
BATT D401 ( FC-89 (9/10)) LITHIUM
CAM 3.2V
UNREG IC407 BATTERY
CAM P 5V
ACV +3.1V REG, RESET
BT901 D 1.8V
BATT SIG UNREG D402 (FC-89 (9/10)
BATTERY S A 3.2V KEY AD1, KEY AD2 FUNCTION
TERMINAL CAM −7.5V KEY
SYS DD ON
LCD DD ON
XCAM/PB SW
PLAY/STILL/
BATT SIG MOVE/XSTILL MOVIE
J001
BL UNREG
DC IN
ACV UNREG XPWR SW POWER
ST UNREG ON/OFF
BATT UNREG
05
3-1 3-2
3-9. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM 1
FU-159 BOARD (1/2) FC-89 BOARD (1/2) CN801 (2/2)

J001 EVER 3.2V EVER 3.2V
25
CN001 CN004 CN001
DC IN F003
ACV UNREG 6 6 BL UNREG BL UNREG BL UNREG 5
1 7 7
BATT/XEXT 6
3 F001 PANEL 13.2V
10 10 ST UNREG ST UNREG 13
POWER
2
ACV GND
F002
11 11
PANEL 4.9V
11
A BLOCK 2
8 8 VCC UNREG VCC UNREG (3-19)
9 9 A 4.9V
F005 12
ACV UNREG ACV UNREG
12 12 PANEL 3.2V 14
F004 15
BATT UNREG
5 5 D 3.2V
10
BATT UNREG Q004
18 VCC VCC OUT 45 SWITCHING
Q001, 004 L007
CN003 (1/2) CN002 (1/2) D401 D402
FAST CHARGE ON
7 7 BL UNREG
OUT A 46
INIT CHARGE ON 6 −INA ST UNREG
6 6 Q010
+IN A 7 FDD P 5V
EMERGENCY
SCP:A 8
BT901 Q002, 003 DETECT
BATTERY Q005 Q024, 032
CN002 CHARGE
TERMINAL Q014 13.2V
BATT CONTROL
UNREG EMERGENCY REG
+ 1 IC001
DETECT
DC CONTROL Q023
BATT/EXT (FC-89 (10/10))
8 8 LCD DD ON SWITCH
BATT SIG BATT SIG IC407
S 2 9 9
(FC-89 (9/10)) Q018
DC PACK SW DC PACK SW L402
4 5 5 T001
4 +3.1V 3 DC/DC CONV. D002
REG
BATT GND TRANS RECT
– 3 Q001 L016
CAM 15V
SWITCHING 4 5
3
6
2
PK-61 BOARD (1/2) D410
CN701 (1/2) CN801 (1/2) IC405 1 8
BT701 BATT TIMER OUT B 44 Q025, 031
6 40 POWER
LITHIUM BATTERY CLOCK 11 −INB
−15V −7.5V CAM −7.5V
(FC-89 (9/10))
REG
B BLOCK 2
(3-19)
+IN B 12
IC404 SCP:B 13
HI CONTROL
(FC-89 (9/10))
V REF 2.5V
Q003
SWITCHING Q16 PANEL
L005 L17
42 51 4.9V 4.9V
BACKUP
75 − 77
VCC
86 87 LCD DD ON
OUT C 40
25 +INC L012
FDD 4.9V
−IN C 26
SCP:C 24 L015
A 4.9V
CAM P 5V
Q002
SWITCHING L004 L011
BATT UNREG 3.2V A 3.2V
71 BATT SENS
FAST CHARGE ON L008
100 FAST CHARGE D 3.2V
INIT CHARGE ON OUT D 39
27 INIT CHARGE L010
30 +IND CAM 3.2V
BATT/EXT
20 BATT/XEXT −IN D 31
Q409 SCP:D 29
BATTERY 48 BATT SI
BATT SIG 19 V REF 2.5V
CHARGE
DETECTOR 49 BATT SO
DC PACK SW 20 POW CONT
65 CHARGE INH
21 CTL B RT 16 Q005, 006
SYS DD ON 29 22 CTL C, D CT 17
D1.8V D 1.8V
REG
VREF 2.5V VREF 2.5V
LCD DD ON
LCD DD ON 47
CAM DD ON CAM DD ON
CAM DD ON 25
05
3-17 3-18
PK-61 BOARD FU-159 BOARD (2/2) CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK

IC702 IC904 IC902 IC901
(2/2) RV001
SHOCK LCD TIMING EVR LCD
DETECT GENERATOR (D/A CONV.) DRIVE ZOOM
(PK-61 (1/3)) (PK-61 (2/3)) (PK-61 (2/3)) (PK-61 (2/3)) CN002 (2/2) CN003 (2/2) CN005
W T
D 3.2V 4 4 D 3.2V
4
CN701 (2/2) L903
L902 PANEL
31 PANEL 3.2V UNIT
32
L702 CN902
D 3.2V
36 16
PANEL 13.2V L901

LCD901
33 18
IC681
D702 COLOR
POWER EVER 3.2V USB I/F
CHARGE LCD
BLOCK 1 A 21 IC903 IC852 IC851
MONITOR
(FC-89 (6/10))
(3-18) D701 VREF AMP. CURRENT DC/DC
VCO DETECT CONTROL
FLASH (PK-61 (2/3)) (PK-61 (3/3)) (PK-61 (3/3)) FB681 Q682 CN681
D 3.2V 3 MS
A 4.9V D703
34 9 SOCKET
POWER Q851, 852 Q861 CN851
PANEL 4.9V D901
35 2
LED
IC508 IC505 IC506 L702
D 3.2V
T851 EEPROM 16M 16M
L851 Q854, 856 L852, 853
40 BL UNREG INVERTER ND801 (FC-89 (6/10)) FLASH SDRAM
SWITCHING 10 BACK (FC-89 (6/10)) (FC-89 (6/10))
41 TRANS
LIGHT IC702 IC703
L505 L504 FDD INVERTER
CONTROL (FC-89 (8/10))
(FC-89 (8/10))
CN701
FC-89 BOARD (2/2) FDD P 5V 9
IC501
IC301 IC901 IC502 10
MC CAM,
CAMERA VIDEO AMP SH DSP NAND GATE
IC651 DSP IC303 (FC-89 (5/10))
(FC-89 (3/10)) (FC-89 (5/10))
CLOCK GEN. (FC-89 (2/10)) 64 SDRAM Q701 − 703 5 FLOPPY
(FC-89 (1/10)) (FC-89 (3/10)) BL UNREG DISK
DRIVE
L902 CN702 UNIT
L303 FDD 4.9V
IC406 5
FB651 D501
L302 EEPROM L502
FB301
FB302
L304
L301
(FC-89 (9/10)) ACCESS CN703

L651 IC704 3
D 3.2V D 3.2V REC/PB AMP
STEPING
D 1.8V D 1.8V MOTOR DRIVE
(FC-89 (7/10))
A 3.2V A 3.2V
Q317, 318 CN301
A 4.9V A 4.9V A 4.9V
4
FDD P 5V FDD P 5V FLASH
UNIT
ST UNREG ST UNREG UNREG
8
POWER
BL UNREG BL UNREG
BLOCK 1 B FDD 4.9V FDD 4.9V FD100: TYPE SO / FD200 FD100: TYPE PA
(3-18)
CD-390 BOARD CD-379 BOARD
Q102 - 105
CN101 CN101 CN201
CAM 15V CAM 15V CAM 15V CAM 15V CAM 15V IC101 CAM 15V IC201
11 10 10
CAM CCD CCD
CAM −7.5V CAM −7.5V CAM −7.5V −7.5V CAM −7.5V IMAGER CAM −7.5V IMAGER
12 9 9
CAM DD ON CAM DD ON
L181
CAM P 5V CAM P 5V
L101 L182
CAM 3.2V CAM 3.2V Q182 CN184
CH 3.2V D 3.2V F SENS VCC F SENS VCC FOCUS
20
L184 L102 SENSOR
FB110 FB111
L183
Z SENS VCC Z SENS VCC ZOOM
IC184 IC185 IC186 IC102 IC101 IC183 IC182 7
SENSOR
IRIS IRIS DRIVE EVR S/H, AGC, TIMING FOCUS/ZOOM IRIS(MECHA
DRIVE HALL AMP (D/A CONV.) A/D CONV. GENERATOR MOTOR DRIVE SHUTTER)
(FC-89 (4/10)) HALL BIAS/GAN (FC-89 (4/10)) (FC-89 (1/10)) (FC-89 (1/10)) (FC-89 (4/10)) DRIVE
(FC-89 (4/10))
05
3-19 3-20 E
SECTION 4
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

(In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)
(For printed wiring boards) (Measuring conditions voltage and waveform)

• : Uses unleaded solder. • Voltages and waveforms are measured between the
• b: Pattern from the side which enables seeing. measurement points and ground when camera shoots
(The other layers’ patterns are not indicated) color bar chart of pattern box. They are reference values
• Through hole is omitted. and reference waveforms. *
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms. (VOM of DC 10 MΩ input impedance is used)
• There are a few cases that the part printed on diagram • Voltage values change depending upon input impedance
isn’t mounted in this model. of VOM used.)
• Chip parts.
Transistor Diode 1. Connection
C 6 5 4 4 5 6 4 5 1 2 3 3 3 3 4
Pattern box
B E 1 2 3 3 2 1 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
2 1 5 4
Front side of the lens

3 4 5 1 2 3
L
(For schematic diagrams)
• All capacitors are in µF unless otherwise noted. pF : µ
µF. 50 V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics
and tantalums.
• Chip resistors are 1/10 W unless otherwise noted.
kΩ=1000 Ω, MΩ=1000 kΩ.
• Caution when replacing chip parts. L=About 30cm
New parts must be attached after removal of chip.
Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum
capacitor, Because it is damaged by the heat.
• Some chip part will be indicated as follows.
Example C541 L452 2. Adjust the distance so that the output waveform of Fig.
22U 10UH a and the Fig. b can be obtain.
TA A 2520
H
Yellow
Magenta
White
Cyan
Green
Kinds of capacitor
Red
Blue
Temperature characteristics
External dimensions (mm)
• Constants of resistors, capacitors, ICs and etc with XX

indicate that they are not used.
In such cases, the unused circuits may be indicated. A B A=B B A
• Parts with ★ differ according to the model/destination.
Fig. a (Video output terminal output waveform)
Refer to the mount table for each function.
• All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic
curve B, unless otherwise noted. Color bar chart
• Signal name picture frame
Magenta
XEDIT → EDIT PB/XREC → PB/REC

Green
Yellow
White
Cyan
Monitor TV or LCD
Blue
Red
• 2: non flammable resistor picture frame

• 1: fusible resistor
• C: panel designation
• A: B+ Line *
• B: B– Line * Fig.b (Picture on monitor TV or LCD)
• J : IN/OUT direction of (+,–) B LINE. *
• C: adjustment for repair. * When indicating parts by reference number, please
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms. * include the board name.
* Indicated by the color red.
Note : Les composants identifiés par une marque
Note : The components identified by mark 0 or 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité.
dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant
Replace only with part number specified. le numéro spécifie.
4-1
I
J
F
E
C
B
A
H
G
D
05
1
FRAME (1/2)
20P
20 F_SENS_VCC
19 F_SENS_RST
2
18 F_SENS_GND
17 FOCUS_A
16 FOCUS_B
15 FOCUS_A
14 FOCUS_B
13 DRIVE-
12 DRIVE+
11 HALL-
3
10 BIAS-
9 HALL+
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2)
LENS UNIT
8 BIAS+
7 Z_SENS_VCC
6 Z_SENS_RST
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
5 Z_SENS_GND
4 ZOOM_A
3 ZOOM_B
4
2 ZOOM_A
1 ZOOM_B
4-3
IC201
IC101
FD200
5
CCD
IMAGER
FD100:TYPE PA
FD100:TYPE SO
S001
BLOCK
(SHUTTER)
CD-390 BOARD
CD-379 BOARD
6
ZOOM
RV001
T
CONTROL SWITCH
:FD100:TYPE PA
FP-464
CN201 20P:FD100:TYPE PA
FLEXIBLE
:FD100:TYPE SO/FD200
CN101 20P:FD100:TYPE SO/FD200
GND
CCD_OUT
GND
GND
V4
V3A
V3B
V2
V1A
V1B
CAM_15V
CAM_-7.5V
GND
H2
H1
RG
VSUB_CONT
VSHT
GND
CCD_TEMP
7
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
FP-465 FLEXBLE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
V4
V2
H2
H1
RG
V3A
V3B
V1A
V1B
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
VSHT
CN005
CN101
D_3.2V
CCD_OUT
CAM_15V
XRS_ON1
XRS_ON2
8
CAM_-7.5V
CCD_TEMP
VSUB_CONT
6P
UNREG_GND
UNREG_GND
20P
ZOOM_SW_AD
CN001 12P CN004 12P

REG_GND 1 1 REG_GND
REG_GND 2 2 REG_GND
REG_GND 3 3 REG_GND
CN184 20P
REG_GND 4 4 REG_GND
1 ZOOM_B
9
BATT_UNREG 5 5 BATT_UNREG
2 ZOOM_A
UNREG4 6 6 UNREG4
3 ZOOM_B
UNREG4 7 7 UNREG4
FU-055
4 ZOOM_A
HARNESS
UNREG3 8 8 UNREG3
5 Z_SENS_GND
UNREG3 9 9 UNREG3
6 Z_SENS_RST
UNREG2 10 10 UNREG2
7 Z_SENS_VCC
UNREG2 11 11 UNREG2
8 BIAS+
UNREG1 12 12 UNREG1
9 HALL+
10
10 BIAS-
11 HALL-
FU-159 BOARD
12 DRIVE+
CN002 9P CN003 9P
13 DRIVE-
BATT_SIG 9 9 BATT_SIG
14 FOCUS_B
BATT/XEXT 8 8 BATT/XEXT
15 FOCUS_A
FAST_CHARGE_ON 7 7 FAST_CHARGE_ON
16 FOCUS_B
INIT_CHARGE_ON 6 6 INIT_CHARGE_ON
17 FOCUS_A
11
DC_PACK_SW 5 5 DC_PACK_SW
18 F_SENS_GND
D_3.2V 4 4 D_3.2V
FU-056
19 F_SENS_RST
HARNESS
ZOOM_SW_AD 3 3 ZOOM_SW_AD
20 F_SENS_VCC
XRS_ON2 2 2 XRS_ON2
XRS_ON1 1 1 XRS_ON1
CN002
CN001
BATT_GND
BATT_SIG
BATT_UNREG
BATT/XEXT
DC_PACK_SW
3P
ACV_GND
ACV_UNREG
4P
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
12
CN701 19P
J001
S
DC IN
PA 1
BT901
BATTERY
TERMINAL
PB 2
PNA 3
PNB 4
FDD_5V(A) 5
13
STBY(K) 6
TOS1(C) 7
FC-89 BOARD (1/2)
FDD_GND(E) 8
4-4
FDD_5V 9
FDD_5V 10
INDEX 11
MC 12
FDD_LED_IN 13
14
CLOCK 14
FDD_GND 15
FDD_GND 16
HDS 17
FPTS 18
DISK 19
CN703 5P
R/W_B 1
15
R/W_A 2
COMMON 3
SIDE 0
ERASE 4
SHIELD 5
FLOPPY DISK DRIVE
CN702 5P
COMMON 5
16
R/W_A 4
R/W_B 3
SIDE 1
ERASE 2
SHIELD 1
(SEE PAGE 4-5)
TO FC-89 BOARD (2/2)
17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
A D901
(LED)
FLASH UNIT ND801

BACK LIGHT
CPC
(FOR CHECK)
10
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
10
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
8
7
4
3
1
STB_CHARGE
STRB_PHOTO_ON
POP_UP_ON
A_4.9V
UNREG_GND
PHOTO_TR_OUT
UNREG
STRB_ON
XSTB_FULL
NC
NC
NC
NC
EVER_3.2V
RESET
RXD
TXD
PF7
MAKER_RECOG
LANC_OUT
LANC_IN
HI_UNREG
VG
COM
HSY
TRACK_00
NC
REG_GND
INDEX
FDDRF_A
FDDRF_B
BL_HIGH
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
BL_LOW
LED
LED_GND
10P
10P
22P
TALLY
CN801 45P CN701 45P
CN851
CN803
CN301
REG_GND 45 1 REG_GND
VG 44 2 VG
PANEL_COM 43 3 PANEL_COM
HSY 42 4 HSY
MAKER_RECOG 41 5 MAKER_RECOG
C BATT 40 6 BATT
BL UNIT
CN902 24P
BUZZER 39 7 BUZZER TESTR 1
REG_GND 38 8 REG_GND RGT 2
XHI_SCK 37 9 XHI_SCK PK-61 BOARD B 3
HI_SO 36 10 HI_SO R 4
XCS_LCD_D/A 35 11 XCS_LCD_D/A G 5
XBATT_CHG_LED 34 12 XBATT_CHG_LED PSIG 6
XPOWER_LED 33 13 XPOWER_LED HCK1 7

D XSTROBE_LED 32 14 XSTROBE_LED S701
S702
DISPLAY HCK2 8
LCD901
XPWR_SW 31 15 XPWR_SW
MENU CRext 9 COLOR
XCAM/PB_SW 30 16 XCAM/PB_SW SDUT 10
MOVE/XSTILL 29 17 MOVE/XSTILL S703 REF 11

LCD
DISK/XMS 28 18 DISK/XMS POWER
ON/OFF(CHG)
HST 12 MONITOR
KEY_AD1 27 19 KEY_AD1 WIDE 13
FP-466 FLEXIBLE
KEY_AD2 26 20 KEY_AD2 CS 14
EVER_3.2V 25 21 EVER_3.2V VSSG 15

E FC-89 BOARD (2/2) REG_GND 24 22 REG_GND VDDG 16
S705
PANEL_R-Y 23 23 PANEL_R-Y D701 VSS 17
(FLASH LED(AMBER)) FLASH
PANEL_B-Y 22 24 PANEL_B-Y VDD 18
D501
TO FC-89 BOARD (1/2) (ACCESS LED(RED)) PANEL_Y 21 25 PANEL_Y DWN 19
(SEE PAGE 4-4) REG_GND 20 26 REG_GND EN 20
PANEL_V 19 27 PANEL_V VCK 21

S707
HDO 18 28 HDO D702 VST 22
PROGRAM AE
(CHARGE LED(AMBER))
REG_GND 17 29 REG_GND COM 23
F REG_GND 16 30 REG_GND TESTL 24
PANEL_3.2V 15 31 PANEL_3.2V
PLAY/STILL/MOVIE
PANEL_13.2V 13 33 PANEL_13.2V D703
(POWER LED(GREEN)) S708 S710
A_4.9V 12 34 A_4.9V (PLAY) (MOVIE)
PANEL_4.9V 11 35 PANEL_4.9V CN702 2P

D_3.2V 10 36 D_3.2V SP + 2 BZ901
BUZZER
SHOCK SENS 9 37 SHOCK SENS S709 SP - 1
G REG_GND(UNREG_GND) 8 38 REG_GND(UNREG_GND)
LCD BACKLIGHT
ON OFF
REG_GND(UNREG_GND) 7 39 REG_GND(UNREG_GND)
BT701
BL_UNREG 6 40 BL_UNREG (LITHIUM BATTERY)
BL_UNREG 5 41 BL_UNREG
VIDEO_GND 4 42 VIDEO_GND J781

VIDEO OUT
USB_JACK_IN(VCC)
VIDEO_OUT 3 43 VIDEO_OUT
S711 S712
VIDEO_GND 2 44 VIDEO_GND
10P
FOCUS MS/FD
GND_GUARD
6P
AV_JACK_IN 1 45 AV_JACK_IN
H
USB_D+
USB_D-
CN681
CN682
SCLK
GND
GND
VSS
VCC
VCC
VSS
DIO
N.C
N.C
INT
BS
10
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
3
5
6
8
9
10 1
MEMORY STICK
CN201 5P
I GND 1
ID 2 FP-335
USB
D+ 3 FLEXIBLE
D- 4
05 VCC 5
4-5 4-6 FRAME (2/2)

4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
CD-379 (CCD IMAGER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-39 for printed wiring board. • See page 4-53 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FC-89 BOARD (1/10)

CN101
A
THROUGH THE
FP-465 FLEXIBLE
CD-379 BOARD SIGNAL PATH
(SEE PAGE 4-11) VIDEO

(MVC-FD100:TYPE PA MODEL) SIGNAL
CCD IMAGER Y/CHROMA

XX MARK:NO MOUNT
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE REC
20P
R:REC MODE
VSUB_CONT
CCD_TEMP
CAM_-7.5V
P:PB MODE
CAM_15V
CCD_OUT
CN201
VSHT
B
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
V1B
V1A
V3B
V3A
RG
H1
H2
V2
V4
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
TH201
C201 C206
1u 0.1u
R201 Q202
XX
UN9213J-(K8).SO
C CL201
SWITCH
CL202 R209 C214

10k 0.001u
R6/ R210
P0 1M
0
4
D C203
22u
C204
0.01u
R-0.4/P0
R-7.4/P0
R-0.4/P0
R-0.4/P0
R-7.4/P0
R-7.4/P0
16V
R-7.5/P0 R6/P0
FB202
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PT(VL)
V5(V1A)
V6(V3A)
V1(B)
V2
V3(B)
V4
SUB
IC201 5
E CCD IMAGER
IC201
MN39742PTJ-S
2
(VOUT)VO
R12.4/P0
(VDD)OD
R1.8/P0
R2.3/P0
D201 R202
PW
OG
RG
100k
H1
H2
LG
MA111-(K8).S0
3 1
R205 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
33 R15.4/
R1.4/P0
R7.7/P0
P0
R206 33 R1.6/P0
C208
0.1u
R204 C207
180 0.1u
F L201
10uH
R15.4/P0
C210
0.1u
R208
1M
C212
0.1u
C213
XX
FB201 R12.4/
C211 Q201 P0
C202
3.3u 0.1u 2SC4178-F13F14-T1
35V BUFFER
R11.6/P0
R203 R207 C209
0 C205
XX 3300 10p
05
Precautions for Replacement of CCD Imager
• The CD-379 board mounted as a repair part is not equipped
with a CCD imager.
When replacing this board, remove the CCD imager from the
old one and mount it onto the new one.
• If the CCD imager has been replaced, carry out all the
adjustments for the camera section.
• As the CCD imager may be damaged by static electricity from
its structure, handle it carefully like for the MOS IC.
In addition, ensure that the receiver is not covered with dusts
nor exposed to strong light.
CD-379 4-7 4-8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FC-89 BOARD (1/10)

CN101
THROUGH THE
A FP-465 FLEXIBLE
(SEE PAGE 4-11) (MVC-FD100:TYPE SO MODEL/FD200) VIDEO
SIGNAL
CCD IMAGER Y/CHROMA
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
R:REC MODE
P:PB MODE
20P
VSUB_CONT
( ):FD100:TYPE SO MODEL(REC MODE)

CCD_TEMP
CAM_-7.5V
CAM_15V
CCD_OUT
< >:FD200(REC MODE)
CN101
VSHT
B
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
V1B
V1A
V3B
V3A
RG
H1
H2
V2
V4
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TH101
R101
XX
C CL101
2
CL102
Q102
2SC4178-F13F14-T1
BUFFER
C110 C112 R14.9/

0.1u 10p P0
L101 R110
100uH R9.5/ 0
R10.4/
P0
P0
R-7.3/P0
R-7.3/P0
R-0.3/P0
R-0.3/P0
R-0.3/P0
IC101 R-7.3/P0 C114
D CCD IMAGER R10.4/
P0
XX
ICX202BQ-13:FD100:TYPE SO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ICX284AQ-13:FD200 R109
3300
GND
VOUT
V4
V2
V3A
V3B
V1A
V1B
∗R104
10:FD200
33:FD100:TYPE SO 3
∗R105
15:FD200 1
33:FD100:TYPE SO
(8.1)<9.2>/P0
(7.8)<8.8>/P0
∗R103
150:FD200 4 ∗R107
180:FD100:TYPE SO 22:FD200
CSUB
VSHT
E 47:FD100:TYPE SO
GND
VDD
D101
H2
H1
RG
VL
MA111-(K8).S0
5 ∗R108
220k:FD200
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 1M:FD100:TYPE SO
R104
∗ R1.5/P0 R14.9/P0
R-7.5/P0
R1.5/P0
FD100: FD200
R107
R105 ∗ TYPE SO
∗
R13.3/P0 C113
1u 0.1u
C101 ∗ C107
C111
0.1u
R103 R108
0.1u
∗
C106 C108
0.1u 2200p
F FB101 R106
0.1u
2.2k:FD200
6.8k:FD100:
TYPE SO
C103
C109
C102 (8.1)<9.2>/P0
3.3u 10u R102
16V 100k 0
35V C105
05 0.01u Q101
UN9213J-(K8).SO
SWITCH

with a CCD imager.
4-9 4-10 CD-390

PK-61 (MODE SWITCH, VIDEO OUT) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-47 for PK-61 printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
SIGNAL PATH
PK-61 BOARD (1/3) D_3.2V
2
PK-61 BOARD (2/3)
Note:Resistor is mounted to the location
where FB791 is printed.
VIDEO SIGNAL
A MODE SWITCH,A/V OUT
R782 J781 CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA
(LK BLOCK,JACK BLOCK) 1k
FB789
VIDEO OUT
XX MARK:NO MOUNT FB788 REC

NO MARK:REC/PB MODE D786
VDR782
MA8082-(K8).S0
30p PB
CN701 45P LND701 FB791

0
B AV_JACK_IN
VIDEO_GND
45
44
DUMMY VDR783
1000p
(Note) D785
XX
VIDEO_OUT 43 IC702 LND783
FLAME_GND
VIDEO_GND 42 SHOCK DETECT
SE701 IC702 TA6009FN(EL)
BL_UNREG 41 BL_UNREG LND784
R704 XX
0.4
1 TRIP
10
1
BL_UNREG 40 C705 S1A FLAME_GND
0.4 1 R714
PK-61 BOARD (3/3) 22u AO 11k
9
REG_GND(UNREG_GND) 39 BL_GND 6.3V S1B DISPLAY FOCUS
C710 0.47u 0.5%
BI
8
REG_GND(UNREG_GND) 38 PANEL_4.9V GUARD
R703 0 3 1.2 R718 S711
BO R715 S702 R722 R724
C
7
SHOCK SENS 37 OUT 120k 2700 4700 39k
VCC 1.2
6
D_3.2V 36 GND
L702 3.1 S701
C706 C711
PANEL_4.9V 35 47uH 0.22u 120p MENU
R716
A_4.9V 34 1800 1
UP RIGHT
PANEL_13.2V 33 PANEL_13.2V
PANEL_3.2V PANEL_3.2V
3 SET S709
32 SET S
LCD BACKLIGHT
PK-61 BOARD (2/3)
PANEL_3.2V 31 ON OFF
REG_GND 30 REG_GND
LEFT DOWN
D REG_GND 29
TLGU1002(TPX1,SONY)
TLYU1002(TPX1,SONY)
R710
(POWER LED(GREEN))
HDO 28
(FLASH LED(AMBER))
R705 R713 270
PANEL_V 27 680 680 R719 R717
2700 1800
D701
D703
REG_GND 26 FLASH PROGRAM AE
FC-89 BOARD PANEL_Y 25 PANEL_Y D702

5 TLYU1002(TPX1,SONY) R721 S705 R723 S707 R725
CN801 PANEL_B-Y 24 PANEL_B-Y 4700 6800 33k
PK-61 BOARD (2/3) (CHARGE LED(AMBER))
THROUGH THE
PANEL_R-Y 23 PANEL_R-Y
FP-466 FLEXIBLE
(SEE PAGE 4-28) REG_GND 22
VDR851
E EVER_3.2V 21
1000p
KEY_AD2 20 LND855
KEY_AD1 19 STATIC_GND
S703
DISK/XMS 18 LND856
POWER
ON/OFF(CHG)
MOVE/XSTILL 17 FLAME_GND
XCAM/PB_SW 16
XPWR_SW 15
S712 PLAY/STILL/MOVIE
XSTROBE_LED 14 VDR781
MS/FD S708 S710 XX LND781
(PLAY) (MOVIE)
F XPOWER_LED 13
FLAME_GND
XBATT_CHG_LED 12
XCS_LCD_D/A 11 XCS_PANEL_D/A LND782
HI_SO
6
HI_SO 10 FLAME_GND
PK-61 BOARD
XHI_SCK 9 XHI_SCK (2/3)
R726
REG_GND 8 MAKER_RECOG CN702 2P 10k
BUZZER 7 2 SP + BZ901
BUZZER
BATT 6 1 SP -
R727
MAKER_RECOG 5 33
1/10W
G HSY 4 HSY
BT701
PANEL_COM 3 PSIG 4 (LITHIUM BATTERY)
VG 2 VG PK-61 BOARD (2/3)
REG_GND 1 PANEL_V
05 HDO
PK-61 (1/3) 4-31 4-32

PK-61 (LCD DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-47 for PK-61 printed wiring board. • See page 4-56, 57 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
PK-61 BOARD (2/3)

A LCD DRIVE,TIMING GENERATOR(RGB.TG BLOCK)
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
L903
PANEL_3.2V
47uH
IC903
L902 VREF AMP,VCO
100uH IC903
NJM062V(TE2)
C907
22u 7.1
VCC+
B
8
6.3V OUT1 R947 R951 D904
13.6 1SV290(TPL3)
PANEL_13.2V R945 470k 10k
R914 R916 R920 R923 39k OUT2
3 L901
7
10uH XX XX 82k 18k IN1- 3.3
R937 R949
PK-61 BOARD 10k 7.1 C924
R984 IN2- 47k R956 C928
6
(1/3) 0.01u
7.6
XX Q904 IN1+ 33k 0.001u
13.6 1.9
0.5% R927 R982 XP4601-TXE R953 L904
47k R946 IN2+ 10k 6.8uH
5
10k PSIG DRIVE 4 6
C901 C918 XX VCC-
C902 C919 1.9
R922
3.3u
4700
0.1u 7 10u
0
5 2
0
20V 6.3V XX
C925
R957 C927
4.7u
C923 R948 R950
7.6 0.1u C926 1k 56p
R928 27k
R910
68k
R913
7 PSIG 3300p
22k 3 1
13.6 6 4
C 7 C921
6.4
REG_GND 7 0.1u R987
2 5
R955 0
BRT_R
BRT_B
33k
PSIGG
R915 R917 R921 R924 R985 C935 VREF VCO

XX XX 56k 47k XX R952 R954 R958 R961
0.1u Q903 XX 0 0
0.5% 1 3 XX
XP4601-TXE
PSIG DRIVE
B_LIM
6.4 C922 P_XVD
PRG
FRP
SBLK
R930
10k 0.1u
C903
0.1u
1.2
1.4
1.4
2.2
1.3
1.5
1.1
3.1
2 0 7 13.6
C936
9 8
3.1
1.5
3.1
1.5
36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 2.2u 3.1 3 0 0 1.5 0
D
PRG/N.C
GAMMA2
GAMMA1
WHITE.LIMIT
FRP
RGBBLK
BLACK.LIMIT
VCC2
VREF/AVE_DET
PSIGGRAY
SUB.BRT.R
SUB.BRT.B
BRT 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
R905 7 5
6
HPOS1
HPOS0
XVD
SLSH2
RPD
GND
TEST
SLSH1
CKO/TEST
CKII
TEST/CKO
SLSH0
4700 C937
2.2u
R902 CN902 24P
27k
R911
100k 7 7
C938
2.2u
R931
100 VB 10 24 TESTL
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
B.OUT VCOM
PSIG.OUT C912 2.2u
TEST 0 7 23 COM
B.DC.DET R932 P_XHD 2.8 0
XTEST/N.C
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1.3 7 100 VG R941 22 VST
G.OUT XX 3.1 XHD VST/STH
BRIGHT 1.5
CONT C904 0.1u 2.2 7 C913 2.2u 21 VCK
G.DC.DET R933 3.1 HPOS2 VCK/XSTH
CONTRAST 2.8
E C905
R962 R963 XX
XX 0
PSIG.DET/N.C
IC901 4 ROUT
7
C914 2.2u
100
R939
VR R942
XX 3.1 XWIDE EN/CKH1
3.1
20 EN
1.6 7
HPOS3 DWN/CHK2 19 DWN
XX 220k D907 XX
R964
1.6
SUB.CONT.B
IC901
LCD DRIVE R.DC.DET
GND2 13.6
R943
0
NTSC 3.1
0 NT/PAL
IC904 TESTI/XSTV
3.1
18 VDD
XX R978 XX SUB.CONT.R AN12511A-BB R938 C915 Q905 LCD TIMING GENERATOR C933
2.9 HPOS4 VDD C931 1u 17 VSS
GND1 47k XX XP4601-TXE 3.1 XX
R906 XX VCC1 IC904
SHA 0 1.3 COM DRIVE VDD TEST/STV 16 VDDG
SYNC.OUT/RGB AMP R999 7.2 6 C920 V_REV 3.1 CXD3510R-T4 0.2 R974 C929 D906 RD3.3UM-T1B
XX SHA/N.C XX 4 R944
SHB R907 0 2.9 7.2 150k 15 VSSG
SHB/N.C 1 SYNC.IN/XDELAY OFF 5 2
0.1u 100k
XHDO 0.3 VREV WIDE/CKV2
0
0.33u
LCD901
AGC.LEVEL/Rch DL ADJ
SHG R908 XX 0 3 R998 14 CS

HDO HST/CKV1 COLOR
AGC.OUT/Gch DL ADJ
EXT.BGP XX 6.7 H_REV 3.1

SHG/N.C
2 LCD
AGC.FL/Bch DL ADJ
SHR R909 XX 0 3 6.7 VCOM 13 WIDE

SYNC.SEP 1 HREV NC/XENB MONITOR
R936 COMTST 0
SHR/N.C
F
REG.OUT/XRGB
C916 R940 C917 D903 12 HST

39k COMTST NC/ENB
H.FILTER.OUT
XX 22k 4.7u XX 3.1

H.FILTER.IN
16V XCLR NC/XPCG 11 REF

R/R-Y/CR
B/B-Y/CB
PICTURE
COLOR
10 SDUT
XRGB
HCK1/XCSV
R935
11
RGT/XCSH
HCK2/PCG
G/Y
XX 9 CRext
XCLP
SBLK
8 HCK2
GND
SHR
SHG
PRG
SHB
SHA
FRP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
7 HCK1
0.3 2 2.9 R965 PSIG
2.9
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.5
1.6
1.5
1.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 0 6 PSIG
3 XHDO VG
5 G
0.5
3.1
0.5
0.5
3.1
1.5
3.1
1.5
R988 3 0 1.5
0 P_XVD VR
G P_XHD VB
4 R
XCLP
R918 R991 R993 R995 R997

C934 1u
XX XX 3 B
XX XX XX
COLOR
2 RGT
COM
R919 R992 R994 R996 R929
XCLP
10k XX XX XX XX 1 TESTR
SHR
SHG
SHB
SHA
R975 R977
SBLK
PRG
FRP
470k 56k 1.6
1
R976
33k
H IC902
EVR(D/A CONVERTER) Q908
IC902 2SA1832F-Y/GR(TPL3)
MB40D001PFV-G-BND-ER HSY REF.VOLTAGE GEN
R986 C908
0 0.01u BRT 1.5 VSS
PANEL_V 4
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1
PANEL_Y BRIGHT HDO

COLOR 2 VDDA 2.9 PK-61 BOARD (1/3)
5 R989
2
C909 COLOR
0 0.01u BRT_R 1.4 3.2 EN PSIG
PANEL_R-Y EN
3
PK-61 BOARD (1/3) BRT_R

BRT_B 2.2 SO VG
4
PANEL_B-Y BRT_B
CONT 2.3 SI 2.6 SI
I
5
R990 C910
0 CONTRAST
0.01u B_LIM 1.1 SCK 2.8 SCK
6
B.LIMIT
VREF 1.3 COMTST 0 COMTST
7
P_GRAY
VCO 1.3 NTSC 3.1 NTSC
8
VCO
COM 1.1 V_REV 3.1 V_REV
7
9
COM
2.1 H_REV 3.1 H_REV
12 11 10
PK-61 BOARD (3/3) BL_LEV

BL_LEV
PSIGG 1.1 VCC 3.1
BRT_TST
TEST 0 VDD 2.9 SIGNAL PATH
P_MUTE
VIDEO SIGNAL
2
J PK-61 BOARD (1/3) D_3.2V CHROMA Y
C932 0.1u
SCK
XHI_SCK REC
6 EN
XCS_PANEL_D/A
PK-61 BOARD (1/3)
SI R925
05
HI_SO
15k PB
MAKER_RECOG
4-33 4-34 PK-61 (2/3)

PK-61 (BACK LIGHT DRIVE) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-47 for PK-61 printed wiring board. • See page 4-57 for waveform.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
PK-61 BOARD (3/3)

A BACK LIGHT DRIVE(BL BLOCK)
XX MARK:NO MOUNT Q856
FP102-TL
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE Q854
SWITCHING L852 L853 R867
T851
L851 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO 3 22uH 82uH
4 XX
4.7uH SWITCHING 8.2 2 5
BL_UNREG 5
7.7 1 R868
R857 1800 1
22k 8.2 1/10W
ND801
7.9 2 6 BACK
LIGHT
B C852
22u
16V C853
R856
560 7.7 C864
0.015u
3
C866
12p
CN851 10P
0.22u 3kV
5.1 5.1
1 C856
18p
R858
560
C859
27p -0.6
2 1 4 10 10 BL_HIGH
PK-61 BOARD (1/3) 3 5 9 N.C.

C861 C862
10u XX -0.6 8 N.C.
Q860 4
CPH5504-TL-E 7 N.C.
INVERTER DRIVE
BL_GND 6 N.C.
5 N.C.
D852
C Q852
UN9112J-(K8).SO XX
Q861
UN9112J-(K8).SO
R873
4 N.C.
SWITCH LED SWITCH 3 BL_LOW
4.9 4.9 120
PANEL_4.9V 2 LED
R860
R855 10k C860 1 LED_GND
120k 0.5% XX
R876 0.5%
68k 0 D901
(LED)
LND851
SHIELD_GND C858 R859
4.9
1.2
12 4.3 1
0.01u 4700
R864 R869
D Q851 1 2 3 4
47k 100k
UN9214J- R861
OUT
(K8).SO 1800
VCC
IC851 C857
FB
IN
SWITCH 0 0.5%
0.022u
TL5001CDR
2.1 Q857-859
DC/DC CONTROL
BL LEVEL
C851
0.01u
Q858
IC851
2SD2216J-
QR(K8).SO
IC852
GND
DTC
SCP
RT
Q857 1
E 2SD2216J-
QR(K8).SO 1
1
CURRENT DETECT
D853
4.9 MA111-(K8).S0
8 7 6 5 1.7
3
Q853
0.9
2.4
0 UN9213J-(K8).SO
2
0.7
PROTECT SWITCH 0.4 0.4 4.9 0.3
R871 C865 R872
1
0 22k 0.1u 470
0.1
2.8 R862 R865 R866 IC852
3300 4700 1500 Q859 NJM2406F-TE2
0.5% UN9213J-(K8).SO CURRENT DETECT
R853 R854 C854 C855 Q855 R863 C863 R870

F 7
6800
0.5%
27k
0.5%
2.2u
6.3V
2.2u UN9213J-(K8).SO
SWITCH
1500 0.1u 6800
05
The components identified by mark 0 or dotted Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont
line with mark 0 are critical for safety. critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que
Replace only with part number specified. par une piéce portant le numéro spécifié.
PK-61 (3/3) 4-35 4-36

FU-159 (DC IN) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-51 for FU-159 printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A CONTROL SWITCH
BLOCK
S001
(SHUTTER)
RV001
1 2
CN005 ZOOM
6P
3 4 W T
B
FU-159 BOARD 1
3
XRS_ON1
XRS_ON2
UNREG_GND
DC IN 4 D_3.2V
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
5 ZOOM_SW_AD
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE 6 UNREG_GND
C
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK is replaced as a block,
Q002,003,005 CN003
CHARGE CONTROL 9P so that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted.
C002 9 BATT_SIG
XX FB004
J001 CN001 XX 8 BATT/XEXT
DC IN 3P
7 FAST_CHARGE_ON
ACV_UNREG 1 FC-89 BOARD (9/10)
LF001 R020 6 INIT_CHARGE_ON
ACV_GND 2 R004 CN002
10 1k
1/8W 5 DC_PACK_SW THROUGH THE
BATT/XEXT 3
D FB001 C003
XX
FB005
XX
8.3
8.3
4
3
D_3.2V
ZOOM_SW_AD
FU-056 HARNESS
(SEE PAGE 4-27)
R001
1k Q001 2 XRS_ON2
SI4963DY-T1
R009 Q002
SWITCH 1 XRS_ON1
-1.1
XX R008 2SB1122-
LND001 2 G
(Note) ST-TD
7.8 8.3
STATIC_GND R002 R019
470k 8 S R005
8 6800 47k
CN004
LND002 1 7 D
5 12P
STATIC_GND 3 8.3
6 D 1 REG_GND
VDR002 Q003
XX UN9213J- 0
BT901 0
E BATTERY
TERMINAL VDR001
S
G
4
(K8).SO 2 REG_GND
VDR003 3 REG_GND
CN002 XX XX F004
4P D001 7.8 1.4A/32V 4 REG_GND
XX
BATT_UNREG 1 5 BATT_UNREG FC-89 BOARD (10/10)
FB002 D002
S BATT_SIG 2 1SS357-TPH3
F003
1.4A/32V 6 UNREG4 CN001
THROUGH THE
BATT_GND 3 7 UNREG4
FU-055 HARNESS
F002
DC_PACK_SW 4 1.4A/32V 8 UNREG3 (SEE PAGE 4-29)
FB003 C001 0.022u 0
9 UNREG3
R006
1M 2.8 F001
F R021
1.4A/32V 10 UNREG2
0 11 UNREG2
12 UNREG1
Q004 Q005
Note:Ferrite bead is mounted to SSM3K03FE(TPL3) F005
05 the location where R008 is printed. SSM3K03FE(TPL3) 1.4A/32V
SWITCH
4-37 4-38 FU-159

4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS
CD-379 (CCD IMAGER) PRINTED WIRING BOARD
• For Printed Wiring Board.

• :Uses unleaded solder.
• CD-379 board is six-layer print board. However, the patterns
of layers 2 to 5 have not been included in the diagram.
• There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model
is printed on this diagram.
• See page 4-58 for printed parts location.
• Chip transistor
B E
4 5
3 1
CD-379 4-39 4-40


• Chip transistor
B E
1 2
3
4
5
4-41 4-42 CD-390

PK-61 (MODE SWITCH, VIDEO OUT, LCD DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT DRIVE) PRINTED WIRING BOARD
BT701
• For Printed Wiring Board. BATTERY,
• :Uses unleaded solder. LITHIUM SECONDARY
• PK-61 board is six-layer print board. However, the patterns of
layers 2 to 5 have not been included in the diagram.
• Chip transistor
C 6 5 4 2 1
B E 1 2 3 3 4 5
1
5
2
4
POWER 3
ON/OFF
(CHG)
5 1
12
6 10
PK-61 4-47 4-48

(CHARGE)
(POWER)
2 1
3 4 5
10
9 8
11
3 2 1
4 7
5
6
MS/FD
LCD BACKLIGHT
PLAY/STILL/MOVIE
(PLAY) (MOVIE)
MENU
(FLASH)
FOCUS PROGRAM AE DISPLAY

VIDEO OUT
FLASH
4-49 4-50 PK-61

FU-159 (DC IN) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

• FU-159 board is six-layer print board. However, the patterns
• Chip transistor
C
B E
1 3 1 4
FU-159 4-51 4-52

4-4. WAVEFORMS
1 1 7.5 Vp-p
(FD200)
2.9 Vp-p
8.0 Vp-p
(FD100:
12.2 MHz TYPE SO)
100 µsec (FD200)
130 µsec (FD100:TYPE SO)
IC201 2 REC IC101 1, 2, 3 REC
2 2 7.5 Vp-p
(FD200)
480 mVp-p 8.0 Vp-p
(FD100:
TYPE SO)
130 µsec 100 µsec (FD200)
IC201 4 REC IC101 4, 5, 6 REC
3 3 910 mVp-p
(FD200)
3.2 Vp-p 1.2 Vp-p
(FD100:
TYPE SO)
10.7 MHz
100 µsec (FD200)
IC201 7, 8 REC IC101 8 REC
4 4
7.8 Vp-p 2.9 Vp-p
18.4 MHz (FD200)

130 µsec 12.2 MHz (FD100:TYPE SO)
IC201 q;, qs, qd REC IC101 qf REC
5 5 4.0 Vp-p
(FD200)
7.8 Vp-p 3.3 Vp-p
(FD100:
TYPE SO)
17.1 MHz (FD200)
IC201 qa, qf, qg REC IC101 qg, qh REC
4-53
PK-61 BOARD (1/2)
1 6
410 mVp-p 7.9 Vp-p
H 2H
IC901 8 REC/PB IC901 wf REC/PB
2 7
160 mVp-p 5.0 Vp-p
H 2H
IC901 9 REC/PB IC901 ej REC/PB
3 8
180 mVp-p 3.3 Vp-p
11.7MHz
H
IC901 q; REC/PB IC904 wh REC/PB
4 9
7.9 Vp-p 3.2 Vp-p
2H V
IC901 w; REC/PB IC904 ef REC/PB
5 q;
7.9 Vp-p 3.1 Vp-p
2H H
IC901 ws REC/PB IC904 ej REC/PB
4-56
PK-61 BOARD (2/2)
qa
3.3 Vp-p
H
IC904 rg REC/PB
qs
6.2 Vp-p
496 kHz
IC851 1 REC/PB
4-57
4-5. PARTS LOCATION
no mark : SIDE A
* mark : SIDE B
C201 A-2 C101 A-1

C202 B-2 C102 B-2
C203 A-1 C103 B-1
C204 A-1 C105 B-1
C206 A-2 C106 A-1
C207 B-2 C107 B-1
C208 B-1 C108 A-2
C209 B-2 C109 B-2
C210 B-2 C110 B-2
C211 B-2 C111 B-2
C212 B-2 C112 A-2
C214 A-2 C113 B-2
CN201 C-2 CN101 C-2
D201 B-2 D101 B-2
FB201 A-2 FB101 C-1

FB202 A-1
L101 B-2
L201 A-1
Q101 B-1
Q201 B-2 Q102 A-2
Q202 A-2
R102 B-1
R202 A-2 R103 B-1
R203 B-2 R104 B-1
R204 C-2 R105 B-1
R205 B-1 R106 B-2
R206 B-1 R107 A-2
R207 B-2 R108 A-2
R208 B-2 R109 A-2
R209 A-2 R110 B-2
R210 A-2
* TH101 B-2
* TH201 B-2
4-58
PK-61 BOARD
BT701 A-3 L702 G-5 * R928 D-4

L851 A-4 * R930 D-5
C705 G-6 L852 B-5 * R931 D-4
C706 G-6 L853 B-6 * R932 D-4
C710 G-6 * L901 D-3 * R933 D-4
C711 G-6 * L902 D-4 R936 C-5
* C851 B-5 L903 A-3 * R937 D-5
C852 A-5 * L904 B-2 * R938 C-4
C853 B-4 * R939 C-4
* C854 B-5 Q851 B-4 * R940 C-4
* C855 B-4 Q852 C-5 * R943 C-3
C856 B-4 * Q853 B-5 * R944 C-3
* C857 B-5 Q854 B-4 R945 B-3
* C858 B-5 * Q855 B-5 R947 B-2
C859 B-4 Q856 B-5 R948 B-2
* C861 A-5 Q857 B-5 R949 B-2
* C863 C-5 Q858 B-5 R950 B-2
* C864 B-6 Q859 B-5 * R951 B-3
C865 C-5 * Q860 B-6 * R953 B-3
C866 D-6 Q861 C-5 * R955 B-3
* C901 D-3 * Q903 D-5 * R956 B-2
* C902 D-3 * Q904 D-5 * R957 B-2
* C903 D-3 * Q905 C-5 * R958 B-2
* C904 D-3 * Q908 D-2 * R961 B-2
* C907 D-4 * R965 C-2
C908 C-4 R703 G-6 R974 D-2
C909 C-4 * R705 F-6 R975 D-2
C910 C-4 * R710 A-1 * R976 D-2
* C912 D-5 * R713 A-1 R977 D-2
* C913 D-5 R714 F-6 * R982 D-4
* C914 D-5 R715 G-6 R986 C-4
* C917 C-4 * R716 F-2 R987 B-3
C918 B-3 * R717 F-2 R988 C-4
* C920 C-3 * R718 G-3 R989 C-4
C921 A-2 * R719 F-2 R990 C-4
* C922 B-3 * R721 G-4
C923 A-3 * R722 G-5 * S701 G-2
* C924 B-3 * R723 G-4 * S702 G-3
* C925 B-3 * R724 G-5 S703 C-1
* C926 B-3 * R725 E-6 * S705 G-6
* C927 B-2 * R726 F-4 * S707 G-4
* C928 B-2 * R727 A-3 * S708 F-5
C929 D-2 R782 F-7 * S709 F-6
C931 D-2 * R853 C-4 * S710 F-2
C932 C-4 * R854 B-4 * S711 G-5
* C934 C-4 * R855 B-5 * S712 F-1
* C935 D-4 R856 B-4
* C936 D-5 R857 B-4 SE701 G-6
* C937 D-5 R858 B-4
* C938 D-5 * R859 B-5 T851 C-6
R860 B-5
CN701 D-4 * R861 B-5 * VDR782 F-7
CN702 D-1 * R862 B-5 * VDR783 F-7
CN851 E-6 R863 B-5 VDR851 A-2
CN902 D-2 R864 B-5
R865 B-5
* D701 G-6 R866 B-5
* D702 A-1 * R868 B-6
* D703 A-1 R869 C-5
* D786 F-7 * R870 C-5
D853 C-5 R871 C-5
* D904 B-2 R872 C-5
D906 D-2 R873 C-5
R876 C-5
FB788 G-7 * R902 D-3
FB789 G-6 * R905 D-3
* FB791 F-7 * R910 D-3
* R911 D-3
IC702 G-6 * R913 D-3
IC851 B-5 * R919 C-4
IC852 C-5 * R920 D-3
* IC901 D-4 * R921 D-3
IC902 B-4 * R922 D-3
IC903 B-3 * R923 D-3
* IC904 C-2 * R924 D-3
R925 C-3
* J781 G-7 * R927 D-4
4-59
FU-159 BOARD
C001 E-2
CN001 E-1
CN002 E-2
CN003 A-3
CN004 A-2
CN005 C-2
* D002 B-2
F001 A-2
F002 A-2
F003 A-2
F004 A-2
F005 A-2
* FB002 E-2
* FB003 E-2
LF001 D-1
Q001 D-2
* Q002 B-2
* Q003 C-2
Q004 D-2
* Q005 C-2
R001 E-2
R002 E-2
* R004 B-2
* R005 C-2
R006 C-2
* R008 E-1
* R019 C-2
* R020 B-2
* R021 C-2
4-60
4-60E
SECTION 5
ADJUSTMENTS
5-1
1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards

When replacing main parts and boards, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table.
Replaced parts
Block Mounted parts Board
replacement replacement replacement
(CCD imager) (FD100: TYPE SO/FD200)

(CCD imager) (FD100: TYPE PA)
(LCD Timing generator)

(S/H, AGC, A/D)
(CAMERA DSP)
(Back light unit)
(VIDEO AMP)
(LCD panel)
(LCD drive)
EEPROM
EEPROM
(EVR)
(EVR)
(COMPLETE)
(COMPLETE)
Adjustment section Adjustment
LCD901
ND801
RadarW
IC201
IC101
IC102
IC186
IC301
IC901
IC901
IC904
IC902
IC508
IC406
Control switch block
CD-379 board
CD-390 board
PK-61 board
PK-61 board
PK-61 board
PK-61 board
FC-89 board
FC-89 board
FC-89 board
FC-89 board
FC-89 board
FC-89 board
FC-89 board
Lens device
LCD block
LCD block
Supporting
Flash unit
FDD unit
Initialization of Initialization of D page data z z

7, 9, B, D, E, F, page data Initialization of 7, 9, B, E, F page data z z
Video Video sync level adj. z z z z z
Video burst level adj. z z z z z
Camera Hall adj. z z z z z z z
Flange back adj. z z z z z z
F No. compensation z z z z z z
Mechanical shutter adj. z z z z z z
Light value adj. z z z z z z z
Mixed color cancel adj. z z z z z z z
Auto white balance standard data input z z z z z z z
Auto white balance adj. z z z z z z z
Color reproduction adj. z z z z z z z
CCD (white and black) defect
z z z z z
compensation
Strobe white balance adj. z z z z z z z z
CCD linearity check z z z
LCD LCD initial data input z z z
VCO adj. z z z z z
Black limit adj. z z z z z
Bright adj. z z z z z
Contrast adj. z z z z z
VG center adj. z z z z z
P-SIG level adj. z z z z z
V-COM adj. z z z z z z
White balance adj. z z z z z z z
System control Battery down adj. z z z
Zoom center adj. z z z
Alignment check (FDD unit) z z
Table 5-1-1
5-2
5-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENTS

1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT
1-1-1. List of service tools
• Oscilloscope • Regulated power supply • AC power adaptor (AC-L10A)
• Digital voltmeter • Vectorscope • Color monitor
Ref. No. Name Parts Code Usage
J-1 Filter for color temperature correction (C14) J-6080-058-A Auto white balance adjustment/check
White balance adjustment/check
J-2 Pattern box PTB-450 J-6082-200-A
J-3 Color bar chart for pattern box J-6020-250-A
J-4 Siemens star J-6080-875-A For checking the flange back
J-5 Adjusting remote commander (RM-95 upgraded) (Note2) J-6082-053-B
J-6 Clear chart for pattern box J-6080-621-A
J-7 CPC-12 jig J-6082-436-A For connecting the adjustment remote commander
For adjusting the LCD block
J-8 Alignment disk (Two disks as a pair) TFD2-1(+) 8-967-990-01 Dynamic inspection disk with LCD adjustment signal
TFD2-2(–) 8-967-990-11
J-9 Cleaning disk (OR-D29WA) 8-960-009-39 FDD head cleaning (Note 1)
Cleaning disk Available on market
J-10 Mini pattern box J-6082-353-B For adjusting the flange back
J-11 Power supply cord (DC) J-6082-223-A For the battery down adjustment
Note 1: Usage and operating note Note 2: If the microprocessor IC in the adjusting remote
One or two seconds of momentary use of cleaning disk is commander is not the new microprocessor (UPD7503G-
sufficient such that FD is accessed momentarily by system C56-12), the pages cannot be switched.
control when the main power is turned on. After cleaning, In this case, replace with the new microprocessor (8-759-
insert a FD for playback. When cleaning is insufficient, 148-35).
use a cleaning disk again.
Caution: Avoid using a cleaning disk excessively. Head
can be broken.
J-1 J-2 J-3 J-4 J-5
J-6 J-7 J-8 J-9 J-10
J-11
Fig. 5-1-1
5-3
1-1-2. Preparations
Note 1: For details of how remove the cabinet and boards, refer
to “2. DISASSEMBLY”. Pattern box
Note 2: When performing only the adjustments, the lens block
and boards need not be disassemble.
1) Connect the equipment for adjustments according to Fig. 5-1-

6. Front side of the lens
2) Connect the Adjusting remote commander to FC-89 board L
CN803 via CPC-12 jig (J-6082-436-A). (See Fig. 5-1-3)
Note 3: Setting the “Forced CAMERA mode power ON” Mode

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 01, and press
the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote com-
mander. L=About 30cm
The Above procedure will enable the camera power
to be turned on. After completing adjustments, be
sure to exit the “Forced CAMERA mode power ON
Mode”. Fig. 5-1-2
Note 4: Exiting the “Forced CAMERA mode power ON Mode”

mander.
1-1-3. Discharging of the Flashlight Power Supply

The capacitor which is used as power supply of flashlight is charged
with 200 V to 300 V voltage. Discharge this voltage before start-
ing adjustments in order to protect service engineers from electric
shock during adjustment.
Discharge procedure
1. Press the FLASH button (PK-61 board S705) and turn off the
FLASH LED (PK-61 board D701).
2. Fabricate the discharging jig as shown in Fig. 5-1-5 locally by
yourself. Connect the discharging jig to the positive (+) and
negative (–) terminal of the flash voltage charge capacitor. Al-
low ten seconds to discharge the voltage.
CPC cover
R: 1 kΩ/1 W 22
(Part code: 1
1-215-869-11) CPC-12 jig
FC-89 board
CN803 (J-6082-436-A)
Fig. 5-1-3
Capacitor
1 kΩ/1 W
Fig. 5-1-5
Fig. 5-1-4
5-4
AC power adaptor
Need not connected
AC IN
FU-159 BOARD
CN001
CN002
CN005
CN003
CN004
FDD UNIT
FLASH
UNIT
ZOOM SHUTTER
CN001
CN002
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
CN301
Adjusting Remote
CN701
Commander
LENS UNIT CN702

CN703
FC-89 BOARD
CD-379/390
CN101
BOARD
CN184 CN682
CN801 CN803
CN101: FD100: TYPE SO/FD200

CN201: FD100: TYPE PA
Terminated VIDEO OUT

75 Ω Need not
jack
connected
CN851 CN902
BUZZER
Video CN702
Vectorscope Color monitor
CPC-12 jig
CN701 (J-6082-436-A)
PK-61 BOARD
LCD PANEL
Note: Connect the GND terminal to Floppy disk drive

unit frame when check the RF signals waveform. BACK LIGHT
Fig. 5-1-6
5-5
1-1-4. Precautions
1. Setting the Switch
Unless otherwise specified, set the switches as follows and per-
form adjustments.
1. PLAY/STILL/MOVIE switch
(PK-61 board S708, S710) .................................... STILL
2. PROGRAM AE button (PK-61 board S707)
...................................... AUTO (No mark indicated on LCD)
3. DISPLAY button (PK-61 board S702) .................. OSD OFF
4. P.EFFECT (Menu display) .................................... OFF
5. DEMO (Menu display) .......................................... OFF
2. Order of Adjustments
Basically carry out adjustments in the order given.
Color bar chart (Color bar standard picture frame)
Electronic beam scanning frame

H
Yellow
Magenta
White
Cyan
Green
C C=D D
Red
Blue
Magenta
Yellow
Green
White
Cyan
Blue
Red
Monitor TV or
LCD picture frame
V
A B A=B B A
Fig. b (Picture on monitor TV or LCD)
Enlargement
Difference in level
Adjust the camera zoom and direction to

B A obtain the output waveform shown in Fig a
and the monitor TV display shown in Fig. b.
Fig. 5-1-7
3. Subjects
1) Color bar chart (Standard picture frame).
When performing adjustments using the color bar chart, ad-
just the picture frame as shown in Fig. 5-1-7. (Standard pic-
ture frame)
2) Clear chart (Standard picture frame)
Remove the color bar chart from the pattern box and insert a White
clear chart in its place. (Do not perform zoom operations dur- 841 mm
ing this time) Black
3) Chart for flange back adjustment
Join together a piece of white A0 size paper (1189mm × 841
mm) and a piece of black paper to make the chart shown in
Fig. 5-1-8. 1189 mm
Note: Use a non-reflecting and non-glazing vellum paper. The Fig. 5-1-8
size must be A0 or larger and the joint between the white
and black paper must not have any undulations.
5-6
4. Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box

A dark room is required to provide an accurate flash adjustment.
If it is not available, prepare the flash adjustment box as given
below;
1) Provide woody board A, B and C of 15 mm thickness.
woody board A (2) woody board B (2) woody board C (1)
530 mm 500 mm 1000 mm
1026 mm 1026 mm 1000 mm
1030 mm 1000 mm
Fig. 5-1-9
2) Apply black mat paint to one side of woody board A and B.

3) Attach background paper (J-2501-130-A) to woody board C.
4) Assemble so that the black sides and the background paper
side of woody board A, B and C are internal. (Fig 5-1-10)
woody board A
woody board B
woody board A
woody board B
woody board C
Fig. 5-1-10
5-7
1-2. INITIALIZATION OF B, D, E, F, 7, 9 PAGE DATA

1-2-1. Initialization of D Page Data
1. Initializing D Page Data
Note: If the D page data has been initialized, the following
adjustments need to be performed again.
1) Modification of D page data
2) LCD system adjustments
Adjusting page D
Adjusting Address 10 to EF
Initializing Method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 0 01 01
2 2 03 → 00 (FD100), 01 (FD200)
3 2 00 2D
4 2 01 2D Press PAUSE button.
5 2 02 Check the data changes to “01”.
6 2 FF Check the data “01”.
Perform “Modification of D
7 page Data”.
2. Modification of D Page Data

If the D page data has been initialized, change the data of the “Fixed
data-2” address shown in the following table by manual input.
Modifying Method:
1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set
data: 01.
2) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because
they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy
the data built in the same model.
Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the
camcorder may not operate.
3) When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the
adjustment remote commander each time when setting new
data to write the data in the non-volatile memory.
4) Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value.
If not, change the data to the initial value.
Processing after Completing Modification of D Page Data:

1 2 00 29
2 2 01 29 Press PAUSE button.
5-8
3. D Page Table
Note 1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data.
(Refer to “1. Initializing of D Page Data”)
Note 2: Fixed data-2: Modified data.
(Refer to “2. Modification of D Page Data”)
Address Initial value Remark

00 to 0F
10 00 Test mode
11 to 18 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
Fixed data-2 (FD100)
19
Fixed data 1 (Initialized data) (FD200)
1A to 5F Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
60 Fixed data-2
61 Fixed data-2
62 Fixed data-2
63 Fixed data-2
89 80 Zoom center adj.
90 90
91 98
92 A7 Battery down adj.
93 BC
94 C7
99 Fixed data-2
9A Fixed data-2
9B Fixed data-2
9C Fixed data-2
9D to CF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
D0 82 Bright adj.
D1 Fixed data 2
D2 80
White balance adj.
D3 B8
D4 CC Contrast adj.
D5 5E Black limit adj.
D6 80 VG center adj.
D7 78 VCO adj. (NTSC)
D8 60 V-COM adj.
D9 Fixed data 2
DA 64 P-SIG level adj.
DB Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
DC Fixed data 2
DD 70 VCO adj. (PAL)
DE Fixed data-2
DF Fixed data-2
E0 to EF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
5-9
1-2-2. Initialization of B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data 2. Modification of B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data

1. Initializing B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data If the B, E, F, 7, 9 Page data has been initialized, change the data
Note: If the B, E, F, 7, 9 Page data has been initialized, of the “Fixed data-2” address shown in the following tables by
“Modification of B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data” and following manual input.
1) Modification of B, E, F, 7, 9 page data Modifying Method:
2) Video system adjustments 1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set
3) Camera system adjustments data: 01.
Adjusting page B they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy
Adjusting Address 00 to FF the data built in the same model.
Adjusting page E camcorder may not operate.
Adjusting Address 00 to FF 3) When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the
Adjusting page F adjustment remote commander each time when setting new
Adjusting Address 10 to FF
Adjusting page 7 If not, change the data to the initial value.
Processing after Completing Modification of B, E, F, 7, 9 Page
Adjusting page 9
data
Initializing Method: 1 2 00 29
1 0 01 01
3. B Page Table
2 6 00 FF
3 6 01 FF Press PAUSE button. (Refer to “1. Initializing B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data”)
4 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. Note 2: Fixed data-2: Modified data.
Set the following data, and (Refer to “2. Modification of B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data”)
press PAUSE button. Address Initial value Remark
FD100 (Note)
5 6 03 → 15: TYPE PA
17: TYPE SO 75 Fixed data-2
FD200 76 to FF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
16
6 6 00 2D
7 6 01 2D Press PAUSE button. 4. E Page Table
8 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. Note 1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data.
(Refer to “1. Initializing B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data”)
Perform “Modification of B,
9 Note 2: Fixed data-2: Modified data.
E, F, 7, 9 page Data”.
(Refer to “2. Modification of B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data”)
Note: Type of CCD imager is different according to the CD board Address Initial value Remark
in MVC-FD100.
Refer to page 7 to discriminate the type of CCD. 00 to AD Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
(FD100: TYPE PA/FD200)
AE
Fixed data-2 (FD100: TYPE SO)
(Note 3)
AF to FF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
Note 3: Type of CCD imager is different according to the CD

board in MVC-FD100.
5-10
5. F Page Table
Note 1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing of B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data”)
Note 2: Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data”)
Initial value Initial value
Address Remark Address Remark
FD100 FD200 FD100 FD200
10 to 13 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 45 D5 D5
14 14 14 46 FE FE
Color reproduction adj.
15 40 40 47 73 73
16 21 21 48 45 45
17 23 23 49 to 4C Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
18 12 12 4D 28 28
Strobe white balance adj.
19 AC AC 4E 6E 6E
1A 00 00 4F to 58 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
1B 00 00 59 00 00 Auto white balance standard data input
1C 00 00 5A 14 14 Mechanical shutter adj.
1D 00 00 Flange back adj. 5B Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
1E 68 68 5C 63 63
1F 00 00 5D 83 83
20 20 20 5E 03 03
21 20 20 5F E9 E9
22 51 51 60 to 63 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
23 40 40 64 10 10 Strobe white balance adj.
24 0A 0A 65 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
25 00 00 66 61 61 Video burst level adj.
26 FB FC 67, 68 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
27 7D 85 Light value adj. 69 02 02
28 27 36 6A 79 79 Strobe white balance adj.
29 00 00 6B F8 F8
2A 00 00 6C 0B 09
2B 00 00 F No. compensation 6D 14 77
2C 00 00 6E 07 06
2D 00 00 6F 09 81
2E 65 65 70 05 05
Hall adj.
2F 7D 7D 71 15 89
30 to 33 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 72 02 04
34 14 14 73 53 C1
Hall adj.
35 79 79 74 00 00
36, 37 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 75 00 00
Mechanical shutter adj.
38 Fixed data-2 76 01 01
39 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 77 01 01
3A 2F 2F 78 01 01
3B 37 37 79 01 01
Auto white balance standard data input
3C 40 40 7A 00 00
3D D0 D0 7B 27 29
3E Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 7C 3C 2A
3F B5 B5 7D 33 33
Auto white balance adj.
40 43 43 7E 33 33
41 03 03 7F 00 00
42 E9 E9 80 00 00 Auto white balance adj.
43 63 63 81 5A 5A Video sync level adj.
5-11
Initial value
Address Remark
FD100 FD200
87 FF FF Flange back adj.
88, 89 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
8A 00 00
Flange back adj.
8B 20 20
8C to 9F Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
A0 00 00
A1 00 00
Mixed color cancel adj.
A2 00 00
A3 00 00
A4 to A8 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
A9 00 00
AA 00 00
AB to C4 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
Fixed data-2 (FD100: TYPE PA)
C5 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
(FD100: TYPE SO/FD200) (Note 3)
C8 to FF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)

board in MVC-FD100.
5-12
6. 7 Page Table
Note 1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data”)
Note 2: Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modified of B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data”)
Address Initial value Remark Address Initial value Remark

00 to 5F Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 8F FF
60 0F 90 0F
61 FF 91 FF
62 0F 92 0F
63 FF 93 FF
64 0F 94 0F
65 FF 95 FF
66 0F 96 0F
67 FF 97 FF
68 0F 98 0F
69 FF 99 FF
6A 0F 9A 0F
6B FF 9B FF
6C 0F 9C 0F
6D FF 9D FF
6E 0F 9E 0F
6F FF 9F FF
70 0F A0 0F
71 FF A1 FF
72 0F A2 0F
CCD black defect compensation
73 FF A3 FF
74 0F A4 0F
75 FF A5 FF
76 0F A6 0F
CCD white defect compensation
77 FF A7 FF
78 0F A8 0F
79 FF A9 FF
7A 0F AA 0F
7B FF AB FF
7C 0F AC 0F
7D FF AD FF
7E 0F AE 0F
7F FF AF FF
80 0F B0 0F
81 FF B1 FF
82 0F B2 0F
83 FF B3 FF
84 0F B4 0F
85 FF B5 FF
86 0F B6 0F
87 FF B7 FF
88 0F B8 0F
89 FF B9 FF
8A 0F BA 0F
8B FF CCD white defect compensation BB FF
8C 0F BC 0F
8D FF BD FF
8E 0F BE 0F
5-13

BF FF F1 FF
C0 0F F2 0F
C1 FF F3 FF
C2 0F F4 0F
C3 FF F5 FF
C4 0F F6 0F
C5 FF F7 FF
C6 0F F8 0F CCD white defect compensation
C7 FF F9 FF
C8 0F FA 0F
C9 FF FB FF
CA 0F FC 0F
CB FF FD FF
CC 0F FE 0F
CD FF FF FF
CE 0F
CF FF
7. 9 Page Table
D0 0F Note 1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data.
D1 FF (Refer to “1. Initializing the B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data”)
D2 0F Note 2: Fixed data-2: Modified data.
D3 FF
D4 0F
00 to 5C Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
D5 FF
5D Fixed data-2
D6 0F
5E Fixed data-2
D7 FF
5F to FF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
D8 0F
D9 FF
DA 0F
DB FF
DC 0F
DD FF
DE 0F
DF FF
E0 0F
E1 FF
E2 0F
E3 FF
E4 0F
E5 FF
E6 0F
E7 FF
E8 0F
E9 FF
EA 0F
EB FF
EC 0F
ED FF
EE 0F
EF FF
F0 0F
5-14
1-3. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS 2. Video Burst Level Adjustment

1. Video Sync Level Adjustment Adjust the burst level of the composite video signal output.
Adjust the sync level of the composite video signal output.
Mode PLAY
Mode PLAY Signal Arbitrary
Signal Arbitrary Measurement Point Video terminal of VIDEO OUT
Measurement Point Video terminal of VIDEO OUT jack (75 Ω terminated)
jack (75 Ω terminated) Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address 66
Adjustment Address 81 Specified Value A = 286 ± 10 mVp-p (NTSC)
Specified Value A = 286 ± 10 mVp-p (NTSC) A = 300 ± 12 mVp-p (PAL)
A = 300 ± 12 mVp-p (PAL) Note: Perform “Video Sync Level Adjustment” before this ad-
justment.
Adjusting method:
Adjusting method:
1 0 01 01 Order Page Address Data Procedure
2 5 F1 04 1 0 01 01
Change the data and set the 2 5 F1 04
3 F 81 sync level (A) to the specified Change the data and set the
value. 3 F 66 burst level (A) to the
4 F 81 Press PAUSE button specified value.
4 F 66 Press PAUSE button
Processing after Completing Adjustments:
Order Page Address Data Procedure Processing after Completing Adjustments:
1 5 F1 00 Order Page Address Data Procedure
2 0 01 00 1 5 F1 00
2 0 01 00
A
A
H H
Fig. 5-1-11 Fig. 5-1-12
5-15
1-4. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS After completing the camera system adjustments,
Before perform the camera system adjustments, check that the release the data setting:
specified values of “VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS” are sat-
isfied.
Note: For “CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS”, perform in 1 5 F1 00
order of item numbers. 2 6 6C 00
3 B 75 10 Press PAUSE button.
Data setting during camera system adjustments
Perform the following data setting before the camera system ad- 4 D 10 00 Press PAUSE button.
justments. Set the bit value of bit 6 is
It is not necessary to perform the following data setting everytime 5 D 63 “0”, and press PAUSE
when you perform some items of camera system adjustments con- button. (Note 1)
tinuously unless the power is turned off. Only when the power is 6 0 01 00
turned off during this adjustments, perform the data setting again,
then continue the adjustments.
Set up setting:
1) VIDEO OUT of SET UP setting............... NTSC (NTSC mode)
(This adjustment must be performed in NTSC mode, so don't
set the SET UP setting to “PAL”)
Data setting method:

1 0 01 01
2 D 63 Note down the data.
Set the bit value of bit 6 is
3 D 63 “1”, and press PAUSE
button. (Note 1)
4 D 10 81 Press PAUSE button.
Check the data changes to
5 6 C1
“02”.
6 5 F1 FF
7 6 6C 01
8 Wait for 1 second.
9 F 38 B1 Press PAUSE button.
Press PAUSE button.
10 F C5 40 (FD100: TYPE PA only)
(Note 3)
Press PAUSE button.
11 F C6 5A (FD100: TYPE PA only)
(Note 3)
Press PAUSE button.
(Note 3)
Press PAUSE button.
14 E AE F9 (FD100: TYPE SO only)
(Note 3)
15 9 5D 82 Press PAUSE button.
16 9 5E 22 Press PAUSE button.
Note 1: For the bit values, refer to “5-2. SERVICE MODE”,
“2-3. 2. Bit value discrimination”.
Note 2: Repeat the “Data setting method”, if the power was turned
off and on during the “CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUST-
MENTS”.
board in MVC-FD100.
5-16
Picture Frame Setting How to reset the zoom and focus when they deviated:
Mode CAMERA Order Page Address Data Procedure
Subject Color bar chart 1 6 2C 01
(Standard picture frame with the 2 6 90 00
zoom lens at WIDE end)
3 6 91 00
Measurement Point Video terminal of VIDEO OUT
jack (75 Ω terminated) 4 6 92 YL (Note 2)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope and monitor TV 5 6 93 YH (Note 2)
Specified Value A=B, C=D, E=F 6 6 01 79 Press PAUSE button.
Note 1: Displayed data of the page 1 of adjusting remote com- Check the data changes to
7 6 07
mander. “01”.
1:XX:XX 8 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button.
YL data Note 2: The data noted down at step 7 of “Setting method”.
YH data
Check on the oscilloscope
Switch setting
1) FOCUS ............................. MACRO 1. Horizontal period
Setting method: A=B C=D

B C
Shoot the color bar chart
1 A D
with the zoom WIDE end.
Enter the output of VIDEO
OUT to the monitor TV, and
2
move the position as shown
in Fig. 5-1-15.
Horizontal width of one color
(B, C) and that of black (A,
3 D) on the color bar chart
should be same. (See Fig. 5-
1-13)
With vertical width of black
(E, F) set in same, the color
4 bar chart should come to the
center of monitor TV. (See
Fig. 5-1-14)
Check that the color bar on Fig. 5-1-13
5
the monitor TV is focused.
6 0 03 22 2. Vertical period
Note down the YH and YL
7 1
data. (Note 1) E E=F F
Processing after Completing Adjustment:

1 0 03 00 V
Fig. 5-1-14
Check on the monitor TV
Color bar chart picture frame Monitor TV picture frame
Fig. 5-1-15
5-17
1. HALL Adjustment
RadarW
RadarW
Mode CAMERA
Subject Not required
Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 1
(Note 2)
Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 2E, 2F, 34, 35
Specified value 10 to 18 during IRIS OPEN
75 to 7D during IRIS CLOSE
Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”.
If not, turn the power of unit OFF/ON.
Note 2: The right two digits of the page: 1 displayed data of the
adjusting remote commander.
1:00:XX
Displayed data
Adjusting method:
Perform “Data setting during
1 camera system adjustment”.
(Refer to page 5-16)
2 6 94 14
3 6 95 79
Press PAUSE button.
4 6 01 6D
(Note 3)
5 6 02
“01”.
7 0 03 03
Check that the displayed data
9 1 (Note 2) during IRIS OPEN
satisfied the specified value.
11 1 (Note 2) during IRIS CLOSE
Note 3: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page:
F, address: 2E, 2F, 34 and 35.

2 6 94 00
3 6 95 00
4 0 03 00
Release the data setting
5 performed at step 1.
5-18
2. Flange Back Adjustment Adjusting method:

(Using the minipattern box) RadarW
The inner focus lens flange back adjustment is carried out auto-
matically. In whichever case, the focus will be deviated during Perform “Data setting during
auto focusing/manual focusing. 1 camera system adjustment”.
Mode CAMERA
Subject Siemens star chart with ND filter
for minipattern box (Note 1) Press PAUSE button.
3 6 01 27
(Note 4)
Measurement Point Check operation on monitor TV
Measuring Instrument 4 6 02
“01”.
Adjustment Page F Check the data.
Adjustment Address 14 to 25, 87, 8A, 8B 5 F 87 00: Normal
Note 1: Dark Siemens star chart. 01 to FF: Defective
Note 2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. Note 4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page:
If not, turn the power of unit OFF/ON. F, address: 14 to 25, 87, 8A and 8B.
Preparations before adjustments: Processing after Completing Adjustment:

1) The minipattern box is installed as shown in the following fig-
ure.
Note 3: The attachment lenses are not used. 1 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button.
2) Install the minipattern box so that the distance between it and Release the data setting
the front of lens of camera is less than 3 cm. 2 performed at step 1.
3) Make the height of minipattern box and the camera equal. (Refer to page 5-16)
4) Check the output voltage of the regulated power supply is the
Perform “Flange Back
specified voltage ± 0.01 Vdc. 3
Check”.
5) Check that the center of Siemens star chart meets the center of
shot image screen with the zoom lens at TELE end and WIDE
end respectively.
Specified voltage: The specified voltage varies according to the

minipattern box, so adjustment the power sup-
ply output voltage to the specified voltage writ-
ten on the sheet which is supplied with the mini-
pattern box.
Below 3 cm
Minipattern box
Camera
Camera
table
Regulated power supply

Output voltage : Specified voltage ± 0.01 Vdc
Output current : more than 3.5 A
Red (+)
Black (–)
Yellow (SENS +)
White (SENS –) Need not connected

Black (GND)
Fig. 5-1-16
5-19
RadarW 3-2. Flange Back Adjustment (2)

3. Flange Back Adjustment RadarW Perform this adjustment after performing “Flange Back Adjust-
(Using the flange back adjustment chart and ment (1)”.
Subject More than 500 m Away)
The inner focus lens flange back adjustment is carried out auto- Mode CAMERA
matically. In whichever case, the focus will be deviated during Subject Subject more than 500 m away
auto focusing/manual focusing. (Subject with clear contrast such
as buildings, etc.)
3-1. Flange Back Adjustment (1)
Mode CAMERA Measuring Instrument
Subject Flange back adjustment chart Adjustment Page F
(2.0 m from the front of lens)
(Luminance: 300 to 400 lux) Adjustment Address 14 to 25, 87, 8A, 8B

Adjusting method:
Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page F
Set the zoom lens to the
Adjustment Address 14 to 25, 87, 8A, 8B
TELE end and expose a
Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. 1
subject that is more than 500
If not, turn the power of unit OFF/ON. m away. (Note 1)
Preparations before adjustments:
1) Place the Flange back adjustment chart 2.0 m from the front
of the lens.
2) Check that the center of Flange back adjustment chart meets 3 6 01 13 Press PAUSE button.
the center of shot image screen with the zoom lens at TELE Place ND filter on the lens so
end and WIDE end respectively. 4 that the optimum image is
obtain.
Adjusting method:
Press PAUSE button.
5 6 01 29
Order Page Address Data Procedure (Note 2)
Perform “Data setting during Check the data changes to
6 6 02
1 camera system adjustment”. “01”.
(Refer to page 5-16) Check the data.
2 6 01 13 Press PAUSE button. 7 F 87 00: Normal
Press PAUSE button. 01 to FF: Defective
3 6 01 15
(Note 2) Note 1: Subject with clear contrast such as building, etc.
Check the data changes to Nearby subjects less than 500 m away should not be in
4 6 02 the screen.
“01”.
Check the data. F, address: 14 to 25, 87, 8A and 8B.
5 F 87 00: Normal
01 to FF: Defective Processing after Completing Adjustment:
F, address: 14 to 25, 87, 8A and 8B.
Processing after Completing Adjustment: Release the data setting
Order Page Address Data Procedure 2 performed at step 2.
Release the data setting 3
Check”.
3
Adjustment (2)”.
5-20
4. Flange Back Check

Mode CAMERA
Subject Siemens star
(1.0 m from the front of the lens)
(Luminance: 200 to 400 lux)
Specified value Focused at the TELE end and
WIDE end
Checking method:
Place the Siemens star 1.0 m
1
from the front of the lens.
To open the IRIS , decrease
the luminous intensity to the
2 Siemens star up to a point
before noise appear on the
image.
4 B 3D Note down the data.
5 B 3D 64 Press PAUSE button.
Shoot the Siemens star with
6
the zoom TELE end.
7 Turn on the auto focus.
Check that the lens is
8
focused.
9 6 2C 01
While observe the TV
monitor, change the zoom to
10
the WIDE end and check that
the lens is focused.

1 6 2C 00
Set data noted down at step
2 B 3D
4, and press PAUSE button.
5-21
5. F No. Compensation RadarW 6. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment RadarW

Compensate the unevenness of the iris meter sensitivity. Adjust the period which the mechanical shutter is closed, and com-
pensate the exposure.
Mode CAMERA
Subject Clear chart Mode CAMERA
(Standard picture frame with the Subject Clear chart
zoom lens at WIDE end) (Standard picture frame with the
Adjustment Page F zoom lens at WIDE end)
Adjustment Address 29 to 2D Adjustment Page F
Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. Adjustment Address 5A, 6C to 7F
If not, turn the power of unit OFF/ON. Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”.
Adjusting method:
Adjusting method:
Perform “Data setting during Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 camera system adjustment”. Perform “Data setting during
(Refer to page 5-16) 1 camera system adjustment”.
Perform “Picture Frame (Refer to page 5-16)
2 setting”. Perform “Picture Frame
(Refer to page 5-17) 2 setting”.
Press PAUSE button. (Refer to page 5-17)
3 6 01 BB
(Note 2) Press PAUSE button.
3 6 01 AD
Check the data changes to (Note 2)
4 6 02
“01”. Check the data changes to
4 6 02
Note 2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: “01”.
F, address: 29 to 2D. 5 6 AB Check the data is “00”.
Processing after Completing Adjustment: F, address: 5A, 6C to 7F.
Release the data setting Order Page Address Data Procedure
2 performed at step 1. 1 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button.
(Refer to page 5-16) Release the data setting
5-22
RadarW
RadarW Processing after Completing Adjustment:
7. Light Value Adjustment
Adjust the standard LV value. Order Page Address Data Procedure
Mode CAMERA 1 0 03 00
Subject Clear chart 2 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button.
(Standard picture frame with the Release the data setting
zoom lens at WIDE end) 3 performed at step 1.
Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 1 (Note (Refer to page 5-16)
2) and page: F, address: 28
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 26 to 28
Specified Value FD100 (Note 3):
TYPE PA:
AE level 1: 0FE0 to 1020
AE level 2: 20 to 60
TYPE SO:
FD200:
Note 2: The right four digits of the page: 1 displayed data of the
1:XX:XX
Displayed data
board in MVC-FD100.
Adjusting method:
Perform “Picture Frame
2 setting”.
Press PAUSE button.
3 6 01 0D
(Note 4)
4 6 02
“01”.
5 0 03 06
6 1 (Note 2) satisfies the AE
level 1 specified value.
7 F 28 satisfies the AE level 2
specified value.
F, address: 26 to 28.
5-23
8. Mixed Color Cancel Adjustment RadarW 9. Auto White Balance Standard Data Input RadarW
To perform mixed color cancel adjustment based on data of each Adjust the white balance standard data at 3200K.
color in color bar.
Mode CAMERA
Mode CAMERA
Subject Clear chart
Subject Color bar chart (Standard picture frame with the
(Standard picture frame with the zoom lens at WIDE end)
Adjustment Page F
Measurement Point Displayed data of page: F,
Adjustment Address 3A to 3D, 59
address :A0 (Note 2)
Measurering Instrument Adjusting remote commander Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”.
Adjustment Page F Note 2: “Auto White Balance Standard Data Input” is available
Adjustment Address A0 to A3 only once after the power is turned on. Turn the power
Specified Value Check data : Except 3. (Note 2) off, then on again if the adjustment is retried.
Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. Adjusting method:
Note 2: Displayed data of page: F, address: A0 of the adjusting Order Page Address Data Procedure
remote commander. Perform “Data setting during
F:XX:A0 1 camera system adjustment”.
Check data (Refer to page 5-16)
Adjusting method:
2 setting”.
Order Page Address Data Procedure (Refer to page 5-17)
Perform “Data setting during 3 6 01 11 Press PAUSE button.
1 camera system adjustment”. Press PAUSE button.
(Refer to page 5-16) 4 6 01 0B
(Note 3)
Perform “Picture Frame Check the data changes to
2 setting”. 5 6 02
“01”.
3 6 01 D7 Press PAUSE button. F, address: 3A to 3D and 59.
Press PAUSE button.
4 6 01 D5
(Note 3) Processing after Completing Adjustment:
Check the data changes to Order Page Address Data Procedure
5 6 02
“01”.
Check that the check data
6 F A0 satisfies the specified value.
(Note 2)
F, address: A0 and A3.

3 0 01 00
5-24
10. Auto White Balance Adjustment RadarW Adjusting method:

Adjust the white balance standard data at 5800K. Order Page Address Data Procedure
Mode CAMERA 1 Place the C14 filter on the lens.
Subject Clear chart Perform “Data setting during
(Standard picture frame with the 2 camera system adjustment”.
zoom lens at WIDE end) (Refer to page 5-16)
Filter Filter C14 for color temperature Perform “Picture Frame
correction 3 setting”.
Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 1 (Note 3) (Refer to page 5-17)
Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander 4 6 01 A7 Press PAUSE button.
Adjustment Page F 49
4A
Adjustment Address 3F, 40, 80, A9, AA 5 F Note down the data.
4B
Specified Value FD100 (Note 5): 4C
TYPE PA: 49
R ratio: 2921 to 2AA1 4A Set the data (Note 6)
B ratio: 5EE0 to 6060 6 F →
4B Press PAUSE button.
TYPE SO: 4C
R ratio: 25C4 to 2744
B ratio: 604B to 61CB 7 Wait for 2 seconds.
FD200: 8 6 01 A5 Press PAUSE button. (Note 7)
R ratio: 25F1 to 2771 Check the data changes to
B ratio: 6610 to 6790 9 6 02
“01”.
Note 1: Perform “Auto White Balance Standard Data Input” 10 6 01 3F Press PAUSE button.
before this adjustment.
Note 2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. 11 Wait for 2 seconds.
If not, turn the power of unit OFF/ON. 12 0 03 04
Note 3: The right 4 digits of the page: 1 displayed data of the Check that the displayed data
adjusting remote commander. 13 1 (Note 3) satisfied the R ratio
1:XX:XX specified value.
Displayed data
Note 4: “Auto White Balance Adjustment” is available only once 14 0 03 05
after the power is turned on. Turn the power off, then on Check that the displayed data
again if the adjustment is retried. 15 1 (Note 3) satisfied the B ratio
Note 5: Type of CCD imager is different according to the CD specified value.
board in MVC-FD100. Note 7: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page:
Refer to page 7 to discriminate the type of CCD. F, address: 3F, 40, 80, A9 and AA.
Note 6: Check the CCD TYPE and input the following data in
page: F, address: 49 to 4C. Processing after Completing Adjustment:
FD100 Order Page Address Data Procedure

Address FD200 1 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button.
TYPE PA TYPE SO
49 29 26 26 2 0 03 00
4A E1 84 B1 3 6 13 00
4B 5F 61 66 49
Set the data noted down at
4A
4C A0 0B D0 4 F step 5, and press PAUSE
4B
button.
4C
Remove the C14 filter on the
6
lens.
5-25
11. Auto White Balance 5800K Check

RadarW
RadarW FD100 :
Mode CAMERA R-Y
Subject Clear chart 0.5 mm

(Standard picture frame with the
B-Y
Filter Filter C14 for color temperature 3 mm
correction 6 mm
Measurement Point Displayed data of Video terminal of
Page: 1 (Note 2) VIDEO OUT jack
(75 Ω terminated)
Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote Vectorscope 6 mm
commander
Specified Value Fig. 5-1-17
If not, turn the power of unit OFF/ON. FD200 :
R-Y
1:XX:XX 0.5 mm
Displayed data
B-Y
Checking method: 3 mm
Order Page Address Data Procedure 6 mm

Place the C14 filter on the
1
lens.
2 camera system adjustment”. 6 mm
3 setting”. Fig. 5-1-17
4 E 52 Note down the data.
5 E 52 45 Press PAUSE button.
6 6 01 3F Press PAUSE button.
Check that the center of the
7 white luminance point within
the circle shown Fig 5-1-17.

2 E 52
4
lens.
5-26
RadarW
Mode CAMERA
Subject Clear chart
zoom lens at WIDE end) Set data noted down at step
3 E 52
Measurement Point Displayed data Video terminal of 3, and press PAUSE button.
of Page: 1 VIDEO OUT jack Release the data setting
(Note 2) (75 Ω terminated) 4 performed at step 1.
Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote Vectorscope (Refer to page 5-16)
commander
Specified Value R ratio: Fig. 5-1-18
R-Y
3E00 to 4200
B ratio:
3E00 to 4200
B-Y
Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. 4mm
adjusting remote commander. 4mm
1:XX:XX
Displayed data Fig. 5-1-18
Checking method:
2 setting”.
6 0 03 04
7 1 (Note 2) satisfied the R ratio
specified value.
8 0 03 05
9 1 (Note 2) satisfied the B ratio
specified value.
5-27
13. Color Reproduction Adjustment RadarW

Adjust the color separation matrix coefficient so that proper color
reproduction is produced.
Mode CAMERA
Subject Color bar chart
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 41 to 48, 5C to 5F
Note 2: “Color Reproduction Adjustment” is available only once
after the power is turned on. Turn the power off, then on
again if the adjustment is retried.
Adjusting method:
2 setting”.
3 6 01 AB Press PAUSE button.
4 6 12 80
6 6 12 00
7 Wait for 2 seconds.
Press PAUSE button.
8 6 01 A9
(Note 3)
9 6 02
“01”.
F, address: 41 to 48 and 5C to 5F.

5-28
14. Color Reproduction Check RadarW For NTSC mode

R-Y
Mode CAMERA
(Standard picture frame with the MG
zoom lens at WIDE end) R
jack (75 Ω terminated)
Measuring Instrument Vectorscope
YE
Specified Value All color luminance points
should settle within each color B-Y
reproduction frame. B
Menu setting:
1) VIDEO OUT of SET UP menu
................................ NTSC (NTSC mode)
................................ PAL (PAL mode) G
CY
Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. Burst position
Fig. 5-1-19
Checking method:
Perform “Data setting during For PAL mode
1 camera system adjustment”. R-Y
(Refer to page 5-16) Burst position

2 setting”. MG
R
3 6 10 01
Set the following data, and YE
press PAUSE button.
B-Y
FD100 (Note 2)
B
5 E 52 → 0A: TYPE PA
08: TYPE SO
FD200
07
7 6 12 80 G
CY
9 6 12 00
10 Wait for 2 seconds. Fig. 5-1-20
Check the each color
11 luminance point is in each
color reproduction frame.
board in MVC-FD100.
Refer to page 7 to discriminate the type od CCD.

2 6 10 00
3 E 52
5-29
15. CCD White Defect Compensation

RadarW
RadarW
Mode CAMERA
Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 6,
address: 55
Adjustment Page 7
Adjustment Address 88 to FF
Note 2: The“CCD White Defect Compensation” should be made
when the set warms up at certain duration after the power
was turned on, as it is affected with the temperature.
Adjusting method:
2 F DE Note down the data.
3 F DE 1E Press PAUSE button.
4 F E3 Note down the data.
5 F E3 0E Press PAUSE button.
Press PAUSE button.
6 6 01 8B
(Note 3)
7 6 02
“01”.
Check the data.
8 6 55 00 to 7F: Normal
80 to FF: Defective
10 F DE 0F Press PAUSE button.
11 F E3 60 Press PAUSE button.
13 6 02
“01”.
Check the data.
14 6 55 00: Normal
01 to FF: Defective
7, address: 88 to FF.

2 F DE
3 F E3
5-30
RadarW
16. CCD Black Defect Compensation
Mode CAMERA
Subject Clear chart
(Standard picture frame with the 2 6 2C 00
zoom lens at WIDE end) 3 6 30 00
Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 6, 4 6 91 00
address: 55 Set data noted down at step
5 F DF
Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander 2, and press PAUSE button.
Adjustment Page 7 Release the data setting
Adjustment Address 60 to 87 6 performed at step 1. (Refer to
page 5-16)
Note 2: Check that there are no dust, no dirt and reflection of the
clear chart.
Note 3: Any subject other than the clear chart should be in the
screen.
Adjusting method:
2 F DF Note down the data.
3 F DF 4C Press PAUSE button.
4 6 2C 01
5 6 90 00
6 6 91 03
7 6 92 00
8 6 93 00
10 6 30 01
11 6 07
“01”.
Press PAUSE button.
12 6 01 8D
(Note 4)
13 6 02
“01”.
Check the data.
14 6 55 00 to 0A : Normal
0B to FF : Defective
16 F DF 5A Press PAUSE button.
18 6 02
“01”.
Check the data.
19 6 55 00: Normal
01 to FF: Defective
7, address: 60 to 87.
5-31
17. Strobe White Balance Adjustment RadarW

RadarW Order Page Address Data Procedure
Adjust the white balance when the strobe light flashed. 16 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”.
Mode CAMERA 17 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button.
Subject Flash adjustment box (Note 3) Press PAUSE button.
18 7 03 05
(1 m from the front of lens) FD100: TYPE SO only (Note 8)
Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 1 (Note 19 6 01 B9 Press PAUSE button. (Note 7)
4) and page: F, address: 64 20 Check the flashing.
Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander 21 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”.
Adjustment Page F 22 Wait for 3 seconds.
Adjustment Address 4D, 4E, 64, 69 to 6B 23 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button.
Specified Value Y level data: 60 to 94 (Note 5) Press PAUSE button.
R-Y level data: 24 7 03 04
FD100: TYPE SO only (Note 8)
FA to FF or 00 to 06 (Note 4) 25 6 01 67 Press PAUSE button.
B-Y level data:
FA to FF or 00 to 06 (Note 4) 26 Check the flashing.
Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. 27 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”.
If not, turn the power of unit OFF/ON. Check that the data satisfies
Note 2: Perform this adjustment in the Flash adjustment box. 28 F 64 the Y level data satisfied
Do not block the photocell window for flash. value. (Note 5)
Restrict external light to enter the photocell window for 29 0 03 02
flash as less as possible.
Note 3: Refer to “4. Preparing the Flash adjustment box”. Check that the R-Y, B-Y
(See page 5-7) 30 1 level data (Note 4) satisfies
Note 4: The right four digits of the page: 1 displayed data of the the specified value.
adjusting remote commander. Note 7: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page:
1:XX:XX F, address: 4D, 4E, 64 and 69 to 6B.
B-Y level data Note 8: Type of CCD imager is different according to the CD
R-Y level data board in MVC-FD100.
Note 5: Displayed data of page: F, address: 64 of the adjusting Refer to page 7 to discriminate the type of CCD.
remote commander.
F:XX:64 Processing after Completing Adjustment:
 Y level data
Note 6: “Strobe White Balance Adjustment” is available only
once after the power is turned on. Turn the power off, 1 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button.
then on again if the adjustment is retried. 2 6 2C 00
3 6 6C 00
Switch setting:
1) FLASH (Control button) .............. ON 4 6 92 00
5 6 93 00
Adjusting method: 6 0 03 00
Order Page Address Data Procedure Release the data setting
Perform “Data setting during 7 performed at step 1.
1 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-16)
2 6 90 00
3 6 91 00
4 6 92 FF
5 6 93 FF
6 6 6C 01
7 6 2C 01
11 Check the flashing.
5-32
18. CCD Linearity Check RadarW

Check that CCD output keeps being straight even ISO sensitivity Check that the displayed data
is changed. 17 1 (Note 1) satisfied the B ratio
specified value.
Mode CAMERA
Subject Clear chart
zoom lens at WIDE end) Order Page Address Data Procedure
Measurement Point Displayed data of Page: 1 (Note 1) 1 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button.
Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander Set data noted down step 11,
2 6 12
Specified Value FD100 (Note 2): and press PAUSE button.
TYPE PA: Set data noted down step 4,
3 6 14
R ratio: 3D00 to 4300 and press PAUSE button.
B ratio: 3D00 to 4300 4 0 03 00
TYPE SO:
R ratio: 3900 to 4700 Release the data setting
B ratio: 3900 to 4700 5 performed at step 1.
FD200: (Refer to page 5-16)
R ratio: 3D00 to 4300
B ratio: 3D00 to 4300
1:XX:XX
Displayed data
board in MVC-FD100.
Checking method:
2 setting”.
4 6 14 Note down the data.
5 6 14 8B
6 0 03 04
specified value.
8 0 03 05
specified value.
10 6 14 90
Set the following data, and
press PAUSE button.
12 6 12
FD100: 9E
FD200: 9D
14 0 03 04
specified value.
16 0 03 05
5-33
1-5. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS [Adjusting connector]

Before perform the LCD system adjustments, check that the Most of the measuring points for adjusting the LCD system are
specified values of “VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS” are sat- concentrated in CN803 of the FC-89 board.
isfied. Connect the Measuring Instruments via the CPC-12 jig (J-6082-
436-A).
Note 1: The back light (fluorescent tube) is driven with high volt- The following table shows the Pin No. and signal name of CN803.
age AC power. Therefore, do not touch the back light
directly, otherwise you will feel an electric shock. Pin No. Signal Name Pin No. Signal Name
Note 2: Taken an extreme care not to destroy the liquid crystal 1 FDDRF_B 12 LANC_OUT
display module by static electricity when replacing it.
2 FDDRF_A 13 MAKER_RECOG
Note 3: Set the LCD BRIGHT (Menu display) to the center.
3 INDEX 14 PF7
4 REG_GND 15 TXD
5 N. C. 16 RXD
6 TRACK_00 17 RESET
7 HSY 18 EVER_3.2 V
8 COM 19 N.C.
9 VG 20 N.C.
10 HI_UNREG 21 N.C.
11 LANC_IN 22 N.C.
22
1
CPC cover
1
22
FC-89 board
CN803
CPC-12 jig
(J-6082-436-A)
Fig. 5-1-21
5-34
1. LCD Initial Data Input
Mode PLAY
Signal Arbitrary
Adjustment Page D
Adjustment Address D0 to DF
Adjusting method:
2) Select page: D, and enter the data given in the following table.
Note: Press the PAUSE button each time the data are set, as the
data are written to non-volatile memory (EEPROM).
Address Data Remark

D0 82 Bright Adjustment
D1 AB Fixed value
D2 80
White Balance Adjustment
D3 B8
D4 CC Contrast Adjustment
D5 5E Black Limit Adjustment
D6 80 VG Center Adjustment
D7 78 VCO Adjustment (NTSC)
D8 60 V-COM Adjustment
D9 6C Fixed value
DA 64 P-SIG Level Adjustment
DB 00
Fixed value
DC AA
DD 84 VCO Adjustment (PAL)
DE 44
Fixed value
DF 00

5-35
2. VCO Adjustment (PK-61 Board)

Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the LCD screen will
be blurred.
Mode PLAY
Signal Arbitrary CH1
Measurement Point CH1: Pin 7 of CN803 on FC-89
board (HSY)
CH2: Video terminal of VIDEO
CH2
OUT jack
(75 Ω terminated)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope H
Adjustment Page D
magnified
Adjustment Address D7 (NTSC)
DD (PAL)
Specified Value NTSC: T = 2.05 ± 0.1 µs
PAL: T = 3.15 ± 0.1 µs
Menu setting:
.................................. NTSC (NTSC mode)
(This adjustment must be performed in NTSC mode, so don’t CH1
set the menu setting to “PAL” )
Adjusting method:
CH2
1 0 01 01
T
Change the data and set the
2 D D7 phase difference (T) to the
NTSC specified value. T: Between the center of HSY signal rising and
3 D D7 Press PAUSE button. VIDEO SYNC signal rising

4 D DD Fig. 5-1-22
phase difference (T) to the
PAL specified value.
5 D DD Press PAUSE button.

1 0 01 00
5-36
3. Black Limit Adjustment (PK-61 Board) 4. Bright Adjustment (PK-61 Board)

Set the maximum amplitude of the RGB decoder for driving the Set the amplitude of the RGB decoder for driving the LCD to the
LCD to the specified value. specified value.
If deviated, the LCD screen image will be blackish or saturated If deviated, the LCD screen image will be blackish or saturated
(whitish). (whitish).
Mode PLAY Mode PLAY

Signal Arbitrary Signal Arbitrary
Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN803 on FC-89 board Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN803 on FC-89 board
(VG) (VG)
External trigger: Pin 8 of CN803 External trigger: Pin 8 of CN803
on FC-89 board (COM) on FC-89 board (COM)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Adjustment Page D Adjustment Page D
Adjustment Address D5 Adjustment Address D0
Specified Value A = 8.20 ± 0.1 Vp-p Specified Value A = 7.80 ± 0.1 Vp-p
Adjusting method: Adjusting method:

Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 0 01 01 1 0 01 01
2 5 F1 03 2 5 F1 03
Set the data. Change the data and set the
3 D D0 20 (Don't press PAUSE button.) 3 D D0 voltage (A) to the specified
Change the data and set the value.
4 D D5 voltage (A) to the specified 4 D D0 Press PAUSE button.
value.
5 D D5 Press PAUSE button. Processing after Completing Adjustments:
1 5 F1 00
Order Page Address Data Procedure 2 0 01 00
1 5 F1 00
2 0 01 00
Pedestal
A
A
Pedestal
2H 2H
A: Between the reversed waveform peak and non-reversed A: Between the reversed waveform pedestal and non-reversed
waveform peak waveform pedestal
Fig. 5-1-23 Fig. 5-1-24
5-37
5. Contrast Adjustment (PK-61 Board) 6. VG Center Adjustment (PK-61 Board)

Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the Set the center of VG signal for driving the LCD to the specified
specified value. value.
If deviated, the LCD screen image will be blackish or saturated
(whitish). Mode PLAY
Signal Arbitrary
Mode PLAY
Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN803 on FC-89 board
Signal Arbitrary (VG)
Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN803 on FC-89 board Measuring Instrument Digital voltmeter
(VG)
External trigger: Pin 8 of CN803 Adjustment Page D
on FC-89 board (COM) Adjustment Address D6
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Specified Value A = 7.00 ± 0.05 V
Adjustment Page D
Adjusting method:
Adjustment Address D4
Specified Value A = 2.45 ± 0.05 Vp-p
1 0 01 01
Adjusting method: 2 5 F1 02
Order Page Address Data Procedure Change the data and set the
3 D D6 DC voltage (A) to the
1 0 01 01
specified value.
2 5 F1 03
4 D D6 Press PAUSE button.
3 D D4 voltage (A) to the specified
value. Processing after Completing Adjustments:
4 D D4 Press PAUSE button. Order Page Address Data Procedure

1 5 F1 00
Processing after Completing Adjustments: 2 0 01 00
1 5 F1 00
2 0 01 00
10 steps peak
Pedestal
2H
A: Between the pedestal and 10 setps peak
Fig. 5-1-25
5-38
7. P-SIG Level Adjustment (PK-61 Board)

This adjustment sets correctly the V-COM drive signal level of the
LCD panel.
Mode PLAY
Signal Arbitrary
(COM)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Adjustment Page D
Adjustment Address DA
Specified Value A=5.0 ± 0.1 Vp-p
Adjusting method:
1 0 01 01
2 D DA voltage (A) to the specified
value.
3 D DA Press PAUSE button.

1 0 01 00
2H
Fig. 5-1-26
5-39
8. V-COM Adjustment (PK-61 Board)

Set the DC bias of the common electrode drive signal of LCD to
the specified value. B A
If deviated, the LCD display will be move, producing flicker and
conspicuous vertical lines. A B
Mode PLAY
Signal Arbitrary B A
Measurement Point
Check on the LCD screen
Measuring Instrument A B
Adjustment Page D
Adjustment Address D8 Fig. 5-1-27
Specified Value The brightness difference
between the section-A and
section-B is minimum
Note 1: Perform “Bright Adjustment” and “Contrast Adjustment”
Adjusting method:
1 0 01 01
2 5 F1 02
3 2 10 02
Change the data so that
4 D D8 brightness of the section A
and section B is equal.
Read the data and this data is
5 D D8 named Dref
Convert Dref to decimal
6 notation, and obtain Dref’
(Note 2)
Calculate DD8’ using
7 following equations
(decimal calculation)
8 DD8’ = Dref’ – 9
Convert DD8’ to a hexadeci-
9 mal number, and obtain DD8
(Note 2)
10 D D8 DD8 Press PAUSE button.
Note 2: Refer to table 5-2-2. “Hexadecimal-decimal conversion
table”

1 5 F1 00
2 2 10 00
3 0 01 00
5-40
9. White Balance Adjustment (PK-61 Board)

Correct the white balance.
If deviated, the LCD screen color cannot be reproduced.
Mode PLAY
Signal Arbitrary
Measurement Point
Adjustment Page D
Adjustment Address D2, D3
Specified Value LCD screen must not be colored
Note 1: Check the white balance only when replacing the fol-
lowing parts. If necessary, adjust them.
1. LCD panel
2. Light induction plate
3. IC901
Adjusting method:
1 0 01 01
2 5 F1 02
D2 80 Press PAUSE button.
3 D D3 B8 (Initial value)
Check that the LCD screen is
not colored. If not colored,
4
proceed to “Processing after
Completing Adjustments”.
D2 Change the data so that the
5 D LCD screen is not colored.
D3 (Note 2)
Note 2: To write in the non-volatile memory (EEPROM), press
the PAUSE button each time to set the data.

1 5 F1 00
2 0 01 00
5-41
1-6. SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS Adjusting method:

1. Battery Down Adjustment
Set the battery end voltage.
If the voltage is incorrect, the life of battery will shorten. 1 0 01 01
The image at the battery end will also be rough. Decrease the output voltage
2 of the regulated power supply
Mode CAMERA so that digital voltmeter
Subject Arbitrary display is 5.55 ± 0.01 Vdc.
Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 2, Read the data and this data is
3 2 52 named Dref
address: 52
Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander 4 D 90 Dref Press PAUSE button.
Adjustment Page D Convert Dref to decimal
5 notation and obtain Dref’.
(Note)
Calculate D91’, D92’, D93’and
Connection:
D94’using following equa-
1) Connect the regulated power supply and the digital voltmeter
tions (decimal calculation).
to the battery terminal as shown in Fig. 5-1-28.
6 D91’= Dref’ + 5
D92’= Dref’ + 23
Preparations before adjustment:
D93’= Dref’ + 44
1) Adjust the output voltage of the regulated power supply so
D94’= Dref’ + 55
that the digital voltmeter display is 6.1 ± 0.1 Vdc.
2) Turn on the HOLD switch of the adjusting remote commander. Convert D91’, D92’, D93’and
3) Turn on the power supply. 7 D94’to a hexadecimal number,
4) Set the CAMERA mode. and obtain D91, D92, D93 and
D94. (Note)
8 D 91 D91 Press PAUSE button.
Note: Refer to table 5-2-2 “Hexadecimal-decimal conversion
table”.

1 0 01 00

5.55 ± 0.01 Vdc Digital voltmeter
Power cord
(J-6082-223-A)
Fig. 5-1-28
5-42
2. ZOOM Center Adjustment 3. Alignment Check (FDD Unit)

Set normal position (center value) of ZOOM lever. Confirm that the FDD alignment is within the specifications. If
deviated, reading and writing data from and to floppy disk be-
Mode CAMERA come impossible.
Subject Arbitrary Or compatibility of floppy disk with other machines can be lost.
Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 2 Mode PLAY
address: 5C (Note 2)
Signal Alignment disks (TFD2-1 (+))
Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander and (TFD2-2 (–)):
Adjustment Page D Arbitrary signal
Adjustment Address 89 Measurement Point
Check on LCD screen
Note 1: Before adjustment, make sure that the ZOOM lever is in Measuring Instrument
mechanical center position. Specified Value The playback pictures should be
Note 2: Displayed data of page: 2, address: 5C of the adjusting normal
remote commander.
2:XX:5C
 Displayed data Checking method:
1) Disconnect the adjusting remote commander.
2) Insert the alignment disk TFD2-1 (+) (+17.5 um).
Adjusting method: 3) Playback arbitrary signal and check that the playback picture
is normal.
Order Page Address Data Procedure 4) Insert the alignment disk TFD2-2 (–) (–17.5 um).
1 0 01 01 5) Playback arbitrary signal and check that the playback picture
is normal.
Check the data
5D to 99: Normal
2 2 5C Alignment disk (Disk-1, Disk-2)
00 to 5C or 9A to FF:
(A set of alignment disks consists of two disks as a pair.)
Defective
Disk-1: 8-967-990-01
Read the data and this data is (TFD2-1 (+)) (+17.5 µm)
3 2 5C named Dref Disk-2: 8-967-990-11
From Table 5-1-2, obtain D89 (TFD2-2 (–)) (–17.5 µm)
4 that correspond to Dref.
[Common signals in the disks]
Data Code Signal
Dref D89 MVC-001C.JPG Color bars
5D to 6B 6C MVC-002M.JPG Monoscope
6C to 8A Dref MVC-003V.JPG V. COM adjustment signal
8B to 99 8A MVC-004W.JPG 100% white
Table 5-1-2 MVC-005H.JPG 50% white
MVC-006T.JPG Stair-step signal of 10 steps
Processing after Completing Adjustments: MVC-007R.JPG Red single color
Order Page Address Data Procedure MVC-008G.JPG Green single color
1 0 01 00 MVC-009B.JPG Blue single color
MVC-010D.JPG Camera color bars
MVC-011N.JPG Camera monoscope
• Contents of alignment disk-1

(Common signal) + (+17.5 µm alignment)
(Common signal) + (–17.5 µm alignment)
5-43
5-2. SERVICE MODE • Changing the address

2-1. ADJUSTING REMOTE COMMANDER The address increases when the FF (M) button is pressed,
The adjusting remote commander is used for changing the calcu- and decreases when the REW (M) button is pressed. There
lation coefficient in signal processing, EVR data, etc. The adjust- are altogether 256 addresses, from 00 to FF.
ing remote commander performs bi-directional communication • Changing the data (Data setting)
with the unit using the remote commander signal line (LANC). The data increases when the PLAY (N) button is pressed,
The resultant data of this bi-directional communication is written and decreases when the STOP (x) button is pressed. There
in the non-volatile memory. are altogether 256 data, from 00 to FF.
• Writing the adjustment data
1. Used the Adjusting Remote Commander The PAUSE button must be pressed to write the adjustment
1) Connect the adjusting remote commander to the CN803 on data in the nonvolatile memory. (The new adjustment data
the FC-89 board via CPC-12 jig (J-6082-436-A). will not be recorded in the nonvolatile memory if this step is
2) Adjust the HOLD switch of the adjusting remote commander not performed)
to “HOLD” (SERVICE position).
3) Turn on the power with the POWER switch of the unit. 2. Precautions upon Using the Adjusting Remote
If it has been properly connected, the LCD on the adjusting re- Commander
mote commander will display as shown in Fig. 5-2-1. Mishandling of the adjusting remote commander may erase the
correct adjustment data at times. To prevent this, it is recommended
that all adjustment data be noted down before beginning adjust-
ments and new adjustment data after each adjustment.
0 : 00 : 00
Page Data Address
Fig. 5-2-1
4) Operate the adjusting remote commander as follows.
• Changing the page
The page increases when the EDIT SEARCH + button is
pressed, and decreases when the EDIT SEARCH – button is
pressed. There are altogether 16 pages, from 0 to F.
Hexadecimal
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 AB C D E F
notation
LCD Display 01 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A b c d E F
Decimal notation
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 13 1415
conversion value
Table 5-2-1
5-44
2-2. DATA PROCESS

The calculation of the adjusting remote commander display data
(hexadecimal notation) are required for obtaining the adjustment
data of some adjustment items. In this case, after converting the
hexadecimal notation to decimal notation, calculate and convert
the result to hexadecimal notation, and use it as the adjustment
data. Table 5-2-2. indicates the hexadecimal notation- the deci-
mal notation, calculation table.
Hexadecimal notation-Decimal notation 2

↓
The lower digits of the 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
hexadecimal notation
The upper digits of the (A) (b) (c) (d) (E) (F)
0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
2 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
3 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
4 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79
5 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95
6 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111
7 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127
8 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143
9 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159
A (A) 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175
1→ B (b) 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191
C (c) 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207
D (d) 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223
E (E) 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239
F (F) 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255
Note : ( ) indicate the adjusting remote control unit display.
(Example) In the case that the adjusting remote control unit display are BD (bd).
As the upper digit of the hexadecimal notation is B (b), and the lower digit is D (d), the intersection “189” of
the1 and 2 in the above table is the decimal notation to be calculated.
Table 5-2-2
5-45
2-3. SERVICE MODE 3. Switch Check (1)

1. Setting the Test Mode
Page 2 Address 43
Page D Address 10
Bit Function When bit value=1 When bit value=0
Data Function XPOWER SW
0 OFF ON
00 Normal (PK-61 board S703)
01 Forced CAMERA mode power ON 1 XCAM/PLAY SW PLAY CAMERA
(PK-61 board S708)
02 Forced PLAY mode power ON
SHUTTR SW
03 Forced MOVIE mode power ON
2 (CONTROL SWITCH OFF ON
• Before setting the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: BLOCK S001)
01.
XSHUTTER LOCK SW
• For page D, the data set is recorded in the non-volatile memory
by pressing the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote com-
BLOCK S001)
mander. In this case, take note that the test mode will not be
exited even when the main power is turned off. 4 MEMORY STICK IN SW OUT IN
• After completing adjustments/repairs, be sure to return the data (MS Socket)
of this address to “00”, and press the PAUSE button of the ad- 5
justing remote commander.
6
Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
XSTILL/MOVIE SW
7 MOVIE STILL
2. Bit Value Discrimination (PK-61 board S710)
Bit values must be discriminated using the display data of the ad-
justing remote commander for following items. Use the table be- Using method:
low to discriminate if the bit value is “1” or “0” 1) Select page: 2, address: 43
2) By discriminating the bit value of display data, the state of the
Display on the adjustilng remote commander switches can be discriminated.
0 : 00 : 00 4. Switch Check (2)
Page 2 Address 48
Address Bit Function When bit value=1 When bit value=0

Page
bit3 to bit0 discrimination DISK/XMS SW MEMORY
bit7 to bit4 discrimination 0 FLOPPY DISK
(PK-61 board S712) STICK
Display on the Bit values
Using method:
Adjusting bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 1) Select page: 2, address: 48
remote or or or or 2) By discriminating the bit value of display data, the state of the
commander bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 switches can be discriminated.
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
A 8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
A (A) 1 0 1 0
B (b) 1 0 1 1
C (c) 1 1 0 0
D (d) 1 1 0 1
B E (E) 1 1 1 0
F (F) 1 1 1 1
Example: If “8E” is displayed on the adjusting remote com-
mander, the bit values for bit7 to bit4 are shown in the
A column, and the bit values for bit3 to bit0 are shown
in the B column.
5-46
5. Switch Check (3)
Page 2 Addresses 55, 56
Using method:
1) Select page: 2, addresses: 55, 56.
2) By discriminating the display data, the pressed key can be
discriminated.
Data
Address
00 to 12 13 to 3A 3B to 62 63 to 87 88 to B3 B4 to E0 E1 to FF
55 CONTROL DOWN CONTROL UP DISPLAY FOCUS
(KEY AD1) (PK-61 board) (PK-61 board) (PK-61 board) (PK-61 board) No key input
(IC404 ul) (S701) (S701) (S702) (S711)
56 CONTROL RIGHT CONTROL LEFT CONTROL SET FLASH PROGRAM AE LCD BACK LIGHT (OFF) LCD BACK LIGHT (ON)
(KEY AD2) (PK-61 board) (PK-61 board) (PK-61 board) (PK-61 board) (PK-61 board) (PK-61 board) (PK-61 board)
(IC404 i;) (S701) (S701) (S701) (S705) (S707) (S709) (S709)
6. LED Check
Page 2 Address 06 Data 02
Using method:
2) Check that all LED except for the ACCESS LED are lit.
7. Self Diagnosis Code

power then back on.
C:13:01
is inserted.
Flash LED
flash unit charged.
Flashing at 3.2 Hz
E:61:00
E61:10
5-47
5-47E
SECTION 6
REPAIR PARTS LIST
6-1. EXPLODED VIEWS The components identified by mark
0 or dotted line with mark 0 are
NOTE: critical for safety.
• -XX and -X mean standardized parts, so they may • The mechanical parts with no reference number in Replace only with part number speci-
have some difference from the original one. the exploded views are not supplied. fied.
• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they are • Accessories are given in the last of the electrical Les composants identifiés par une
seldom required for routine service. Some delay parts list. marque 0 sont critiquens pour la
should be anticipated when ordering these items. sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une pièce
portant le numéro spécifié.
6-1-1. CABINET (FRONT) SECTION
Cabinet (rear) section

(See page 6-4.)
8
10
9
11
2
7
BT901
6
4
2
10
10
2
5 10
FDD block section
2 (See page 6-3.)
2
Lens block section
(See page 6-6.)
10 1
Cabinet (front) assembly J001
(See page 6-2.)
Ref. No. Part No. Description Ref. No. Part No. Description
1 3-073-018-01 RETAINER, DC 8 1-961-478-11 HARNESS (FU-055)
2 3-948-339-61 TAPPING 9 1-961-479-11 HARNESS (FU-056)
03 1-418-995-11 FLASH UNIT 10 3-968-729-31 SCREW (M2), LOCK ACE, P2
* 4 3-058-801-01 SHEET, ST INSULATING * 11 3-061-228-01 RETAINER, HARNESS
5 A-7078-139-A FU-159 BOARD, COMPLETE BT901 1-694-297-21 TERMINAL BOARD, BATTERY
6 1-418-894-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL J001 1-794-045-21 CONNECTOR, DC-IN

7 3-073-019-01 HOLDER, SW
6-1
6-1-2. CABINET (FRONT) ASSEMBLY
64 62
51 63
64
70 61
65
59
58
69 60
64 66
64
67
68
54
53
57
52
56
55
51 X-3952-208-1 CABINET (FRONT) ASSY (FD100) 60 3-066-772-01 PLATE, HINGE
51 X-3952-212-1 CABINET (FRONT) ASSY (FD200) 61 3-066-778-01 SPRING, BT TORSION
52 X-3952-207-1 LABEL ASSY, LENS 62 3-066-773-01 HOLDER, BATTERY
53 3-073-008-01 SCREW, FILTER 63 3-969-380-01 SPRING, BATTERY
54 3-073-005-01 RING, ORNAMENTAL 64 3-948-339-01 SCREW, TAPPING
55 3-073-006-01 LID, BATTERY (FD100) 65 3-066-774-01 SHAFT, HINGE

55 3-073-006-11 LID, BATTERY (FD200) 66 3-052-574-01 CLAW, BT LOCK
56 3-719-381-01 SCREW (M2X4) 67 3-058-755-01 SCREW, TRIPOD
57 3-072-999-01 COVER, DC (FD100) 68 3-713-791-41 SCREW (M1.7X5), TAPPING, P2
57 3-072-999-11 COVER, DC (FD200) 69 3-073-010-01 KNOB, ZOOM (FD100)
58 3-073-013-01 SHEET METAL (L), STRAP 69 3-073-010-11 KNOB, ZOOM (FD200)

59 3-066-775-01 SPRING, BT PLATE 70 3-073-011-01 SLIDER, ZOOM
6-2
6-1-3. FDD BLOCK SECTION

ns: not supplied
106
(Note 2)
105
104
108
104
107
ns
CN201
104
103
101
(Note 1)
102
104
(Note 1) Be sure to read “2-9. THE WAY OF DISASSEMBLING

(Note 2) About FC-89 board, CD-379/390 board and CCD

imager, discriminate CCD type on the machine
referring to page 7, and replace the same type.
101 1-772-563-11 DRIVE, FLOPPY DISK (Note 1) 106 A-7078-111-A FC-89 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE)
102 3-066-799-01 BRACKET, USB (FD100: TYPE PA) (Note 2)
103 1-680-234-11 FP-335 FLEXIBLE BOARD 106 A-7078-112-A FC-89 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE) (FD200)
104 3-964-010-31 SCREW (M2), 0 PART-NO. P2 MAIN 107 1-683-379-11 FP-465 FLEXIBLE BOARD
105 3-066-780-01 BRACKET, FC * 108 3-061-228-01 RETAINER, HARNESS
CN201 1-794-962-11 CONNECTOR, SQUARE TYPE (USB 5P)
106 A-7078-110-A FC-89 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE)
(FD100: TYPE SO) (Note 2)
6-3
6-1-4. CABINET (REAR) SECTION
156
Cabinet (rear) assembly

(See page 6-5.)
157
LCD901
BZ901
ND801
153
@
153
154
155 151
153
153 153
152
! : Board
BT701 (BATTERY, LITHIUM SECONDARY)
on the mount position. (See page 4-48.)
The components identified by Les composants identifiés par une

mark 0 or dotted line with marque 0 sont critiques pour la
mark 0 are critical for safety. sécurité.
Replace only with part num- Ne les remplacer que par une pièce
ber specified. portant le numéro spécifié.
151 X-3952-209-1 CASE ASSY, PK SHIELD 156 3-068-458-01 WINDOW, SOLAR
152 1-683-380-11 FP-466 FLEXIBLE BOARD 157 3-066-764-01 SHEET (BUZZER), ADHESIVE
153 3-948-339-61 TAPPING BZ901 1-529-739-11 BUZZER, PIEZOELECTRIC
154 A-7078-140-A PK-61 BOARD, COMPLETE LCD901 8-753-050-80 ACX307AKC-1
155 3-073-075-01 RETAINER, BL 0 ND801 1-517-787-71 TUBE, FLUORESCENT, COLD CATHODE
6-4
6-1-5. CABINET (REAR) ASSEMBLY

ns: not supplied
213
211
214
ns
210 212 215

204
217
ns 208
(Note 3)
207
210 218
ns 220
202
210 ns 205
(Note 3) 206
209
219
201 221 203
216
(Note 3) The eject mechanism portion is a mechanical unit which

has completely been adjusted in the factory. So never
disassemble the eject mechanism portion.
201 X-3952-210-1 CABINET (REAR) ASSY (FD100) 213 3-058-783-21 BUTTON, LOCK (FD200)
202 3-073-024-01 CABINET, SIDE (FD100) 214 3-066-788-01 KNOB, EJECT (FD200)
203 3-051-124-01 FOOT, RUBBER 215 3-058-785-01 SPRING, LOCK BUTTON
204 3-073-032-01 KNOB, POWER (FD100) 216 3-066-802-11 COVER, USB JACK (FD100)
205 3-073-033-01 RETAINER, P KNOB 217 3-066-805-21 LID, CPC (FD100)
206 3-053-141-01 SPRING, POWER 217 3-066-805-31 LID, CPC (FD200)
207 3-355-424-21 SCREW, TAPPING 218 3-073-034-01 KNOB, MODE SELECTION (FD100)
208 3-073-030-01 KNOB, MS 218 3-073-034-11 KNOB, MODE SELECTION (FD200)

209 3-073-031-01 RETAINER, MS KNOB 219 3-073-035-01 RETAINER, MODE SELECTION
210 3-948-339-61 TAPPING 220 3-073-039-01 KNOB, LCD (FD100)
211 3-058-770-01 SHEET METAL (R), STRAP 220 3-073-039-11 KNOB, LCD (FD200)
212 3-058-784-01 RETAINER, LOCK BUTTON 221 3-073-040-01 RETAINER, LCD KNOB
6-5
6-1-6. LENS BLOCK SECTION
257
256
255
259
258
(Note 2)
251
IC101, 201
(Note 2, 4)
253
254
252 253

(Note 4) Be sure to read “Precuations for Replacement of CCD

Imager” on page 4-8, 10 when changing the CCD
imager.
251 1-758-620-11 LENS, ZOOM (DE01) 258 A-7078-141-A CD-379 BOARD, COMPLETE (FD100: TYPE PA)
252 3-073-016-01 FRAME, LENS (Note 2)
253 3-713-791-41 SCREW (M1.7X5), TAPPING, P2 258 A-7078-144-A CD-390 BOARD, COMPLETE (FD200)
254 1-683-378-11 FP-464 FLEXIBLE BOARD 259 3-073-017-01 SHEET, LENS
255 1-758-571-11 FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL (FD100) IC101 A-7095-017-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) (FD100: SO)
(Note 2, 4)
255 1-758-572-11 FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL (FD200) IC101 A-7095-033-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) (FD200)
256 3-068-558-01 CCD SEAL RUBBER
257 3-318-203-11 SCREW (B1.7X6), TAPPING IC201 A-7095-023-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) (FD100: PA)
258 A-7078-137-A CD-390 BOARD, COMPLETE (FD100: TYPE SO) (Note 2, 4)
(Note 2)
6-6
CD-379 CD-390
6-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST

NOTE:
• Due to standardization, replacements in the • Items marked “*” are not stocked since they The components identified by
parts list may be different from the parts speci- are seldom required for routine service. mark 0 or dotted line with mark
0 are critical for safety.
fied in the diagrams or the components used Some delay should be anticipated when order- Replace only with part number
on the set. ing these items. specified.
• -XX and -X mean standardized parts, so they • SEMICONDUCTORS
Les composants identifiés par une
may have some difference from the original In each case, u: µ, for example: marque 0 sont critiquens pour la
one. uA. . : µA. . uPA. . : µPA. . sécurité.
• RESISTORS uPB. . : µPB. . uPC. . : µPC. . Ne les remplacer que par une pièce
All resistors are in ohms. uPD. . : µPD. . portant le numéro spécifié.
METAL: Metal-film resistor. • CAPACITORS
METAL OXIDE: Metal oxide-film resistor. uF: µF When indicating parts by reference
F: nonflammable • COILS number, please include the board.
uH: µH
• Abbreviation About FC-89 board, CD-379/390 board and CCD
AUS : Australian model imager, discriminate CCD type on the machine
CND : Canadian model referring to page 7, and replace the same type.
J : Japanese model
A-7078-141-A CD-379 BOARD, COMPLETE (FD100:TYPE PA) < RESISTOR >
***********************
(IC201 is not included in this complete board) R202 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W
R203 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W
< CAPACITOR > R204 1-218-944-11 RES-CHIP 180 5% 1/16W
R205 1-218-935-11 RES-CHIP 33 5% 1/16W
C201 1-125-827-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 25V R206 1-218-935-11 RES-CHIP 33 5% 1/16W
C202 1-113-992-11 TANTAL. CHIP 3.3uF 20% 35V
C203 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 16V R207 1-218-959-11 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W
C204 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V R208 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W
C206 1-104-329-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 50V R209 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W
R210 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W
C207 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V
C208 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V < THERMISTOR >
C209 1-164-850-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10PF 0.5PF 50V
C210 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V TH201 1-810-816-11 THERMISTOR, NTC (1608)
C212 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V A-7078-137-A CD-390 BOARD, COMPLETE (FD100: TYPE SO)
C214 1-162-964-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V A-7078-144-A CD-390 BOARD, COMPLETE (FD200)
***********************
< CONNECTOR > (IC101 is not included in this complete board)
CN201 1-691-358-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 20P < CAPACITOR >
< DIODE > C101 1-125-827-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 25V
C102 1-113-992-11 TANTAL. CHIP 3.3uF 20% 35V
D201 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111- (K8).S0 C103 1-104-913-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 16V
< FERRITE BEAD > C106 1-104-329-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 50V
FB201 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH C107 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V
< IC > C110 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V
C111 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V
IC201 A-7095-023-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (Note) (FD100: TYPE SO)
< COIL > C112 1-164-850-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10PF 0.5PF 50V
L201 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH (FD200)
< TRANSISTOR > < CONNECTOR >
Q201 8-729-117-73 TRANSISTOR 2SC4178-F14 CN101 1-691-358-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 20P
Q202 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (TX).SO
(Note) Be sure to read “Note on the CCD Imager

Replacement” on page 4-8 when changing the
CCD imager.
6-7
CD-390
< DIODE >
D101 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111- (K8).S0
< FERRITE BEAD >
FB101 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH
< IC >
IC101 A-7095-017-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (FD100: TYPE SO) (Note)

IC101 A-7095-033-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (FD200) (Note)
< COIL >
L101 1-469-528-91 INDUCTOR 100uH
< TRANSISTOR >

Q102 8-729-117-73 TRANSISTOR 2SC4178-F14
< RESISTOR >
R102 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W

R103 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W
(FD200)
R103 1-218-944-11 RES-CHIP 180 5% 1/16W
(FD100: TYPE SO)
R104 1-208-635-11 RES-CHIP 10 5% 1/16W
(FD200)
R104 1-218-935-11 RES-CHIP 33 5% 1/16W
(FD100: TYPE SO)
R105 1-218-931-11 RES-CHIP 15 5% 1/16W

(FD200)
R105 1-218-935-11 RES-CHIP 33 5% 1/16W
(FD100: TYPE SO)
R106 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W
(FD200)
R106 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W
(FD100: TYPE SO)
R107 1-208-643-11 RES-CHIP 22 5% 1/16W
(FD200)
R107 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W

(FD100: TYPE SO)
R108 1-218-981-11 RES-CHIP 220K 5% 1/16W
(FD200)
R108 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W
(FD100: TYPE SO)
R109 1-218-959-11 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W
R110 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W
< THERMISTOR >
TH101 1-810-816-11 THERMISTOR, NTC (1608)
Electrical parts list of the FC-89 board is not

shown.
Pages 6-9 to 6-15 are not shown.

CCD imager.
6-8
Ver 1.2 2003. 04
FU-159 PK-61
A-7078-139-A FU-159 BOARD, COMPLETE C706 1-115-467-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF 10% 10V
*********************** C710 1-125-891-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 10% 10V
C711 1-164-876-11 CERAMIC CHIP 120PF 5% 50V
< CAPACITOR > C851 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V
C001 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V C852 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 16V
< CONNECTOR > C854 1-135-149-21 TANTALUM CHIP 2.2uF 20% 10V
* CN001 1-580-056-21 PIN, CONNECTOR (SMD) 3P C856 1-164-856-81 CERAMIC CHIP 18PF 5% 50V
* CN002 1-580-057-11 PIN, CONNECTOR (SMD) 4P
CN003 1-770-626-21 PIN, CONNECTOR 9P C857 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V
CN004 1-770-629-21 PIN, CONNECTOR 12P C858 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V
CN005 1-779-327-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 6P C859 1-164-860-11 CERAMIC CHIP 27PF 5% 50V
C861 1-127-692-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 10% 6.3V
< DIODE > C863 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
D002 8-719-027-76 DIODE 1SS357-TPH3 C864 1-164-657-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.015uF 10% 50V
< FUSE > 0 C866 1-131-959-91 CERAMIC CHIP 12PF 10% 3KV
C901 1-107-687-11 TANTAL. CHIP 3.3uF 20% 20V
0 F001 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO (1608) (1.4A/32V) C902 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V
0 F002 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO (1608) (1.4A/32V)
0 F003 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO (1608) (1.4A/32V) C903 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
0 F004 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO (1608) (1.4A/32V) C904 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
0 F005 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO (1608) (1.4A/32V) C907 1-104-852-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V
< LINE FILTER > C917 1-107-686-11 TANTAL. CHIP 4.7uF 20% 16V
LF001 1-411-957-11 FILTER, COMMON MODE C918 1-135-259-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V
< TRANSISTOR > C921 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V
Q001 8-729-046-77 TRANSISTOR SI4963DY-T1 C923 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
Q002 8-729-804-41 TRANSISTOR 2SB1122-S
Q003 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (TX).SO C924 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V
Q004 8-729-047-68 TRANSISTOR SSM3K03FE (TPL3) C925 1-127-760-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 6.3V
Q005 8-729-047-68 TRANSISTOR SSM3K03FE (TPL3) C926 1-164-940-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0033uF 10% 16V
< RESISTOR > C928 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V
R001 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W C929 1-110-501-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.33uF 10% 16V
R002 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W C931 1-109-982-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V
R005 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W C934 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V
R006 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W C935 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
R008 1-414-226-21 FERRITE 0uH (Note) C936 1-125-889-91 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 10V
R020 1-216-150-91 RES-CHIP 10 5% 1/8W C938 1-125-889-91 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 10V
R021 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
< CONNECTOR >
A-7078-140-A PK-61 BOARD, COMPLETE CN701 1-774-054-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 45P
********************** CN702 1-784-342-11 HOUSING, CONNECTOR 2P
CN851 1-764-709-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (LIF) 10P
< BATTERY > CN902 1-691-362-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 24P
BT701 1-756-102-21 BATTERY, LITHIUM SECONDARY < DIODE >
< CAPACITOR > D701 8-719-061-81 DIODE TLYU1002 (TPX1, SONY)

(FLASH LED)
C705 1-119-750-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V D702 8-719-061-81 DIODE TLYU1002 (TPX1, SONY)

(Note) Ferrite bead is mounted to the location Replace only with part num- Ne les remplacer que par une pièce
where R008 is printed. ber specified. portant le numéro spécifié.
6-16
PK-61
(CHARGE LED) R714 1-208-912-11 METAL CHIP 11K 0.5% 1/16W
D703 8-719-064-05 DIODE TLGU1002 (TPX1, SONY)
(POWER LED) R715 1-218-978-11 RES-CHIP 120K 5% 1/16W
D786 8-719-073-03 DIODE MA8082- (K8).S0 R716 1-218-956-11 RES-CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/16W
D853 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111- (K8).S0 R717 1-218-956-11 RES-CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/16W
R718 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W
D904 8-719-084-47 DIODE 1SV290 (TPL3) R719 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W
D906 8-719-050-42 DIODE RD3.3UM-T1B
R721 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W
< FERRITE BEAD > R722 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W
R723 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W
FB788 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH R724 1-218-972-11 RES-CHIP 39K 5% 1/16W
FB789 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH R725 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W
FB791 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W
(Note) R726 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W
R727 1-216-013-00 METAL CHIP 33 5% 1/10W
< IC > R782 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W
R853 1-208-703-11 METAL CHIP 6.8K 0.5% 1/16W
IC702 8-759-572-54 IC TA6009FN (EL) R854 1-218-970-11 METAL CHIP 27K 0.5% 1/16W
IC851 8-759-521-35 IC TL5001CDR
IC852 8-759-710-82 IC NJM2406F R855 1-218-978-11 METAL CHIP 120K 0.5% 1/16W
IC901 6-700-684-01 IC AN12511A-BB R856 1-218-950-11 RES-CHIP 560 5% 1/16W
IC902 8-759-364-05 IC M62376GP-65AD R857 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W
R858 1-218-950-11 RES-CHIP 560 5% 1/16W
IC903 8-759-327-01 IC NJM062V (TE2) R859 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W
IC904 8-752-405-01 IC CXD3510R-T4
R860 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W
< JACK > R861 1-208-689-11 METAL CHIP 1.8K 0.5% 1/16W
R862 1-208-695-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 0.5% 1/16W
J781 1-569-950-31 JACK (SMALL TYPE) (VIDEO OUT) R863 1-218-955-11 RES-CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W
R864 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W
< COIL >
R865 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W
L702 1-469-527-91 INDUCTOR 47uH R866 1-218-955-11 RES-CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W
L851 1-469-524-91 INDUCTOR 4.7uH R868 1-216-055-00 METAL CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/10W
L852 1-419-354-21 INDUCTOR 22uH R869 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W
L853 1-428-878-11 INDUCTOR 0uH R870 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W
L901 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH
R871 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W
L902 1-469-528-91 INDUCTOR 100uH R872 1-218-949-11 RES-CHIP 470 5% 1/16W
L903 1-469-527-91 INDUCTOR 47uH R873 1-218-942-11 RES-CHIP 120 5% 1/16W
L904 1-412-949-21 INDUCTOR 6.8uH R876 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W
R902 1-218-970-11 RES-CHIP 27K 5% 1/16W
< TRANSISTOR >
R905 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W
Q851 8-729-042-72 TRANSISTOR UN9214J- (K8).SO R910 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
Q852 8-729-042-59 TRANSISTOR UN9112J- (K8).SO R911 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W
Q853 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (TX).SO R913 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
Q854 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR R919 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W
R920 1-218-976-11 RES-CHIP 82K 5% 1/16W
Q856 8-729-823-84 TRANSISTOR FP102 R921 1-218-974-11 RES-CHIP 56K 5% 1/16W
Q857 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR (TX) R922 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W
Q858 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR (TX) R923 1-218-968-11 RES-CHIP 18K 5% 1/16W
Q859 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (TX).SO R924 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W
Q860 6-550-065-01 TRANSISTOR CPH5504-TL-E
R925 1-218-967-11 RES-CHIP 15K 5% 1/16W
Q903 8-729-427-74 TRANSISTOR XP4601 R928 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W
Q905 8-729-427-74 TRANSISTOR XP4601 R931 1-218-941-81 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W
Q908 8-729-037-53 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR (TX)
R932 1-218-941-81 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W
< RESISTOR > R933 1-218-941-81 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W
R936 1-218-972-11 RES-CHIP 39K 5% 1/16W
R703 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R937 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W
R705 1-218-951-11 RES-CHIP 680 5% 1/16W R938 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W
R710 1-218-946-11 RES-CHIP 270 5% 1/16W
(Note) Resistor is mounted to the location where

FB791 is printed.
6-17
PK-61
R940 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W
R943 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 0 1-783-374-11 CORD, POWER (UK)
R944 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W 0 1-790-107-22 CORD, POWER (US, CND)
R945 1-218-972-11 RES-CHIP 39K 5% 1/16W 0 1-790-732-11 CORD, POWER (J)
1-792-955-11 CORD, CONNECTION (AV CONNECTING 1.5m)
R947 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W 1-823-931-11 CORD, CONNECTION (USB 5P)
R948 1-218-970-11 RES-CHIP 27K 5% 1/16W
R949 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W 3-065-665-01 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (for SAFETY)
R950 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W (JAPANESE) (J)
R951 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W 3-067-797-01 STRING (T), CAP
3-072-414-01 SPVD-008 (CD-ROM) (EXCEPT US, CND, J)
R953 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W 3-072-654-01 SPVD-008 (I) (CD-ROM) (US, CND, J)
R955 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 3-073-074-01 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (JAPANESE) (J)
R956 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W
R957 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W 3-073-074-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH)
R958 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (US, CND, AEP, UK, E, AUS)
3-073-074-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH, GERMAN)
R961 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (CND, AEP)
R965 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W 3-073-074-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
R974 1-218-979-11 RES-CHIP 150K 5% 1/16W (SPANISH, PORTUGUESE) (AEP, E)
R975 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W 3-073-074-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ITALIAN, DUTCH)
R976 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W (AEP)
3-073-074-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (TRADITIONAL
R977 1-218-974-11 RES-CHIP 56K 5% 1/16W CHINESE, SIMPLIFIED CHINESE) (E)
R982 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W
R986 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W 3-073-074-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
R987 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W (SWEDISH, RUSSIAN) (AEP)
R988 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 3-073-074-71 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ARABIC) (E)
3-987-015-01 BELT (S), SHOULDER
R989 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W 0 A-7094-140-A BATTERY PACK (NP-F330) (US, CND)
R990 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W 0 A-7094-141-A BATTERY PACK (NP-F330) (EXCEPT US, CND)
< SWITCH > X-3950-660-1 CAP ASSY, LENS
S701 1-786-039-21 SWITCH, TACTILE (MENU)

S702 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (DISPLAY)
S703 1-771-039-31 SWITCH, PUSH (POWER ON/OFF (CHG))
S705 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (FLASH)
S707 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (PROGRAM AE)
S708 1-771-039-31 SWITCH, PUSH (PLAY)

S709 1-762-741-11 SWITCH, SLIDE (LCD BACKLIGHT)
S710 1-771-039-31 SWITCH, PUSH (MOVIE)
S711 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (FOCUS)
S712 1-771-040-31 SWITCH, PUSH (MS/FD)
< SENSOR >
SE701 1-801-868-41 SENSOR, SHOCK
< TRANSFORMER >
0 T851 1-435-786-31 TRANSFORMER, INVERTER
< VARISTOR >
VDR782 1-803-974-21 VARISTOR, CHIP

ACCESSORIES
************
0 1-475-599-11 ADAPTOR, AC (AC-L10)

0 1-569-007-11 ADAPTOR, CONVERSION 2P (E)
0 1-569-008-21 ADAPTOR, CONVERSION 2P (E)
0 1-696-819-11 CORD, POWER (AUS)
0 1-769-608-11 CORD, POWER (AEP, E)

6-18
6-18E
FOR CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION ADJUSTMENT
Take a copy of CAMERA COLOR

REPRODUCTION FRAME with a
For NTSC mode
clear sheet for use.
R-Y
MG
R
YE
B-Y
B
G
CY
✄ MVC-FD100/FD200
For PAL mode
R-Y
MG
R
YE
B-Y
B
G
CY
MVC-FD100/FD200
✄
– 151 –
2003I0500-1
9-929-934-31 Sony EMCS Co. © 2003. 9
– 152 – Published by DI CS Strategy Div
US Model
Canadian Model
SERVICE MANUAL MVC-FD100/FD200
AEP Model
Level 2 UK Model
MVC-FD200
E Model
Ver 1.1 2003. 03
Japanese Model
MVC-FD100/FD200
Australian Model
Brazilian Model
MVC-FD100
SUPPLEMENT-1
File this supplement with the service manual.
(PV02-014)
• Addition of Brazilian Model (FD100)
Note: Any particular parts for Brazilian Model are not especially prepared.
Therefore, there are no differences in the contents of the service manual.
2003C0500-1
© 2003. 3
9-929-934-81 Sony EMCS Co. Published by DI Customer Center
US Model
Canadian Model
AEP Model
Level 2 UK Model
MVC-FD200
E Model
Ver 1.3 2003. 05
Japanese Model
MVC-FD100/FD200
Australian Model
Brazilian Model
MVC-FD100
SUPPLEMENT-2
(PV02-019)
• Suffix number of the following boards are Changed from [-11] to [-13].
(CD-379, CD-390, PK-61 and FU-159 board)
• Change of repair parts.
Note:
Suffix No. [-12] does not exist for CD-379, CD-390, PK-61 and FU-159 boards.
Comparison between suffix-11 and suffix-13

CD-379 board No differences
CD-390 board No differences
PK-61 board Different
FU-159 board Different
Note:
Since CD-379 board and CD-390 board are not changed,
refer to information about suffix [-11].
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
3-1. Overall Block Diagram ......................................................... 3

3-10. Power Block Diagram 2 ....................................................... 4
4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
4-2. Schematic Diagrams ..................................................... 4-1

CD-379 Schematic Diagram ......................................... 4-1
CD-390 Schematic Diagram ......................................... 4-1
PK-61 (MODE SWITCH, VIDEO OUT)
Schematic Diagram ....................................................... 4-23
PK-61 (LCD DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR)
PK-61 (BACK LIGHT DRIVE) Schematic Diagram ...... 4-27
FU-159 (DC IN) Schematic Diagram ............................ 4-29
4-3. Printed Wiring Boards ................................................... 4-35
PK-61 Printed Wiring Board .......................................... 4-35
FU-159 Printed Wiring Board ........................................ 4-39
4-5. Parts Location ............................................................... 4-42

6-1. Exploded Views ................................................................. 23
• Change of Repair Parts ............................................................ 23
6-1-1. Cabinet (Front) Section ................................................ 23
6-1-4. Cabinet (Rear) Section ................................................ 23
6-1-5. Cabinet (Rear) Assembly ............................................. 23
6-1-6. Lens Block Section ....................................................... 23
6-2. Electrical Parts List ........................................................... 24
• Different Parts List .................................................................... 24
• Change of Repair Parts ............................................................ 27
–2–
SECTION 3
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
- : Points changed portion,
(Service manual page 3-1)
Suffix-11 Suffix-13
H H
V1A, V1B, V1A, V1B
V3B, V4, V V3B, V4,
R
IC182
R
\
IC183 (2/2)
DRIVE + IRIS DRIVE + IRIS
(MECHA SHUTTER) (MECHA SHUTTER)
DRIVE DRIVE
(FC-89 (4/10)) (FC-89 (4/10))
IC184 IC184
IC185 IC185
DRIVE− DRIVE−
(FC-89 (4/10)) (FC-89 (4/10))
IRIS DRIVE IRIS DRIVE
HALL+ HALL AD HALL+ HALL AD
HALL AMP HALL AMP
Z SENS RST Z SENS RST

F SENS RST F SENS RST
IC183
(FC-89 (4/10))
IC183 (1/2)
(FC-89 (4/10))
=
ZOOM MOTOR ZOOM MOTOR
DRIVE DRIVE
FOCUS MOTOR FOCUS MOTOR
DRIVE DRIVE
IC651 TG CLK IC651 TG CLK

MC CLK MC CLK
CLOCK GEN. USB CLK CLOCK GEN. USB CLK
X651 (FC-89 (1/10)) X651 (FC-89 (1/10))
FDC CLK FDC CLK
–3–

(Service manual page 3-19)
Suffix-11 Suffix-13
Q102 - 105
\
Q102, 103, 105
CAM 15V CAM 15V
CAM −7.5V CAM −7.5V
CAM DD ON CAM DD ON
CAM P 5V CAM P 5V
CAM 3.2V CAM 3.2V

CH 3.2V CH 3.2V
L183 L183
IC184 IC185 IC184 IC185

IRIS IRIS DRIVE IRIS IRIS DRIVE
DRIVE HALL AMP DRIVE HALL AMP
(FC-89 (4/10)) HALL BIAS/GAN (FC-89 (4/10)) HALL BIAS/GAN
CONTROL CONTROL
(FC-89 (4/10)) (FC-89 (4/10))
(Service manual page 3-20E)
Suffix-11 Suffix-13
Q317, 318 Q317

\
FD100: T FD100:
CD C
CN101 CN1 CN101 CN
CAM 15V CAM 15V CA CAM 15V CAM 15V
11 10 11 10
CAM CAM
CAM −7.5V −7.5V CA CAM −7.5V −7.5V
12 9 12 9
L182 L182
CN1 Q182 CN
Q182
D 3.2V F SENS VCC F D 3.2V F SENS VCC
20 20
Z SENS VCC Z Z SENS VCC Z

7 IC183 7
IC183 IC182
FOCUS/ZOOM
MOTOR DRIVE
(FC-89 (4/10))
IRIS(MECHA
SHUTTER)
DRIVE
FOCUS/ZOOM MOTOR DRIVE,
IRIS (MECHASHUTTER)
DRIVE
=
(FC-89 (4/10)) (FC-89 (4/10))
–4–
SECTION 4
- : Points changed portion

(Suffix-13)
CD-379 (CCD IMAGER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(Service manual page 4-8, Location C-6 to E-8)
C206
0.1u
Q202
DTC144EMT2L
\
SWITCH
R209 C214
10k 0.001u
R6/ R210
P0 1M
0
4
C203
22u C204
R-0.4/P0
R-7.4/P0
R-0.4/P0
R-0.4/P0
R-7.4/P0
R-7.4/P0
16V 0.01u
R6/P0
2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PT(VL)
V5(V1A)
V6(V3A)
V1(B)
V2
V3(B)
V4
SUB
IC201 5
CCD IMAGER
IC201
MN39742PTJ-S
2
(VOUT)VO
R12.4/P0
(VDD)OD
R1.8/P0
R2.3/P0
PW
OG
RG
H1
H2
LG
3 1
(Suffix-13)
CD-390 (CCD IMAGER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(Service manual page 4-9, Location E-6 to F-8)
3
1
(8.1)<9.2>/P0
(7.8)<8.8>/P0
4 ∗R107
22:FD200
CSUB
VSHT
47:FD100:TYPE SO
GND
VDD
H2
H1
RG
VL
5 ∗R108
220k:FD200
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 1M:FD100:TYPE SO
R1.5/P0 R14.9/P0
R-7.5/P0
R1.5/P0
FD100: FD200
R107
TYPE SO
∗
R13.3/P0 C113
C107 0.1u
C111
0.1u
0.1u R108
∗
C106 C108
0.1u 2200p
R106
0.1u
2.2k:FD200
6.8k:FD100:
TYPE SO
C109
(8.1)<9.2>/P0
R102
100k 0
- Q101
DTC144EMT2L
SWITCH
4-1 CD-379, CD-390

(Suffix-13)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
SIGNAL PATH
PK-61 BOARD (1/3) D_3.2V
2
PK-61 BOARD (2/3)
VIDEO SIGNAL
FB789
VIDEO OUT

VDR782
MA8082-(K8).S0
30p PB
CN701 45P LND701 FB791

0
B AV_JACK_IN
VIDEO_GND
45 DUMMY VDR783
1000p
(Note) D785
XX
44
FLAME_GND
R704 XX
0.4
1 TRIP
10
1
0.4 1 R714
PK-61 BOARD (3/3) 22u AO 11k
9
C710 0.47u 0.5%
BI
8
R703 XX 3 1.2 R718 S711
BO R715 S702 R722 R724
C
7
SHOCK SENS 37 OUT 150k 2700 4700 39k
1.2
VCC
6
D_3.2V 36 GND
L702 3.1 S701
C706 C711
R716
A_4.9V 34 1800 1
UP RIGHT
3 SET S709
32 SET S LCD BACKLIGHT
PK-61 BOARD (2/3)
REG_GND 30 REG_GND
LEFT DOWN
D REG_GND 29
TLGU1002(TPX1,SONY)
TLYU1002(TPX1,SONY)
R710
(POWER LED(GREEN))
HDO 28
(FLASH LED(AMBER))
R705 R713 270
PANEL_V 27 680 680 R719 R717
2700 1800
D701
D703

THROUGH THE
FP-466 FLEXIBLE
VDR851
E EVER_3.2V 21
1000p
KEY_AD2 20 LND855
S703
DISK/XMS 18 LND856
POWER
MOVE/XSTILL 17 ON/OFF(CHG)
FLAME_GND
XCAM/PB_SW 16
XPWR_SW 15
(PLAY) (MOVIE)
F XPOWER_LED
XBATT_CHG_LED
13
12
FLAME_GND
HI_SO 10 HI_SO
6
FLAME_GND
PK-61 BOARD
R726
BUZZER
BATT 6 1 SP -
R727
MAKER_RECOG 5 33
1/10W
G HSY 4 HSY
BT701 BZ001
XX
REG_GND 1 PANEL_V
05 HDO
PK-61 (1/3) 4-23 4-24

(Suffix-13)
PK-61 (LCD DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-35 for PK-61 printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
PK-61 BOARD (2/3)

XX MARK:NO MOUNT
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
L903
PANEL_3.2V
47uH
IC903
L902 VREF AMP,VCO
100uH IC903
NJM062V(TE2)
C940 C907
22u XX 7.1
VCC+
B
8
10V OUT1 D904
13.6 R947 R951
PANEL_13.2V R945 470k 10k 1SV290(TPL3)
R914 R916 R920 R923 39k OUT2
3 L901
7
10uH XX XX 82k 18k IN1- 3.3
R937 R949
PK-61 BOARD 10k 7.1
IN2- C924
R984 47k R956 C928
6
(1/3) 0.01u
7.6
XX Q904 13.6 IN1+ 1.9 33k 0.001u
0.5% R927 R982 XP4601-TXE R953 L904
R946 IN2+ 10k 6.8uH
C901 XX
47k
5
10k PSIG DRIVE 4 6 C918 XX VCC- 1.9
C919
R922
4700
7 10u
0
5 2
0
6.3V XX
C925
R957 C927
4.7u
C923 R948 R950
7.6 0.1u C926 1k 56p
R928 27k
R910
68k
R913
C939 7 PSIG 3300p

22k 3 1
1u 13.6 6 4
C 7 C921
6.4
REG_GND 7 0.1u R987
2 5
BRT_R
BRT_B
33k
PSIGG
C902 R915 R917 R921 R924 R985 C935 VREF VCO

0.1u XX XX 56k 47k XX 0.1u R952 R954
0.5% Q903 1 XX XX
XP4601-TXE 3
PSIG DRIVE
B_LIM
PRG 6.4 C922 P_XVD
FRP
SBLK
R930
10k 0.1u
C903
0.1u
1.2
1.4
1.4
2.2
1.3
1.5
1.1
3.1
2 0 7
13.6
C936
9 8
3.1
1.5
3.1
1.5
36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 2.2u 3.1 3 0 0 1.5 0
D
PRG/N.C
GAMMA2
GAMMA1
WHITE.LIMIT
FRP
RGBBLK
BLACK.LIMIT
VCC2
VREF/AVE_DET
PSIGGRAY
SUB.BRT.R
SUB.BRT.B 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
BRT
R905 7 5
6
HPOS1
HPOS0
XVD
SLSH2
RPD
GND
TEST
SLSH1
CKO/TEST
CKII
TEST/CKO
SLSH0
4700 C937
2.2u
R902 CN902 24P
27k
R911
100k 7 7
C938
2.2u
R931
100 VB 10 24 TESTL
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
B.OUT VCOM
PSIG.OUT C912 2.2u
TEST 0 7 23 COM
XTEST/N.C
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1.3 7 100 VG R941 22 VST
G.OUT XX XHD VST/STH
BRIGHT 3.1 1.5
CONT C904 0.1u 2.2 7 C913 2.2u 21 VCK
G.DC.DET R933 HPOS2 VCK/XSTH
CONTRAST 3.1 2.8
E C905
R962 R963 XX
XX 0
PSIG.DET/N.C
IC901 4 ROUT
7
C914 2.2u
100
R939
VR R942
XX 3.1
XWIDE EN/CKH1
3.1
20 EN
1.6 7 19 DWN
XX 220k HPOS3 DWN/CHK2 D907 XX
R964
1.6
SUB.CONT.B
IC901
LCD DRIVE R.DC.DET
GND2 13.6
NTSC 3.1
0
NT/PAL
IC904 TESTI/XSTV
3.1
18 VDD
R906 XX VCC1 IC904
SHA 0 1.3 COM DRIVE VDD TEST/STV
16 VDDG
SYNC.OUT/RGB AMP R999 7.2 C920 V_REV 3.1 CXD3510R-T4 0.2 R974 C929 D906 RD3.3UM-T1B
XX SHA/N.C XX 4 6 R944
SHB R907 0 2.9 7.2 150k 15 VSSG
0.1u 100k
XHDO 0.3
VREV WIDE/CKV2
0
0.33u
LCD901
SHG R908 XX 0 3 R998 14 CS

HDO HST/CKV1 COLOR
AGC.OUT/Gch DL ADJ

SHG/N.C
2 LCD
AGC.FL/Bch DL ADJ

SHR/N.C R936 COMTST 0
F
REG.OUT/XRGB
C916 R940 C917 D903 12 HST

39k COMTST NC/ENB
H.FILTER.OUT
XX 22k 4.7u XX 3.1

H.FILTER.IN
16V 11 REF
XCLR NC/XPCG
R/R-Y/CR
B/B-Y/CB
PICTURE
COLOR
10 SDUT
XRGB
HCK1/XCSV
R935
11
RGT/XCSH
HCK2/PCG
G/Y
XX 9 CRext
XCLP
SBLK
8 HCK2
GND
SHR
SHG
PRG
SHB
SHA
FRP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
7 HCK1
0.3 2 2.9 R965 PSIG
2.9
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.5
1.6
1.5
1.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 XX 6 PSIG
3 XHDO VG
5 G
0.5
3.1
0.5
0.5
3.1
1.5
3.1
1.5
3 0 1.5
P_XVD VR
G P_XHD VB
4 R
XCLP
R918 R991 R993 R995 R997

C934 1u
XX XX 3 B
XX XX XX
COLOR
2 RGT
COM
R919 R992 R994 R996 R929
XCLP
SHR
SHG
SHB
SHA
R975 R977
SBLK
PRG
FRP
470k 56k 1.6
R976
33k
H IC902
R986 C908
XX 0.01u BRT 1.5
VSS
PANEL_V 4
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1
PANEL_Y 2 BRIGHT 2.9 HDO

COLOR VDDA PK-61 BOARD (1/3)
2
1.4 COLOR 3.2

BRT_R EN EN PSIG
3
C909 BRT_R
R989 0.01u BRT_B 2.2 VG
5 XX SO
4
PANEL_R-Y 2.3 BRT_B 2.6

PK-61 BOARD (1/3) CONT SI SI
I
5
1.1 CONTRAST 2.8

B_LIM SCK SCK
6
R990 C910 B.LIMIT

XX 0.01u VREF 1.3 0 COMTST
COMTST
7
PANEL_B-Y 1.3 P_GRAY 3.1

VCO NTSC NTSC
8
1.1 VCO 3.1

COM V_REV V_REV
7
9
2.1 COM 3.1

H_REV H_REV
12 11 10

1.1 BL_LEV 3.1
PSIGG VCC
BRT_TST
P_MUTE
VIDEO SIGNAL
2
C932 0.1u
SCK
XHI_SCK REC
6 EN
XCS_PANEL_D/A
PK-61 BOARD (1/3)
SI R925
05
HI_SO
15k PB
MAKER_RECOG
4-25 4-26 PK-61 (2/3)

(Suffix-13)
PK-61 (BACK LIGHT DRIVE) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-35 for PK-61 printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
PK-61 BOARD (3/3)

FP102-TL
T851
L851 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO 3 22uH 82uH
4 XX
BL_UNREG 5
7.7 1 R868
R857 1800 1
22k 8.2 1/10W ND801
BACK
7.9 2 6 LIGHT
B C852
22u
16V C853
R856
560 7.7 C864
0.015u
3
C866
12p
CN851 10P
0.22u 3.15kV
5.1 5.1
1 C856
18p
R858
560
C859
27p -0.6
2 1 4 10 10 BL_HIGH
PK-61 BOARD (1/3) 3 5 9 N.C.

C861 C862
C867
22u XX XX -0.6 8 N.C.
10V Q860 4
CPH5504-TL-E 7 N.C.
INVERTER DRIVE
BL_GND 6 N.C.
5 N.C.
D852
C Q852
UN9112J-(K8).SO
SWITCH
XX
Q861
UN9112J-(K8).SO
LED SWITCH R873
4
3
N.C.
BL_LOW
4.9 4.9 120
PANEL_4.9V 2 LED
R860
R855 10k C860 R864 1 LED_GND
120k 0.5% XX 47k
R876 0.5%
68k 0 D901
(LED)
LND851
4.9
1.2
12 4.3 1
0.01u 4700
R869
D Q851 1 2 3 4
100k
UN9214J- R861
OUT
(K8).SO 1800
VCC
IC851 C857
FB
IN
SWITCH 0 0.5%
0.022u
TL5001CDR
2.1 Q857-859
DC/DC CONTROL
BL LEVEL
C851
0.01u
Q858
IC851
2SD2216J-
QR(K8).SO
IC852
GND
RT
DTC
SCP
Q857 1
E 2SD2216J-
QR(K8).SO 1
1
CURRENT DETECT
D853
4.9 MA111-(K8).S0
8 7 6 5 1.7
3
Q853
0.9
2.4
0 DTC144EMT2L
2
0.7
R871 C865 R872
1
0 22k 0.1u 470
0.1
2.8 R862 R865 R866 IC852
3300 4700 1500 Q859 NJM2406F-TE2
R853 R854 C854 C855 Q855 R863 C863 R870

F 7
6800
0.5%
27k
0.5%
2.2u
6.3V
2.2u DTC144EMT2L
SWITCH
1500 0.1u 6800
05
PK-61 (3/3) 4-27 4-28

MVC-FD100/FD100H/FD200/FD200H MVC-FD100/FD100H/FD200/FD200H

(Suffix-13)
FU-159 (DC IN) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(Service manual page 4-37, Location C-5 to F-6)
6 5 4
Q006
XX
Q002,003,005
1 2 3 CHARGE CONTROL
R020 R004
10 1k
1/8W
8.3
8.3
Q001
SI4963DY-T1
Q002
SWITCH
-1.1
G 2SB1122-
2 ST-TD
7.8
8.3
8 S R005 R019
8 6800 47k
1 7 D
5
3 8.3
6 D
DTC144EMT2L
0
S 0
Q003
4
G
01 7.8
]
X
D002
1SS357-TPH3
01 0.022u 0
R006
1M 2.8
R021
0
Q004 Q005
K03FE(TPL3) SSM3K03FE(TPL3)
SWITCH
4-29 FU-159

(Suffix-13)
• :Uses unleaded solder. BT701
• PK-61 board is six-layer print board. However, the patterns of BATTERY,
layers 2 to 5 have not been included in the diagram. PK-61 BOARD (SIDE A) LITHIUM SECONDARY
VDR851
• Chip transistor
C 6 5 4 2 1
A
L851
LND856 + C852 B
BT701
B E 1 2 3 3 4 5 C921
A C919 + C923
L903
R945
R856
R858
C856
C859
A C918 +
R947 Q856
R948 R946
1
5 4 5
L852 L853
IC903 R857
B
C 3 LND851
R987 E
R949
8 1
R950
Q854 3
4
POWER
B
C853
ON/OFF 12 1
R865 Q857
R860
E
R864
C860
B
(CHG) C
B
R863 C
E
Q851 R866 E B
IC902
5 4
C
Q859 5 1
E
IC851 Q858 C
B
13 24
S703 5
1
IC852
8 1
C932 2
3 4
R918 Q852 C
12 Q861 T851
R869
R991 B E
E C B
C R876
C909
C908
C910
R993
R929
R995 R871
R936
C865
R873
R872
D853
R925 R997
R989
R990
R986
6 10
1 45
CN701
C866
2 C933 D906
CN702
1
D D907
C929
K A
R975
R977
R974
C931
1 24 1 10
CN902
CN851
BZ001
LND782
R782
R714
R715
C710
C711
+ C705 A
FB789
FB788
L702
C706
10 6
R703
IC702
G 1 5
R704
SE701
LND784
LND701
1-683-377- 13
05
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
PK-61 4-35 4-36

PK-61 BOARD (SIDE B)

D702
(CHARGE)
LND855
R710
A
R713
D703
R727
(POWER)
+ C867 A
C861
C862
Q853
D852
B
C
C855
C864 E
R951 C924
A
D904 B
R855
2 1 K
C925
C858
C857
R868
C928
R859
R861
R953
A C854 +
Q860 C926 R956
R867
R957
R954
C922 R952
C927
L904
3 4 5 C
R862
Q855 C851
10
R854
B E
R870 R941 36 25
R853
37 24
C863
C920 R942
9 8
R919
IC904
+ C917 A R992
D903
C934
R994
R944
48 11 13
R940
2
R996 1 12 C
C916
R935
3 1
Q905
C915 R909 R965
R908
R939 12 1
R998 13 R907
R938 48 R906
R978 R964
R999
R963 R962
IC901
C914
C938 4 7 C905
R905
C913 5 24
25 36
37
R902
C903
C937
R976
R911
C904
C912 6 C
R910
D
R982
C936
R913 Q908
C935
C902
R915
R917
R921
R928
R924 B E
R937
Q904 R922 + C901 A
C939
L902
R985
R984
B
R933
R932
R931
C907
R930
L901
Q903
R914
R916
R927
R920
R923
A C940 +
+
VDR781
R726
LND781 R725
S712
S709 LCD BACKLIGHT S710
S708
FB791 PLAY/STILL/MOVIE
F
VDR783
(MOVIE)
R716
(PLAY)
MS/FD
R717
R719
VDR782
D785
R705
2
D786 S701
1
MENU
R723 R721 R718
J781 D701
(FLASH)
S711 S707 S702
3 R724 R722
S705
G
4
LND783
VIDEO OUT
FLASH 13
1-683-377-
05
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4-37 4-38 PK-61

(Suffix-13)

• Chip transistor
C
B E
FU-159 BOARD (SIDE A) FU-159 BOARD (SIDE B)
CN003
CN004
A 12 1 9 1 A
F001
F005
F002
F003
F004
R020
R004
E B
B Q002
B
C
D002
4 3
R005
Q006
6 1
R019 Q003
C Q005 C
R021
6
5
R006
CN005
2
1
D 8 7 6 5 D
FB005
Q001
1
FB004
2 3 4
LF001
Q004
D001
R001
C002
C003
R002 C001
R008
FB001
FB003
FB002
E 1 3 1 4 E
R009
LND001
VDR001 VDR003 VDR002
CN001 CN002
LND002
1-683-376- 13 13
1-683-376-
05
05
1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1
FU-159 4-39 4-40

4-5. PARTS LOCATION

(Suffix-13)
no mark : SIDE A
* mark : SIDE B
PK-61BOARD FU-159BOARD
BT701 A-3 * R928 D-4 C001 E-2

L702 G-6 * R930 D-5
C705 G-6 L851 A-4 * R931 D-4 CN001 E-1
C706 G-6 L852 B-5 * R932 C-4 CN002 E-2
C710 G-6 L853 B-6 * R933 D-5 CN003 A-3
C711 G-6 * L901 D-3 R936 C-5 CN004 A-2
* C851 B-5 * L902 D-4 * R937 D-5 CN005 C-2
C852 A-5 L903 A-3 * R938 C-4
C853 B-4 * L904 B-2 * R939 C-4 * D002 B-2
* C854 B-5 * R940 C-4
* C855 B-5 Q851 B-4 * R944 C-3 F001 A-2
C856 B-4 Q852 C-4 R945 B-3 F002 A-2
* C857 B-5 * Q853 B-5 R947 B-2 F003 A-2
* C858 B-5 Q854 B-4 R948 B-2 F004 A-2
C859 B-5 * Q855 B-5 R949 B-2 F005 A-2
* C863 C-5 Q856 B-5 R950 B-2
* C864 B-6 Q857 B-5 * R951 B-3 FB001 E-2
C865 C-5 Q858 B-5 * R953 B-3 * FB002 E-2
C866 D-6 Q859 B-5 * R956 B-2 * FB003 E-2
* C867 A-5 * Q860 B-6 * R957 B-2
* C902 D-3 Q861 C-5 R974 D-2 LF001 D-1
* C903 D-3 * Q903 D-5 R975 D-2
* C904 D-3 * Q904 D-5 * R976 D-2 Q001 D-2
C908 C-4 * Q905 C-5 R977 D-2 * Q002 B-2
C909 C-4 * Q908 D-2 * R982 D-4 * Q003 C-2
C910 C-4 R987 B-3 Q004 D-2
* C912 D-5 * R705 F-6 * Q005 C-2
* C913 D-5 * R710 A-1 * S701 F-2
* C914 D-5 * R713 A-1 * S702 G-3 R001 E-2
* C917 C-4 R714 F-6 S703 C-1 R002 E-2
C918 B-3 R715 G-6 * S705 G-6 * R004 B-2
* C920 C-3 * R716 F-2 * S707 G-4 * R005 C-2
C921 A-2 * R717 F-2 * S708 F-5 R006 C-2
* C922 B-3 * R718 G-3 * S709 F-6 * R008 E-1
C923 A-3 * R719 F-2 * S710 F-2 R019 C-2
* C924 B-3 * R721 G-4 * S711 G-5 R020 B-2
* C925 B-3 * R722 G-5 * S712 F-1 R021 C-2
* C926 B-3 * R723 G-4
* C927 B-2 * R724 G-5 SE701 G-6
* C928 B-2 * R725 E-6
C929 D-2 * R726 E-4 T851 C-6
C931 D-3 * R727 A-3
C932 C-4 R782 F-7 * VDR782 F-7
* C934 C-4 * R853 C-4 * VDR783 F-7
* C935 D-4 * R854 B-4 VDR851 A-2
* C936 D-5 * R855 B-5
* C937 D-5 R856 B-4
* C938 D-5 R857 B-4
* C939 D-3 R858 B-4
* C940 D-4 * R859 B-5
R860 B-5
CN701 D-4 * R861 B-5
CN702 D-1 * R862 B-5
CN851 E-6 R863 B-5
CN902 D-2 R864 B-5
R865 B-5
* D701 G-6 R866 B-5
* D702 A-1 * R868 B-6
* D703 A-1 R869 C-5
* D786 F-7 * R870 C-5
D853 C-5 R871 C-5
* D904 B-2 R872 C-5
D906 D-2 R873 C-5
R876 C-5
FB788 G-7 * R902 D-3
FB789 G-6 * R905 D-3
* FB791 F-7 * R910 D-3
* R911 D-3
IC702 G-6 * R913 D-3
IC851 B-5 * R919 C-4
IC852 C-5 * R920 D-3
* IC901 D-4 * R921 D-3
IC902 B-4 * R922 D-3
IC903 B-3 * R923 D-3
* IC904 C-2 * R924 D-3
R925 C-3
* J781 G-7 * R927 D-4
4-42
4-42E
SECTION 6
REPAIR PARTS LIST

6-1. EXPLODED VIEWS
• Change of repair parts

Page Former Type New Type
6-1 BT901 1-694-297-21 TERMINAL BOARD, BATTERY BT901 1-694-297-41 TERMINAL BOARD, BATTERY
[

6-4 BZ901 1-529-739-11 BUZZER, PIEZO ELECTRIC BZ901 1-825-273-31 BUZZER, PIEZO ELECTRIC
[

6-5 215 3-058-785-01 SPRING, LOCK BUTTON 215 3-069-194-01 SPRING, LOCK BUTTON

6-6 IC101 A-7095-033-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) (FD200) IC101 A-7031-265-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) (FD200)
– 23 –
• Different Parts List
Page Suffix-11 Suffix-13
A-7078-141-A CD-379 BOARD, COMPLETE A-7078-141-A CD-379 BOARD, COMPLETE
(FD100: TYPE PA) (FD100: TYPE PA)
*********************** ***********************
< TRANSISTOR > < TRANSISTOR >

6-7
Q202 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (TX) .SO Q202 6-550-119-01 TRANSISTOR DTC144EMT2L

(FD100: TYPE SO) (FD100: TYPE SO)
A-7078-144-A CD-390 BOARD, COMPLETE (FD200) A-7078-144-A CD-390 BOARD, COMPLETE (FD200)
*********************** ***********************

6-8
A-7078-139-A FU-159 BOARD, COMPLETE A-7078-139-A FU-159 BOARD, COMPLETE

*********************** ***********************
6-16
– 24 –
PK-61
Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark
A-7078-140-A PK-61 BOARD, COMPLETE (Suffix-13) < CONNECTOR >
**********************
CN701 1-774-054-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 45P
< BATTERY > CN702 1-784-342-11 HOUSING, CONNECTOR 2P
CN851 1-764-709-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (LIF) 10P
BT701 1-756-102-22 BATTERY, LITHIUM SECONDARY CN902 1-691-362-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 24P
< CAPACITOR > < DIODE >
C705 1-119-750-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V D701 8-719-061-81 DIODE TLYU1002 (TPX1, SONY)
C706 1-115-467-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF 10% 10V (FLASH LED)
C710 1-125-891-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 10% 10V D702 8-719-061-81 DIODE TLYU1002 (TPX1, SONY)
C711 1-164-876-11 CERAMIC CHIP 120PF 5% 50V (CHARGE LED)
C851 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V D703 8-719-064-05 DIODE TLGU1002 (TPX1, SONY)
(POWER LED)
C852 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 16V D786 8-719-073-03 DIODE MA8082- (K8).S0
C853 1-165-128-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF 16V D853 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111- (K8).S0
C854 1-135-149-21 TANTALUM CHIP 2.2uF 20% 10V
C855 1-164-505-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 16V D904 8-719-084-47 DIODE 1SV290 (TPL3)
C856 1-164-856-81 CERAMIC CHIP 18PF 5% 50V D906 8-719-050-42 DIODE RD3.3UM-T1B
C857 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V < FERRITE BEAD >
C859 1-164-860-11 CERAMIC CHIP 27PF 5% 50V FB788 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0UH
C863 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V FB789 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0UH
C864 1-164-657-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.015uF 10% 50V FB791 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/10W
(Note)
0 C866 1-100-371-11 CERAMIC CHIP 12PF 5% 3.15KV < IC >
C867 1-165-897-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22UF 20% 10V
C902 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V IC702 8-759-572-54 IC TA6009FN (EL)
C903 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V IC851 8-759-521-35 IC TL5001CDR
IC852 8-759-710-82 IC NJM2406F-TE2
C904 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V IC901 6-700-684-01 IC AN12511A-BB
C908 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V IC902 8-759-364-05 IC MB40D001PFV-G-BND-ER
C910 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V IC903 8-759-327-01 IC NJM062V (TE2)
C912 1-125-889-91 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 10V IC904 8-752-405-01 IC CXD3510R-T4
C913 1-125-889-91 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 10V < JACK >
C917 1-107-686-11 TANTAL. CHIP 4.7uF 20% 16V J781 1-569-950-31 JACK (SMALL TYPE) (VIDEO OUT)
C918 1-135-259-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V
C920 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V < COIL >
C921 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V L702 1-469-527-91 INDUCTOR 47uH
C922 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V L851 1-469-524-91 INDUCTOR 4.7uH
C925 1-127-760-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 6.3V L901 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH
C927 1-164-868-11 CERAMIC CHIP 56PF 5% 50V L903 1-469-527-91 INDUCTOR 47uH
C928 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V L904 1-412-949-21 INDUCTOR 6.8uH
C931 1-109-982-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V < TRANSISTOR >
C932 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V Q851 8-729-042-72 TRANSISTOR UN9214J- (K8).SO
C934 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V Q852 8-729-042-59 TRANSISTOR UN9112J- (K8).SO
C935 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V Q853 6-550-119-01 TRANSISTOR DTC144EMT2L
C936 1-125-889-91 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 10V Q854 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR (K8).SO
C937 1-125-889-91 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 10V Q855 6-550-119-01 TRANSISTOR DTC144EMT2L
C938 1-125-889-91 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 10V Q856 8-729-823-84 TRANSISTOR FP102-TL
C939 1-127-573-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 16V Q857 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR (K8).SO
C940 1-165-897-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22UF 20% 10V Q858 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR (K8).SO
Q859 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (K8).SO
Q860 6-550-065-01 TRANSISTOR CPH5504-TL-E

(Note) Resistor is mounted to the location where Replace only with part num- Ne les remplacer que par une pièce
FB791 is printed.
– 25 –
PK-61
Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark
Q903 8-729-427-74 TRANSISTOR XP4601-TXE R930 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W
Q904 8-729-427-74 TRANSISTOR XP4601-TXE R931 1-218-941-81 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W
Q905 8-729-427-74 TRANSISTOR XP4601-TXE R932 1-218-941-81 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W
Q908 8-729-037-53 TRANSISTOR 2SA1832F-Y/GR (TPL3)
R933 1-218-941-81 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W
< RESISTOR > R936 1-218-972-11 RES-CHIP 39K 5% 1/16W
R937 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W
R713 1-218-951-11 RES-CHIP 680 5% 1/16W
R714 1-208-912-11 METAL CHIP 11K 0.5% 1/16W R940 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W
R715 1-218-978-11 RES-CHIP 120K 5% 1/16W R944 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W
R945 1-218-972-11 RES-CHIP 39K 5% 1/16W
R716 1-218-956-11 RES-CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/16W R947 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W
R718 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W
R951 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W
R724 1-218-972-11 RES-CHIP 39K 5% 1/16W
R975 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W
R727 1-216-013-00 METAL CHIP 33 5% 1/10W R976 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W
R853 1-208-703-11 METAL CHIP 6.8K 0.5% 1/16W
R856 1-218-950-11 RES-CHIP 560 5% 1/16W < SWITCH >

R857 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W
R858 1-218-950-11 RES-CHIP 560 5% 1/16W S701 1-786-039-21 SWITCH, TACTILE (MENU)
R859 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W S702 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (DISPLAY)
R860 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W S703 1-771-039-31 SWITCH, PUSH (POWR ON/OFF (CHG))
S705 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (FLASH)
R861 1-208-689-11 METAL CHIP 1.8K 0.5% 1/16W S707 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (PROGRAM AE)
R862 1-208-695-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 0.5% 1/16W
R863 1-218-955-11 RES-CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W S708 1-771-039-31 SWITCH, PUSH (PLAY)
R864 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W S709 1-762-741-11 SWITCH, SLIDE (LCD BACK LIGHT)
R865 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W S710 1-771-039-31 SWITCH, PUSH (MOVIE)
S711 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (FOCUS)
R866 1-218-955-11 RES-CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W S712 1-771-040-31 SWITCH, PUSH (MS/FD)
R868 1-216-055-00 METAL CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/10W
R869 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W < SENSOR >
R870 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W
R871 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W SE701 1-801-868-41 SENSOR, SHOCK
R872 1-218-949-11 RES-CHIP 470 5% 1/16W < TRANSFORMER >

R873 1-218-942-11 RES-CHIP 120 5% 1/16W
R876 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W 0 T851 1-435-786-31 TRANSFORMER, INVERTER
R902 1-218-970-11 RES-CHIP 27K 5% 1/16W
R905 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W < VARISTOR >
R910 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0 VDR782 1-803-974-21 VARISTOR, CHIP (1608)

R911 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W VDR783 1-801-862-11 VARISTOR, CHIP (1608)
R913 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0 VDR851 1-801-862-11 VARISTOR, CHIP (1608)
R919 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W
R920 1-218-976-11 RES-CHIP 82K 5% 1/16W
R921 1-218-974-11 RES-CHIP 56K 5% 1/16W

R922 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W
R923 1-218-968-11 RES-CHIP 18K 5% 1/16W
R924 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W
R925 1-218-967-11 RES-CHIP 15K 5% 1/16W
R927 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W

– 26 –
6-7 (FD100: TYPE SO) (FD100: TYPE SO)
A-7078-144-A CD-390 BOARD, COMPLETE (FD200) A-7078-144-A CD-390 BOARD, COMPLETE (FD200)
*********************** ***********************
< IC > < IC >
IC101 A-7095-033-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (FD200) (Note) IC101 A-7031-265-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (FD200) (Note)
6-8 [
< RESISTOR > < RESISTOR >
R107 1-208-643-11 RES-CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R107 1-218-933-11 RES-CHIP 22 5% 1/16W

(FD200)
[ (FD200)
ACCESSORIES ACCESSORIES
************ ************
0 1-475-599-11 ADAPTOR, AC (AC-L10) 0 1-475-599-15 ADAPTOR, AC (AC-L10)
6-18E [
1-792-955-11 CORD, CONNECTION 1-824-009-81 CORD, CONNECTION
(AV CONNECTING 1.5m)
[ (AV CONNECTING 1.5m)

– 27 –
2003E0500-1
9-929-934-83 Sony EMCS Co. © 2003. 5
– 28 – Published by DI Customer Center
US Model
Canadian Model
AEP Model
Level 2 UK Model
MVC-FD200
E Model
Ver 1.4 2003. 09
Australian Model
Japanese Model
MVC-FD100/FD200
Brazilian Model
MVC-FD100
SUPPLEMENT-3
(PV03-009)
• Addition of Australian Model (FD200)
Note: Any particular parts for Australian Model are not especially prepared.
Therefore, there are no differences in the contents of the service manual.
Since the accessories of the Australian Model of FD200 are common to
the Australian Model of FD100, refer to it.
The other parts can use the contents of MVC-FD100/FD100H/FD200/
FD200H service manual as it is.
2003I0500-1
© 2003. 9
9-929-934-85 Sony EMCS Co. Published by DI CS Strategy Div
Reverse 992993435.pdf
Revision History
S.M. Rev.
Ver. Date History Contents
issued
1.0 2002.01 Official Release — —
1.1 2003.03 Supplement-1 • Addition of Brazilian Model (FD100) No
(S1 PV02-014)
1.2 2003.04 Correction-1 • Correction of repair parts Yes
(C1) S.M. correction : Page 6-16
1.3 2003.05 Supplement-2 • Suffix number of the following boards are No
(S2 PV02-019) changed from [-11] to [-13].
(CD-379, CD-390, PK-61 and FU-159 board)
1.4 2003.09 Supplement-3 • Addition of Australian Model (FD200) No
(S3 PV03-009)
SERVICE MANUAL US Model
Level 3 Canadian Model
MVC-FD100/FD200
AEP Model
UK Model
MVC-FD200
Ver 1.4 2003. 09
E Model
Australian Model
Japanese Model
MVC-FD100/FD200
Brazilian Model
Photo: MVC-FD200 MVC-FD100
This service manual contains information for Japanese model as well.
When the machine needs to be repaired,

please refer to page 7 to discriminate the
type of CCD.
SPECIFICATIONS
System Recording medium General AC-L10A/L10B Capacity

Floppy disk: 5.0 Wh (700 mAh)
Image device Application AC power adaptor
3.5-inch 2HD MS-DOS Operating temperature
6.64 mm (1/2.7 type) Sony battery pack NP-F330 Power requirements
format (1.44 MB) 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
Color CCD (supplied)/F550 (Optional) 100 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
“Memory Stick” Dimensions (Approx.)
Effective pixels number Power requirements Rated output voltage
of camera Flash 7.2 V 38.4×20.6×70.8 mm
Recommended recording DC 8.4 V, 1.5 A in operating
MVC-FD100: (1 9/16×13/16×2 7/8 inches)
distance (ISO set to AUTO): Power consumption mode
Approx. 1 228 000 pixels (w/h/d)
0.5 m to 2.0 m (1 2/3 feet to (During shooting and Operating temperature
MVC-FD200: LCD backlight is on) 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F) Mass (Approx.)
Approx. 1 976 000 pixels 6 2/3 feet) MVC-FD100: 3.5 W 70 g (2 oz)
MVC-FD200: 3.6 W Storage temperature
Lens Input and Output −20°C to +60°C (−4°F to Accessories
3× zoom lens Operating temperature
f = 6.4 – 19.2 mm (9/32 –
connector 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
+140°F) AC-L10A/L10B
25/32 inches) VIDEO OUT Dimensions (Approx.) AC power adaptor (1)
Storage temperature 125×39×62 mm (5×1 9/16× Power cord (mains lead) (1)
(41 – 123 mm Minijack –20°C to +60°C (–4°F to
Video: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω, 2 1/2 inches) (w/h/d) USB cable (1)
(1 5/8 – 4 7/8 inches) when +140°F)
converted into a 35 mm still unbalanced, sync negative Mass (Approx.) NP-F330 battery pack (1)
Dimensions (Approx.) 280 g (10 oz) VIDEO connecting cable (1)
camera) USB jack 142 × 104 × 77 mm (5 1/2 ×
F = 3.8 – 3.9 mini-B Shoulder strap (1)
4 × 3 inches) (w/h/d) NP-F330 battery Lens cap (1)
Exposure control LCD screen Mass (Approx.) pack Lens cap strap (1)
Automatic exposure 645 g (1 lb 7 oz)
LCD panel Battery type CD-ROM (SPVD-008 USB
White balance (including NP-F330 battery Driver) (1)
Automatic, Indoor, Outdoor, 6.2 cm (2.5 type) Lithium ion
pack, floppy disk and lens Operating instructions (1)
Hold TFT (Thin Film Transistor Maximum output
cap, etc.)
active matrix) drive voltage
Data system DC 8.4 V Design and specifications
Movie: MPEG Total number of dots
123 200 (560×220) dots are subject to change
Still: JPEG, GIF (in TEXT Mean output voltage
DC 7.2 V without notice.
mode, Clip Motion), TIFF
MPEG
DIGITAL STILL CAMERA

SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT

À LA SÉCURITÉ!
COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED
LINE WITH MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFIÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0
AND IN THE PARTS LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE SUR LES DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE
OPERATION. REPLACE THESE COMPONENTS WITH DES PIÈCES SONT CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ
SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS APPEAR AS DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE REMPLACER CES COM-
SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS PUB- POSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈCES SONY DONT LES
LISHED BY SONY. NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU
DANS LES SUPPLÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.
SAFETY CHECK-OUT
After correcting the original service problem, perform the following
safety checks before releasing the set to the customer.
1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-sol- UNLEADED SOLDER
dered connections. Check the entire board surface for solder Boards requiring use of unleaded solder are printed with the lead-
splashes and bridges. free mark (LF) indicating the solder contains no lead.
2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are (Caution: Some printed circuit boards may not come printed with
“pinched” or contact high-wattage resistors. the lead free mark due to their particular size)
3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly transis-
tors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point them : LEAD FREE MARK
out to the customer and recommend their replacement. Unleaded solder has the following characteristics.
4. Look for parts which, though functioning, show obvious signs • Unleaded solder melts at a temperature about 40 ˚C higher than
of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and recom- ordinary solder.
mend their replacement. Ordinary soldering irons can be used but the iron tip has to be
5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified. applied to the solder joint for a slightly longer time.
Soldering irons using a temperature regulator should be set to
6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing about 350 ˚C .
• Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270 ˚C Caution: The printed pattern (copper foil) may peel away if the
during repairing. heated tip is applied for too long, so be careful!
• Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of • Strong viscosity
the circuit board (within 3 times). Unleaded solder is more viscous (sticky, less prone to flow) than
• Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when sol- ordinary solder so use caution not to let solder bridges occur
dering or unsoldering. such as on IC pins, etc.
• Usable with ordinary solder
It is best to use only unleaded solder but unleaded solder may
also be added to ordinary solder.
–2–
• Floppy disk that can be used by the MVC-FD100/FD200

• Size : 3.5-inch
• Type : 2 HD
• Capacity : 1.44 MB
• Format : MS-DOS format
(512 bytes × 18 sector)
(FD can be formatted by the MVC-FD100/FD200)
Table for differences of function

MVC-FD100H MVC-FD200H
Model MVC-FD100 MVC-FD200
(Note 2) (Note 2)
US, Canadian, US, Canadian,
Destination US US
E, Australian, J AEP, UK, E, J
Effective pixels number
Approx. 1228 k pixels Approx. 1976 k pixels Approx. 1228 k pixels Approx. 1976 k pixels
of camera
CD-379 CD-390 CD-379 CD-390
CD board (Note 1) CD-390 CD-390
(TYPE PA) (TYPE SO) (TYPE PA) (TYPE SO)
Note 1: Type of CCD imager is different according to the CD board in MVC-FD100.
Note 2: MVC-FD100H/FD200H are the same as MVC-FD100/FD200 (US model) except packing materials.
Therefore, information about MVC-FD100/FD200 (US model) in the text is applied.
–3–
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page Section Title Page
SERVICE NOTE ................................................................... 6 FC-89 (MEMORY, USB I/F, MS SOCKET)
Self-diagnosis Display .......................................................... 8 FC-89 (FDD INTERFACE) Schematic Diagram ........... 4-23
FC-89 (FDD CONTROL) Schematic Diagram .............. 4-25
1. GENERAL FC-89 (HI CONTROL) Schematic Diagram .................. 4-27
FC-89 (DC/DC CONVERTER) Schematic Diagram ..... 4-29
Introduction .............................................................................. 1-1 PK-61 (MODE SWITCH, VIDEO OUT)
Identifying the Parts ................................................................. 1-2 Schematic Diagram ....................................................... 4-31
Preparing the Power Supply ................................................... 1-2 PK-61 (LCD DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR)
Setting the Date and Time ....................................................... 1-3 Schematic Diagram ....................................................... 4-33
Inserting a Floppy Disk ............................................................ 1-4 PK-61 (BACK LIGHT DRIVE) Schematic Diagram ...... 4-35
Inserting a “Memory Stick” ...................................................... 1-4 FU-159 Schematic Diagram .......................................... 4-37
Recording Still Images ............................................................ 1-4 4-3. Printed Wiring Boards ................................................... 4-39
Recording Moving Images ...................................................... 1-6 CD-379 Printed Wiring Board ....................................... 4-39
Playing Back Still Images ........................................................ 1-6 CD-390 Printed Wiring Board ....................................... 4-41
Playing Back Moving Images .................................................. 1-6 FC-89 Printed Wiring Board .......................................... 4-43
Viewing Images Using a Computer ......................................... 1-7 PK-61 Printed Wiring Board .......................................... 4-47
Image File Storage Destinations and Image File Names ....... 1-9 FU-159 Printed Wiring Board ........................................ 4-51
Viewing Images Using “ImageMixer” ...................................... 1-10 4-4. Waveforms .................................................................... 4-53
Before Performing Advanced Operations ............................... 1-12 4-5. Parts Location ............................................................... 4-58
Various Recording ................................................................... 1-14
Various Playback ..................................................................... 1-17
Editing ..................................................................................... 1-18 5. ADJUSTMENTS
As an External Drive ................................................................ 1-20
Additional Information ............................................................. 1-21 Before Starting Adjustment ..................................................... 5-1
Troubleshooting ....................................................................... 1-22 1-1. Adjusting Items when Replacing
Warning and Notice Messages ............................................... 1-23 Main Parts and Boards .................................................. 5-2
Self-diagnosis Display ............................................................. 1-24 5-1. Camera Section Adjustments ........................................ 5-3
LCD Screen Indicators ............................................................ 1-24 1-1. Preparations Before Adjustment ................................... 5-3
1-1-1. List of Service Tools ................................................. 5-3
1-1-2. Preparations ............................................................. 5-4
2. DISASSEMBLY 1-1-3. Discharging of the Flashlight Power Supply ............ 5-4
1-1-4. Precautions .............................................................. 5-6
2-1. Cabinet (Rear) Block Assembly .................................... 2-1 1. Setting the Switch .................................................... 5-6
2-2. USB Connector Block ................................................... 2-2 2. Order of Adjustments ............................................... 5-6
2-3. FC-89 Board .................................................................. 2-2 3. Subjects .................................................................... 5-6
2-4. FDD ............................................................................... 2-3 4. Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box ....................... 5-7
2-5. FDD Block Assembly ..................................................... 2-3 1-2. Initialization of B, D, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data .................... 5-8
2-6. Lens Block Assembly .................................................... 2-4 1-2-1. Initialization of D Page Data .................................... 5-8
2-7. PK-61 Board .................................................................. 2-5 1. Initializing D Page Data ............................................ 5-8
2-8. LCD Module ................................................................... 2-5 2. Modification of D Page Data .................................... 5-8
2-9. The Way of Disassembling the FDD ............................. 2-7 3. D Page Table ............................................................ 5-9
2-10. Circuit Boards Location ................................................. 2-15 1-2-2. Initialization of B, E, F, 7,9 Page Data ..................... 5-10
1. Initializing B, E, F, 7 ,9 Page Data ........................... 5-10
2. Modification of B, E, F, 7,9 Page Data ..................... 5-10
3. B Page Table ............................................................ 5-10
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
4. E Page Table ............................................................ 5-10
5. F Page Table ............................................................ 5-11
3-1. Overall Block Diagram .................................................. 3-1 6. 7 Page Table ............................................................ 5-13
3-2. Camera Block Diagram 1 .............................................. 3-3 7. 9 Page Table ............................................................ 5-14
3-3. Camera Block Diagram 2 .............................................. 3-5 1-3. Video System Adjustments ........................................... 5-15
3-4. FDC Block Diagram ...................................................... 3-7 1. Video Sync Level Adjustment ....................................... 5-15
3-5. Lens Motor Block Diagram ............................................ 3-9 2. Video Burst Level Adjustment ....................................... 5-15
3-6. Mode Control Block Diagram ........................................ 3-11 1-4. Camera System Adjustments ........................................ 5-16
3-7. Video/USB Block Diagram ............................................ 3-13 Data Setting During Camera System Adjustments .............. 5-16
3-8. LCD Block Diagram ....................................................... 3-15 Picture Frame Setting ........................................................... 5-17
3-9. Power Block Diagram 1 ................................................. 3-17 Check on the Oscilloscope ................................................... 5-17
3-10. Power Block Diagram 2 ................................................. 3-19 1. HALL Adjustment ........................................................... 5-18
2. Flange Back Adjustment
(Using the Minipattern Box) .......................................... 5-19
4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND 3. Flange Back Adjustment
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS (Using the Flange Back Adjustment Chart and
Subject More than 500 m Away) ................................... 5-20
4-1. Frame Schematic Diagrams ......................................... 4-3 4. Flange Back Check ....................................................... 5-21
Frame Schematic Diagram (1/2) ................................... 4-3 5. F No. Compensation ..................................................... 5-22
Frame Schematic Diagram (2/2) ................................... 4-5 6. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment .................................... 5-22
4-2. Schematic Diagrams ..................................................... 4-7 7. Light Value Adjustment .................................................. 5-23
CD-379 Schematic Diagram ......................................... 4-7 8. Mixed Color Cancel Adjustment .................................... 5-24
CD-390 Schematic Diagram ......................................... 4-9 9. Auto White Balance Standard Data Input ..................... 5-24
FC-89 (CAMERA PROCESS) Schematic Diagram ...... 4-11 10. Auto White Balance Adjustment ................................... 5-25
FC-89 (CAMERA DSP) Schematic Diagram ................ 4-13 11. Auto White Balance 5800K Check ................................ 5-26
FC-89 (VIDEO, MEMORY) Schematic Diagram .......... 4-15 12. Auto White Balance 3200K Check ................................ 5-27
FC-89 (LENS DRIVE) Schematic Diagram .................. 4-17 13. Color Reproduction Adjustment .................................... 5-28
FC-89 (SH DSP) Schematic Diagram ........................... 4-19 14. Color Reproduction Check ............................................ 5-29
–4–
Section Title Page

15. CCD White Defect Compensation ................................ 5-30
16. CCD Black Defect Compensation ................................. 5-31
17. Strobe White Balance Adjustment ................................ 5-32
18. CCD Linearity Check ..................................................... 5-33
1-5. LCD System Adjustments ............................................. 5-34
1. LCD Initial Data Input .................................................... 5-35
2. VCO Adjustment (PK-61 Board) ................................... 5-36
3. Black Limit Adjustment (PK-61 Board) ......................... 5-37
4. Bright Adjustment (PK-61 Board) .................................. 5-37
5. Contrast Adjustment (PK-61 Board) ............................. 5-38
6. VG Center Adjustment (PK-61 Board) .......................... 5-38
7. P-SIG Level Adjustment (PK-61 Board) ....................... 5-39
8. V-COM Adjustment (PK-61 Board) ............................... 5-40
9. White Balance Adjustment (PK-61 Board) ................... 5-41
1-6. System Control System Adjustments ........................... 5-42
1. Battery Down Adjustment .............................................. 5-42
2. ZOOM Center Adjustment ............................................. 5-43
3. Alignment Check (FDD Unit) ......................................... 5-43
5-2. Service Mode ................................................................ 5-44
2-1. Adjusting Remote Commander ..................................... 5-44
1. Used the Adjusting Remote Commander ..................... 5-44
2. Precautions upon Using the Adjusting
Remote Commander ..................................................... 5-44
2-2. Data Process ................................................................. 5-45
2-3. Service Mode ................................................................ 5-46
1. Setting the Test Mode ................................................... 5-46
2. Bit Value Discrimination ................................................ 5-46
3. Switch Check (1) ........................................................... 5-46
4. Switch Check (2) ........................................................... 5-46
5. Switch Check (3) ........................................................... 5-47
6. LED Check .................................................................... 5-47
7. Self Diagnosis Code ...................................................... 5-47
6-1. Exploded Views ............................................................. 6-1

6-1-1. Cabinet (Front) Section ............................................ 6-1
6-1-2. Cabinet (Front) Assembly ........................................ 6-2
6-1-3. FDD Block Section ................................................... 6-3
6-1-4. Cabinet (Rear) Section ............................................ 6-4
6-1-5. Cabinet (Rear) Assembly ......................................... 6-5
6-1-6. Lens Block Section ................................................... 6-6
6-2. Electrical Parts List ........................................................ 6-7
* The color reproduction frame is shown on page 195.
–5–
SERVICE NOTE
• NOTE FOR REPAIR When remove a connector, don’t pull at wire of connector.
Make sure that the flat cable and flexible board are not cracked of
bent at the terminal.
Do not insert the cable insufficiently nor crookedly.
When installing a connector, don’t press down at wire of connector.

Cut and remove the part of gilt

which comes off at the point.
(Be careful or some pieces of
gilt may be left inside)
[Discharging of the FLASH unit’s charging capacitor] Discharging the Capacitor

Short-circuit between the positive and the negative terminals of
The charging capacitor of the FLASH unit is charged up to the charged capacitor with the short jig about 10 seconds.
maximum 300 V potential.
There is a danger of electric shock by this high voltage when the R: 1 kΩ/1 W
battery is handled by hand. The electric shock is caused by the (Part code:
charged voltage which is kept without discharging when the main 1-215-869-11)
power of the MVC-FD100/FD200 is simply turned off. There-
fore, the remaining voltage must be discharged as described be-
low.
Preparing the Short Jig

To preparing the short jig. a small clip is attached to each end of a
Capacitor
resistor of 1 kΩ /1 W (1-215-869-11).
Wrap insulating tape fully around the leads of the resistor to pre-
vent electrical shock.
1 kΩ/1 W
–6–
[CCD type discrimination] (MVC-FD100 only)
Note: About CD board, FC-89 board and CCD imager, discrimi-

nate CCD type on the machine, and replace the same type.
• Discrimination method by adjusting remote commander. • Discrimination method by CD board (Board name check).
Checking method: – CD-379 Board (Side A) –

1) Select page: 6, address: 03
2) By checking the data value of display data, the type of CCD
can be discriminated.
CD-379: TYPE PA
Data CCD Type

15 TYPE PA
17 TYPE SO
– CD-390 Board (Side A) –
CD-390: TYPE SO
–7–
[Description on Self-diagnosis Display]
Note : The “Self-diagnosis” data is backed up by the coin lithiumbattery.

The data will be lost and initialized when the coin lithium battery
is removed.

power then back on.
C:13:01
is inserted.
Flash LED
flash unit charged.
Flashing at 3.2 Hz
E:61:00
E61:10
–8–
SECTION 1 This section is extracted from MVC-
GENERAL FD100/FD200 instruction manual.
.
Regulatory Information no guarantee that interference will not occur
WARNING in a particular installation. If this equipment NOTICE FOR THE
Declaration of Conformity does cause harmful interference to radio or CUSTOMERS IN THE UNITED
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do
Trade Name: SONY television reception, which can be KINGDOM
not expose the unit to rain or Model No.: MVC-FD100 determined by turning the equipment off and
moisture. A moulded plug complying with BS 1363 is
Responsible Party:Sony Electronics Inc. on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
fitted to this equipment for your safety and
Address: 680 Kinderkamack the interference by one or more of the
For the Customers in the convenience.
Road, Oradell, NJ, following measures:
U.S.A. Should the fuse in the plug supplied need to
07649 USA — Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
be replaced, a 5 AMP fuse approved by
Telephone No.: 201-930-6972 — Increase the separation between the
ASTA or BSI to BS 1362, (i.e. marked with
equipment and receiver.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC or mark) must be used.
— Connect the equipment into an outlet on
Rules. Operation is subject to the following a circuit different from that to which the If the plug supplied with this equipment has
two conditions: (1) This device may not receiver is connected. a detachable fuse cover, be sure to attach the
cause harmful interference, and (2) this — Consult the dealer or an experienced fuse cover after you change the fuse. Never
device must accept any interference received, radio/TV technician for help. use the plug without the fuse cover. If you
including interference that may cause should lose the fuse cover, please contact
undesired operation. The supplied interface cable must be used
your nearest Sony service station.
with the equipment in order to comply with
Declaration of Conformity the limits for a digital device pursuant to
Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules. For the Customers in
Trade Name: SONY Germany
Model No.: MVC-FD200
Responsible Party:Sony Electronics Inc. For the Customers in the Directive:EMC Directive 89/336/EEC.92/
This symbol is intended to U.S.A. and Canada
alert the user to the presence Address: 680 Kinderkamack 31/EEC
of uninsulated “dangerous Road, Oradell, NJ, This equipment complies with the EMC
07649 USA RECYCLING LITHIUM-ION regulations when used under the following
voltage” within the BATTERIES
product’s enclosure that Telephone No.: 201-930-6972 circumstances:
may be of sufficient Lithium-Ion batteries are • Residential area
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC recyclable. • Business district
magnitude to constitute a Rules. Operation is subject to the following
risk of electric shock to You can help preserve our • Light-industry district
two conditions: (1) This device may not environment by returning your (This equipment complies with the EMC
persons. cause harmful interference, and (2) this used rechargeable batteries to standard regulations EN55022 Class B.)
device must accept any interference received,
This symbol is intended to the collection and recycling location nearest
including interference that may cause you.
alert the user to the presence undesired operation. Attention for the Customers in
of important operating and For more information regarding recycling of Europe
maintenance (servicing) CAUTION rechargeable batteries, call toll free
instructions in the literature This product has been tested and found
You are cautioned that any changes or 1-800-822-8837, or
accompanying the compliant with the limits sets out on the
modifications not expressly approved visit http://www.rbrc.org/.
appliance. EMC Directive for using connection cables
in this manual could void your Caution:Do not handle damaged or leaking shorter than 3 meters (9.8 feet).
If you have any questions about this product, authority to operate this equipment. Lithium-Ion batteries.
you may call: The electromagnetic fields at the specific
Sony Customer Information Center Note: CAUTION frequencies may influence the picture of this
1-800-222-SONY (7669) This equipment has been tested and found to TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT camera.
The number below is for the FCC related comply with the limits for a Class B digital USE THIS POLARIZED AC PLUG WITH
matters only. device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC AN EXTENSION CORD, RECEPTACLE OR
Rules. These limits are designed to provide OTHER OUTLET UNLESS THE BLADES
reasonable protection against harmful CAN BE FULLY INSERTED TO PREVENT
interference in a residential installation. This BLADE EXPOSURE.
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. However, there is
2 3
Be sure to read the following

Do not shake or strike the camera
In addition to malfunctions and inability to Introduction
before using your camera record images, this may render the floppy
Operating instructions disks or the “Memory Stick”s unusable or Check images after recording
Before operating the unit, please read this image data breakdown, damage or loss may
occur.
Recording still images:
manual thoroughly, and retain it for future page 18
reference. LCD screen, finder (only models
As you read through this manual, buttons Playing back still images:
with a finder) and lens page 24
and settings on the camera are shown in • The LCD screen and the finder are
capital letters. manufactured using extremely high- Deleting images (DELETE):
e.g. Press DISPLAY. precision technology so over 99.99% of page 75
Trial recording the pixels are operational for effective use.
Before you record one-time events, you may However, there may be some tiny black
want to make a trial recording to make sure points and/or bright points (white, red, Capture images with your computer
that the camera is working correctly. blue or green in color) that constantly You can copy images onto your computer and view and modify images or attach
appear on the LCD screen and the finder.
images to e-mail on your computer using the supplied USB cable and application
No compensation for contents of These points are normal in the
manufacturing process and do not affect software.
the recording
The recorded images cannot be the recording in any way. Viewing images using a computer: page 27
compensated if recording or playback • Be careful when placing the camera near a Recording still images for e-mail (E-MAIL): page 61
cannot be performed due to a trouble of your window or outdoors. Exposing the LCD
camera or recording medium. screen, the finder or the lens to direct
sunlight for long periods may cause
Notes on image data compatibility malfunctions.
of the “Memory Stick”
• This camera conforms with the Design rule Do not get the camera wet
for Camera File system universal standard When taking pictures outdoors in the rain or
established by the JEITA (Japan under similar conditions, be careful not to
Electronics and Information Technology get the camera wet. If moisture
Industries Association). You cannot play condensation occurs, refer to page 83 and
back on your camera still images recorded follow the instructions on how to remove it
on other equipment (DCR-TRV890E/ before using the camera. Records a moving picture
TRV900/TRV900E, DSC-D700, DSC- The digital still camera can record a moving picture for maximum 60 seconds. Your
Back up recommendation camera does not record sound.
D770) that does not conform with this
To avoid the potential risk of data loss,
universal standard. (These models are not Recording moving images: page 23
always copy (back up) data to a disk.
sold in some areas.)
• Playback of images recorded with your When the camera is used for long
camera on other equipment and playback periods
of images recorded or edited with other Note that the camera body may become hot.
equipment on your camera are not
guaranteed.
Precaution on copyright
Television programs, films, video tapes, and
other materials may be copyrighted.
Unauthorized recording of such materials
may be contrary to the provision of the
copyright laws.
Select from various recording modes
Creating Clip Motion Files: page 59
Recording text documents (TEXT): page 62
Recording still images as uncompressed files (TIFF): page 63
4 5
1-1
Getting started
Identifying the parts w;

See the pages in parentheses for details of operation.
Getting started
1 7
Attaching the
2 shoulder strap
3 qa
4 wa
qs
8 ws
5 wd
qd
wf
9 qf
wg
6 0 qg
wh
qh
wj
A Self-timer lamp (21) G Lens qj
qk wk
B Flash (22) H Lens cap (supplied)
ql wl
C Shutter button (18, 23) I VIDEO OUT jack (73)
D Zoom lever (20) J DC IN cover/DC IN jack (10, 13) K Photocell window for LCD T Hooks for strap
E Photocell window for flash screen
U POWER ON/OFF (CHG)
Do not block while recording. The LCD screen becomes brighter (Charge) lamp (10)
when exposed to sunlight.
F Tripod receptacle (bottom V Access lamp (18, 19)
surface) L LCD screen
W DISK EJECT lever (16)
Use a tripod with a screw length of M PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector
less than 5.5 mm (7/32 inch). You (48) X POWER switch (14)
cannot firmly secure the camera to
tripods having longer screws, and N LCD BACKLIGHT switch (20) Y Floppy disk slot (16)
may damage the camera. O (Flash) button/ Z “Memory Stick” cover/
“Memory Stick” slot (17)
(Flash) lamp (22)
wj USB cover/USB jack (29)
P FOCUS button (64)
wk Battery cover (9)
Q PROGRAM AE button (65)
wl MS /FD (“Memory Stick”/floppy
R DISPLAY button (21) disk) selector
S Control button (48)
7 8
Preparing the power supply Charging the battery pack

When the camera is turned on, you cannot charge the battery pack. Be sure to turn off
the power of the camera.
Installing the battery pack
Getting started
Your camera operates only with the NP-F330 (supplied)/F550 (optional)

“InfoLITHIUM” battery pack* (L series). See page 86 for more information about
“InfoLITHIUM” battery pack.
2 To DC IN jack
1 1 2 3 2 AC-L10A/L10B
2 AC power adaptor
1
Battery
eject lever
1 Power cord
(mains lead)
1 Open the battery cover. 3

Slide the battery cover in the direction of the arrow. Battery pack
2 Install the battery pack.

Press and hold the battery eject lever and then insert the battery pack with the v
mark facing toward the battery compartment.
1 Insert the battery pack into your camera.
3 Close the battery cover.
2 Open the DC IN cover and connect the AC power adaptor to the DC
To remove the battery pack
Open the battery cover. Slide the battery eject lever rightward, and remove the 3 Connect the power cord (mains lead) to the AC power adaptor and
battery pack. The POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp (orange) on the right of the LCD screen
Be careful not to drop the battery pack when removing it. lights up when charging begins. When the POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp goes
off, full charge is completed.
After charging the battery pack

Disconnect the AC power adaptor from the DC IN jack on your camera.
Battery eject lever Battery remaining indicator

The LCD screen on the camera shows the remaining time for which you can still
* What is “InfoLITHIUM”? record or play back images.
“InfoLITHIUM” is a lithium ion battery pack which can exchange information such as battery This indication may not be entirely accurate depending on the conditions of use and
consumption with compatible video equipment. “InfoLITHIUM” L series battery packs have the
the operating environment.
mark. “InfoLITHIUM” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between
10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F).
9 10
1-2
NP-F330 (supplied)/F550 (optional) battery pack STILL mode recording/playback when using “Memory Stick”s
When you record images in an extremely cold location or using the LCD screen, the NP-F330 (supplied) NP-F550
operating time becomes short. When using the camera in an extremely cold location,
place the battery pack in your pocket or other place to keep it warm, then insert the Battery life Number of Battery life Number of
battery pack into the camera just before recording. When using a pocket heater, take (min.) images (min.) images
Getting started
care not to let the heater directly contact the battery. Continuous
recording*
Auto power-off function Continuous
If you do not operate the camera for about three minutes during recording, the camera playback**
turns off automatically to prevent wearing down the battery pack. To use the camera
again, slide the POWER switch down to turn on the camera again. Approximate battery life and number of images that can be recorded/played back at a
temperature of 25°C (77°F) with a fully charged battery pack, 640×480 image size
Note on the POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp during charging and in NORMAL recording mode.
The POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp may flash: ∗ Recording at about 5-second intervals when using a floppy disk, or at about 3-second intervals
when using a “Memory Stick”
• When a malfunction occurs in the battery pack.
The POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp does not light up: ∗∗ Playing back single images continuously at about 2-second intervals
• When the battery pack is not installed properly.
MOVIE mode recording when using floppy disks
Charging time NP-F330 (supplied) NP-F550

Battery life (min.) Battery life (min.)
Battery pack Full charge (min.) Continuous recording Approx. 85 Approx. 180
NP-F330 (supplied) Approx. 150
NP-F550 Approx. 210 MOVIE mode recording when using “Memory Stick”s
Approximate time to charge a completely discharged battery pack at a temperature of NP-F330 (supplied) NP-F550
25°C (77°F). Battery life (min.) Battery life (min.)
Continuous recording Approx. 90 Approx. 190
Battery life and number of images that can be recorded/played back
Approximate time that can be recorded at a temperature of 25°C (77°F) and 160×112
image size with a fully charged battery pack.
STILL mode recording/playback when using floppy disks
Notes
NP-F330 (supplied) NP-F550
• The battery life and number of images will be decreased when using at low temperature, using
Battery life Number of Battery life Number of the flash, turning the power on/off frequently, or using the zoom.
(min.) images (min.) images • The capacity of the floppy disk or the “Memory Stick” is limited. The above figures are as a
guide when you continuously record/play back by replacing the floppy disk or the “Memory
Continuous Stick.”
recording* • If sufficient battery remaining time is indicated but the power runs out soon, fully charge the
Continuous battery so that the correct battery remaining time appears.
Approx. 80 Approx. 2200 Approx. 170 Approx. 4800 • Do not short the DC plug of the AC power adaptor with a metallic object, as this may cause a
playback**
malfunction.
• Do not use the DC plug of the AC power adapter in a dirty state. Wipe off any dirt with a dry
cotton wool bud. Using the DC plug in a dirty state may prevent correct charging.
11 12
Using the AC power adaptor Setting the date and time

When you first use your camera, set the date and time. If these are not set, the
CLOCK SET screen appears whenever you turn on your camera.
Getting started
POWER ON/OFF
(CHG) lamp
1
AC-L10A/L10B 1
AC power adaptor
To DC IN jack 2–8
Control button
Power cord
(mains lead)
2
1 Press and hold the green button and slide the POWER switch in the
direction of the arrow to turn on power.
1 Open the DC IN cover and connect the AC power adaptor to the DC The POWER ON/OFF (CHG) (green) lamp lights up.
2 Press v on the control button.
2 Connect the power cord (mains lead) to the AC power adaptor and The menu bar appears on the LCD screen.
Using your camera abroad

For details, see page 85. SELECT OK MENU BAR OFF
When using the AC power adaptor 3 Select [SETUP] with B on the control button,
Be sure to use it near a wall outlet (wall socket). If a malfunction occurs, disconnect then press the center z.
the plug from the wall outlet (wall socket). VIDEO OUT
/LANGUAGE
CLOCK SET
BEEP
LCD BRIGHT

SELECT CLOSE
4 Select [CLOCK SET] with v/V on the control button, then press the
center z.
VIDEO OUT CLOCK SET Y/M/D

/LANGUAGE 2002 1 1 M/D/Y
CLOCK SET 1 2:0 0:0 0AM D/M/Y
BEEP
LCD BRIGHT
2002 / 1 / 1 12 : 00 AM ENTER
CANCEL
SELECT OK SELECT OK
13 14
1-3
5 Select the desired date display format with Inserting a floppy disk
v/V on the control button, then press the
center z. CLOCK SET Y/M/D
Select from [Y/M/D] (year/month/day), [M/D/Y] M/D/Y

D/M/Y
(month/day/year), or [D/M/Y] (day/month/year). 2002 / 1 / 1 12 : 00 AM ENTER 2
Getting started
CANCEL
SELECT/ADJUST OK
6 Select the year, month, day, hour or minute

item you want to set with b/B on the control
button. CLOCK SET
The item to be set is indicated with v/V.
Y/M/D
M/D/Y
D/M/Y
2002 / 1 / 1 12 : 00 AM ENTER EJECT lock DISK EJECT lever 1

CANCEL
SELECT/ADJUST OK
7 Set the numeric value with v/V on the 1 Check that the write protect tab is set to the recordable position for
recording.
control button, then press the center z to
enter it.
After entering the number, v/V moves to the next
CLOCK SET Y/M/D
M/D/Y
Recordable/erasable
item. If you selected [D/M/Y] in step 5, set the
D/M/Y
2002 / 7 / 1 12 : 00 AM ENTER
Unrecordable/unerasable
time on a 24-hour cycle. CANCEL
SELECT/ADJUST OK
8 Select [ENTER] with B on the control button,

then press the center z at the desired
moment to begin clock movement. CLOCK SET
2 Insert the floppy disk until it clicks.
Y/M/D
The date and time are entered. M/D/Y

D/M/Y
2002 / 7 / 4 10 : 30 PM ENTER
CANCEL
Usable floppy disks
SELECT OK
• Size: 3.5-inch
• Type: 2HD (1.44 MB)
To cancel the date and time setting • Format: MS-DOS format (512 bytes × 18 sectors)
Select [CANCEL] with v/V/b/B on the control button, then press the center z. Notes
• Do not insert the media other than the floppy disks described above.
• You cannot use the optional MSAC-FD2M/FD2MA Floppy Disk Adaptor for Memory Stick.
• If the access lamp is lit, data is being read or written. Never remove the floppy disk, turn off
the power, or change the setting of the MS/FD selector while the access lamp is lit. Otherwise,
the image data could be damaged or lost.
Removing the floppy disk

While sliding the EJECT lock to the left, slide down the DISK EJECT lever.
15 16
Basic operations B Recording
Inserting a “Memory Stick” Recording still images

See page 85 for details about “Memory Stick”. Still images are recorded in JPEG format.
Slide the POWER switch down to turn on the power and insert a floppy disk or a
Getting started
1 2 3
3, 4
“Memory Stick” cover
Access lamp
1 Open the “Memory Stick” cover.
1 2
2 Insert the “Memory Stick.”
Insert the “Memory Stick” with the B mark facing toward the “Memory Stick”
slot as illustrated until it clicks.
1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to STILL.
3 Close the “Memory Stick” cover.
Removing the “Memory Stick” FD: When recording on the floppy disk.
Open the “Memory Stick” cover, then push the “Memory Stick” once lightly.
3 Press and hold the shutter button halfway down.
Notes The image has not been recorded yet at this time. The camera automatically
• Insert the “Memory Stick” firmly until it clicks, otherwise a message such as “MEMORY adjusts the exposure and focus in accordance with the subject and recording
STICK ERROR” will be displayed. conditions. When the camera finishes the automatic adjustments, the AE/AF
• If the access lamp is lit, data is being read or written. Never remove the “Memory Stick,” turn lock indicator z stops flashing, then lights up and is followed by beeps,
off the power, or change the setting of the MS/FD selector while the access lamp is lit. and the camera is ready for recording.
Otherwise, the image data could be damaged or lost. If you release the shutter button, the recording will be canceled.
• You cannot record or edit images on a “Memory Stick” if the write-protect switch is set to the
LOCK position. AE/AF lock indicator (green)
Connector flashes t lights up
Write-protect LOCK
switch
Label space
The position and shape of the write-protect switch may differ depending on the types of
“Memory Stick” used.
17 18
1-4
4 Press the shutter button fully down. Adjusting the brightness of the LCD screen
The shutter clicks. “RECORDING” appears on the LCD screen, and the image
will be recorded on the floppy disk or the “Memory Stick.” When Adjust the brightness with the [LCD BRIGHT] item in the menu settings (page 56).
“RECORDING” disappears from the LCD screen, you can start the next This adjustment does not affect the brightness of the images recorded on the floppy disk
recording. or the “Memory Stick.”
B Recording
RECORDING
RECORDING LCD BACKLIGHT switch
To turn off the LCD backlight

Set the LCD BACKLIGHT switch to OFF to save the battery.
For the number of images you can record on a floppy disk or a

Using the zoom feature
“Memory Stick”
See page 58.
Notes
• When recording bright subjects, the color of the LCD screen may change after the
AE/AF is locked. However, this will not affect the recorded image. Zoom lever
• While the image is being recorded on a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick,” the access
lamp lights. When this lamp is lit, do not shake or strike the camera. Also, do not
turn the power off, not change the position of the MS/FD selector, or not remove T side: for W side: for wide-
the battery pack/floppy disk/“Memory Stick.” Otherwise, an image data breakdown telephoto angle (subject
may occur and the floppy disk or the “Memory Stick” may become unusable. (subject appears farther
• When you press the shutter button fully down at once, the camera starts recording appears closer) away)
after the automatic adjustment is complete. However, the recording cannot be
carried out if the flash is required for the recording and the lamp (page 8) is
flashing.
If you cannot get a sharp focus on a close subject
Checking the last recorded image (Quick Review) Slide the zoom lever to the W side and move closer to the subject until the focus is
sharp (page 64).
You can check the last recorded image by clearing the menu bar from the screen
(page 49) and pressing b on the control button.
Minimum focal distance to the subject
To return to the normal recording mode W side: About 25 cm (9 7/8 inches)
Press the shutter button lightly, or select [RETURN] with b/B on the control button T side: About 80 cm (31 1/2 inches)
and then press the center z. To record even closer subjects, see page 64.
To delete the image
1 Select [DELETE] in the Quick Review screen using b/B on the control button
and press the center z.
2 Select [OK] using v/V on the control button and press the center z.
19 20
Digital zoom function Select on the LCD screen using b/B/v/V on the control button and press the
This camera has a digital zoom function. center z.
Digital zoom enlarges the image by digital processing, and it starts to function when The (self-timer) indicator appears on the LCD screen, and the subject is recorded
the zoom exceeds 3×. approximately 10 seconds after you press the shutter button. The self-timer lamp
flashes until the subject is recorded.
W T
To cancel the self-timer

The T-side of the bar shows the To cancel the self-timer, press v on the control button to display the menu bar and
digital zooming zone. select and press the center z on the control button to clear on the LCD
B Recording
screen.
Using digital zoom
• The maximum zoom magnification is 6×. Recording images with the flash
• Digital zooming deteriorates the picture quality. When digital zoom is not
necessary, set [DIGITAL ZOOM] to [OFF] in the menu settings (page 54). The initial setting is AUTO (no indication). In this mode, the flash is automatically
activated when the surroundings are dark. To change the flash mode to other than
Note AUTO, press (Flash) several times until the desired flash mode indicator appears
Digital zoom does not work for moving images. on the LCD screen.
The indicators on the LCD screen during recording

Press DISPLAY to turn on/off the indicators on the LCD screen. See page 97 for a
detailed description of the indicators.
(Flash)
Each time you press the button, the indicator changes as follows.
(No indication) t t t t (No indication)
Auto red-eye reduction : The flash strobes before recording to reduce the red-
DISPLAY eye phenomenon.
Forced flash : The flash strobes regardless of the surrounding brightness.
No flash : The flash does not strobe.
Notes You can change the amount of the flash light with [FLASH LEVEL] in the menu
• You cannot turn off the (self-timer) indicator and some of the indicators used in advanced settings (page 54).
operations.
• The indicators on the LCD screen are not recorded. Notes
• The recommended shooting distance of the built-in flash is 0.5 to 2.0 m (1 2/3 to 6 2/3 feet)
when [ISO] in the menu is [AUTO].
Using the self-timer • Attaching a conversion lens (optional) may block the light from the flash and the shadow of the
lens may be recorded.
When you use the self-timer function, the subject is recorded approximately 10 • Auto red-eye reduction may not produce the desired red-eye reduction effects depending on
seconds after you press the shutter button. individual differences, the distance to the subject, if the subject does not see the pre-strobe, or
Self-timer lamp other conditions.
Shutter button • The flash effect is not obtained easily when you use forced flash in a bright location.
Control button
21 22
1-5
B Playback
Recording moving images Playing back still images

Moving images are recorded in MPEG format. Your camera does not record sound. Slide the POWER switch down to turn on the power and insert a floppy disk or a
Slide the POWER switch down to turn on the power and insert a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick” in your camera.
Access lamp
3
B Recording
2 3, 4
Control button
1 2
1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to PLAY.
1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to MOVIE. 2 Select the playback media using the MS/FD selector.
MS: When playing back images in the “Memory Stick.”
FD: When playing back images in the floppy disk.
FD: When recording on the floppy disk. 3 Press v on the control button to display the menu bar on the LCD
screen.
3 Press the shutter button fully down.
4 Select the desired still image with the "b/B"
“REC” appears on the LCD screen, and the moving image is recorded on the control button. 60min 6/8
floppy disk or the “Memory Stick.” Press v/V/b/B on the control button to select
640
If you press the shutter button momentarily "b/B" on the LCD screen, then press b/B.
The image is recorded for 5 seconds. The recording time can be set to 10 or 15 "b: To display the preceding image.
seconds with [REC TIME SET] in the menu settings (page 53). B": To display the next image.
If you hold the shutter button down INDEX DELETE
SELECT
FILE TOOL SETUP
FILE BACK/NEXT
The image is recorded while the shutter button is held down for up to 60
seconds. However, when [IMAGE SIZE] in the menu settings is set to
[320×240], the maximum recording time is 15 seconds (page 57).
You can directly select and play back the image with b/B on the control button.
Notes
Adjusting the brightness of the LCD screen, zooming or using the self-timer • You might not be able to correctly play back images recorded with this camera on other equipment.
• You may not be able to play back images whose image sizes are larger than the maximum
See pages 20 to 22. image size that can be used with this camera for recording.
LCD screen indicators during recording LCD screen indicators during still image playback
Press DISPLAY to turn on/off the indicators on the LCD screen. Press DISPLAY to turn on/off the indicators on the LCD screen.
These indicators are not recorded. See page 97 for a detailed description of the indicators. See page 98 for a detailed description of the indicators.
23 24
Playing back moving images 5 Select the B (playback) button on the B (playback)/
LCD screen with v/V/b/B on the control X (pause) button
Slide the POWER switch down to turn on the power and insert a floppy disk or a button, then press the center z.
“Memory Stick” in your camera. The moving image is played back. 60min 160 6/8
0:05
During playback, B (playback) changes to X
(pause).
Access lamp INDEX DELETE FILE TOOL SETUP

SELECT OK
Playback bar
2 3–5
Control button
To pause playback
B Playback
Select X (pause) on the LCD screen with v/V/b/B on the control button, then press
the center z.
1
You can directly select the image with b/B on the control button, and play back the
image by pressing the center z. When you press the center z during playback,
1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to PLAY. playback is paused.
LCD screen indicators during moving image playback
2 Select the playback media using the MS/FD selector.
MS: When playing back images in the “Memory Stick.” Press DISPLAY to turn on/off the indicators on the LCD screen.
FD: When playing back images in the floppy disk. See page 98 for a detailed description of the indicators.
3 Press v on the control button to display the menu bar on the LCD
screen.
4 Select the desired moving image with the "b/B"

control button.
Moving images are displayed one size smaller 60min 160 6/8
than still images.
Press v/V/b/B on the control button to select
"b/B" on the LCD screen, then press b/B.
"b: To display the preceding image.
B": To display the next image. INDEX DELETE
SELECT
FILE TOOL SETUP
FILE BACK/NEXT
25 26
1-6
Viewing images using a • When you copy an image to the camera from your computer, which was modified with
retouching software and was converted to another file format, the “FILE ERROR” message
computer may appear and you may be unable to open the image.
• Depending on your application software, only the first frame of the Clip Motion file may be
You can view or edit image data recorded with your camera using software installed played back.
in your computer. You can also attach the image data to e-mail.
Communications with your computer (for Windows only)
Communications between your camera and your computer may not recover after
Viewing images using a floppy disk drive recovering from Suspend or Sleep.
Example: For Windows Me users • Microsoft, Windows and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
1 Turn on your computer and insert a floppy disk in the floppy disk • Macintosh, Mac OS and QuickTime are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Apple
drive of your computer. Computer, Inc.
• All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of
B Playback
2 Open “ My Computer” and double-click “ 3 1/2 Floppy (A:).” their respective companies. Furthermore, “™” and “®” are not mentioned in each case in this
manual.
3 Double-click a file to be viewed. • In this manual, the Windows 2000 Professional is referred to as “Windows 2000”, and
Windows Millennium Edition is referred to as “Windows Me”, and Windows XP Home Edition
and Windows XP Professional are referred to as “Windows XP.”
details.
It is recommended that you copy a moving image file to the hard disk of your
computer before viewing it. If you view the file directly from a floppy disk, the
image may break off.
Viewing images on Windows
Recommended computer environment
Viewing images on a computer using the USB cable OS: Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows 2000 Professional,
Windows Millennium Edition, Windows XP Home Edition, Windows XP
This section describes the method for viewing images on a computer using the
Professional
supplied USB cable.
The USB cable is used to connect the camera to a computer so that operations can
Operation is not assured in an environment upgraded to the operating systems
be performed on image files recorded in a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick” from the
described above.
computer.
CPU: MMX Pentium 200 MHz or faster
In order to use the USB cable, a USB driver must be installed in the computer
beforehand.
Windows Media Player (recommended) must be installed to play back moving
Be sure to also refer to the operation manuals for your computer and the application
pictures.
software.
Notes
Viewing images on Windows: page 28 • If you connect two or more devices that use USB to a single computer or use a hub, operation is
Viewing images on Macintosh: page 34 not guaranteed.
Notes on using your computer: page 37 • Some USB devices may not operate if they are connected to the computer at the same time as
your camera.
Notes • Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments mentioned
• Data recorded with your camera is stored in the following formats. Make sure that applications above.
that support these file formats are installed on your computer.
—Still images (other than TEXT mode, uncompressed mode, and Clip Motion): JPEG format
—Moving images: MPEG format
—Uncompressed mode still images: TIFF format
—TEXT mode/Clip Motion: GIF format
• Depending on your application software, the file size may increase when you open a still image
file.
27 28
Before operation
General procedure for viewing images
If you are using Windows 2000, log in as an administrator and then install the USB
Step 1 Installing the USB driver to the computer (page 29) driver.
Perform this step only when you view images on your computer for the
first time. 1 Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.
Close all applications you are running on your computer.
Step 2 Connecting your camera to your computer using the USB cable
(page 30) 2 Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your
computer.
Step 3 Viewing images on Windows (page 32) The title screen appears after a moment.
For Windows XP users
You do not have to install a USB driver. Windows XP recognizes the camera as a
drive as soon as it is connected it to the computer using the USB cable. Begin the
procedure from Step 2.
B Playback
The operation below is explained using Windows Me. The window screen and
operation method may be different depending on the type of OS.

Before connecting your camera to your computer, install the USB driver to the If the title screen does not appear
computer. The USB driver is included with the application software in the CD-ROM 1 Double-click “My Computer” on the Desktop.
which is supplied with your camera. 2 Double-click the CD-ROM (“ImageMixer (E:)*”).
For Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows 2000, and Windows Me
users 3 Click “USB Driver” on the screen.
Do not connect your camera to your computer yet. Be sure to The “Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Sony USB Driver” window
complete installation of the USB driver before connecting your appears.
camera to the computer. If you connect the USB cable first, you will
be unable to install the USB driver properly. 4 Follow the on-screen messages to install the USB driver.
See “If the Removable Disk does not appear” (page 33) for corrective measures if the 5 Eject the CD-ROM from the computer.
USB cable was connected before installing the driver and the driver software could
not be installed correctly.
6 Select “Yes, I want to restart my computer now” and click “Finish.”
Your computer restarts and you can connect your camera to your computer.

cable
You can connect your camera to your computer after Windows is loaded.
1 Insert a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick” in your computer and set

the MS/FD selector in accordance with the media you have
inserted.
29 30
1-7
2 Connect the AC power adaptor to your camera and turn on your Step 3 Viewing images on Windows
camera.
your computer.
3 Use the supplied dedicated USB cable to connect the USB jack
(mini-B) on your camera to the USB connector on your computer.
1 Open “My Computer” on Windows and double-click the newly
recognized drive “Removable Disk” (E:)*.
The folder in a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick” is displayed.
Computer If “Removable Disk” is not displayed, see “If the Removable Disk does not
appear” (page 33).
2 Select an image file to be viewed from the folder and double-click

the file.
To the USB To the USB jack
B Playback
connector USB cable (supplied) Push the connector in further information.
as far as it will go.
Viewing an image of a floppy disk
“USB MODE” appears on the LCD screen of your camera. Desired file type Double-click in this order
When you connect the camera for the first time, the operation automatically
starts to allow your computer to recognize the camera. Be sure to wait until the E-mail image “E-mail” folder t Image file
operation finishes. Other files Image file
See “If the Copy Wizard appears” (page 33) if you are using Windows XP.
Viewing an image of a “Memory Stick”
Cautions
• If you connect your camera to a computer with two or more USB jacks, do not connect Desired file type Double-click in this order
any other USB device excepting a keyboard and/or mouse.
• If you have a desktop computer, use the USB jack on the rear panel of the computer.
Still image “Dcim” folder t “100msdcf” folder t Image file
Moving image* “Mssony” folder t “Moml0001” folder t Image file*
Clip Motion
When you disconnect the USB cable from your computer, image
“Dcim” folder t “100msdcf” folder t Image file
when you remove a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick” from the
camera being connected to the computer using the USB E-mail image
cable, and when you switch the MS/FD selector TIFF image “Mssony” folder t “Imcif100” folder t Image file
(uncompressed)
For Windows 2000, Windows Me, and Windows XP users
1 Double-click the “Remove hardware” icon displayed at the lower you view the file directly from a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick,” the image may break
right of the desktop screen. off.
2 Click “Sony DSC” and click “Stop.”
To copy the image data to your computer
3 Confirm the drive to be removed and click “OK.” Open a folder that contains the image data to be copied, and drag and drop the image
4 Click “OK.” data to the “My Documents” (example) folder.
5 Perform operations such as disconnecting the USB cable. Caution

If you copy an image with the same filename to the same folder in your computer, a
For Windows 98 and Windows 98SE users confirmation message for overwriting the original image data will appear. If you
Perform only step 5 above. want to delete the original image and copy an image you want to drag and drop, click
“Yes.” If you want to keep the original image, click “No” and change the filename of
the image you want to drag and drop.
31 32
If the Copy Wizard appears (for Windows XP users) 3 If there is a device indicated with a question mark, delete it.
Use the following procedure to copy an image data from your camera to your 1 Click “ Sony DSC” or “ Sony Handycam”.
computer. 2 Click “Remove.” The “Confirm Device Removal” screen appears.
3 Click the “OK” button.
1 Click “Copy pictures to a folder on my computer using Microsoft
Scanner and Camera Wizard,” and then click “OK.” 4 Turn off your camera and disconnect the dedicated USB cable from
the camera and computer.
2 Follow the instructions displayed on the screen to copy an image.
5 Install the USB driver provided on the supplied CD-ROM.
Select “My Documents” (example) as the copy destination.
To copy another image, click “Finish”, disconnect the USB cable, and connect it See “Step 1 Installing the USB driver to the computer (page 29).”
again. Then, repeat the procedure in the Copy Wizard screen.
If the Removable Disk does not appear Viewing images on Macintosh

Delete a driver registered unintentionally while your camera is connected to your
B Playback
computer. See “Step 2 Connecting your camera to your computer using the USB Recommended Computer environment
cable (page 30)” for the connecting method. Perform all steps below to install the
USB driver properly. OS: Mac OS 8.5.1/8.6/9.0/9.1/9.2, Mac OS X(v10.0/v10.1)
1 Open “Device Manager” on your computer. However, note that the upgrade to Mac OS 9.0/9.1 should be used for the
For Windows 2000 users: following models.
Select “My Computer” t “Control Panel” t “System” open “Hardware” tab, — iMac with the Mac OS 8.6 factory pre-installed and a slot loading type
and then click “Device Manager.” CD-ROM drive
For Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me users: — iBook or Power Mac G4 with the Mac OS 8.6 factory pre-installed
Select “My Computer” t “Control Panel” t “System” and click “Device Mac OS X(v10.0/v10.1) users can use a USB connection only when a
Manager.” “Memory Stick” is used.
2 Check whether a USB driver is already installed. QuickTime 3.0 or newer must be installed to play back moving pictures.
Notes
• If you connect two or more devices that use USB to a single computer or use a hub, operation is
not guaranteed.
• Some USB devices may not operate if they are connected to the computer at the same time as
your camera.
• Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments mentioned
above.
1
2 General procedure for viewing images
Step 1 Installing the USB driver to the computer (page 35)
Perform this step only when you view the images on your computer for
the first time.
1 Click “Other Devices.” Step 2 Connecting your camera to your computer using the USB cable
2 Check for “ Sony DSC” or “ Sony Handycam” with a question mark.
(page 36)
Step 3 Viewing images on Macintosh (page 36)
33 34
1-8
For Mac OS 9.1/9.2 Mac OS X(v10.0/v10.1) users

You do not have to install a USB driver. Macintosh recognizes the camera as a drive
cable
as soon as it is connected it to the Macintosh using the USB cable. Begin the
procedure from Step 2. See page 30 for the procedure to connect your camera to your computer using the
USB cable.
When you disconnect the USB cable from your computer,
Before connecting your camera to your computer, install the USB driver to the when you remove a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick” from the
computer. The USB driver is included with the application software in the CD-ROM camera being connected to the computer using the USB
which is supplied with your camera. cable, and when you switch the MS/FD selector
Drag and drop the floppy disk or the “Memory Stick” icon into the recycle bin and
1 Turn on your computer and allow the Mac OS to load. then perform operations such as disconnecting the USB cable.
2 Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your For Mac OS X(v10.0) users
B Playback
computer. Turn off your computer first and then perform operations such as disconnecting the
The CD-ROM window (Pixela ImageMixer) appears. USB cable.
3 Double-click the “Setup Menu” icon in the CD-ROM window.

Step 3 Viewing images on Macintosh
The “PIXELA ImageMixer for Sony” appears.
your computer.
1 Double-click the newly recognized icon on the desktop.

The folders in a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick” are displayed.
4 Click “USB Driver” button (folder button).

2 Select and double-click the desired image file from the folder.
The folder containing the six Sony USB driver related files opens. See “Image file storage destinations and image file names” (page 38) for
further information.
5 Select the following two files and drag and drop them to the
system folder. When the message is displayed, click “OK.” Viewing an image of a floppy disk
• Sony USB Driver
• Sony USB Shim Desired file type Double-click in this order
E-mail image “E-mail” folder t Image file
6 Restart your computer. Other files Image file
35 36
Viewing an image of a “Memory Stick” Image file storage destinations

Desired file type Double-click in this order and image file names
Still image “Dcim” folder t “100msdcf ” folder t Image file
Image files recorded with your camera are grouped in folders by recording mode.
Moving image* “Mssony” folder t “Moml0001” folder t Image file* Images in a floppy disk and ones in a “Memory Stick” have different file names. The
Clip Motion meanings of the file names are as follows.
image
“Dcim” folder t “100msdcf ” folder t Image file
E-mail image When using floppy disks
TIFF image “Mssony” folder t “Imcif100” folder t Image file
(uncompressed) sss stands for any number within the range from 001 to 999.
f stands for one of the following characters below.
you view the file directly from a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick,” the image may break
B Playback
off.
S: Still image file recorded at 640×480 size
F: Still image file of more than 640×480 size
V: Moving image file recorded at 160×112 size
To copy image data to your computer W:Moving image file recorded at 320×240 size
T: Still image file recorded in TEXT mode
Open the folder that contains an image data you want to copy, and drag and drop the
C: Clip Motion file recorded in NORMAL mode
image data to the hard disk icon.
M:Clip Motion file recorded in MOBILE mode
The image file is copied to the hard disk.
For Windows Me users (The drive recognizing the floppy disk
Notes on using your computer is [A:].)
Storage destination containing still image,
Floppy disk and “Memory Stick” moving image, TEXT mode image and Clip
• Be sure to format a floppy disk and a “Memory Stick” using your camera (page 81). Motion image data
You cannot format a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick” from a computer connected
using the USB cable. Folder containing E-MAIL mode image data
• Use the DOS/V format 2HD type floppy disk. A computer cannot correctly
recognize a floppy disk other than this type.
• Do not compress the data on the “Memory Stick.” Compressed files cannot be
played back on your camera.
37 38
1-9
When using “Memory Stick”s

Location File Meaning
3 1/2 Floppy MVC-sssf.JPG • Still image file recorded normally ssss stands for any number within the range from 0001 to 9999.
[A:] • Still image file recorded in E-MAIL
mode (page 61) For Windows Me users (The drive recognizing the camera is
[D:])
MVC-sssf.411 • INDEX display file
This file can only be played back on
your camera. Folder containing still image recorded in
MVC-sssf.MPG • Moving image file normal mode, TEXT mode image and Clip
Motion image data
MVC-sssf.GIF • Still image file recorded in
— TEXT mode (page 62) Folder containing E-MAIL mode and TIFF
— Clip Motion (page 59) mode image data
B Playback
MVC-sssf.THM • Index image file recorded in
Folder containing moving image data
— TEXT mode (page 62)
— Clip Motion (page 59)
E-MAIL MVC-sssE.JPG • Small-size image file recorded in
folder E-MAIL mode (page 61) Folder File Meaning
100msdcf DSC0ssss.JPG • Still image file recorded normally
• The numerical portions of the following files are the same. • Still image file recorded in
— An image file recorded in E-MAIL mode and its corresponding small-size — E-MAIL mode (page 61)
image file — TIFF mode (page 63)
— An image file recorded in TEXT mode and its corresponding index image file
CLP0ssss.GIF • Clip Motion file recorded in NORMAL
— An image file recorded with Clip Motion and its corresponding index image file
mode (page 59)
• INDEX display files recorded in the TEXT mode or Clip Motion mode are played
back only on this camera. CLP0ssss.THM • Index image file of Clip Motion file
recorded in NORMAL mode
MBL0ssss.GIF • Clip Motion file recorded in MOBILE
mode (page 59)
MBL0ssss.THM • Index image file of Clip Motion file
recorded in MOBILE mode
TXT0ssss.GIF • Still image file recorded in TEXT mode
(page 62)
TXT0ssss.THM • Index image file of still image file
recorded in TEXT mode
39 40
Folder File Meaning Viewing images using

Imcif100 DSC0ssss.JPG • Small-size image file recorded in
E-MAIL mode (page 61) “ImageMixer”
DSC0ssss.TIF • Uncompressed image file recorded in
TIFF mode (page 63) Installing “PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony”
Moml0001 MOV0ssss.MPG • Moving image file recorded normally
You can easily view a still image and/or moving image recorded by your camera
The numerical portions of the following files are the same. using the “PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony” provided on the CD-ROM
— A small-size image file recorded in E-MAIL mode and its corresponding image supplied with your camera.
file The system requirements of your computer are indicated in the operation manual
— An uncompressed image file recorded in TIFF mode and its corresponding supplied with the CD-ROM.
image file Before operation
— An image file recorded in TEXT mode and its corresponding index image file If you are using Windows 2000 and Windows XP, log in as an administrator and then
B Playback
— An image file recorded with Clip Motion and its corresponding index image file install the USB driver.
Tips 1 Turn on your computer.
The digital still camera saves recorded images as digital data. The format of the Close all applications you are running on your computer.
saved data is called as the file format. The formats that can be used with this
camera are as follows: 2 Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your
computer.
JPEG format The title screen appears after a moment.
Most digital still cameras, operating systems of computers, and browser
software adopt this format. This format is able to compress files without If the title screen does not appear
appreciable deterioration. However, if the image is compressed and saved on 1 Double-click “My Computer” on the Desktop.
repeated occasions, the image will deteriorate. This camera records still images 2 Double-click the CD-ROM (“ImageMixer (E:)*).
using the JPEG format for normal recording. ∗ The drive symbol ((E:), etc.) may differ depending on your computer.
GIF format 3 Select “PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony” in the title screen.
Using this format, the image will not deteriorate even if the image is compressed For Windows users
and saved on repeated occasions. This format limits the number of colors used
to 256 colors. This camera records still images using the GIF format in Clip
1 Click “PIXELA ImageMixer” and install the software in
accordance with the instructions displayed on the screen.
Motion (page 59) or TEXT mode (page 62).
After confirming the information in the “Readme.txt” screen displayed at
TIFF format the end of installing process, close this screen and click “Finish.”
Stores shooting images without compression, so the image does not deteriorate. If you are using Windows XP, skip steps 2 to 4 below. Go to
Most of operating systems and applications correspond to this format. This step 4.
camera records still images using the TIFF format for the TIFF mode (page 63).
2 Click “DirectX” in the title screen.
MPEG format The “Microsoft DirectX8.0 Setup” screen appears.
This format is very typical for moving images. This camera records moving
images in the MPEG format during the recording. 3 Click “Yes.”
The “DirectX(R) Setup” screen appears.
4 Click “Install.”
The installation starts. When the installation finishes, click “OK” and
restart your computer.
41 42
1-10
For Macintosh users 2 Start “ImageMixer” on your computer.

Click the button of the language (such as English) of the version to be installed
in the title screen and then install the software in accordance with the For Windows users
instructions displayed in the screen. Open the nested windows in the following order: “Start” t “Program” t
“Pixela” t “ImageMixer” t “PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony”.
4 Remove the CD-ROM from the computer. For Macintosh users
Click “PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony” in the installed folder.
“ImageMixer” starts and the main screen is displayed.
To copy image data to your computer using “ImageMixer”
Use the following procedure of “PIXELA ImageMixer” to copy a still image or
moving image data recorded in your camera.
The procedure below is explained using screens displayed by Windows. You can
copy the image using a similar procedure for Macintosh also.
B Playback
Cautions
• Sometimes an displayed image may be interrupted when you view it on your computer using 3 Click the Capture Environment displayed on the left edge of the
the USB cable. screen.
• The screen display of your camera is not copied to your computer. The screen for copying an image is displayed.
If you encounter a trouble 4 Select a folder that contains an image to be copied.

Close “ImageMixer” and restart it to retry. Click the Import File Mode button displayed on the left of the screen and
select a folder that contains an image to be viewed from the folder list window.
A list of the images stored in the selected folder is displayed in the file
1 Prepare your camera and computer. thumbnail list window.
If the image is stored in a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick” set in your camera,
1 Turn on your computer. select “Removable Disk (E:)*”.
2 Insert a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick” in your computer and
Import Folder list Thumbnail list Capture Preferences
set the MS/FD selector in accordance with the media you have
File Mode window window button button
inserted.
button
Album list
3 Connect the AC power adaptor to your camera and turn on your window
camera.
4 Connect your camera to your computer using the USB cable.
“USB MODE” appears on the LCD screen of your camera.
43 44
5 Click the Preferences button at the top right of the screen. Viewing images using “ImageMixer”
The “Capturing/Recording Preferences” screen appears.
You can use “ImageMixer” to view the image copied to your computer.
1 Click the Album Environment button in the main screen or

image copy screen.
Select an album that contains an image you want to view.
The screen for viewing images appears.
Album File Menu
Environment button
button
B Playback
6 Select a folder in which the copied image is stored.

Click “Browse” for “Destination of Captured/Recorded Files” and click “My
Documents” (example) in the “Browse for Folder” screen that is displayed.
Then, click “OK.”
After you finish the setting, click the button at the bottom right of the
screen.
7 Click an album in the album list window.

Select an album in which you want to save a file.
2 Double-click the image to be viewed.
8 Click to select an image to be copied to your computer. The selected image is displayed.
You can select two or more images by clicking the images while holding down
the Control key for Windows (Option key for Macintosh).
To return to the image list display screen
9 Click the Capture button at the upper right of the screen.
Click the close button displayed on the upper right of the screen.
The image is copied to your computer.
You can also copy the image by dragging and dropping it from the file
thumbnail list window to the album. To print the image
1 Click an image to be printed in the image list display screen.
2 Click the File Menu button and click “Print” on the displayed
menu.
The “Print Layout Settings” screen appears.
3 Set the layout.
Set the layout you prefer. Normally, click the Print Image Only button under
the screen.
4 Click the print setup button at the lower right of the screen.
The “Print Setup” screen appears. Set the paper size and printing direction and
click “OK.”
45 46
1-11
Advanced operations
5 Click the print button at the lower right of the screen.
The “Print” screen appears. Click “OK.” Before performing advanced
The image is printed.
operations
If the image is not printed
Confirm whether the printer setting is correct. This section describes the basic control methods that are frequently used for
See the operating instructions supplied with your printer for further information. “Advanced operations.”
Viewing the on-line help of “PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony”

How to use the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector
You can find detailed information about procedures and functions of “PIXELA
ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony.” The PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector selects whether you can use your camera to
record or play back and edit images. Set the selector as follows before starting to
B Playback
For Windows users operate your camera.
1 Click the Help button at the upper right of the screen. PLAY STILL MOVIE
The “ImageMixer Help” screen appears.
2 You can access the information you want from the table of PLAY: To play back or edit
contents or click a link displayed in blue characters (site address). images
STILL: To record still images
and Clip Motion images
For Macintosh users MOVIE: To record moving
images
Use your web browser to open the manual.html file in the folder in which
ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony is installed.
To close the on-line help

Click the button for closing the window of “PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for
Sony”
How to use the control button
The control button is used to select the buttons, images and menus displayed on the
If you have any questions about “PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0
LCD screen of your camera and modify the settings. The operation methods that are
for Sony”
frequently used for “Advanced operations” are described below.
ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony is a trademark of PIXELA corporation.
Refer to the information web site at: “http://www.imagemixer.com”.
Select Set (enter)
47 48
Turning on/off the operation buttons (menu bar) on the LCD screen
How to change the menu settings
Press v to display the menu bar Some of the advanced operations for your camera are executed by selecting menu
on the LCD screen. items displayed on the LCD screen with the control button.
Press V to clear the menu bar SELECT OK MENU BAR OFF
from the LCD screen. Menu bar
Note 1–3
You cannot clear the menu bar on the INDEX screen (page 70). Control button
Selecting items or images on the LCD screen

PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector
1 Press v/V/b/B on the control

button to select the item you

want to set or the image you 1 Press v on the control button to display the menu bar.
want to display. The menu bar appears as follows according to the position of the PLAY/STILL/
The color of the selected item or the MOVIE selector.
frame of the selected image INDEX DELETE FILE TOOL SETUP STILL/MOVIE PLAY (single mode) PLAY (INDEX mode)
changes from blue to yellow. SELECT OK MENU BAR OFF
2 Press the center z on the

control button to enter the
item. VIDEO OUT
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to execute /LANGUAGE

CLOCK SET MVC–001F 2002 7 4 10:30PM
each function. BEEP
LCD BRIGHT
EFFECT FILE
SELECT OK
CAMERA SETUP
MENU BAR OFF
INDEX DELETE FILE
SELECT OK
TOOL SETUP
MENU BAR OFF
DELETE FILE
SELECT
TOOL SETUP
SINGLE DISPLAY

SELECT CLOSE
2 Select the desired item with v/V/b/B on the

control button, then press the center z.
The color of the selected item changes from blue to
The “Advanced operations” section of this manual refers to yellow, and when you press the center z, the settings VIDEO OUT
/LANGUAGE
NTSC
CLOCK SET
selecting and entering items by the above procedure as that can be set for its item are displayed. BEEP
LCD BRIGHT
“Select [item name].” Note INDEX DELETE FILE

SELECT OK
TOOL SETUP
The displayed items are changed according to the position

of the MS/FD selector.
3 Select the desired setting with v/V/b/B on the control button, then
press the center z.
To cancel the setup

Press V on the control button repeatedly until the LCD screen returns to the menu bar
display in step 1. To clear the menu bar, press V again.
49 50
1-12
Menu settings Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/

Menu items that can be modified differ depending on the positions of the PLAY/ MOVIE selector
STILL/MOVIE selector or the MS/FD selector. The LCD screen shows only the FORMAT OK Formats a “Memory Stick.” Once you PLAY
items you can operate at the moment. Initial settings are indicated with x. (When the format the “Memory Stick,” all of the STILL
MS/FD data, including protected images are MOVIE
(self-timer) selector is deleted. Be sure to check for images
set to MS.) before you format a “Memory Stick.”
Records with the self-timer (page 21).
CANCEL Cancels formatting of a “Memory
EFFECT Stick.”
Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/ FILE SERIES Assigns numbers to files in sequence STILL
MOVIE selector NUMBER even if the floppy disk or the “Memory MOVIE
Stick” is changed. Note that file
P. EFFECT SOLARIZE Sets the image special effects (page 69). STILL numbers are not in sequence between a
B&W MOVIE floppy disk and a “Memory Stick.”
SEPIA x NORMAL Resets the file number that starts from
NEG.ART 001 or 0001 each time the floppy disk or
x OFF the “Memory Stick” is changed.
DATE/ DAY & Sets whether to insert the date and time STILL CLIP Sets the image size and number of STILL

TIME TIME into the image (page 69). MOTION frames for creating GIF format
DATE animation (page 59).
x OFF 160×120 Up to 10 frames can be recorded.
(NORMAL)
80×72 Up to 2 frames can be recorded.
FILE
(MOBILE)
Item-1 Item-2 Setting Description PLAY/STILL/ CANCEL Cancels Clip Motion.
MOVIE selector
IMAGE MVC-FD100 Selects the image size when recording STILL
DISK FORMAT OK Formats a floppy disk (page 81). PLAY SIZE x 1280×960 still images.
TOOL Once you format a floppy disk, STILL (When the
all of the data, including 1280(3:2)
(When the MOVIE MS/FD
MS/FD protected images are deleted. Be 1024×768
selector is 640×480
selector is sure to check for images before set to FD.)
set to FD.) you format a floppy disk. MVC-FD200
CANCEL Cancels formatting of a floppy x 1600×1200
disk. 1600 (3:2)
1600 (ECM)
DISK OK Copies all data stored in a floppy 1024×768
COPY disk to another disk (page 79).
640×480
CANCEL Cancels the disk copy.
CANCEL Goes back to the [DISK TOOL]
item.
51 52
Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/ CAMERA

MOVIE selector
Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/
IMAGE MVC-FD100 Selects the image size when recording STILL MOVIE selector
SIZE x 1280 (FINE) still images.
ISO 400 Selects the ISO film speed. When STILL
(When the 1280(3:2) F recording under dark conditions or
MS/FD 200
1024 (FINE) 100 recording a fast-moving subject, use a
selector is 640 (FINE) high-number setting. To record high-
set to MS.) x AUTO
MVC-FD200 quality images, use a low-number
x 1600 (FINE) setting. (You can select this item only
1600 (3:2)F when the PROGRAM AE function is
1024 (FINE) canceled or spot light-metering mode is
640 (FINE) set.)
IMAGE 320×240 Selects the MPEG image size when MOVIE DIGITAL x ON Uses a digital zoom. STILL
ZOOM
SIZE x 160×112 recording moving images. OFF Does not use a digital zoom.
REC MODE TIFF Records a TIFF (uncompressed) file in STILL SHARPNESS +2 to –2 Adjusts the sharpness of the image. STILL
addition to the JPEG file when the MS/ The indicator appears (except when
FD selector is set to MS. the setting is 0).
WHITE IN DOOR Sets the white balance (page 68). STILL
TEXT Records a GIF file in black-and-white.

BALANCE OUT DOOR MOVIE
E-MAIL Records a small-size (320×240) JPEG
file in addition to the selected image HOLD
size. x AUTO
x NORMAL Records an image using the normal FLASH HIGH Makes the flash level higher than STILL
recording mode. LEVEL normal.
REC TIME 15 sec Selects the recording time for moving MOVIE x NORMAL Normal setting.
SET 10 sec images. LOW Makes the flash level lower than normal.
x 5 sec EXPOSURE +2.0EV to Adjusts the exposure before recording. STILL
–2.0EV MOVIE
SLIDE INTERVAL Sets the slide show interval. PLAY
SHOW x 3 sec/5 sec/10 sec/30 sec/1 min
(Only in TOOL
PLAY REPEAT A slide show can be repeated. (When
(single) using the floppy disk, a slide show is up Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/
mode) to approx. 20 minutes.) MOVIE selector
x ON/OFF COPY FD t FD Copies the image to a floppy disk. PLAY
START Starts the slide show. (When the FD t MS Copies the image to a “Memory Stick.”
CANCEL Cancels the slide show settings or MS/FD
selector is CANCEL Cancels copying of the image (page 78).
execution.
set to FD.)
PRINT ON Marks the still images to be printed PLAY
MARK (page 80). COPY MS t MS Copies the image to a “Memory Stick.” PLAY
(When the MS t FD Copies the image to a floppy disk.
x OFF Unmarks the print mark of the still MS/FD
images. selector is CANCEL Cancels copying of the image (page 78).
PROTECT ON Protects images against accidental PLAY set to MS.)
erasure (page 74).
x OFF Releases protection of images.
53 54
1-13
Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/ Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/

MOVIE selector MOVIE selector
RESIZE MVC-FD100 Changes the recorded image size in PLAY BEEP SHUTTER Turns on the shutter sound only. (The PLAY
(When the 1280×960 PLAY (single) mode (page 76). shutter sound is heard when you press STILL
MS/FD 1024×768 the shutter button.) MOVIE
selector is 640×480 x ON Turns on the beep/shutter sound (when
set to FD.) CANCEL you press the control button/shutter
MVC-FD200 button).
1600×1200 OFF Turns off the beep/shutter sound.
1024×768
LCD Adjusts the LCD screen brightness PLAY
640×480 BRIGHT using −/+ on the LCD screen. STILL
CANCEL
MOVIE
RESIZE MVC-FD100 Changes the recorded image size in PLAY
(When the 1280 (FINE) PLAY (single) mode (page 76). INDEX (Only in PLAY (single) mode)
MS/FD 1024 (FINE)
selector is Displays six images at a time (PLAY (INDEX) mode).
640 (FINE)
set to MS.) CANCEL
MVC-FD200 DELETE (Only in PLAY (single) mode)

1600 (FINE) Setting Description PLAY/STILL/MOVIE
1024 (FINE) selector
640 (FINE) OK Deletes the displayed image. PLAY
CANCEL
CANCEL Cancels deleting of the image.
SETUP
Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/ (Return) (Only in PLAY (INDEX) mode)
MOVIE selector Returns to PLAY (single) mode.
DEMO x STBY/ON Displayed only when you use the AC STILL
OFF power adaptor in STILL or MOVIE MOVIE
mode. When [ON] is selected, a
demonstration will start if you do not
operate your camera for about 10
minutes. To stop the demonstration, turn
off your camera.
VIDEO NTSC Sets the video output signal to NTSC PLAY
OUT mode (e.g., the U.S.A., Japan). STILL
PAL Sets the video output signal to PAL MOVIE
mode (e.g., Europe).
/ x ENGLISH Displays the menu items in English. PLAY
LANGUAGE /JPN Displays the menu items in Japanese. STILL
MOVIE
CLOCK — Sets the date and time (page 14). PLAY
SET STILL
MOVIE
55 56
B Various recording When the MS/FD selector is

The number of images or the time that you can record on a floppy disk or a
“Memory Stick” (8 MB)
set to MS
Setting the image size 1600 (FINE): 2.0 mega pixels MVC-FD100
(IMAGE SIZE) 1600 (3:2)*
Number of images to be recorded or time*1)
1024 (FINE): 0.8 mega pixels Image size Usage
640 (FINE): 0.35 mega pixels Floppy disk “Memory Stick”
(FINE): The images recorded on 1280×960 Printing in post card size Approx. 6 Approx. 12
a “Memory Stick” have a higher 1280 (3:2) Printing in 3:2 ratio Approx. 6 Approx. 12
picture quality. The size of a file
1024×768 Home page, etc. Approx. 10 Approx. 20
1 that can be recorded on a
2, 3 “Memory Stick” is also larger 640×480 Attaching to e-mail Approx. 30 Approx. 48
than that of a floppy disk. Approx. 80 sec.
(ECM): The picture quality is 320×240*2) Viewing on computer Approx. 15 sec.
lower, but more images can be
selector to STILL or MOVIE. Approx. 320 sec.
recorded. If picture quality is 160×112*2) Attaching to e-mail Approx. 60 sec.
2 Select [FILE] and then more important than the number
[IMAGE SIZE] from the menu. of images to be recorded, select MVC-FD200
[1600×1200].
3 Select the desired image size. Number of images to be recorded or time*1)
* Your camera will record an Image size Usage
Still image sizes: image using a 3:2 ratio so that it Floppy disk “Memory Stick”
• MVC-FD100 matches the horizontal and 1600×1200 Printing in size A4 Approx. 4 Approx. 8
When the MS/FD selector is vertical ratio 3:2 of print paper.
set to FD 1600 (3:2) Printing in 3:2 ratio Approx. 4 Approx. 8
Therefore, there will be no
B Various recording
1280×960: 1.2 mega pixels margin when the image is printed 1600 Recording a large
1280 (3:2)* Approx. 8 –
in the print paper. Please note (ECM) number of images
1024×768: 0.8 mega pixels that the top and bottom of the 1024×768 Home page, etc. Approx. 10 Approx. 20
640×480: 0.35 mega pixels recording range displayed on the
640×480 Attaching to e-mail Approx. 30 Approx. 48
When the MS/FD selector is LCD screen (horizontal and
set to MS vertical ratio 4:3) is cut off when Approx. 80 sec.
320×240*2) Viewing on computer Approx. 15 sec.
1280 (FINE): 1.2 mega pixels the image is recorded in your (15 sec.)*3)
1280 (3:2)*F camera. Approx. 320 sec.
1024 (FINE): 0.8 mega pixels 160×112*2) Attaching to e-mail Approx. 60 sec.
Moving image sizes: (60 sec.)*3)
640 (FINE): 0.35 mega pixels
320×240, 160×112 *1) When REC MODE is set to NORMAL.
• MVC-FD200 *2) Image size of a moving image.
When the MS/FD selector is *3) The maximum recording time in continuous recording.
set to FD
1600×1200: 2.0 mega pixels Recording time and number of images to be recorded
1600 (3:2)* The recording time and the number of images to be recorded may differ from the
1600 (ECM) above values depending on the recording conditions.
Notes
• If you try to record 55 images or more on a floppy disk, even if the remaining disk capacity is
sufficient, “DISK FULL” appears on the LCD screen and you cannot record any more images.
• If you try to record 3001 images or more on a “Memory Stick,” even if the remaining memory
capacity of the “Memory Stick” is sufficient, “NO MEMORY SPACE” appears on the LCD
screen and you cannot record any more images.
• When the TEXT mode is selected, the number of images that can be recorded will be the same
as that of [1600×1200] even if you select [1600 (ECM)] for image size.
57 58
1-14
Notes
Tips
Creating Clip Motion 4 Record the image for the first
• Reading and writing data takes more time
The size of the image is indicated by the frame.
Files than normal image recording.
pixel unit. The higher the number of 160 6
2/10 • Due to the limitations of the GIF format,
pixels, the more information is included.
Clip Motion is an animation function the number of colors for Clip Motion
So, an image that is saved using a large
images is reduced to 256 colors or less.
number of pixels is suitable for a large- that plays back still images in
Therefore, the picture quality may
format print and one that is saved using a succession. Clip Motion images are deteriorate for some images.
smaller number of pixels is suitable for played back on this camera at • The file size is reduced in MOBILE mode,
attaching to an E-mail. Normally, an approximately 0.5 s intervals. The so the picture quality deteriorates.
image is recorded in the ratio of four to
images are stored in GIF format, which • GIF files not created on this camera may
three to fit the monitor ratio. This camera
can also record the image in the ratio of is convenient for creating home pages 5 Record the image for the next not be displayed correctly.
three to two to accommodate the most or attaching images to an e-mail. frame.
common printing paper size. This is the Image recording can be repeated
same ratio as the one used in photo- 4, 5 up to the maximum number of
developing shops. recordable frames.
The frame images are
automatically recorded on the
floppy disk or the “Memory Stick”
1 when you select [FINISH] or after
2, 3 recording the maximum number of
frames.
1280×960 1280 (3:2)
1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE To stop Clip Motion creation
selector to STILL.
B Various recording
Select [RETURN] after step 3.
2 Select [FILE] and then [CLIP Note that if you record even one frame,
MOTION] from the menu. you cannot stop Clip Motion creation.
3 Select the desired mode.
The number of Clip Motion frames
160×120 (NORMAL) that you can record on a floppy
Clip Motion of up to 10 frames can disk or a “Memory Stick” (8 MB)
be recorded.
Image size Number of images
This is suitable for use on home
pages, etc. Floppy disk “Memory Stick”
80×72 (MOBILE) 160×120 Approx. Approx.
Clip Motion of up to 2 frames can (NORMAL) 7* 40*
be recorded. 80×72 Approx. Approx.
This is suitable for use with (MOBILE) 54** 400**
portable data terminals.
∗ When recording 10 frames per Clip
CANCEL Motion file
This cancels the creation of Clip ∗∗ When recording 2 frames per Clip
Motion. Motion file
59 60
MVC-FD200 MVC-FD200
Recording still Image size Number of images Recording text Image size Number of images*
images for e-mail documents (TEXT)
Floppy disk “Memory Stick” Floppy disk “Memory Stick”
(E-MAIL) Text is recorded in GIF format to
1600×1200 Approx. 3 Approx. 8 1600×1200 Minimum Minimum
The E-MAIL mode records a small- provide a clear image. 4 24
1600 (3:2) Approx. 3 Approx. 8
size (320×240) image at the same time 1600 (3:2) Minimum Minimum
as a still image. Small-size images are 1600 Approx. 7 – 3
(ECM) 5 26
convenient for e-mail transmission,
etc. Images in E-MAIL mode are 1024×768 Approx. 8 Approx. 1600 Minimum –
recorded in the JPEG format. 20 (ECM) 4
640×480 Approx. Approx. 1024×768 Minimum Minimum

3 1 11 54
22 43 2
28 121
To return to normal 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE
recording mode selector to STILL. ∗ The maximum number of recordable
1 Select [NORMAL] in step 2. images depends on the document
2 2 Select [FILE], [REC MODE],
condition, such as the amount of text
and then [TEXT] from the
portions.
menu.
To return to normal
selector to STILL. 3 Record the image.
recording mode
2 Select [FILE], [REC MODE], Select [NORMAL] in step 2.
and then [E-MAIL] from the
B Various recording
The number of images that you

menu. Notes
can record on a floppy disk or a
3 Record the image. “Memory Stick” (8 MB) in TEXT • If the subject is not evenly illuminated, you
mode may be unable to record a clear image.
• Writing and reading data take more time
MVC-FD100 than normal recording.
The number of images that you • When TEXT mode is selected, you cannot
can record on a floppy disk or a Image size Number of images* use the PROGRAM AE function.
“Memory Stick” (8 MB) in E-MAIL Floppy disk “Memory Stick”
mode
MVC-FD100 7 36
Image size Number of images 1280 (3:2) Minimum Minimum
8 40
Floppy disk “Memory Stick”
11 54
12
1280 (3:2) Approx. 5 Approx.
28 121
12
20
640×480 Approx. Approx.
22 43
61 62
1-15
MVC-FD200
Recording still Image size Number of images Recording images in Setting the distance
images as macro to the subject
1600×1200 1
uncompressed files Use this mode when you record a small The focus is automatically adjusted.
1600 (3:2) 1
(TIFF) subject such as flower or insect from This function is useful when you
This mode simultaneously records still To return to normal close up. record a subject by presetting the
images in both TIFF format recording mode recording distance in accordance with
(uncompressed) and JPEG format the distance to the subject or the auto
Select [NORMAL] in step 3. focus does not work well.
(compressed) when using a “Memory
Stick.” Notes
Since this mode records images • JPEG images are recorded using the image
without compressing data, the quality size selected in the [IMAGE SIZE] menu
1
of picture will hardly deteriorate. Use (page 57). Images are automatically 2
this mode when you want to print recorded using the image size [1280×960]
unless [1280 (3:2)] is selected for MVC- 1
images with photograph picture
FD100.
quality. selector to STILL or MOVIE. 2
Images are automatically recorded using
4
the image size [1600×1200] unless [1600
(3:2)] is selected for MVC-FD200.
until the (macro) indicator
• Writing data takes more time than in appears on the LCD screen. selector to STILL or MOVIE.
normal recording. With the zoom lever set to the W
side, you can shoot a subject that is
until a sharp focus is
2 about 3 cm (1 3/16 inch) away achieved.
1
B Various recording
3 from the lens surface in macro The 9 (manual focus) indicator
mode. appears on the LCD screen. You
can select from six focus settings:
1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE (macro), 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 3.0 m,
selector to STILL. To return to normal 7.0 m, and ∞ (infinity).
recording mode
2 Set the MS/FD selector to MS.
Press FOCUS repeatedly until both the
3 Select [FILE], [REC MODE], and 9 indicators disappear. To reactivate auto focusing
and then [TIFF] from the Press FOCUS repeatedly until both the
menu. Notes and 9 indicators disappear.
• You cannot record images in macro with
4 Record the image. the following PROGRAM AE modes: Notes
—Landscape mode • Focal point information may not
—Panfocus mode completely show the correct distance. Use
The number of images that you • You cannot record images in macro if the the information as a guide.
can record on a “Memory Stick” indicator appears. • Focal point information does not show the
correct distance when attaching the
(8 MB) in TIFF mode
conversion lens (optional).
MVC-FD100 • If you shoot a subject within 0.8 m
(31 1/2 inches) while the zoom lever is set
Image size Number of images to T side, you cannot get a clear focus. In
1280×960 1 such cases, the focal point information
flashes. Move the zoom lever to the W side
1280 (3:2) 2 until the indicator stops flashing.
• You cannot use this function if you have
selected the Panfocus mode in the
PROGRAM AE function.
63 64
Tips
Using the PROGRAM Spot light-metering mode Under normal recording conditions, the
AE function Select this mode when there is camera automatically makes various
backlight or when there is strong adjustments, such as those for the focus,
contrast between the subject and iris, exposure, and white balance, as it
the background, etc. Position the shoots. However, you may not be able to
point you want to record at the spot carry out your desired shooting
depending on shooting conditions. The
light-metering cross hair. PROGRAM AE function provides you
with near-optimum adjustments to suit
1 LCD screen your shooting situation.

selector to STILL. Spot light-metering
cross hair
2 Press PROGRAM AE
repeatedly to select the
desired PROGRAM AE mode.
To cancel PROGRAM AE
Twilight mode Press PROGRAM AE repeatedly until
Suppresses the blurring of colors the indicator on the LCD screen goes
of a bright subject in a dark place out.
B Various recording
so that you can record the subject Notes

without losing the dark atmosphere • You can focus only on distant subjects in
of the surroundings. Landscape mode.
• In Panfocus mode, the zoom position is set
Twilight plus mode to the W side and focus is fixed.
Increases the effectiveness of the • When you record in Twilight plus mode,
we recommend that you use a tripod to
twilight mode function. prevent shaking.
• Set the forced flash when you use the
Landscape mode flash in the following modes:
Focuses only on a distant subject to – Twilight mode
record landscapes, etc.
– Twilight plus mode
– Landscape mode
• You cannot use the PROGRAM AE
Panfocus mode function when the moving or still image of
Changes the focus quickly and TEXT mode is recorded.
• The ISO film speed is set to AUTO when a
simply from a close subject to a PROGRAM AE function other than the
distant subject. spot light-metering mode is set.
65 66
1-16
Tips To reactivate auto adjustment

Adjusting the Normally, the camera automatically
Adjusting the white Select [AUTO] in step 3.
exposure adjusts the exposure. If the color of the balance (WHITE
BALANCE) Tips
(EXPOSURE) image is too dark or bright as shown
The image is affected by the lighting
below, we recommend that you adjust the
exposure manually. When recording a When the white balance mode is set to conditions. The image looks blue under
backlighted subject or a subject in the AUTO, your camera automatically sets sunlight in the summer, and looks red
snow, set the exposure toward +, and under mercury lamps. Human eyes can
white balance in accordance with the resolve these problems. However, the
when recording a subject with extremely
bright illumination such as a spotlight, set recording conditions and adjusts the camera cannot resolve the problem
it toward –. balance of all colors in an image. If without making adjustments. Normally,
1 you want to fix the recording
2, 3 the camera adjusts automatically, but if
Set the exposure toward + conditions or record an image in the image appears in strange colors, we
specific lighting conditions, you can recommend that you change the white
set the desired white balance mode. balance mode.
selector to STILL or MOVIE.
[EXPOSURE] from the menu.
3 Select the desired exposure
1
value. 2, 3
Set the exposure toward –
Adjust the exposure value while
checking the brightness of the
background. You can select values 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE
ranging from +2.0 EV to −2.0 EV selector to STILL or MOVIE.
B Various recording
in steps of 1/3 EV.
[WHITE BALANCE] from the
Note
menu.
If a subject is under extremely bright or dark
situations, or the flash is used, the exposure
3 Select the desired white
balance setting.
adjustment may not be effective.
IN DOOR (n)
• Places where the lighting
condition changes quickly
• Under bright lighting such as
photography studios
• Under sodium or mercury lamps
OUT DOOR ( )
Recording a sunrise/sunset, night
scene, neon signs, or fireworks
HOLD (HOLD)
Retains the adjusted white balance
value
AUTO (No indicator)
Adjusts the white balance
automatically
67 68
B Various playback To display the next

Recording the date Enjoying picture (previous) index screen
and time on the still effects (PICTURE Playing back six Select v/V at the lower-left on the
image (DATE/TIME) EFFECT) LCD screen.
images at once
4 (INDEX)
Displays the previous index
screen.
Displays the next index screen.
1
2, 3 1 To return to normal playback
2, 3 (single image)
1
1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE 2 • Select the desired image with the
selector to STILL. control button.
1 • Select (Return).
2 Select [EFFECT] and then Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE
[DATE/TIME] from the menu. selector to STILL or MOVIE.
1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE Note
3 Select the date and time. 2 Select [EFFECT] and then selector to PLAY. When viewing an image recorded in Clip
[P. EFFECT] from the menu. Motion or TEXT mode on the INDEX
DAY & TIME 2 Select [INDEX] on the LCD screen, the image may appear different from
Superimposes the date, hour, and 3 Select the desired mode. screen. the actual image.
minute. Six images are displayed at once
SOLARIZE (index screen).
DATE The light contrast is clearer and the Only the first frame of Clip Motion
B Various recording
Superimposes the year, month, and picture looks like an illustration. files is displayed.
day.
B&W
OFF The picture is monochrome (black
Does not superimposes the date and white).
and time.
SEPIA
4 Record the image. The picture is sepia-toned like an MVC-001F 2002 7 4 12:30PM
DELETE FILE
SELECT
TOOL SETUP
SINGLE DISPLAY
The date and time do not appear on old photograph.
the LCD screen during shooting. This shows the position of the
NEG.ART currently displayed images relative
These appear during playback
The color and brightness of the to all the recorded images.
only.
picture are reversed as in a
negative. The following marks are displayed
on each image according to the
OFF image type and settings.
Does not use the picture effect : Moving image file
function. : E-mail file
2002 7 4 : Print mark
- : Protect mark
To cancel picture effect TEXT: TEXT file
Notes Select [OFF] in step 3. TIFF: TIFF file
• When [DATE] is selected in step 3, the CLIP: Clip Motion file
date is imposed in the order set by the (No mark): Normal recording (no
CLOCK SET item (page 14). settings)
• The date and time are not imposed onto
Clip Motion images.
69 70
1-17
Notes To cancel the slide show

Enlarging a part of the • You cannot trim moving images, still Playing back the still Select [CANCEL] in step 2 or 3.
still image (Zoom and images recorded in Clip Motion, TEXT images in order
mode, or uncompressed images.
trimming) • Zoom scaling is up to 5× regardless of the (SLIDE SHOW) To skip to the next/previous
original image size. image during the slide show
• The quality of enlarged images may be This function plays back the recorded Select \b/B\ at the lower-left on the
3 deteriorated. still images one after another. LCD screen.
• The original data is left even if you enlarge This function is useful for checking the
the image. recorded images or for presentations, Note
1 • The enlarged image is recorded as the etc. The interval setting time may vary
4 newest file. depending on the image size.

selector to PLAY.
1
2 Display the image to be 2, 3
enlarged.
3 Zoom in/out the image with

the zoom lever. 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE
The zoom scaling indicator selector to PLAY.
appears on the LCD screen.
2 Select [FILE] and then [SLIDE
4 Press the control button SHOW] from the menu.
repeatedly to select the Set the following items.
desired portion of the image. INTERVAL
v : The image moves downward You can select from 1 min (one
V : The image moves upward
B Various playback
minute), 30 sec (30 seconds),
b : The image moves rightward 10 sec (10 seconds), 5 sec
B : The image moves leftward (5 seconds), or 3 sec (3 seconds).
REPEAT
To return to the normal size ON: Plays back images
Zoom out with the zoom lever until the continuously in a loop until
zoom scaling indicator ( ×1.1) [RETURN] is selected (the slide
disappears from the screen, or simply show stops automatically after
press the center z. approximately 20 minutes* when
the image is played back from a
To record an enlarged image floppy disk).
(trimming) OFF: After all images have been
1 Enlarge the image. played back, the slide show ends.
2 Press the shutter button. The image ∗ The slide show does not end until all
is recorded at 640×480 size and the the images are played back, even if it
image on the LCD screen returns to takes more than 20 minutes.
the normal size after recording.
3 Select [START].
The slide show begins.
71 72
B Editing
Viewing images on a 2 Select [FILE], [PROTECT],
and then [ALL] or [SELECT]
TV screen Preventing accidental from the menu.
You can play back the recorded images erasure (PROTECT)
by connecting your camera to the TV.
3 When you select [ALL]
This function is used to prevent any Select [ON].
Before connecting your camera, be All the images in the floppy disk or
valuable images that you have
sure to turn off the TV, connect the the “Memory Stick” are protected.
recorded from being erased
VIDEO connecting cable, and turn on
accidentally. When you select [SELECT]
the TV.
The - (protect) indicator appears on Select all the images to be
Set the TV/VIDEO protected images.
switch to protected with the control button,
“VIDEO”. Note: then select [ENTER]. The selected
If you format a floppy disk or a “Memory
images are protected.
To VIDEO Stick”, all images are erased even when they
INPUT jack are protected.
VIDEO
connecting
cable 0001-0006/0040
(supplied) SELECT
PROTECT
OK
ENTER CANCEL
1
2, 3
To VIDEO OUT jack To release protection
If you selected [ALL] in step 2, select
In single mode [OFF]. If you selected [SELECT] in
1 Connect the VIDEO step 2, select the images to be
connecting cable to the unprotected with the control button,
B Various playback
VIDEO OUT jack of your selector to PLAY, then then select [ENTER].
camera and to the VIDEO display the image to be
INPUT jack of the TV. protected.
2 Turn on the TV and start
playback on your camera. 2 Select [FILE], [PROTECT],
and then [ON] from the menu.
The playback image appears on the
The displayed image is protected
TV screen.
and the - indicator appears.
Note
• You cannot use a TV that has an antenna To release protection
(aerial) connector only. Select [OFF] in step 2.
• When viewing a still image on the TV, the
black band may appear around the image.
In INDEX mode

73 74
1-18
To cancel changing the size

Deleting images 3 When you select [ALL] Changing the Select [CANCEL] in step 3.
Select [ENTER].
(DELETE) All the unprotected images are recorded still image
size (RESIZE) Notes
You can delete the images that are no deleted. • You cannot change the size of images
longer required. When you select [SELECT] Use this function when you need a recorded in TEXT mode, moving images,
Protected images cannot be deleted. small-size image to attach it to an uncompressed images, or Clip Motion
Select all the images to be deleted
images.
with the control button, then select E-mail. The original image is retained • When you change from a small size to a
[ENTER]. The (delete) even after resizing. The resized image large size, the picture quality deteriorates.
indicator appears on the selected is recorded as the newest file. • If you resize the recorded still image, the
images and these images are space remaining on a floppy disk or a
deleted. “Memory Stick” will decrease.
1 • You may not be able to resize a recorded
2, 3 still image if there is insufficient space
remaining on a floppy disk or a “Memory
Stick.”
In single mode 1 • You cannot resize the recorded still image
2, 3 to an image size of 3:2.
0001-0006/0040
1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE SELECT

DELETE ENTER CANCEL
OK
• If you resize a 3:2 size recorded still image
to another size, a black band will be
display the image to be 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE displayed above and below the resized
image.
deleted. selector to PLAY, then
To cancel deleting display the image of which • You cannot resize the recorded still image
you want to change the size. in the index screen.
Select [CANCEL] in step 2 or 3.
[OK] from the menu.
The image is deleted. Note 2 Select [TOOL] and then
If there are files on the “Memory Stick” [RESIZE] from the menu.
with names having the same last 4 digits as
the file name of the image to be deleted, 3 Select the desired size.
these files are also deleted at the same time. • MVC-FD100:
In INDEX mode
set to FD
1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE 1280×960, 1024×768, 640×480
B Editing When the MS/FD selector is
set to MS
1280 (FINE), 1024 (FINE),
640 (FINE)
[ALL] or [SELECT] from the
menu. • MVC-FD200:
set to FD
1600×1200, 1024×768, 640×480
set to MS
1600 (FINE), 1024 (FINE),
640 (FINE)
The resized image is recorded,
then the display returns to the
image display before resizing.
75 76
4 Select the media that the In INDEX mode 5 When you select [ALL]*
Copying images image will be copied onto. Select [OK].
(COPY) • When the MS/FD selector is ∗ [ALL] can be selected only when
set to FD. selecting [FD t FD] or [FD t
Copies images to another floppy disk
or “Memory Stick.” FD t FD MS].
Copies to the floppy disk
When you select [SELECT]**
FD t MS 1
In single mode Select all the images to be copied
Copies to the “Memory Stick” 2 6 with the control button. The
• When the MS/FD selector is 3, 4, 5 mark appears on the selected
set to MS. images and then select [ENTER].
MS t MS ∗∗ When selecting [MS t FD], the
Copies to the “Memory Stick” 1 Select the media using the
necessary number of floppy disks
MS/FD selector.
MS t FD appears after selecting [ENTER].
1 Copies to the floppy disk Select [OK] again.
2 5 2 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE
3, 4 When you select [FD t MS] or display the INDEX screen. 6 Insert or change the floppy
[MS t FD], the camera disk or the “Memory Stick”
automatically starts copying if the following the messages on
1 Select the media using the
floppy disk and “Memory Stick”
3 Select [TOOL], and then the LCD screen.
MS/FD selector. [COPY] from the menu. “RECORDING” appears. When
are inserted.
2 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE 4 Select the media that the “COMPLETE” appears.
selector to PLAY, then 5 Insert or change the floppy image will be copied onto.
To end copying, select [EXIT].
display the image to be disk or the “Memory Stick” • When the MS/FD selector is
copied. following the messages on set to FD.
the LCD screen. FD t FD
“RECORDING” appears. When To continue copying the
3 Select [TOOL], and then
Copies to the floppy disk image to other floppy disks
[COPY] from the menu. FD t MS or “Memory Stick”s
“COMPLETE” appears. Copies to the “Memory Stick”
To end copying, select [EXIT]. After “COMPLETE” appears in step 6,
• When the MS/FD selector is select [CONTINUE] and repeat step 6.
set to MS.
To continue copying the MS t MS When selecting [MS t FD], if the
B Editing
image to other floppy disks Copies to the “Memory Stick” amount of total images that will be
or “Memory Stick”s MS t FD copied is too large to copy to one
After “COMPLETE” appears in step 5, Copies to the floppy disk floppy disk, the images will be copied
select [CONTINUE] and repeat step 5 using multiple floppy disks.
above.
To cancel copying partway
Select [CANCEL].
77 78
1-19
Notes
• You cannot copy uncompressed images. Copying all the 4 Insert another floppy disk. Selecting still images
• You cannot copy the image that is bigger “RECORDING” appears. When
than 1.4 MB.
information on your copying is completed, to print (PRINT MARK)
• You cannot copy the images that the total floppy disk (DISK “COMPLETE” appears. You can mark a print mark on still
amount of the images is bigger than COPY) To end copying, select [EXIT]. images recorded with your camera.
1.4 MB. If “NOT ENOUGH MEMORY”
appears or flashes on the INDEX You can copy to another disk not only This mark is convenient when you
screen, cancel some images to copy and try the images you have recorded with have images printed at a shop that
To continue copying to other conforms with the DPOF (Digital Print
again. your camera but also various files you floppy disks Order Format) standard.
• If you eject and insert the floppy disk or have created in other software with
the “Memory Stick” without selecting After “COMPLETE” appears in step 4,
[EXIT] after “COMPLETE” appears, the
your computer. select [CONTINUE] and repeat steps 3
image will be copied. and 4 above.
• The number of floppy disks that is needed
Notes
for copying is as a guide, which is • Once you carry out DISK COPY, all
information saved on the recipient floppy To cancel copying partway
displayed when selecting [MS t FD].
disk is erased to be replaced by newly Select [CANCEL]. 1
written data including the protected image 2, 3, 4
data. Check the contents of the recipient Note
disk before copying the disk. If you eject and insert the floppy disk
• Be sure to use the floppy disk that has been without selecting [EXIT] after In single mode
formatted by this camera to carry out “COMPLETE” appears, DISK COPY will
DISK COPY (page 81). be carried out onto the floppy disk.
selector to PLAY and display
1, 4 the image you want to print.
3 2 Select [FILE], [PRINT MARK],
1 and then [ON] from the menu.
2 The (print) mark is marked on
the displayed image.
1 Set the MS/FD selector to FD, To unmark the print mark

then insert the floppy disk to
be copied. Select [OFF] in step 2.
B Editing
2 Select [FILE], [DISK TOOL], In INDEX mode

[DISK COPY], and then [OK]
from the menu.
“DISK ACCESS” appears. 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE
3 When “CHANGE FLOPPY
DISK” is displayed, eject the
floppy disk. 2 Select [FILE], [PRINT MARK],
“INSERT FLOPPY DISK” and then [SELECT] from the
menu.
appears.
3 Select the images to be
marked with the control
button.
79 80
Notes
4 Select [ENTER]. Format • Format the floppy disk or the 4 Open “My Computer” on
The marks on the selected “Memory Stick” only using this Windows and check the icon
images change from green to When you format a floppy disk or a camera. You cannot format the “Removable Disk,” then use
white. floppy disk or the “Memory Stick” the camera as an external
“Memory Stick,” all data stored on the drive.
floppy disk or the “Memory Stick” will using a computer via the USB cable.
be deleted. Check the contents of the • When you format, be sure to use a fully
charged battery pack or the AC power Note
floppy disk or the “Memory Stick” • When using Windows 2000, Windows Me,
adaptor as the power source.
before formatting. or Windows XP, see also page 31.
• The drive symbol ((D:), etc.) may differ
0001-0006/0100
Note depending on your computer.
B As an external drive
PRINT MARK ENTER CANCEL
SELECT OK
Even if images are protected, these images • If you are using Mac OS X(v10.0/v10.1),
will be deleted. you can use only a “Memory Stick” with a
Using the camera as computer running Mac OS X(v10.0/
To unmark selected print v10.1). Even if you insert a floppy disk,
marks an external drive of a Mac OS X(v10.0/v10.1) cannot recognize
Select the images to be unmarked in computer it. To use data saved on a floppy disk,
copy it to a “Memory Stick” first
step 3 with the control button, then 1 Once you connect the camera to a (page 77).
select [ENTER]. 2 computer using the USB cable, you
3 can use the camera as a floppy disk/
To unmark all the print “Memory Stick” drive of a computer.
marks Install the USB driver to the computer
Select [FILE], [PRINT MARK], 1 Select the floppy disk or the
beforehand (page 29).
[ALL], and then [OFF] from the menu. “Memory Stick” using the
MS/FD selector.
The marks on all images are For Windows 98, Windows
removed. 98SE, Windows 2000,
2 Insert only the floppy disk or
Windows Me and Windows
the “Memory Stick” you want
To print out using the FVP-1 to format. XP Users
Mavica Printer Be sure to insert only the media
Set PRESET SELECT SW to PC on you want to format. 1 Select the drive type using
the printer. the MS/FD selector on this
camera.
Notes
3 Select [FILE] from the menu.
When used as the floppy disk
• When formatting a floppy disk
B Editing
• You cannot mark moving images, Clip drive, set the MS/FD selector to
Select [DISK TOOL],
Motion images or images recorded in FD.
[FORMAT], and then [OK] from
TEXT mode. When used as the “Memory Stick”
the menu.
• If you mark an image recorded in TIFF drive, set the MS/FD selector to
mode with a print mark, only the • When formatting a “Memory MS.
uncompressed image is printed, and the Stick”
JPEG image recorded at the same time is Select [FORMAT], and then 2 Connect the AC power
not printed. [OK] from the menu. adaptor and turn on the
camera.
To cancel formatting 3 Connect the camera to the

Select [CANCEL] in step 3. computer using the supplied
USB cable.
81 82
1-20
Additional information • Avoid getting liquids on the floppy If moisture condensation occurs
On battery pack
disk. Immediately eject the floppy disk, then
Precautions • Be sure to use a floppy disk case to turn off the camera and wait about an • Use only the specified charger with
ensure protection of important data. hour for the moisture to evaporate. the charging function.
• Even when you use a 3.5-inch 2HD Note that if you attempt to record with • To prevent accident from a short
On cleaning floppy disk, image data may not be moisture remaining inside the lens, you circuit, do not allow metal objects to
recorded and/or displayed depending will be unable to record clear images. come into contact with the battery
Cleaning the LCD screen
on the using environment. In this terminals.
Wipe the screen surface with a On AC power adaptor
case, use a disk of other brand. • Keep the battery pack away from
cleaning cloth (optional) or an LCD
cleaning kit (optional) to remove • Unplug the unit from the wall outlet fire.
fingerprints, dust, etc. On operating temperature (wall socket) when you are not using • Never expose the battery pack to
the unit for a long time. To temperatures above 60°C (140°F),
Cleaning the camera surface Your camera is designed for use disconnect the power cord (mains such as in a car parked in the sun or
Clean the camera surface with a soft between the temperatures of 0°C to lead), pull it out by the plug. Never under direct sunlight.
cloth slightly moistened with water, 40°C (32°F to 104°F). Recording in pull the power cord (mains lead) • Keep the battery pack dry.
then wipe the surface dry. Do not use extremely cold or hot places that itself. • Do not expose the battery pack to any
any type of solvent such as thinner, exceed this range is not recommended. • Do not operate the unit with a mechanical shock.
alcohol or benzene as this may damage damaged cord (mains lead) or if the • Do not disassemble nor modify the
the finish or the casing. unit has been dropped or damaged. battery pack.
On moisture condensation
After using your camera at the • Do not bend the power cord (mains • Attach the battery pack to the camera
seashore or other dusty locations If the camera is brought directly from a lead) forcibly, or place a heavy object securely.
Clean your camera carefully. cold to a warm location, or is placed in on it. This will damage the cord • Charging while some capacity
Otherwise, the salty air may corrode a very damp room, moisture may (mains lead) and may cause fire or remains does not affect the original
the metal fittings or dust may enter the condense inside or outside the camera. electrical shock. battery capacity.
inside of your camera, causing a Should this occur, the camera will not • Prevent metallic objects from coming
malfunction. operate properly. into contact with the metal parts of
the connecting section. If this On the built-in rechargeable
Moisture condensation occurs happens, a short may occur and the lithium battery
On floppy disks easily when: unit may be damaged.
• The camera is brought from a cold Your camera is supplied with a built-in
To protect data recorded on floppy • Always keep metal contacts clean. rechargeable lithium battery installed
location such as a ski slope into a
disks, note the following: warmly heated room. • Do not disassemble the unit. to retain the date/time and various
• Avoid storing floppy disks near • The camera is taken from an air- • Do not apply mechanical shock or settings, regardless of the setting of the
magnets or magnetic fields such as conditioned room or car interior to drop the unit. POWER switch. The built-in
those of speakers and televisions. the hot outdoors, etc. • While the unit is in use, particularly rechargeable lithium battery is always
Otherwise, permanent erasure of disk during charging, keep it away from charged as long as you are using your
data may result. How to prevent moisture AM receivers and video equipment. camera. The battery, however, will get
• Avoid storing floppy disks in areas condensation AM receivers and video equipment discharged gradually if you do not use
subject to direct sunlight or sources When bringing the camera from a cold disturb AM reception and video your camera. It will be completely
of high temperature, such as a place to a warm place, seal the camera operation. discharged in about one month if you
heating device. Floppy disk warping in a plastic bag and allow it to adapt to • The unit becomes warm during use. do not use your camera at all. Even if
or damage may result, rendering the conditions at the new location over a This is not a malfunction. the built-in rechargeable lithium
disk useless. period of time (about an hour). • Do not place the unit in locations that battery is not charged, it will not affect
• Avoid contact with the disk’s surface are: the camera operation. To retain the
by opening the disk shutter plate. If — Extremely hot or cold date and time, etc., charge the battery if
the disk’s surface becomes the battery is discharged.
— Dusty or dirty
blemished, data may be rendered — Very humid
unreadable.
— Vibrating
83 84
Charging the built-in rechargeable Notes necessary, depending on the design of

lithium battery: • It is recommended that you make a backup the wall outlet (wall socket) [b]. About “InfoLITHIUM”
• Connect your camera to house copy of your important data. battery pack
current (mains) using the AC power • Do not remove the “Memory Stick” while
adaptor supplied with your camera, reading or writing data. AC-L10A/L10B What is the “InfoLITHIUM” battery
and leave your camera with the • Data may be damaged if: pack?
—you remove the “Memory Stick” or turn
power turned off for more than 24 The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack is a
off your camera while reading or writing
hours. data. lithium-ion battery pack that has
• Or install the fully charged battery —you use the “Memory Stick” in a functions for communicating
Watching the playback picture on information related to operating
pack in your camera, and leave your location subject to the effects of static
TV conditions between your camera and
camera with the power turned off for electricity or noise.
• Do not attach any other material than the If you want to view the playback the AC adaptor/charger (optional).
more than 24 hours.
supplied label on the labeling position. picture on a TV, you need a TV having The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack
• When you carry or store the “Memory a video input jack and a video calculates power consumption
If any problem occurs, unplug your Stick,” put it in its supplied case. connecting cable.
camera and contact your nearest Sony according to the operating conditions
• Do not touch the terminals of a “Memory The color system of the TV must be
dealer. Stick” with your hand or a metal object.
of your camera and displays the
the same as that of your digital still remaining battery time in minutes. If
• Do not strike, bend or drop the “Memory camera. Check the following list:
Stick.” you use the AC adaptor/charger
• Do not disassemble or modify the NTSC system (optional), it will calculate and display
On “Memory Stick”s “Memory Stick.” Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, the operation time and charging
• Do not allow the “Memory Stick” to get Central America, Chile, Colombia, completion time also.
“Memory Stick” is a new compact, wet.
Ecuador, Guyana, Jamaica, Japan, Charging the battery pack
portable and versatile IC recording • Do not use or keep “Memory Stick”s in
locations that are: Korea, Mexico, Peru, Surinam, • Be sure to charge the battery pack
medium with a data capacity that Taiwan, the Philippines, the U.S.A.,
—Extremely hot such as in a car parked in before you start using your camera.
exceeds a floppy disk. “Memory Stick” Venezuela, etc.
the sun or under the scorching sun. • We recommend charging the battery
is specially designed for exchanging —Under direct sunlight.
and sharing digital data among PAL system pack in an ambient temperature of
—Very humid or subject to corrosive
“Memory Stick” compatible products. gases. Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, between 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F)
Because it is removable, “Memory Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, until the POWER ON/OFF (CHG)
“Memory Stick”, , “MagicGate lamp goes out, indicating that the
Stick” can also be used for external Germany, Holland, Hong Kong,
Memory Stick” and are Hungary, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New battery pack is fully charged. If you
data storage.
trademarks of Sony Corporation. Zealand, Norway, Poland, Portugal, charge the battery pack outside of
There are two types of “Memory “MagicGate” and Singapore, Slovak Republic, Spain, this temperature range, you may not
Stick”s: general “Memory Stick”s and are trademarks of Sony Corporation. Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand, United be able to efficiently charge the
“MagicGate Memory Stick”s that are Kingdom, etc. battery pack.
equipped with the MagicGate* • After charging is completed, either
PAL-M system
copyright protection technology. disconnect the AC power adaptor
You can use both types of “Memory Using your camera Brazil
from the DC IN jack on your camera
Stick” with your camera. However, abroad PAL-N system or remove the battery pack.
because your camera does not support Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay
Power sources
the MagicGate standards, data
You can use your camera in any SECAM system
recorded with your camera is not
country or area with the supplied Bulgaria, France, Guiana, Iran, Iraq,
subject to MagicGate copyright
battery charger within 100 V to 240 Monaco, Russia, Ukraine, etc.
protection.
V AC, 50/60 Hz. Use a commercially
∗ MagicGate is copyright protection available AC plug adaptor [a], if
technology that uses encryption
technology.
85 86
1-21
Effective use of the battery pack • The E mark indicating there is little
• Battery performance decreases in remaining battery time sometimes Troubleshooting
low-temperature surroundings. So, flashes depending on the operating
the time that the battery pack can be conditions or ambient temperature If you experience trouble with your camera, first check the following items. Should
used is shorter in cold places. We and environment even if the your camera still not operate properly after you have made these checks, consult your
recommend the following to use the remaining battery time is 5 to 10 Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. If code displays (C:ss:ss)
battery pack longer: minutes. appear on the LCD screen, the self-diagnosis display function is working
— Put the battery pack in a pocket (page 95).
How to store the battery pack
close to your body to warm it up,
• If the battery pack is not used for a
and insert it in your camera
long time, do the following Symptom Cause and/or Solution
immediately before you start
procedure once per year to maintain
taking shots. Your camera does not • You are not using an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack.
proper function.
— Use the large capacity battery
1. Fully charge the battery. work. t Use an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (page 9).
pack (NP-F550, optional). • The floppy disk is not inserted properly.
2. Discharge on your camera.
• Frequently using the LCD panel or 3. Remove the battery from your t Eject the disk, and insert it again (page 16).
frequently operating the zoom wears camera and store it in a dry, cool • The battery level is too low. (The indicator
out the battery pack faster. We place. appears.)
recommend using the large capacity
battery pack (NP-F550, optional).
• To use the battery pack up on your t Charge the battery pack fully (page 10).
camera, leave the POWER switch to • The AC power adaptor is not connected securely.
• Be certain to turn the POWER switch on in PLAY mode until the power
to off when not taking shots or t Connect it securely to the DC IN jack and a wall
goes off without a floppy disk or a outlet (wall socket) (pages 10, 13).
playing back on your camera. “Memory Stick” inserted.
• Procure spare batteries that can last • The malfunction occurs inside the camera.
two or three times longer than the Battery life t Turn off the power, and turn on after one
expected recording time. Also, make • The battery life is limited. Battery minute, then check that the camera works
a trial recording before you record capacity decreases little by little as properly.
the actual images. you use it more and more, and as Your camera cannot • The PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector is set to PLAY.
time passes. When the battery
• Do not expose the battery pack to record images. t Set it to STILL or MOVIE (pages 18, 23).
water. The battery pack is not water- operating time is shortened
considerably, a probable cause is that • No floppy disk is inserted into your camera.
resistant. t Insert a floppy disk (page 16).
the battery pack has reached the end
Remaining battery time indicator of its life. Please buy a new battery • The tab on the disk is set to the unrecordable
• If the power goes off although the pack. position.
battery remaining indicator indicates • The battery life varies according to t Set it to the recording position (page 16).
that the battery pack has enough how it is stored and operating • No “Memory Stick” is inserted into your camera.
power to operate, charge the battery conditions and environment for each t Insert a “Memory Stick” (page 17).
pack fully again so that the indication battery pack. • The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is
on the battery remaining indicator is set to LOCK.
correct. Note, however, that the
t Set it to the recording position.
correct battery indication sometimes
will not be restored if it is used in The picture is out of focus. • Your camera is not in macro recording mode when
high temperatures for a long time or you shoot a subject that is about 3 to 25 cm
left in a fully charged state, or the (1 3/16 to 9 7/8 inches) away from the lens.
battery pack is frequently used. t Set the macro recording mode (page 64).
Regard the remaining battery time t Move the zoom lever to the W side.
indication as the approximate
The resizing function does • You cannot resize moving images, text images, Clip
shooting time.
not work. Motion images, and uncompressed images.
87 88

You cannot display a print • You cannot display print marks on moving images, The moving image breaks • You are playing back the file from the floppy disk
mark. text images and Clip Motion images. off when you play back an or the “Memory Stick.”
The picture is noisy. • Your camera is placed near a TV or other
image on a computer. t Copy the file to the hard disk of the computer
equipment that uses strong magnets. and then play back the file from the hard disk
t Move your camera away from the TV, etc. (page 32).
The picture is too dark. • You are shooting a subject with a light source Your camera cannot delete • The image is protected.
behind the subject.
an image. t Cancel the protection (page 74).
t Adjust the exposure (page 67). The power turns off • With the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector set to
• The brightness of the LCD screen is too low. suddenly. STILL or MOVIE, if you do not operate the camera
t Adjust the brightness of the LCD screen for about three minutes while the power is on, the
(page 20). camera turns off automatically to prevent wearing
down the battery pack.
The flash does not work. • The flash is set to .
t Turn on the camera.
t Set the flash to (no indication), , or
• The battery pack is discharged.
(page 22).
t Replace it with a fully charged battery pack.
• The camera is in one of the following PROGRAM
AE modes: Twilight, Twilight plus, or Landscape. The image does not • The VIDEO OUT setting of your camera is
t Cancel the PROGRAM AE function or set the appear on the TV screen. incorrect.
flash to (pages 22, 65). t Change the setting (page 55).
• The PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector is set to The slide show function • The slide show function stops after about
MOVIE. stops automatically. 20 minutes when using a floppy disk.

t Set it to STILL. t To continue the slide show, select [START]
The date and time are • The date and time are not set correctly. again (page 72).
recorded incorrectly. t Set the correct date and time (page 14). You cannot use the • Your camera is set to TEXT mode or the PLAY/
Vertical streaks appear • This is called the smear phenomenon. PROGRAM AE function. STILL/MOVIE selector is set to MOVIE.
when you are shooting a t This is not a malfunction. t Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to STILL
very bright subject. and change the setting (pages 53, 54).
The zoom does not work. • PROGRAM AE is set to the Panfocus mode. The macro function does • PROGRAM AE is set to the Panfocus mode.
t Cancel the Panfocus mode (page 65). not work. t Cancel the Panfocus mode (page 65).
Digital zoom does not • You cannot use digital zoom when recording
work. moving pictures.
• Digital zoom is set to [OFF].
t Set digital zoom to [ON] at the menu.
The image is in • You shot the image in TEXT mode.
monochrome. t Cancel the TEXT mode (page 62).
• The picture effect is set to B&W.
t Cancel the B&W mode (page 69).
The image cannot be t Consult the computer or software manufacturer.
played back on a
computer.
89 90
1-22

Your computer does not • The battery level is low. The indication of the • You are using the camera for many hours under
recognize your camera. t Use the AC power adaptor (page 13). battery remaining time is extremely hot or cold temperatures.
• The camera is turned off. not proper, or the power is • The battery pack is dead.
immediately turned off t Replace the battery pack with a new one
t Turn on the camera. even if the battery
• The USB cable is not connected firmly. (page 9).
remaining indicator
t Disconnect the USB cable, and connect it again indicates that the battery • The battery level is too low.
firmly. Make sure that “USB MODE” is level is sufficient. t Install the fully charged battery pack (pages 9,
displayed on the LCD screen (page 30). 10).
• The USB connectors on your computer are • A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery
connected to other equipment besides the keyboard, time.
the mouse, and your camera. t Charge the battery pack fully (page 10).
t Disconnect the USB cables except for the ones The POWER ON/OFF • A malfunction has occurred in the battery pack.
connected to the keyboard, the mouse, and your (CHG) lamp flashes when t Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized
camera. charging a battery pack. Sony service facility.
• The position of the MS/FD selector is not set to the
proper position for the media being used. The POWER ON/OFF • The AC power adaptor is not connected.
t Set the MS/FD selector to the proper position. (CHG) lamp does not light t Connect the power cord firmly to a wall outlet
up when charging a (wall socket) (page 10).
• The USB driver is not installed. battery pack.
t Install the USB driver (page 29). • The battery pack is not installed properly.
• For Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows t Install it properly (page 9).
2000 and Windows Me users • Charging of the battery pack is complete.
Since the camera is connected to a computer using
the USB cable before installing the USB driver, the
drive is not recognized properly by the computer.
t Delete the drive which is not recognized
properly, then install the USB driver. For details,
see the procedure on page 33.
Battery packs
Symptom Cause and/or Solution

The battery pack cannot • The power of the camera is turned on.
be charged. t Turn off the power of the camera (page 10).
The battery life is short. • You are recording/playing back images under
extremely cold temperatures.
• The battery pack is not charged enough.
t Charge the battery pack fully.
• The battery pack is dead.
t Replace the battery pack with a new one.
91 92
Message Meaning
Warning and notice messages
IMAGE SIZE OVER You tried to play back images with an
Various messages appear on the LCD screen. Check the corresponding descriptions image size larger than the maximum
in the following list. playback size of this camera.
INVALID OPERATION You are playing back a file that was
Message Meaning created on equipment other than your
DRIVE ERROR There is trouble with the disk drive. camera.
SYSTEM ERROR Turn the power off and on again. for “InfoLITHIUM” battery only The battery is not the “InfoLITHIUM”
type.
NO DISK No disk is inserted.
- The image is protected.
NO MEMORY STICK No “Memory Stick” is inserted.
The battery level is too low. When the
FORMAT ERROR • The floppy disk loaded is not MS-DOS remaining time is about 5 to 10 minutes,
formatted (512 bytes × 18 sectors). E may flash depending on the battery
• Failed to format the “Memory Stick.” pack used, operating conditions, or the
• The Floppy Disk Adaptor for Memory environment.
Stick is inserted.
MEMORY STICK ERROR The inserted “Memory Stick” cannot be
used with your camera, or the “Memory
Stick” is damaged or not inserted
correctly.
DISK PROTECT The tab on the disk is set to the

unrecordable position.
MEMORY STICK LOCKED The write-protect switch on the
“Memory Stick” is set to the LOCK
position.
DISK FULL The disk is full.
NO MEMORY SPACE The capacity of the “Memory Stick” is
not sufficient to record images.
NO FILE No image is recorded in a floppy disk or
a “Memory Stick.”
FILE ERROR Trouble has occurred during playback.
FILE PROTECT The image is protected.
DISK ERROR A 2DD floppy disk is inserted, or there is
trouble with the disk.
DIRECTORY ERROR A directory with the same name already
exists.
NOT ENOUGH MEMORY The remaining capacity of the floppy
disk or the “Memory Stick” is not
enough to copy the image.
93 94
1-23
Self-diagnosis display LCD screen indicators

Your camera has a self-diagnosis display. This
function displays the camera condition on the The indicators during recording
LCD screen with a combination of a letter and
four digits of numbers. If this appears, check the
following code chart. The code informs you of the
camera’s current condition. The last two digits 1 qa
(indicated by ss) will differ depending on the
state of the camera. 2 qs
3 qd
Self-diagnosis display
• C: ss: ss 4 qf
You can correct the problem by 5 120min 1024 3:2 10 qg
yourself. REC 0:03
• E: ss: ss 6 +1.0EV
DATE
5s qh
Contact your Sony dealer or local 7 qj
authorized Sony service facility. SOLARIZE
8 ISO100 qk
Code Cause and/or Corrective Action 9 ql
C:32:ss
• There is trouble with the disk drive. 0 SELECT OK MENU BAR OFF w;
t Turn the power off and on again.
C:13:ss
• An unformatted floppy disk or A Sharpness indicator O Remaining disk capacity/
“Memory Stick” is inserted. Remaining memory capacity
t Format the floppy disk or the B Focus mode indicator/Macro indicator
“Memory Stick.” (page 81) indicator
: Floppy disk
• A floppy disk or a “Memory Stick” not C Battery remaining indicator : “Memory Stick”
compatible with this camera is inserted.
t Change the floppy disk or the D Flash level indicator/Flash P Recording time indicator
mode indicator
“Memory Stick.” (pages 16, 17) Q Self-diagnosis function
E:61:ss • A camera malfunction that you cannot E PROGRAM AE indicator/Zoom indicator/Recording time
E:91:ss repair has occurred. indicator indicator
t Contact your Sony dealer or local F White balance indicator R Self-timer indicator
authorized Sony service facility and
inform them of the 5-digit G DATE/TIME indicator S Spot light-metering indicator
indication. (example: E:61:10) H Picture effect indicator T Menu bar and guide menu
If you are unable to rectify the problem even if you try corrective actions a I ISO film speed indicator They appear by pressing v on the
few times when C:ss:ss is indicated, contact your Sony dealer or local control button and disappear by
authorized Sony service facility. J EV level indicator pressing V.
K AE/AF lock indicator
L Recording mode/Clip Motion
indicator
M Image size indicator
N Number of recorded images
95 97
The indicators during still image playback
120min 1024 11/12

1
2 6
3 7
4 8
5 MVC-011F 2002 7 4 12:00AM 9
A Protect indicator/Zoom scaling : Floppy disk

indicator : “Memory Stick”
B Print mark indicator G Number of stored images on a
C Recording mode/Clip Motion floppy disk or a “Memory
indicator Stick”
D Image size indicator H Image number
E File name* I Recording date of the playback
F Remaining disk capacity/ image*
Remaining memory capacity ∗ When the menu bar is displayed, this
indicator indicator disappears from the screen.
The indicators during moving image playback
120min 160 6/8

0:10 6
1
7
2
8
3
9
4
0
5 INDEX DELETE FILE
SELECT OK
TOOL SETUP
MENU BAR OFF
A Moving image file indicator F Remaining disk capacity/

B Image size indicator Remaining memory capacity
indicator
C Playback button/pause button
: Floppy disk
B is displayed during stop, and X
during playback. : “Memory Stick”
G Counter
D Image searching buttons
H Image number/number of
E Menu bar and guide menu
stored images on a floppy disk
or a “Memory Stick”
I Playback image
J Playback bar
98
1-24
1-24E
SECTION 2
DISASSEMBLY
• This set can be disassembled in the order shown below.
MVC-FD100/FD200
2-1. CABINET (REAR) BLOCK

ASSEMBLY (Page 2-1)
2-2. USB CONNECTOR BLOCK 2-5. FDD BLOCK ASSEMBLY 2-7. PK-61 BOARD
(Page 2-2) (Page 2-3) (Page 2-5)
2-3. FC-89 BOARD 2-6. LENS BLOCK ASSEMBLY 2-8. LCD MODULE
(Page 2-2) (Page 2-4) (Page 2-5)
SERVICE POSITION
2-4. FDD
(PK-61 BOARD AND LCD PANEL)
(Page 2-3)
(Page 2-6)
2-9. THE WAY OF DISASSEMBLING SERVICE POSITION

THE FDD (FC-89 AND CD-379/390 BOARDS)
(Page 2-7) (Page 2-4)
Note: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.
2-1. CABINET (REAR) BLOCK ASSEMBLY

1 Two screws (M2)
6 Cabinet (rear) block assembly
5 Two screws (M2)
2 Screw (M2)
3 Two screws (M2)

7 Flexible board
(CN801)
4 Screw (M2)
2-1
2-2. USB CONNECTOR BLOCK
1 Screw (M2)
2 Flexible board (CN682)
3 USB connector block
2-3. FC-89 BOARD
7 Connector
(CN002) 6 Connector
9 Two screws (M2) (CN001)
5 Connector
(CN301)
qa FC-89 board
8 Two screws (M2)
1 Flexible board
(CN701)
2 Two flexible board
(CN702, 703)

(CN101)
0 Claw

(CN184)
2-2
2-4. FDD
1 Three screws (M2)
3 FDD
2 FC bracket
Note: Be sure to read “2-9. THE WAY OF DISASSEMBLING

2-5. FDD BLOCK ASSEMBLY
4 Two connectors
(CN001, 002)
3 Connector
(CN301)
5 FDD block
assembly

(CN101)
2 FP-464 flexible board (CN184)
2-3
2-6. LENS BLOCK ASSEMBLY
1 Tapping screw
2 Lens block assembly
[SERVICE POSITION (FC-89 BOARD AND CD-379/390 BOARDS)]

AC power
AC IN
adaptor
CD-379 board (FD100: TYPE PA)
CD-390 board (FD100: TYPE SO/FD200)
FC-89 board
Cabinet (rear)
block assembly
Cabinet (front)
block assembly
FDD unit
Stand
Lens block assembly

Stand
Adjustment remote
Stand commander
CPC-12 jig
(J-6082-436-A)
2-4
2-7. PK-61 BOARD
4 Flexible board
(CN902)
9 PK-61 board
5 Flexible board
(CN851)
3 Connector
(CN702)
2 PK shield case assembly
LCD knob retainer

S709
1 Tapping screw
6 FP466 flexible board

(CN701)
Note: When installing PK-61 board, connect S709 with

LCD knob retainer.
2-8. LCD MODULE
5 LCD module
4 Cold cathode
fluorescent tube
3 BL retainer
2-5
[SERVICE POSITION (PK-61 BOARD AND LCD PANEL)]

LCD panel
Insulating sheet Cold cathode

fluorescent tube
PK-61 board
AC power FC-89 board

AC IN
adaptor
Cabinet (front)
block assembly
CPC-12 jig
(J-6082-436-A)
Adjustment remote
commander
2-6
2-9. THE WAY OF DISASSEMBLING THE FDD
Disassembling the FD-02H
(1) [Entire view before starting

disassembling]

Remove the 2 screws from the front
and the rear respectively, totaling 4
screws. Start removing the 2 screws
from the front.

Then remove the 2 screws from the
rear.
2-7

Caution: The spring of the door of the
disk insertion slot is engaged with the
top cover. Be careful not to lose the
spring when removing the top cover.
(5) [The view after the top cover is

removed]
(6) [Removing the cassette

compartment]
How to remove the cassette
compartment: Hold the head arm of the
side-1 with fingertips and raise it
upward.
Hold the cassette compartment and
raise it in the slant angle as shown by
the arrow in the picture.
Caution: When raising the head arm,
apply the holding force in the direction
of up/down only. Never apply any force
in the direction of right/left as shown in
the picture. When removing the
cassette compartment, be careful not
hit or damage the head tip with the
cassette compartment. Be careful not
to raise the head arm too high. (Raising
the head arm too high, deforms the
spring that is inserted in the head arm.)
2-8
(7) [Cassette compartment]

The 2 pins are inserted in only an end
of cassette compartment. So, be
careful not lose the 2 pins.

Remove the transport motor cover (on
the rear of the FDD). The transport
motor cover is fixed by the 2 screws.
Because the recess the screw is small
and the screw is fastened into the
aluminum chassis, be careful not to
damage the recess.

Caution: Check to see that there is no
foreign material in the transport motor.
Check also that an end of the torsion
coil spring is engaged with the lead
screw as shown.
2-9

disassembling]
Check that any foreign materials exist
inside the machine. Check that the
cover is not deformed. Check that the
cassette compartment is not
deformed.

disassembling]
Check to see that the flexible board
has no scar.
Check that the flexible board is not
folded and not twisted. Check also
that the gimbal is not deformed.
Check that the head tip is not peeled
off.
Gimbal
2-10
Reassembling the FD-02H

(12) [Reassembling]
Attach the transport motor cover.
Tightening torque: 1kgf•cm±10%
(13) [Attaching the cassette

compartment]
Raise the head arm and insert the
cassette compartment in a slant
angle.
Because there are POM supporting
studs (not visible in the picture shown)
beneath the head arm, the cassette
compartment must override
exceeding the studs.
(14) [Attaching the door]

Attach the door spring to the shaft in
the center of the door and insert the
shafts at the both ends of the door into
the grooves of the chassis.
2-11
(15) [Method of raising the head

arm]
Caution: Apply force in the up/down
direction only,
Never apply force in the direction
shown by the arrow in the picture.
(16) [Correct position of the flexible

board]
Be sure that the flexible board is
placed on top of the cassette
compartment. (As shown in the arrow
in the picture.)
Be sure that the flexible board is not
twisted.
(17) [Attaching the top cover]

Start attaching the screws to the front.
Tightening torque: 1kg•cm±10%
Refer to the separate document "Top
Cover Attachment SOP".
2-12
(18) [Attaching the door spring]

Insert an end of the spring into the
hole of the top cover. (Hole that is
shown in the picture)
(19) [Confirming the coupling of

top cover and cassette
compartment]
Confirm that the hole of the cover is
engaged with the shaft on the cassette
compartment.
(20) [Checking the flexible boards]

Check that the 3 flexible boards are
coming out. Check that the 3 flexible
cards are free from scars and are not
damaged.
2-13
[Notes when attaching the top cover]
1. Be careful not touch the grease that is coated at the 8 locations as shown below.
8 locations
2. When attaching the top cover to a drive, be careful that the FPC of S1 must not be caught into the drive. Observe that the FPC of
S1 must not be caught into the drive, by observing the position of FPC through the hole of the top cover as shown below. Also be
careful that the 6-pin FPC must not be caught into a drive at the same time.
OK NG OK
This line of the top cover is a guideline.
The 6-pin FPC must not be caught into a drive
3. Be sure not to forget to engage an end of the shutter spring in this hole.
The hole in which an end of the shutter spring is engaged.
4. When tightening the screws, there is an order tightening the screws. Follow the order as shown below.
(Tightening torque: 9.8N•cm(1.0kg•cm)±10%)
1 2 3 4
2-14
2-10. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION
FC-89
FLASH UNIT
FU-159
CD-379 (FD100: TYPE PA)

CD-390 (FD100: TYPE SO/FD200)
PK-61
Board Name Function

CD-379 CCD IMAGER
CD-390
FC-89 CAMERA PROCESS, CAMERA DSP, VIDEO, MEMORY, LENS DRIVE,
SH DSP, USB I/F, MS SOCKET, FDD INTERFACE, FDD CONTROL,
HI CONTROL, DC/DC CONVERTER
FU-159 DC IN
PK-61 MODE SWITCH, VIDEO OUT, LCD DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR,
BACK LIGHT DRIVE
2-15 E
SECTION 3
BLOCK DIAGRAMS

FC-89 BOARD
CD-379 CD-390
BOARD BOARD
IC702 IC704
ADDERESS BUS
LENS
IRIS
DATA BUS
16 16 FDD REC/PB AMP, FLOPPY
METER IC102 IC301
IC201 IC101 CONTROL FDD DATA STEPPING FDD DATA DISK
CCD OUT S/H, AGC, CAMERA (FC-89 (8/10)) MOTOR DRIVE
DATA BUS 12 DSP 14 3
CCD CCD A/D CONV. DRIVE UNIT
IMAGER IMAGER (FC-89 (1/10)) (FC-89 (2/10)) (FC-89 (7/10))
CAM SO, XCAM SCK

16
IC505 MC XRD
16M MC XWE1
FLASH ROM
M M H M (FC-89 (6/10))
20 PK-61 BOARD (1/2)
IC501 IC702
H1, H2 IC101
MC CAM,
TIMING SHOCK DETECT
V1A, V1B, V2, V3A, SH DSP
ADDERESS BUS
FOCUS ZOOM GENERATOR 16 16 (PK-61 (1/3))
V3B, V4, VSHT, RG IC506 (FC-89 (5/10))
SENSOR SENSOR (FC-89 (1/10))
16M SDRAM
DATA BUS
(FC-89 (6/10)) 12 20
IC182
CN681
DRIVE + IRIS
MSHUT ON MS
(MECHA SHUTTER) MS DIO, MS BS, MS SCLK
DRIVE SOCKET
(FC-89 (4/10))
IC508 CN201
IC303 EEPROM
16 DATA BUS 16 (FC-89 (6/10))
FP-335 FLEXIBLE USB
64M SDRAM BOARD
(FC-89 (3/10)) IC681 D+ USB D+
IC184
IC186 14 ADDRESS BUS 14 USB I/F
USB DATA
CAM SO, XCAM SCK

IC185 (FC-89 (6/10)) D– USB D–
DRIVE− EVR
(FC-89 (4/10)) PE DAC LEVEL 1, 2
(D/A CONVERTER)
CNTC
CAM SI, CAM SO, XCAM SCK

IRIS DRIVE (FC-89 (4/10))
HALL+ HALL AD
HALL AMP
HALL AD PK-61 BOARD (2/2) J781
V OUT ON
IC901 VIDEO OUT
Z SENS RST Z SENS RST Y OUT Y OUT
VIDEO AMP VIDEO OUT
F SENS RST F SENS RST C OUT C OUT
(FC-89 (3/10))
HI SO, HI SI, XHI SCK

PANEL Y
IC183 PANEL R-Y
PE EN1, PANEL B-Y
(FC-89 (4/10))
PE DIR1A, PE DIR1B
ZOOM MOTOR
DRIVE BZ901
PE EN0, BEEP IN
PE DIR1A, PE DIR0B BUZZER
FOCUS MOTOR
DRIVE
IC651 TG CLK
STRB ON
MC CLK
CLOCK GEN. USB CLK STRB AIN
X651 (FC-89 (1/10))
HALL AD
FDC CLK
CAM SO, XCAM SCK PANEL Y VR

STRB ON
PANEL R-Y IC901 VG LCD901
STRB AIN
PANEL B-Y LCD VB
FLASH DRIVE
(PK-61 (2/3)) COLOR
UNIT LCD
STB CHARGE STB CHARGE BEEP IN IC904
MONITOR
XSTB FULL XSTB FULL IC902 LCD TIMING
HI SO, HI SI, XHI SCK HI SO, XHI SCK (EVR) GENERATOR
D/A CONVERTER (PK-61 (2/3))
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK FU-159 BOARD
IC404 (PK-61 (2/3))
(1/2) IC406 BL LEV
HI EEPROM Q856
ZOOM ZOOM SW AD BL HIGH
FDD P 5V CONTROL
SWITCH ( FC-89 (9/10)) BL UNREG SWITCHING ND801
FDD 4.9V ( FC-89 (9/10))
IC001 CAM 15V
FU-159 BOARD DC A 4.9V SHUTTER XRS ON1, XRS ON2 IC851 T851
(2/2) CONTROL PANEL 13.2V
SWITCH IC405 DC/DC CONTROL
INVERTER
(FC-89 (10/10) TRANS
PANEL 4.9V TIMER (PK-61 (3/3))
RST SIO, RST SCK CLOCK
D 3.2V BT701
BATT D401 ( FC-89 (9/10)) LITHIUM
CAM 3.2V
UNREG IC407 BATTERY
CAM P 5V
ACV +3.1V REG, RESET
BT901 D 1.8V
BATT SIG UNREG D402 (FC-89 (9/10)
BATTERY S A 3.2V KEY AD1, KEY AD2 FUNCTION
TERMINAL CAM −7.5V KEY
SYS DD ON
LCD DD ON
XCAM/PB SW
PLAY/STILL/
BATT SIG MOVE/XSTILL MOVIE
J001
BL UNREG
DC IN
ACV UNREG XPWR SW POWER
ST UNREG ON/OFF
BATT UNREG
05
3-1 3-2
3-2. CAMERA BLOCK DIAGRAM 1

910 mVp-p 4.0 Vp-p
(FD200) (FD200)
2.9 Vp-p 480 mVp-p 1.2 Vp-p 2.9 Vp-p 3.3 Vp-p 3.2 Vp-p
(FD100: (FD100:
TYPE SO) TYPE SO)
12.2 MHz 18.4 MHz (FD200) 17.1 MHz (FD200) 18.4 MHz (FD200)
130 µsec (FD100:TYPE SO) 12.2 MHz (FD100:TYPE SO) 10.7 MHz (FD100:TYPE SO) 12.2 MHz (FD100)
IC201 2 REC IC201 4 REC IC101 8 REC IC101 qf REC IC101 qg, qh REC IC102 qh REC

FC-89 BOARD (1/6)
CN201 CN101 CN101 8

1
CCD OUT CCD OUT 10 ADIN00 − 11 75 76 78 − 82
(VOUT) VO 4 BUFFER 19 VOUT 8 BUFFER 19 2 30 CCDIN D0 − 11 DATA BUS 12 D00 − 15 84 − 88 90 − 93 16 DATA BUS 16
12
Q201 Q102 20
IC201 IC101 IC101 CAMERA BLOCK 2
CCD IMAGER CCD IMAGER IC102 23 − 29 31 − 35
1 (3-5)
TIMING A01 − 14 14 ADDRESS BUS 14
GENERATOR 37 38
S/H, AGC, 4.2 Vp-p
(FC-89 (1/10)) A/D CONV. (FD200) MC XWE1
(FC-89 (1/10)) 3.6 Vp-p WRHX 43
(FD100) MC XWE0
RG 18.4 MHz (FD200)
WRLX 42
RG 2 5 RG 14 5 16 9 RG XSHP 16 21 XSHP MC HCLK
12.2MHz (FD100) CPUCK 72
XSHD 17 22 XSHD IC101 e; REC/PB MC XRD
H2 RDX 39
H2 7 7 H2 16 7 14 13 H2 MC XCS2
CSX2 41
CLPDM 20 23 CLPDM MC XCS6
H1 IC301 CSX 40 CAMERA BLOCK 2
H1 8 6 H1 15 6 15 12 H1 ADCLK 23 16 ADCCLK
CAMERA DSP
FLD 183
IC301FLD
MC DRAK0
2 (3-5)
CLPOB 22 20 CLPOB DRAK1 69
VSHT 47 SUB (FC-89 (2/10))
3 VSHT 11 3 18 SCK 32 48 SCLK MC DRAK1
DRAK2 70
SSI 31 47 SDATA MC DREQ0
DRQ1 67
IRQAUDIO
V4 IRQAU 66
V4 15 16 V4 1 16 5 40 V4 RSI 2 43 RST IRQIMG
IRQIMG 64
XCAM RESET
46 SEN 3.1 Vp-p IRQJPG
V3A
XCAM SCK
44 V3A
XIC102 CS
V6 (V3A) 11 15 V3A 2 15 6 SDL IRQJPG 63
AU LRCK
CAM SO
V3B 46 V3B 45 LRCK 209
V3 (B) 14 14 V3B 3 14 7 H SYS V
IC101 eg REC
STRB ON
V2 MCK12 STROBE1 199
V2 13 13 V2 4 13 8 39 V2 MCKO 30 48 CLK TG STROB PHOTO ON MODE CONTROL
PIO00 (STRB PHOTO ON) 158
V5 (V1A) 10 12 V1A 5 12
V1A
9 41 V1A HDI 35
CA HD
5 CCDHD Q302 PHOTO TR OUT
3 BLOCK (3-11)
CA FD STRBAD 203 SWITCH
V1B VDI 34 6 CCDFD
V1 (B) 12 11 V1B 6 11 10 43 V1B
XTG CS SYS V
SEN 33 NTVDO 184
MODE CONTROL
CKI VSUB CNT
202 SUBCNTL
3.1 Vp-p NTVDI 1
XRST SYS
18 BLOCK (3-12)
26 RSTX 59
Q202 Q101 VSUB
CONT V PE DAC LEVEL1
SUB 16 SWITCH 4 CSUB 12 SWITCH 4 17 IC101 ef REC VREF1 161
CCD PE DAC LEVEL2
VREF2 172
1 1
TEMP
20 2 4 5 7 8 10 126 − 129 SHUTTER 198
MSHUT ON
11 13 42 44 131 − 135 PE ENO
CD-379 BOARD TH201 CD-390 BOARD TH101 DQ0 − 15 16 DATA BUS 16 DQ00 − DQ15 EN0 188 LENS
45 47 48 50 137 − 140 PE DIR0A
51 53 142 − 144 DIR0A 189 MOTOR 410 mVp-p
PE DIR0B
DIR0B 190
PE EN1
5 DRIVE
EN1 193 BLOCK H
99 100 PE DIR1A
DIR1A 194 Q307 E REC/PB
7.5 Vp-p 7.5 Vp-p 20 − 26 102 − 105 PE DIR1B (3-10)
A0 − 13 14 ADDRESS BUS 12 AQ00 − 11
107 − 110
(FD200)
7.8 Vp-p 7.8 Vp-p 8.0 Vp-p
(FD200)
29 − 35 DIR1B 195
XFC RST SENS
8.0 Vp-p
(FD100: (FD100: 112 114 SENS0 187
TYPE SO) TYPE SO) (XFC RST SENS) PIO08 149
130 µsec 100 µsec (FD200) 100 µsec (FD200)
130 µsec 130 µsec (FD100:TYPE SO) 130 µsec (FD100:TYPE SO) XZM RST SENS
IC303 SENS1 191
IC201 q;, qs, qd REC IC201 qa, qf, qg REC IC101 4, 5, 6 REC IC101 1, 2, 3 REC 170 mVp-p
96 (XZM RST SENS) PIO09 148
64M SDRAM 2 BA0, BA1 XLENS RST LED
(FC-89 (3/10)) 97 (XLENS RST LED) PIO03 155
H
CCD TEMP AD Q309 E REC/PB
3.2 Vp-p XTG CS
DQML 15 125 QDML
10.7 MHz
CAMERA XIC102 CS
DQMU 39 124 QDMH CN801 (1/6)
BLOCK 2 10 XCAM RESET
WE 16 122 XWE 180 mVp-p PYO 162
Q307
BUFFER
PANEL Y
21
IC201 7, 8 REC XCAM SCK
(3-6) 3.5 Vp-p
CAM SO Q309 LCD BLOCK
CAS 17 121 XCAS PANEL R-Y
36.8 MHz (FD200)
H CRO 168 BUFFER 23 6 (3-15)
TG CLK
IC651 RAS 18 120 XRAS Q308 E REC/PB

24.5 MHz (FD100)
IC651 4 REC/PB CLK 38 94 QCLK Q308 PANEL B-Y
CLOCK GEN. CBO 165 BUFFER 22
(FC-89 (1/10)) CS 19 118 XCSO
3.4 Vp-p HDO
HD 182 18 LCD BLOCK
48 MHz CLK3 OUT 4 410 mVp-p LCDVD 185
PANEL V
19 7 (3-15)
AU CLK
IC651 2 (X651) REC/PB CLK1 OUT 9 218 ACLK
2 FIN H
REF OUT 16 Q305 E REC/PB
179 EXTPAL
X651 CLK2 OUT 11 3.0 Vp-p
(FD200)
48MHz 3.5 Vp-p Q305 Y OUT
3.4 Vp-p YO 173 BUFFER
XNTSC/PAL VIDEO/USB
(FD100)
6 48 MHz 16.4 MHz
410 mVp-p Q306 C OUT
8 BLOCK (3-13)
CO 176 BUFFER
IC651 qh REC/PB IC651 9 REC/PB
CAMERA MC CLK H
BLOCK 2 11 USB CLK Q306 E REC/PB
(3-5) Q310 − 312
3.5 Vp-p
CNT C LENS MOTOR DRIVE
Q303, 304
CHROMA
CONTROL
9 BLOCK (3-10)
FDC FDC CLK
25.8 MHz
SWITCH
BLOCK 12 IC651 qa REC /PB
(3-7) MODE CONTROL
PAL/XNTSC PAL/XNTSC 20 BLOCK (3-12)
05
3-3 3-4
3-3. CAMERA BLOCK DIAGRAM 2
FC-89 BOARD (2/6)
16 DATA BUS 16 16 DATA BUS 16 35 37 – 45

D0 – 15
CAMERA 47 49 – 53
(MS SOCKET)
BLOCK 1 1 57 – 59 61 MSBS/PTC2 193
MS BS
CN681
2 10
(3-4)
ADDRESS BUS
14 ADDRESS BUS 14 20 ADDRESS BUS 20 63 – 71 73 A1 – 20 MS DIO
MSDIO/PTC1 194
DATA BUS
4
75 – 80 MS SCLK
MSSCLK 192 8
XMS IN 1
6
IC506
16M FLASH
IRQ6 184 XMS IN
(FC-89 (6/10))
2356 XMC CS
CKE 34 110 XCKE/PTK5 CTS 177
8 9 11 12 XMC HELP
16 DATA BUS 16 16 DATA BUS 16 DQ0 – 15 CS− 18 102 XCS3 PTE4 106 MODE CONTROL
39 40 42 43
45 46 48 49 RAS− 17 111 PTJ0 TXD0 171
HI SI 17 BLOCK (3-12)
HI SO
RXD0 178
CAS− 16 113 PTJ2 XHI SCK
19 SCK0 172
ı WE− 15 96 XRDWR PAL/XNTSC
PTL4 210
24
3 ADDRESS BUS 3 12 ADDRESS BUS 12 A0 – 11
27
ı CLK 35 169 CKIO USB VBUS
32 DQML 14 92 XWE0 VBUS 189
USB TXENL
DQMU 36 93 XWE1 TXENL 187
USB XVDATA
XVDATA 186
USB D+IN
DPLS/PTF2 146 VIDEO/USB
DMNS/PTF3 145
USB D–IN 19 BLOCK (3-13)
USB SUSPND
SUSPND 191
USB D+OUT
IC505 TXDPLS/PTF1 147
USB D–OUT
TXDMNS/PTF0 148
16M FLASH USB D+PULLUP
D31/PT87 14
FDC BLOCK (FC-89 (6/10))
(3-7) 15 29
ı
36
16 DATA BUS 16 DQ0 – 15
38 CE 26 99 XCS0
PTJ4 117 1 CS
ADDRESS BUS
ı
DATA BUS
45 RXD1 179 4 DO
OE 28 91 XRD IC508
D20/PTA4 27 6 RST
1 EEP ROM
ı WE 11 (FC-89 (6/10))
9 3 DI
20 ADDRESS BUS 20 16 A0 – 19 2 SCK
ı
25 RESET− 12
48 IC501
CAM SO
MC CAM TXD1 173
MC XRD XCAM SCK
SH DSP SCK1 174
MC XWE1 XCAM RESET CAMERA BLOCK 1
(FC-89 (5/10)) D16/PTA0 33
XIC102 CS
10 (3-3)
PTJ1 112
XTG CS
PTJ3 115
CCD TEMP AD
MC XFLRST AN1/PTL1 207
MODE CONTROL
BLOCK (3-12) 14 XRST SYS XCAM SCK
200 XRESETP CAM SO
LENS MOTOR DRIVE
D19/PTA3 29
DAC STBY 21 BLOCK (3-10)
MC XWE1 HALL AD
AN0/PTL0 206
MC XWE0
MC HCLK
MC XRD
FDC BLOCK
SYS V
D25/PTB1 21
MOTOR ON
22 (3-7)
9 IRQ0
MC XCS2 MC XDACK 1
101 XCS2 XDACK1/PTD7 120
CAMERA MC XCS6 FDC RST/XCDR RST
105 XCS6 D24/PTB0 23
IC301FLD
BLOCK 1 2 185 IRQ7 D27/PTB3 18
MC XCKSLEEP
23
FDC BLOCK
(3-4) MC XCS5 (3-7)
MC DRAK0 XCS5 104
196 DRAK0
MC DRAK1 1 IRQ FDC/CW
197 DRAK1 4
MC DREQ0 IRQ4 13 FDC INT ENB
198 XDREQ0 IRQ5 183 2
IC502
AU LRCK
166 TCLK (FC-89 (5/10))
IRQAUDIO D26/PTB2 19
12 IRQ3
IRQIMG 10 IRQ1
IRQJPG
11 IRQ2
FDC BLOCK
(3-7) 13 MC DREQ1
199 XDREQ1
Q501
D501
CAMERA BLOCK 1 MC CLK LED (ACCESS LED (RED) )
161 EXTAL D30/PT86 15
(3-3) 11 USB CLK
134 USB CLK
DRIVE
05
3-5 3-6
3-4. FDC BLOCK DIAGRAM
FC-89 BOARD (3/6)
CN702
79 − 82 84 − 87 R/W A R/W A
16 DATA BUS 16 D0 − 15 COM14 47 1 XDCO RW1A 46 4
90 − 93 95 − 98 R/W B R/W B
SIDEOUTB 60 2 XSS1 RW1B 45 3
ERASE ERASE
CAMERA BLOCK 2 5 RDATAB 65 3 XRD0 ED1 47 2
(3-5) 15 3 ADDRESS BUS 3 A0 – 2
7 WPRTB 70 5 XWPO
MC XRD 9 RDB TRK0B 69 6 XT0O
MC XWE1 10 WRB CN703
WEB 57 7 XIWG
R/W A R/W A
RW0A 49 2
MC XDACK1 R/W B R/W B
12 DMAAKB WDATAB 56 8 XIWD RW0B 48 1
FDC RST/XCDR RST ERASE ERASE
2 RESET IC702 STEPB 59 9 XISTP IC704 ED0 44 4
CAMERA BLOCK 2 MC XCKSLEEP
(3-6) 23 MC XCS5
23 CLKEN FDD CONTROL DIRB 62 10 XIDIR REC/PB AMP,
8 CSB (FC-89 (8/10)) STEPPING MOTOR DRIVE
IRQ FDC/CW (FC-89 (7/10))
14 INT COM11 44 13 XDSEL
IC703 COM13 46 14 XHDO
CAMERA BLOCK 2 MC DREQ1 (FC-89 (8/10)) READYB 67 15 XRDYO
(3-5) 13 4 2
13 DMARQ COM12 45
3.5 Vp-p CN701

PA PA
CAMERA BLOCK 1 FDC CLK PA 22 1 FLOPPY
(3-3) 12 53 XT1 4 MHz
PB 19
PB
2
PB DISK
PNA PNA DRIVE
IC704 wg (X702) REC/PB PNA 23 3
PNB PNB UNIT
PNB 20 4
STBY (K) STBY (K)
STBY 17 6
25 OSCI
PK-61 BOARD (1/4) X702 HDS 35
HDS
17
HDS
4MHz FPTS FPTS
XFPTS 34 18
IC702 26 OSCO CLOCK CLOCK
CPO 30 14
SE701 SHOCK DETECT
SHOCK (PK-61 (1/3))
SENSOR
1 S1A CN701 (1/4) CN801 (2/6)
+ 43 COM10
OUT SHOCK SENS SHOCK SENS
OUT 4 37 9 64 SHOCKB
TOSI (C) TOSI (C)
2 S1B TOSI 16 7
INDEX INDEX
INDEXB 66 12 XIDXO XIDXS 31 11
MC MC
XMC 32 12
DISK DISK
COM9 42 DISK 33 19
XMON
MONB
MONA
COM8 41
COM15 48
11 40 41
CAMERA BLOCK 2 MOTOR ON

(3-6) 22
MODE CONTROL DISK IN

BLOCK (3-12) 30
CN803
INDEX INDEX
3
FDDRF B FDDRF B
1
FDDRF A FDDRF A
2
TRACK00
6
CPC
(FOR CHECK)
RESET RESET
17
TXD TXD
15 MODE CONTROL
16
RXD RXD 26 BLOCK (3-11)
PF7 PF7
14
HSY
7
VG
9
COM
8
CN801 (3/6)
PANEL COM
43
LCD BLOCK VG
(3-15) 32 44
HSY
42
05
3-7 3-8
3-5. LENS MOTOR BLOCK DIAGRAM
FC-89 BOARD (4/6)

IC186
EVR (D/A CONVERTER)
(FC-89 (4/10))
CNT C CAMERA BLOCK 1

IC184 (1/2) IC185 (1/4)
AO10 9 9 (3-4)
LENS BLOCK IRIS DRIVE IRIS DRIVE
(FC-89 (4/10)) (FC-89 (4/10)) 18 A01
IRIS Q181 12 CAM SO
2 14 + 19 A02 DI 17
CN184 − XCAM SCK
METER DRIVE− IRIS 1 CLK 16 CAMERA BLOCK 2
−
M
13
DRIVE+
DRIVE
+
13 LD 15
DAC STBY 21 (3-6)
12 3 HALL AD
IC184 (2/2)
IRIS DRIVE
D182 (FC-89 (4/10))
IC185 (2/4) 5
7 +
HALL BIAS CONTROL
−
(FC-89 (4/10)) 6
5
BIAS+ 7 + 4 A05
8
−
6
IC185 (3/4)
HALL+
H 9 HALL GAIN CONTROL
Q184 (FC-89 (4/10))
PE DAC LEVEL1
3 AO3 2
BIAS− GAIN 1 + 5 A06 PE DAC LEVEL2
10 AO4 3
CONTROL −
2
6 A07
IC185 (4/4)
HALL AMP
HALL−
11 (FC-89 (4/10))
9 −
8
+
10
17 B4 ZB
MSHUT ON
19 B3 ZA IN3 13
IN4 15
5 A3 ZA
7 A4 ZB
CAMERA BLOCK 1
IC183 IC182 5 (3-4)
(FC-89 (4/10)) IRIS (MECHA SHUTTER)
DRIVE
M902
(FC-89 (4/10))
FOCUS
MOTOR FOCUS A
17 2 A1 FA EN1 10
FOCUS A FOCUS PE EN0
M 15 23 B1 FA MOTOR EN2 12
FOCUS B PE DIR0A
16 4 A2 FB DRIVE IN1 9
FOCUS B PE DIR0B
14 21 B2 FB IN2 11
M901
ZOOM ZOOM A
MOTOR 12 5 A3 ZA EN3 14
ZOOM A ZOOM PE EN1
4 19 B3 ZA EN4 16
M ZOOM B MOTOR PE DIR1A
1 7 A4 ZB IN3 13
ZOOM B DRIVE PE DIR1B
3 17 B4 ZB IN4 15
FOCUS F SENS RST XFC RST SENS

19
SENSOR
F SENS VCC
20
ZOOM Z SENS RST XZM RST SENS

6
SENSOR
Z SENS VCC B+
7 (D 3.2V)
05 Q182
XLENS RST LED
3-9 3-10
3-6. MODE CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
FC-89 BOARD (5/6)
IC407
RESET
+3.1V REG, RESET
(FC-89 (9/10))
FDC BLOCK B+ D401
(3-7) 26 TXD
22 TXD
(EVER 3.2V) 5 4 BATT UNREG
RXD ACV UNREG
23 TRD XREST 38 1 RESET D402
PF7 37 PF7
IC404 D406
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK FU-159 BOARD (1/2)
HI CONTROL MC XFLRST
XRST FLASH 98 CAMERA BLOCK 2
S001
(FC-89 (9/10))
XRST SYS 9
XRST SYS 14 (3-5)
(SHUTTER)
CN005 CN003 (1/2) CN002 (1/2) XRST SYS
XRS ON1 XRS ON1 XRS ON1 CAMERA BLOCK 1
1
XRS ON2
1
XRS ON2
1
XRS ON2
17 XSHTR LOCK SW
SYS V 64
SYS V 18 (3-4)
2 2 2 16 XSHTR SW
ZOOM SW AD ZOOM SW AD ZOOM SW AD

5 3 3 89 ZOOM SW
RV001
3.1 Vp-p
ZOOM
IC405
32.768 MHz
W T TIMER CLOCK
(FC-89 (9/10)) IC405 1 (X402) REC/PB
X402
32.768KHz 3 X OUT CLK OUT 1 52 32KHz USB VBUS
USB JACK IN 68
CS 5 24 RTC CCS VOUT ON VIDEO/USB
PK-61 BOARD (2/4) 2 X IN XSCK 6 7 RTC SCK
VOUT ON 55
AV JACK IN 28 BLOCK (3-13)
AV JACK IN 30
CN701 (2/4) CN801 (4/6) SIO 7 8 RTC SIO
BATT
6 40 8
BT701 Q415
LITHIUM D410 MELODY ENV 59 MODULATOR
BATTERY Q406
B+ (EVR 3.2V) Q412 BEEP IN VIDEO/USB
D701 MELODY 36 MODULATOR 29 BLOCK (3-13)
(FLASH LED (AMBER) ) XSTROBE LED XSTROBE LED LED
14 32 56 STB LED XMS IN
DRIVE XMS IN 18
XMC CS
D703 XCS MC 50
XPOWER LED XPOWER LED Q411 LED XMC HELP CAMERA BLOCK 2
(POWER LED (GREEN) ) XMC DEAD DET 67
13 33
DRIVE
60 POWER LED
HI SI 44
HI SI 17 (3-6)
HI SO
D702 HI SO 45
XBATT CHG LED XBATT CHG LED Q408 LED XHI SCK
(CHARGE LED (AMBER) ) 12 34 94 CHARGE LED XHI SCK 46
DRIVE PAL/XNTSC
S703
4 3 2
POWER XPWR SW XPWR SW
DO
DI
SCK
ON/OFF (CHG) 15 31 14 XPWR SW
S701, 702, KEY AD1 KEY AD1

FUNCTION 19 27 79 KEY AD1
S705, 707, KEY AD2 KEY AD2 IC406
KEY 20 26 80 KEY AD2 XEEPROM WE 12 6 RST
S709, 711 EEPROM
XCS EEPROM 95 1 CS (FC-89 (9/10))
B+ (D 3.2V)
S708 DISK IN FDC BLOCK

(PLAY) 16
XCAM/PB SW
30
XCAM/PB SW
15 XCAM/PB SW
DISK IN 33 30 (3-7)
S710
(MOVIE) 17
MOVE/XSTILL
29
MOVE/XSTILL
21 XSTILL/MOVIE SW PAL/XNTSC CAMERA BLOCK 1
PLAY/STILL/MOVIE
PAL/XNTSC 3 20 (3-4)
DISK/XMS DISK/XMS
18 28 63 DISK/XMS SW
S712 MS/FD CN801 (5/6)
Q410 HI SO
CN301 36
TALLY TALLY LED XHI SCK LCD BLOCK
7
DRIVE
58 SELFTMR LED
XCS PANEL D/A
37 31 (3-15)
XCS LCD D/A 26 35
STB CHARGE STB CHG
1 93 STB CHG
XSTB FULL XSTB FULL
FLASH 10 32 XSTB FUL
UNIT
PHOTO TR OUT
6
PHOTO TR OUT FU-159 BOARD (2/2)
STRB PHOTO ON STRB PHOTO ON CN002
2 40 20MHz OUT Q409 CN002 (2/2) CN003 (2/2) BATT UNREG
STRB ON
9
STRB ON X401
BATTERY
1 + BT901
20MHz BATT SI 48 BATT SIG BATT SIG BATT SIG BATTERY
41 20MHz IN CHARGE 9 9 2 S
BATT SO 49 TERMINAL
DETECTOR
DC PACK SW DC PACK SW DC PACK SW
CHARGE INH 65 5 5 4
STRB ON
CAMERA BLOCK 1 STRB PHOTO ON
3 –
(3-4) 3 PHOTO TR OUT 3.4 Vp-p BATT/XEXT CN001
20 MHz 20 ACV UNREG J001
1
BATT/XEXT BATT/XEXT BATT/XEXT DC IN
IC404 r; (X401) REC/PB 8 8 3
2
05
3-11 3-12
3-7. VIDEO/USB BLOCK DIAGRAM
FC-89 BOARD (6/6) PK-61 BOARD (3/4)
Q416 CN801 (6/6) CN701 (3/4) CN702

MODE CONTROL BEEP IN BUZZER BUZZER
BLOCK (3-12) 29 AMP 39 7 1
BZ901
2 BUZZER
410 mVp-p
IC901 2.0 Vp-p
H VIDEO AMP
IC901 1 REC/PB (FC-89 (3/10))
H
IC901 3 REC/PB
Y OUT
1 Y-IN
CAMERA BLOCK 1 VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT
(3-4) 8 C OUT
Q903 V-OUT 3 2 43
J781
BUFFER 8 C-IN
VIDEO OUT
6 POWER SAVE AV JACK IN AV JACK IN
1 45
VOUT ON
AV JACK IN
MODE CONTROL
BLOCK (3-12) 28
400 mVp-p
USB VBUS
H
IC901 8 REC/PB
FP-335 FLEXIBLE BOARD

CN682 CN201
USB VBUS USB VBUS USB JACK IN VCC
4 5
IC681
USB I/F
(FC-89 (6/10))
USB TXENL USB D− USB D− D– USB

2 OE USB D− 10 3 4
USB XVDATA
3 RCV
CAMERA BLOCK 2 USB D+IN
4 VP
(3-6) 19 USB D−IN
5 VM
USB SUSPND
6 SUSPND
USB D+OUT USB D+ USB D+ D+
12 VPO USB D+ 11 5 3
USB D−OUT Q683
13 VMO/FSEO
B+
(D3.2V)
USB D+ PULLUP
05
3-13 3-14
3-8. LCD BLOCK DIAGRAM
PK-61 BOARD (4/4)

410 mVp-p
7.9 Vp-p 7.9 Vp-p
IC901
LCD DRIVE
160 mVp-p H
(PK-61 (2/3)) 2H 2H
IC901 8 REC/PB
IC901 w; REC/PB IC901 ws REC/PB
CN701 (4/4) IC901 9 REC/PB CN902

PANEL Y G/Y R OUT VR R
CAMERA 25 8 20 4
PANEL R-Y R/R-Y/CR G OUT VG G
BLOCK 1 6 23
PANEL B-Y
9
B/B-Y/CB B OUT
22
VB
5
B
(3-4) 24 10 LCD DRIVE 24 3
Q903, 904
PSIG OUT PSIG PSIG PSIG
180 mVp-p 37 6
DRIVE
BLACK LIMIT
H
SUB BRT R
CONTRAST
SUB BRT B
PSIGGRAY
IC901 q; REC/PB
EXT BGP
RGBBLK
BRIGHT
COLOR
XTEST
VREF
PRG
7.9 Vp-p
FRP
IC902
EVR (D/A COMVERTER) 39 6 32 31 40 27 38 35 26 14 28 36 29 2H
(PK-61 (2/3)) IC901 wf REC/PB
BRT
BRIGHT 1 5.0 Vp-p
COLOR
COLOR 2
XCS PANEL D/A BRT R
11 22 EN BRT R 3 2H
BRT B
BRT B 4 IC901 ej REC/PB
MODE CONT
CONTRAST 5
XCLP
SBLK
CONTROL B LIM
PRG
FRP
BLOCK 31 B LIMIT 6
TEST LCD901
XHI SCK BRT TST 11
19 SCK PSIGGRAY Q905
(3-12) 9
P MUTE 12
COM COM VCOM COM
HI SO COM 9 23 COLOR
10 20 SI DRIVE
IC903 (2/2) LCD
MONITOR
(PK-61 (2/3))
RGT RGT
VREF VREF 2
P GRAY 7
AMP
HCK1 HCK1
IC904 7
3.3 Vp-p LCD TIMING GENERATOR HCK2 HCK2

(PK-61 (2/3)) 8
11.7MHz IC903 (1/2)
(PK-61 (2/3) ) CREXT CREXT
IC904 wh REC/PB
PANEL 13.2V 9
VCO 27 CKII XCLP 1
VCO 8 VCO Q908
26 CKO/TEST SBLK 7 REF REF
REF. VOLTAGE. GEN. 11
PRG 8
FRP 9
FILTER
RGT/XCSH 10
32 RPD HCK1/XCSV 11
H REV
H REV 15 46 HREV HCK2/PCG 12
V REV 3.1 Vp-p
V REV 16 44 VREV
NTSC
NTSC 17 41 NT/PAL
COMTST H
COMTST 18 47 COMTST
IC904 ej REC/PB
BL LEV
BL LEV 10 HST HST
HST/CKV1 16 12
WIDE WIDE
WIDE/CKV2 17 13
CAMERA HDO
28 37 XHD
BLOCK 1 7 27
PANEL V
34 XVD DWN/CHK2 21
DWN
19
DWN
(3-4) EN EN
EN/CHK1 22 20
HSY VCK VCK
4 45 HDO VCK/XSTH 23 21
VST VST
VST/STH 24 22
3.2 Vp-p
FDC CONTROL
BLOCK (3-7) 32 V
IC904 ef REC/PB
VG
2
PANEL COM
3
T851 ND801
BL UNREG INVERTER TRANS CN851
3.3 Vp-p Q854 BACK LIGHT
SAW BL HIGH
7
OSC − 3 5 10 10
1 SWITCHING
+
H
Q856 Q860
IC904 rg REC/PB Q857-859
Q851, 852 3 SWITCHING INVERTER 5 1 6
−
4 BL LEVEL DRIVE 2 2
PANEL 4.9V 2 VCC + 3
Q855
Q853
SWITCH
PROTECT IC852
SHORT CIRCUIT SWITCH 1 4
5 CURRENT DETECT
PROTECT (PK-61 (3/3))
D853
3 BL LOW
Q861 4 + 3
6.2 Vp-p IC851
LED SWITCH – 1
DC/DC CONTROL D901
496 kHz
(PK-61 (3/3)) LED
1
IC851 1 REC/PB
05
3-15 3-16
FU-159 BOARD (1/2) FC-89 BOARD (1/2) CN801 (2/2)

J001 EVER 3.2V EVER 3.2V
25
CN001 CN004 CN001
DC IN F003
ACV UNREG 6 6 BL UNREG BL UNREG BL UNREG 5
1 7 7
BATT/XEXT 6
3 F001 PANEL 13.2V
10 10 ST UNREG ST UNREG 13
POWER
2
ACV GND
F002
11 11
PANEL 4.9V
11
A BLOCK 2
8 8 VCC UNREG VCC UNREG (3-19)
9 9 A 4.9V
F005 12
ACV UNREG ACV UNREG
12 12 PANEL 3.2V 14
F004 15
BATT UNREG
5 5 D 3.2V
10
BATT UNREG Q004
18 VCC VCC OUT 45 SWITCHING
Q001, 004 L007
CN003 (1/2) CN002 (1/2) D401 D402
FAST CHARGE ON
7 7 BL UNREG
OUT A 46
INIT CHARGE ON 6 −INA ST UNREG
6 6 Q010
+IN A 7 FDD P 5V
EMERGENCY
SCP:A 8
BT901 Q002, 003 DETECT
BATTERY Q005 Q024, 032
CN002 CHARGE
TERMINAL Q014 13.2V
BATT CONTROL
UNREG EMERGENCY REG
+ 1 IC001
DETECT
DC CONTROL Q023
BATT/EXT (FC-89 (10/10))
8 8 LCD DD ON SWITCH
BATT SIG BATT SIG IC407
S 2 9 9
(FC-89 (9/10)) Q018
DC PACK SW DC PACK SW L402
4 5 5 T001
4 +3.1V 3 DC/DC CONV. D002
REG
BATT GND TRANS RECT
– 3 Q001 L016
CAM 15V
SWITCHING 4 5
3
6
2
PK-61 BOARD (1/2) D410
CN701 (1/2) CN801 (1/2) IC405 1 8
BT701 BATT TIMER OUT B 44 Q025, 031
6 40 POWER
LITHIUM BATTERY CLOCK 11 −INB
−15V −7.5V CAM −7.5V
(FC-89 (9/10))
REG
B BLOCK 2
(3-19)
+IN B 12
IC404 SCP:B 13
HI CONTROL
(FC-89 (9/10))
V REF 2.5V
Q003
SWITCHING Q16 PANEL
L005 L17
42 51 4.9V 4.9V
BACKUP
75 − 77
VCC
86 87 LCD DD ON
OUT C 40
25 +INC L012
FDD 4.9V
−IN C 26
SCP:C 24 L015
A 4.9V
CAM P 5V
Q002
SWITCHING L004 L011
BATT UNREG 3.2V A 3.2V
71 BATT SENS
FAST CHARGE ON L008
100 FAST CHARGE D 3.2V
INIT CHARGE ON OUT D 39
27 INIT CHARGE L010
30 +IND CAM 3.2V
BATT/EXT
20 BATT/XEXT −IN D 31
Q409 SCP:D 29
BATTERY 48 BATT SI
BATT SIG 19 V REF 2.5V
CHARGE
DETECTOR 49 BATT SO
DC PACK SW 20 POW CONT
65 CHARGE INH
21 CTL B RT 16 Q005, 006
SYS DD ON 29 22 CTL C, D CT 17
D1.8V D 1.8V
REG
VREF 2.5V VREF 2.5V
LCD DD ON
LCD DD ON 47
CAM DD ON CAM DD ON
CAM DD ON 25
05
3-17 3-18
PK-61 BOARD FU-159 BOARD (2/2) CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK

IC702 IC904 IC902 IC901
(2/2) RV001
SHOCK LCD TIMING EVR LCD
DETECT GENERATOR (D/A CONV.) DRIVE ZOOM
(PK-61 (1/3)) (PK-61 (2/3)) (PK-61 (2/3)) (PK-61 (2/3)) CN002 (2/2) CN003 (2/2) CN005
W T
D 3.2V 4 4 D 3.2V
4
CN701 (2/2) L903
L902 PANEL
31 PANEL 3.2V UNIT
32
L702 CN902
D 3.2V
36 16
PANEL 13.2V L901

LCD901
33 18
IC681
D702 COLOR
POWER EVER 3.2V USB I/F
CHARGE LCD
BLOCK 1 A 21 IC903 IC852 IC851
MONITOR
(FC-89 (6/10))
(3-18) D701 VREF AMP. CURRENT DC/DC
VCO DETECT CONTROL
FLASH (PK-61 (2/3)) (PK-61 (3/3)) (PK-61 (3/3)) FB681 Q682 CN681
D 3.2V 3 MS
A 4.9V D703
34 9 SOCKET
POWER Q851, 852 Q861 CN851
PANEL 4.9V D901
35 2
LED
IC508 IC505 IC506 L702
D 3.2V
T851 EEPROM 16M 16M
L851 Q854, 856 L852, 853
40 BL UNREG INVERTER ND801 (FC-89 (6/10)) FLASH SDRAM
SWITCHING 10 BACK (FC-89 (6/10)) (FC-89 (6/10))
41 TRANS
LIGHT IC702 IC703
L505 L504 FDD INVERTER
(FC-89 (8/10))
CN701
FC-89 BOARD (2/2) FDD P 5V 9
IC501
IC301 IC901 IC502 10
MC CAM,
CAMERA VIDEO AMP SH DSP NAND GATE
IC651 DSP IC303 (FC-89 (5/10))
(FC-89 (3/10)) (FC-89 (5/10))
CLOCK GEN. (FC-89 (2/10)) 64 SDRAM Q701 − 703 5 FLOPPY
(FC-89 (1/10)) (FC-89 (3/10)) BL UNREG DISK
DRIVE
L902 CN702 UNIT
L303 FDD 4.9V
IC406 5
FB651 D501
L302 EEPROM L502
FB301
FB302
L304
L301
(FC-89 (9/10)) ACCESS CN703

L651 IC704 3
D 3.2V D 3.2V REC/PB AMP
STEPING
D 1.8V D 1.8V MOTOR DRIVE
(FC-89 (7/10))
A 3.2V A 3.2V
Q317, 318 CN301
A 4.9V A 4.9V A 4.9V
4
FDD P 5V FDD P 5V FLASH
UNIT
ST UNREG ST UNREG UNREG
8
POWER
BL UNREG BL UNREG
BLOCK 1 B FDD 4.9V FDD 4.9V FD100: TYPE SO / FD200 FD100: TYPE PA
(3-18)
Q102 - 105
CN101 CN101 CN201
CAM 15V CAM 15V CAM 15V CAM 15V CAM 15V IC101 CAM 15V IC201
11 10 10
CAM CCD CCD
CAM −7.5V CAM −7.5V CAM −7.5V −7.5V CAM −7.5V IMAGER CAM −7.5V IMAGER
12 9 9
CAM DD ON CAM DD ON
L181
CAM P 5V CAM P 5V
L101 L182
CAM 3.2V CAM 3.2V Q182 CN184
CH 3.2V D 3.2V F SENS VCC F SENS VCC FOCUS
20
L184 L102 SENSOR
FB110 FB111
L183
Z SENS VCC Z SENS VCC ZOOM
IC184 IC185 IC186 IC102 IC101 IC183 IC182 7
SENSOR
IRIS IRIS DRIVE EVR S/H, AGC, TIMING FOCUS/ZOOM IRIS(MECHA
DRIVE HALL AMP (D/A CONV.) A/D CONV. GENERATOR MOTOR DRIVE SHUTTER)
(FC-89 (4/10)) HALL BIAS/GAN (FC-89 (4/10)) (FC-89 (1/10)) (FC-89 (1/10)) (FC-89 (4/10)) DRIVE
(FC-89 (4/10))
05
3-19 3-20 E
SECTION 4
THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

(In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)
(For printed wiring boards) (Measuring conditions voltage and waveform)

• : Uses unleaded solder. • Voltages and waveforms are measured between the
• b: Pattern from the side which enables seeing. measurement points and ground when camera shoots
(The other layers’ patterns are not indicated) color bar chart of pattern box. They are reference values
• Through hole is omitted. and reference waveforms. *
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms. (VOM of DC 10 MΩ input impedance is used)
• There are a few cases that the part printed on diagram • Voltage values change depending upon input impedance
isn’t mounted in this model. of VOM used.)
• Chip parts.
Transistor Diode 1. Connection
C 6 5 4 4 5 6 4 5 1 2 3 3 3 3 4
Pattern box
B E 1 2 3 3 2 1 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
2 1 5 4
Front side of the lens

3 4 5 1 2 3
L
(For schematic diagrams)
• All capacitors are in µF unless otherwise noted. pF : µ
µF. 50 V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics
and tantalums.
• Chip resistors are 1/10 W unless otherwise noted.
kΩ=1000 Ω, MΩ=1000 kΩ.
• Caution when replacing chip parts. L=About 30cm
New parts must be attached after removal of chip.
Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum
capacitor, Because it is damaged by the heat.
• Some chip part will be indicated as follows.
Example C541 L452 2. Adjust the distance so that the output waveform of Fig.
22U 10UH a and the Fig. b can be obtain.
TA A 2520
H
Yellow
Magenta
White
Cyan
Green
Kinds of capacitor
Red
Blue
Temperature characteristics
External dimensions (mm)
• Constants of resistors, capacitors, ICs and etc with XX

indicate that they are not used.
In such cases, the unused circuits may be indicated. A B A=B B A
• Parts with ★ differ according to the model/destination.
Fig. a (Video output terminal output waveform)
Refer to the mount table for each function.
• All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic
curve B, unless otherwise noted. Color bar chart
• Signal name picture frame
Magenta
XEDIT → EDIT PB/XREC → PB/REC

Green
Yellow
White
Cyan
Monitor TV or LCD
Blue
Red
• 2: non flammable resistor picture frame

• 1: fusible resistor
• C: panel designation
• A: B+ Line *
• B: B– Line * Fig.b (Picture on monitor TV or LCD)
• J : IN/OUT direction of (+,–) B LINE. *
• C: adjustment for repair. * When indicating parts by reference number, please
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms. * include the board name.
* Indicated by the color red.
Note : Les composants identifiés par une marque
Note : The components identified by mark 0 or 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité.
dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant
Replace only with part number specified. le numéro spécifie.
4-1
I
J
F
E
C
B
A
H
G
D
05
1
FRAME (1/2)
20P
20 F_SENS_VCC
19 F_SENS_RST
2
18 F_SENS_GND
17 FOCUS_A
16 FOCUS_B
15 FOCUS_A
14 FOCUS_B
13 DRIVE-
12 DRIVE+
11 HALL-
3
10 BIAS-
9 HALL+
LENS UNIT
8 BIAS+
7 Z_SENS_VCC
6 Z_SENS_RST
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
5 Z_SENS_GND
4 ZOOM_A
3 ZOOM_B
4
2 ZOOM_A
1 ZOOM_B
4-3
IC201
IC101
FD200
5
CCD
IMAGER
FD100:TYPE PA
FD100:TYPE SO
S001
BLOCK
(SHUTTER)
CD-390 BOARD
CD-379 BOARD
6
ZOOM
RV001
T
CONTROL SWITCH
:FD100:TYPE PA
FP-464
CN201 20P:FD100:TYPE PA
FLEXIBLE
:FD100:TYPE SO/FD200
CN101 20P:FD100:TYPE SO/FD200
GND
CCD_OUT
GND
GND
V4
V3A
V3B
V2
V1A
V1B
CAM_15V
CAM_-7.5V
GND
H2
H1
RG
VSUB_CONT
VSHT
GND
CCD_TEMP
7
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
FP-465 FLEXBLE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
V4
V2
H2
H1
RG
V3A
V3B
V1A
V1B
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
VSHT
CN005
CN101
D_3.2V
CCD_OUT
CAM_15V
XRS_ON1
XRS_ON2
8
CAM_-7.5V
CCD_TEMP
VSUB_CONT
6P
UNREG_GND
UNREG_GND
20P
ZOOM_SW_AD
CN001 12P CN004 12P

REG_GND 1 1 REG_GND
REG_GND 2 2 REG_GND
REG_GND 3 3 REG_GND
CN184 20P
REG_GND 4 4 REG_GND
1 ZOOM_B
9
BATT_UNREG 5 5 BATT_UNREG
2 ZOOM_A
UNREG4 6 6 UNREG4
3 ZOOM_B
UNREG4 7 7 UNREG4
FU-055
4 ZOOM_A
HARNESS
UNREG3 8 8 UNREG3
5 Z_SENS_GND
UNREG3 9 9 UNREG3
6 Z_SENS_RST
UNREG2 10 10 UNREG2
7 Z_SENS_VCC
UNREG2 11 11 UNREG2
8 BIAS+
UNREG1 12 12 UNREG1
9 HALL+
10
10 BIAS-
11 HALL-
FU-159 BOARD
12 DRIVE+
CN002 9P CN003 9P
13 DRIVE-
BATT_SIG 9 9 BATT_SIG
14 FOCUS_B
BATT/XEXT 8 8 BATT/XEXT
15 FOCUS_A
FAST_CHARGE_ON 7 7 FAST_CHARGE_ON
16 FOCUS_B
INIT_CHARGE_ON 6 6 INIT_CHARGE_ON
17 FOCUS_A
11
DC_PACK_SW 5 5 DC_PACK_SW
18 F_SENS_GND
D_3.2V 4 4 D_3.2V
FU-056
19 F_SENS_RST
HARNESS
ZOOM_SW_AD 3 3 ZOOM_SW_AD
20 F_SENS_VCC
XRS_ON2 2 2 XRS_ON2
XRS_ON1 1 1 XRS_ON1
CN002
CN001
BATT_GND
BATT_SIG
BATT_UNREG
BATT/XEXT
DC_PACK_SW
3P
ACV_GND
ACV_UNREG
4P
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
12
CN701 19P
J001
S
DC IN
PA 1
BT901
BATTERY
TERMINAL
PB 2
PNA 3
PNB 4
FDD_5V(A) 5
13
STBY(K) 6
TOS1(C) 7
FC-89 BOARD (1/2)
FDD_GND(E) 8
4-4
FDD_5V 9
FDD_5V 10
INDEX 11
MC 12
FDD_LED_IN 13
14
CLOCK 14
FDD_GND 15
FDD_GND 16
HDS 17
FPTS 18
DISK 19
CN703 5P
R/W_B 1
15
R/W_A 2
COMMON 3
SIDE 0
ERASE 4
SHIELD 5
FLOPPY DISK DRIVE
CN702 5P
COMMON 5
16
R/W_A 4
R/W_B 3
SIDE 1
ERASE 2
SHIELD 1
(SEE PAGE 4-5)
TO FC-89 BOARD (2/2)
17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
A D901
(LED)
FLASH UNIT ND801

BACK LIGHT
CPC
(FOR CHECK)
10
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
10
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
8
7
4
3
1
STB_CHARGE
STRB_PHOTO_ON
POP_UP_ON
A_4.9V
UNREG_GND
PHOTO_TR_OUT
UNREG
STRB_ON
XSTB_FULL
NC
NC
NC
NC
EVER_3.2V
RESET
RXD
TXD
PF7
MAKER_RECOG
LANC_OUT
LANC_IN
HI_UNREG
VG
COM
HSY
TRACK_00
NC
REG_GND
INDEX
FDDRF_A
FDDRF_B
BL_HIGH
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
BL_LOW
LED
LED_GND
10P
10P
22P
TALLY
CN801 45P CN701 45P
CN851
CN803
CN301
REG_GND 45 1 REG_GND
VG 44 2 VG
PANEL_COM 43 3 PANEL_COM
HSY 42 4 HSY
MAKER_RECOG 41 5 MAKER_RECOG
C BATT 40 6 BATT
BL UNIT
CN902 24P
BUZZER 39 7 BUZZER TESTR 1
REG_GND 38 8 REG_GND RGT 2
XHI_SCK 37 9 XHI_SCK PK-61 BOARD B 3
HI_SO 36 10 HI_SO R 4
XCS_LCD_D/A 35 11 XCS_LCD_D/A G 5
XBATT_CHG_LED 34 12 XBATT_CHG_LED PSIG 6
XPOWER_LED 33 13 XPOWER_LED HCK1 7

D XSTROBE_LED 32 14 XSTROBE_LED S701
S702
DISPLAY HCK2 8
LCD901
XPWR_SW 31 15 XPWR_SW
MENU CRext 9 COLOR
XCAM/PB_SW 30 16 XCAM/PB_SW SDUT 10
MOVE/XSTILL 29 17 MOVE/XSTILL S703 REF 11

LCD
DISK/XMS 28 18 DISK/XMS POWER
ON/OFF(CHG)
HST 12 MONITOR
KEY_AD1 27 19 KEY_AD1 WIDE 13
FP-466 FLEXIBLE
KEY_AD2 26 20 KEY_AD2 CS 14
EVER_3.2V 25 21 EVER_3.2V VSSG 15

E FC-89 BOARD (2/2) REG_GND 24 22 REG_GND VDDG 16
S705
PANEL_R-Y 23 23 PANEL_R-Y D701 VSS 17
(FLASH LED(AMBER)) FLASH
PANEL_B-Y 22 24 PANEL_B-Y VDD 18
D501
TO FC-89 BOARD (1/2) (ACCESS LED(RED)) PANEL_Y 21 25 PANEL_Y DWN 19
(SEE PAGE 4-4) REG_GND 20 26 REG_GND EN 20
PANEL_V 19 27 PANEL_V VCK 21

S707
HDO 18 28 HDO D702 VST 22
PROGRAM AE
(CHARGE LED(AMBER))
REG_GND 17 29 REG_GND COM 23
F REG_GND 16 30 REG_GND TESTL 24
PLAY/STILL/MOVIE
PANEL_13.2V 13 33 PANEL_13.2V D703
(POWER LED(GREEN)) S708 S710
A_4.9V 12 34 A_4.9V (PLAY) (MOVIE)
PANEL_4.9V 11 35 PANEL_4.9V CN702 2P

D_3.2V 10 36 D_3.2V SP + 2 BZ901
BUZZER
SHOCK SENS 9 37 SHOCK SENS S709 SP - 1
G REG_GND(UNREG_GND) 8 38 REG_GND(UNREG_GND)
LCD BACKLIGHT
ON OFF
REG_GND(UNREG_GND) 7 39 REG_GND(UNREG_GND)
BT701
BL_UNREG 6 40 BL_UNREG (LITHIUM BATTERY)
BL_UNREG 5 41 BL_UNREG
VIDEO_GND 4 42 VIDEO_GND J781

VIDEO OUT
USB_JACK_IN(VCC)
VIDEO_OUT 3 43 VIDEO_OUT
S711 S712
VIDEO_GND 2 44 VIDEO_GND
10P
FOCUS MS/FD
GND_GUARD
6P
AV_JACK_IN 1 45 AV_JACK_IN
H
USB_D+
USB_D-
CN681
CN682
SCLK
GND
GND
VSS
VCC
VCC
VSS
DIO
N.C
N.C
INT
BS
10
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
3
5
6
8
9
10 1
MEMORY STICK
CN201 5P
I GND 1
ID 2 FP-335
USB
D+ 3 FLEXIBLE
D- 4
05 VCC 5
4-5 4-6 FRAME (2/2)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FC-89 BOARD (1/10)

CN101
A
THROUGH THE
FP-465 FLEXIBLE
(SEE PAGE 4-11) VIDEO

(MVC-FD100:TYPE PA MODEL) SIGNAL
CCD IMAGER Y/CHROMA

XX MARK:NO MOUNT
20P
R:REC MODE
VSUB_CONT
CCD_TEMP
CAM_-7.5V
P:PB MODE
CAM_15V
CCD_OUT
CN201
VSHT
B
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
V1B
V1A
V3B
V3A
RG
H1
H2
V2
V4
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
TH201
C201 C206
1u 0.1u
R201 Q202
XX
UN9213J-(K8).SO
C CL201
SWITCH
CL202 R209 C214

10k 0.001u
R6/ R210
P0 1M
0
4
D C203
22u
C204
0.01u
R-0.4/P0
R-7.4/P0
R-0.4/P0
R-0.4/P0
R-7.4/P0
R-7.4/P0
16V
R-7.5/P0 R6/P0
FB202
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PT(VL)
V5(V1A)
V6(V3A)
V1(B)
V2
V3(B)
V4
SUB
IC201 5
E CCD IMAGER
IC201
MN39742PTJ-S
2
(VOUT)VO
R12.4/P0
(VDD)OD
R1.8/P0
R2.3/P0
D201 R202
PW
OG
RG
100k
H1
H2
LG
MA111-(K8).S0
3 1
R205 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
33 R15.4/
R1.4/P0
R7.7/P0
P0
R206 33 R1.6/P0
C208
0.1u
R204 C207
180 0.1u
F L201
10uH
R15.4/P0
C210
0.1u
R208
1M
C212
0.1u
C213
XX
FB201 R12.4/
C211 Q201 P0
C202
3.3u 0.1u 2SC4178-F13F14-T1
35V BUFFER
R11.6/P0
R203 R207 C209
0 C205
XX 3300 10p
05
with a CCD imager.
CD-379 4-7 4-8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FC-89 BOARD (1/10)

CN101
THROUGH THE
A FP-465 FLEXIBLE
(SEE PAGE 4-11) (MVC-FD100:TYPE SO MODEL/FD200) VIDEO
SIGNAL
CCD IMAGER Y/CHROMA
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
R:REC MODE
P:PB MODE
20P
VSUB_CONT
( ):FD100:TYPE SO MODEL(REC MODE)

CCD_TEMP
CAM_-7.5V
CAM_15V
CCD_OUT
< >:FD200(REC MODE)
CN101
VSHT
B
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
V1B
V1A
V3B
V3A
RG
H1
H2
V2
V4
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TH101
R101
XX
C CL101
2
CL102
Q102
2SC4178-F13F14-T1
BUFFER
C110 C112 R14.9/

0.1u 10p P0
L101 R110
100uH R9.5/ 0
R10.4/
P0
P0
R-7.3/P0
R-7.3/P0
R-0.3/P0
R-0.3/P0
R-0.3/P0
IC101 R-7.3/P0 C114
D CCD IMAGER R10.4/
P0
XX
ICX202BQ-13:FD100:TYPE SO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ICX284AQ-13:FD200 R109
3300
GND
VOUT
V4
V2
V3A
V3B
V1A
V1B
∗R104
10:FD200
33:FD100:TYPE SO 3
∗R105
15:FD200 1
33:FD100:TYPE SO
(8.1)<9.2>/P0
(7.8)<8.8>/P0
∗R103
150:FD200 4 ∗R107
180:FD100:TYPE SO 22:FD200
CSUB
VSHT
E 47:FD100:TYPE SO
GND
VDD
D101
H2
H1
RG
VL
MA111-(K8).S0
5 ∗R108
220k:FD200
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 1M:FD100:TYPE SO
R104
∗ R1.5/P0 R14.9/P0
R-7.5/P0
R1.5/P0
FD100: FD200
R107
R105 ∗ TYPE SO
∗
R13.3/P0 C113
1u 0.1u
C101 ∗ C107
C111
0.1u
R103 R108
0.1u
∗
C106 C108
0.1u 2200p
F FB101 R106
0.1u
2.2k:FD200
6.8k:FD100:
TYPE SO
C103
C109
C102 (8.1)<9.2>/P0
3.3u 10u R102
16V 100k 0
35V C105
05 0.01u Q101
UN9213J-(K8).SO
SWITCH

with a CCD imager.
4-9 4-10 CD-390

FC-89 (CAMERA PROCESS) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-43 for FC-89 printed wiring board. • See page 4-54 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
D101 8
FC-89 BOARD (1/10)

XX
CAM_DD_ON FC-89 BOARD
(9/10)
R14.9/P0 15
CAM_15V
A CAMERA PROCESS(CH BLOCK) R141
0 Q102
UN9113J-(K8).SO
XX MARK:NO MOUNT CAM 15V SWITCH R2.9/
P14.9
C135
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE FB111 L101 ∗ 1u
Q103
R:REC MODE UN9113J-(K8).SO R0/P14.8
P:PB MODE FB107 CAM DD SWITCH R3.2/P0
( ):FD100(REC/PB MODE) R0.4/ R149 7
∗L101 P14.8 10k
< >:FD200(REC/PB MODE) R662 C118 R150 10uH:FD200 D102 R2.9/P-7.5 Q105 FC-89 BOARD
FB105 0 C123 C126 47uH:FD100 XX (10/10)
0.1u 0 R151 47u UN9213J-(K8).SO
0 0.1u
6.3V CAM DD SWITCH
CN101 20P R-7.5/P0 -7.6
B GND 1 C116 R140
Q104
CAM_-7.5V
XX 0
CCD_OUT 2 UN9213J-(K8).SO
R0.6/P0
CAM -7.5 SWITCH
GND 3 REG_GND
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
R1.5/P0 3.1
GND 4
V4 C102 CAM_3.2V
10u R133
CD-390 BOARD V4 5 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 100k
V3A 10V
CN101 V3A 6
H1
VSS3
VSS2
RG
VDD2
VDD1
EBCKSM
WEN
ID
RST
VSS1
DSGAT
:FD100:TYPE SO/FD200 V3B C130
V3B 7 C103 22u
THROUGH THE 1u 16V
V2
FP-465 FLEXIBLE V2 8 C105
C (SEE PAGE 4-9) V1A 9
V1A
FB101
R661
0
XX C127
10u
20V
V1B R1.6/P0
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
V1B 10 H2 TEST2
3.1 R-7.5/P0 VSHT
CD-379 BOARD CAM_15V 11 VDD3 SUB
CN201 3.1 R-7.3/P0 V3B
CAM_-7.5V 12 VDD4 V3B
:FD100:TYPE PA R1.8/P0 R-7.5/P0
XSHP C128
GND 13 XSHP VL
THROUGH THE 0.1u
FP-465 FLEXIBLE H2 14
H2 XSHD R2.1/P0
XSHD IC101 V3A
R-7.3/P0
R-0.3/P0
V3A
V1B
(SEE PAGE 4-7) H1 C106 XRS V1B
H1 15 TIMING GENERATOR
0.1u
RG R14.9/P0 C129
RG 16 PBLK IC101 VH
0.1u
D VSUB_CONT 17
R3/P0
CLPDM
CXD2470R-T4
V1A
R-0.3/P0 V1A
VSHT R-7.3/P0 V4
VSHT 18 VSS4 V4
R3/P0 R-0.3/P0 V2
GND 19 CLPOB V2
ADCLK R1.8/P0
CCD_TEMP 20 ADCLK VM
R104
100 VSS5 TEST1
MCKO
OSCO
VDD5
VSS6
OSCI
CKO
SCK
SEN
HDI
VDI
CKI
SSI
E C104
0.1u
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
1.3
3
3.1
1.7
0.8
3.1
3.1
R3/P3.1
R3/P0
1
R121
C117 220
∗
0.01u
R114
F R120
220
∗R114
100:FD200 FB109
1 220:FD100
SIGNAL PATH
FC-89 BOARD MCK12
(2/10)
VIDEO
R115 SIGNAL
0:FD100:TYPE SO/FD200
2200:FD100:TYPE PA
ADCLK
R126 XX R127 Y/CHROMA
G XX
XSHD
XSHP
FD100:TYPE SO/FD200 R116 R117
4 2200 0 REC
FDC_CLK
4 C124 0.1u
R112
FC-89 BOARD L102
XX
(8/10) 10uH
FD100:TYPE PA C125 9
R653 1u
47 FB653 VSUB_CNT FC-89 BOARD
R2.1/P0
R1.8/P0
R1.8/P0
CCD_TEMP_AD (2/10)
R3/P0
R3/P0
FB110
C652 R652 FB652
3.1
3.1
3.1
L651 10u 47 2 3.1 3.1
5 10uH FB651 10V
USB_CLK CA_FD
D_3.2V FC-89 BOARD
H FC-89 BOARD R657 (5/10)
C134 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 CLPOB
VD/AVDD
C655
R655
(10/10) 1u
0.1u 100 FB654
0
R654 PBLK
DRVDD
CLPDM
XSHD
XSHP
CLPOB
PBLK
HD/DVDD
DVDD1
ADCCLK
DVSS3
DRVSS
0 MC_CLK
C108 CA_HD
R660
FD100 150 FB655 3 1u 0
36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
10 11 12
ACVSS D11 CA_AD11
AU_CLK FC-89 BOARD R0.1/P0
9
(0)<3>
(2/10) ACVSS D10 CA_AD10

3.1 R0.6/P0
7
3.1
1.5
ACVDD D9 CA_AD09
1.5 0 1.5 10
C110 R1.6/P0 R0.5/P0
∗ D8
9
CLPOUT/L+1 CA_AD08
R0.9/P0.7
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 ∗R103 R103 C111
IC102 D7
R1.9/P0 FC-89 BOARD
8
∗ CLPREF/L+2 CA_AD07 (2/10)
33:FD200 ∗ FB103 1.5 R1/P3.1
REF_OUT
VSS
CCD_SEL
SS_ON
VDD
CLK2_OUT
VSS
CLK1_OUT
82:FD100:TYPE SO
I S/H AGC A/D CONV. D6
7
CCDIN CA_AD06
100:FD100:TYPE PA C112 0.9 R1/P3.1
IC651 C101 ∗ IC102 D5
6
0.1u NC/L CA_AD05
0.5 AD80027AJSTRL :FD100:TYPE PA R1.1/P3.1
C113 VSP2202Y/2K :FD100:TYPE SO/FD200
8 D4
5
CLOCK GEN. ∗C110 ∗ CLPBYP/L_ CA_AD04
0.1u:FD100:TYPE SO/ 3.1 R1.4/P3.1
D3 CA_AD03
4
IC651 ADVDD1
FD200
6 IMIC6004ATD :FD100:TYPE SO/FD200
1u:FD100:TYPE PA
C114 2.1 R1.5/P3.1
XNTSC/PAL
D2 CA_AD02
3
IMIC6014ATD :FD100:TYPE PA 0.1u LINE/COMPVID
CLK3_OUT
CLK1_ON
C109 R1.5/P0
CA_AD01
2
1u ADVSS D1
∗C111 1.5 R1.4/P3.1
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
FIN
C115 CA_AD00
1
18p:FD100:TYPE SO/ CHROMA D0
CMLVL
0.1u
SDATA
FD200
SVDD
SVSS
SCLK
1u:FD100:TYPE PA
SLM
VRB
RST
SDL
SEN
VRT
TRI
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J ∗C112 XCAM_SCK
FB657
3.1 3 3.1 0.1u:FD100:TYPE PA

1.5
R656 150 1.3
3.1
R658 10k 0.3
1u:FD100:TYPE SO/ 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 CAM_SO 11

FD200
5 1.5 3.1 XIC102CS/XGCAM_CS FC-89 BOARD
1.7
1.2
3.1
3.1
XX 3.1
3.1
3.1
0.8
(5/10)
C656 ∗C113 XTG_CS
R106
0.1u 120p:FD100:TYPE SO/ C119

X651 R651 FD200 XCAM_RESET
0.1u
R108
48MHz 100
XX
1u:FD100:TYPE PA
FB656
C120 C121 C131

R119
∗
1u 1u 22u
C653 6.3V
0.01u
R107
C654 C122
R129
C651 ∗R119
0
K 0.1u
0
0.1u
0.01u R659 XX 0:FD100:TYPE SO/ R128 ∗
FD200
1k:FD100:TYPE PA
6 PAL/XNTSC R663
R125 0
FC-89 BOARD C657 0.1u

XX ∗R128 R124 0
0:FD100:TYPE SO/
(9/10) AU_CLK_ENV
05 FD200
1k:FD100:TYPE PA
FC-89 (1/10) 4-11 4-12

FC-89 (CAMERA DSP) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-43 for FC-89 printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
FC-89 BOARD (2/10) SIGNAL PATH
VIDEO SIGNAL
STRB_ON
MSHUT_ON
PE_DIR1B
PE_DIR1A
PE_EN1
XZM_RST_SENS
PE_DIR0B
PE_DIR0A
PE_EN0
XFC_RST_SENS
A CAMERA DSP(P2K BLOCK 1/2)
XX MARK:NO MOUNT CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
VSUB_CNT
R314 REC
AU_LRCK
C351 0 330
R352
0.001u 1k R315 L303 C328
0 C333 10uH
XX 680
10%
10u
6.3V
PB
22 FC-89 BOARD (3/10) STRB_AIN Q302
R313 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO
3300 SWITCH
C329
0.1u
B A_3.2V
FB301 HS601 1608 23
D_1.8V HDO FC-89 BOARD
C345 (9/10)
10u PANEL_V
C324
12 FC-89 BOARD (10/10) 4V 0.1u PE_DAC_LEVEL1 24
REG_GND FC-89 BOARD
PE_DAC_LEVEL2
FB302 (4/10)
HS601 1608
D_3.2V
C346 R305
13 FC-89 BOARD (9/10) SYS_V 10u 2700 R306
C330
0.1u
6.3V 0.5% 47k
C332
IC301FLD
XX
C327
14 FC-89 BOARD (5/10)
C326 XX C331
SYS_V R347
XX XX XX
1
3 FC-89 BOARD (1/10) AU_CLK
R351 2
0
224 223 222 221 220 219 218 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 209 208 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 169
XACLK
VCC2
SCAN1
SCAN2
SCAN3
VCC3
ACLK
DGND
SCAN4
SCAN5
SCAN6
XPWDA
ADCK
SCLK
LRCK
SOA
SIA
VR
STRBAD
SUBCNTL
DGND
STROBE2
STROBE1
SHUTTER
IRISOUT
VCC2
DIR1B
DIR1A
EN1
VCC3
SENS1
DIR0B
DIR0A
EN0
SENS0
DGND
LCDVD
NTVD0
FLD
HD
VRI
HRI
CO
YO
VREF2
VRO2
XPWAD
AVS
AVDD
EXTPAL
VAVS4
VAVD4
VAVS3
VAVD3
VAVS2
VAVD2
61
CLPOB FC-89 BOARD
CLPOB R307 (3/10)
D PBLK
PBLK 68
0.5% 3
CA_HD
CA_HD
113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168
4
1
CA_FD NTVDI CRO
CA_FD CLPOB
5
2
OPBO VAVS1
PBLK
6
3
SIGCCD VAVD1
4
DGND CBO
CA_HD R308 120 0.5%
5
CCDHD VAVS0
C325
0.1u
CA_FD R309
6
CCDFD VAVD0 150
0.5% PE_PIO04
E CL301
7
OPTEST0 PYO
CA_AD00 CA_AD11 PE_PIO07
10 CA_AD00 CL302
8
C303 ADIN11 VREF1 C352
CA_AD01 R310 R311
FC-89 BOARD (1/10) CA_AD01 XX XX 2700
25
9
VCC3 VRO1 47k
CA_AD02 CA_AD10 0.5% PE_PIO00
56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
CA_AD02 ADIN10 DGND STRB_PHOTO_ON FC-89 BOARD
CA_AD03 CA_AD09 PE_PIO00 (3/10)
CA_AD03 ADIN09 (STRB_PHOTO_ON) PIO00
CA_AD04 CA_AD08
CA_AD04 ADIN08 (ND_ON) PIO01 PE_VCC3
CA_AD05 CA_AD07
CA_AD05 ADIN07 (MACRO) PIO02
CA_AD06 CA_AD06 PE_PIO03 R353
CA_AD06 ADIN06 (XLENS_RST_LED) PIO03 100k
CA_AD07 CA_AD05 PE_PIO04 PE_PIO10
F CA_AD07
CA_AD08
CA_AD08 CA_AD04
ADIN05 PIO04
ADIN04 (VAP_LOCK_ON) PIO05

CA_AD09 CA_AD03
CA_AD09 ADIN03 (IRIS_EN) PIO06 PE_VCC3
CA_AD10 CA_AD02 PE_PIO03
CA_AD10 ADIN02 DGND XLENS_RST_LED 26
CA_AD11 CA_AD01 PE_PIO07 PE_PIO08
CA_AD11 ADIN01 PIO07 XFC_RST_SENS FC-89 BOARD
CA_AD00 PE_PIO08 PE_PIO09 (4/10)
ADIN00 (XFC_RST_SENS) PIO08 XZM_RST_SENS
PE_PIO09
CAMTEST1 (XZM_RST_SENS) PIO09
PE_PIO10
CAMTEST0 (XGCAM/EAGLE) PIO10
R346 1k C314
7
62
XX
G MC_A14
MC_A13
A14 (VAP_LOCK_SENS) PIO11
GND
FC-89 BOARD
(3/10)
A13 VCC2
PE_DQ00
MC_A12 A12 DQ00 19
PE_DQ01 AU_LRCK
MC_A11 A11 DQ01 AU_LRCK FC-89 BOARD
PE_DQ02 (5/10)
MC_A10 A10 IC301 DQ02
C315 XX VSUB_CNT 9
MC_A09 A09 VCC3 VSUB_CNT
CAMERA DSP FC-89 BOARD
PE_DQ03
MC_A08 A08 IC301 DQ03 (1/10)
15 C302 MB87J4030LGA-G-TJ-ER PE_DQ04
20
XX VCC2 DQ04 STRB_ON
FC-89 BOARD (5/10) PE_DQ05 STRB_ON
H MC_A07
MC_A06
A07 DQ05
PE_DQ06
FC-89 BOARD
(3/10)
A06 DQ06
MSHUT_ON
MC_A05 A05 DGND MSHUT_ON
PE_DQ07
MC_A04 A04 DQ07 PE_DIR1B
PE_DQ08 PE_DIR1B
MC_A03 A03 DQ08 PE_DIR1A
PE_DQ09 PE_DIR1A
DGND DQ09 PE_EN1
PE_DQ10 PE_EN1 21
MC_A02 A02 DQ10 FC-89 BOARD
PE_DQ11 XZM_RST_SENS (4/10)
MC_A01 A01 DQ11 XZM_RST_SENS
MC_XRD C313 XX PE_DIR0B
I MC_XCS6
RDX VCC3
PE_DQ12 PE_DIR0A
PE_DIR0B
PE_DIR0A
CSX DQ12
MC_XCS2 PE_DQ13 PE_EN0
CSX2 DQ13 PE_EN0
MC_XWE0 PE_DQ14 XFC_RST_SENS
WRLX DQ14 XFC_RST_SENS
MC_XWE1 PE_DQ15
WRHX DQ15
PE_QDML
MD0 QDML
PE_QDMH
DGND QDMH
CLKI DGND
C306 PE_XWE
J 0.1u VCC3 XWE
PE_XCAS
CLKTG XCAS
PE_XRAS
MD1 XRAS
MD2 XCS1
MC_XRD PE_XCS0
MC_XRD PLLGND XCS0
MC_XCS6
MC_XCS6 PLLVCC VCC3
MC_XCS2
MC_XCS2 CLK0 QCLKE1 C316
MC_XWE0 C305 L301 XX
MC_XWE0 C304 22u 10uH MD3 QCLKE0
MC_XWE1 0.1u 6.3V 10% 18
K MC_XWE1 PLLBYP AQ00
MC_D00-15 FC-89 BOARD
(5/10)
DACMD2 DGND
MC_HCLK
MC_HCLK
16
SONYTEST
PLLXMSK
DACMD1
DACMD0
FC-89 BOARD (5/10) MC_DREQ0

IRQIMG
IRQJPG
DRAK1
DRAK2
CPUCK
MC_DREQ0
IRQAU
PLL24
PLL12
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DRQ1
DRQ2
RSTX
QCLK
VCC2
VCC3
AQ12
AQ11
AQ10
VCC3
AQ09
AQ08
AQ07
AQ06
VCC2
AQ05
AQ04
AQ03
AQ02
AQ01
VPD
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D09
D08
D07
D06
D05
D04
D03
D02
D01
D00
BA1
BA0
FD200
MC_DRAK0
MC_DRAK0 R328
MC_DRAK1 0 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112
MC_DRAK1
R330 0
IRQJPG
L IRQJPG R331 XX
CL304
IRQIMG
IRQIMG R332 XX
IRQAUDIO
IRQAUDIO
0
XX
R334 R337 R350

0 0 0
R348
R344
FD100
1 FC-89 BOARD (1/10) MCK12
MCK12
C312
C311
C310
R335 R336
XX
XX
XX
XX 0
M
XRST_SYS
XRST_SYS
17
FC-89 BOARD (9/10)
C309
PAL/XNTSC C308 XX
PE_AQ01
PE_AQ04
PE_AQ03
PE_AQ02
PE_AQ00
PE_AQ13
PE_AQ12
PE_AQ11
PE_AQ10
PE_AQ09
PE_AQ08
PE_AQ07
PE_AQ06
PE_AQ05
PE_QCLK
0.022u
R343 8
63
R302 XX
FC-89 BOARD
1k 9 (3/10)
MC_DREQ0
MC_DRAK0
MC_DRAK1
XRST_SYS
IRQAUDIO
MC_HCLK
MC_D15
MC_D14
MC_D13
MC_D12
MC_D11
MC_D10
MC_D09
MC_D08
MC_D07
MC_D06
MC_D05
MC_D04
MC_D03
MC_D02
MC_D01
MC_D00
IRQIMG
IRQJPG
MCK12
05
4-13 4-14 FC-89 (2/10)

FC-89 (VIDEO, MEMORY) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-43 for FC-89 printed wiring board. • See page 4-54, 55 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FC-89 BOARD (3/10)

A VIDEO,MEMORY(CAMERA DSP)
(P2K BLOCK 2/2,VI BLOCK)
XX MARK:NO MOUNT A_4.9V
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE A_3.2V
30
R:REC MODE FC-89 BOARD
D_3.2V
P:PB MODE (10/10)
REG_GND
31
B PAL/XNTSC FC-89 BOARD
(9/10)
32
CNT_C FC-89 BOARD
(4/10)
L902
10uH 34
VOUT_ON FC-89 BOARD
C908 (9/10)
L304 XX
C
47uH
10% R905 17
11 Q305-309
1k
C904
0.1u
BUFFER R909 C910
820 0.01u
R319 R321 R323 R325 R327

R317
22k 10 1k
R320
1k 1k 1k 1k C901
120p
1.6
1.4 3 3.1 C903
22u
2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO
Q310-312 1 0 1
CHROMA CONTROL 6.3V
0.4 8 7 6 5
R906 R907
BUFFER
Q306 330 330
PowerSave
VCC
C-IN
C-MUTE
Q903
R318
0 2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO
D R300
R316 R349
0.9 C909
12p
NJM2274R(TE2)
R339 820 0.3
1200 150 47
0.5%
0.5% L305
IC901
IC901
Q311 0.3 1.3
47uH
10%
Q305
2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO
14 VIDEO AMP
2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO
2SD2216J- 0 C337
QR(K8).SO 22p C338 C339
V-OUT
R333 1.4 0 R326
Vsag
0.7 15p
Q310
GND
6p
Y-IN
4700 0
0.5% 0.8 R340 0.7
Q303
UN9214J-
1.3
12 13
2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO
820 0.8
0.5% 0.1 (K8).SO 1 2 3 4
E
SWITCH 0.2 Q309
2SB1462J- 1.5 1.2 16
1.1
0.7 Q304 R324 QR(K8).SO
Q312
0.1 UN9214J- 0.9 0

C907
R342
100
R329
100
(K8).SO
SWITCH 0.3
15 22u
6.3V
R902
68 35
1 0.5% 0.5% Q308
R322 VIDEO_OUT FC-89 BOARD
0 2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO
2 0.9 R908 (9/10)
C334 C902 1M
0.3 1u C906
22u
C323
0.1u
C336 100u
6.3V 4V
0.01u R303
220 Q307
0.5% 2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO
61
F FC-89 BOARD
(2/10)
R304
150
GND
62
0.5% FC-89 BOARD
(2/10)
7
L302
3 10uH
4
C318
5 10u
C317 6.3V
0.1u FB304
6
XX
G PANEL_R-Y 33
C301
XX IC303 PANEL_B-Y FC-89 BOARD
(9/10)
CN301 10P 64M SDRAM PANEL_Y
IC303
STB_CHARGE 1 HY57V641620HGT-PTRPV
R341
STRB_PHOTO_ON 2 XX Q317,318 3.1
B+ SWITCH VSS
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 VCC
POP_UP_ON 3 4.9 PE_DQ00 0.6 DQ15 0.3 PE_DQ15
2
DQ0
A_4.9V 4 3.1
VSSQ
3
UNREG_GND 5 R4.9/ 0.6 VCCQ 0.3

FLASH P0 Q317 PE_DQ01 DQ14 PE_DQ14
4
H UNIT
PHOTO_TR_OUT 6 UN9113J-(K8).SO
PE_DQ02 0.6 DQ1
DQ13
0.5 PE_DQ13
5
R0/ DQ2
TALLY 7 P4.9 VCCQ
3.1 C319
6
R3.2/P0 XX
UNREG 8 0.8 VSSQ 0.6
PE_DQ03 DQ12 PE_DQ12
Q318
7
DQ3
STRB_ON 9 UN9213J-(K8).SO PE_DQ04 0.9 0.6 PE_DQ11
DQ11
8
DQ4
XSTB_FULL 10 3.1
VSSQ
9
R345 VCCQ
22k PE_DQ05 0.9 0.6 PE_DQ10
DQ10
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
0.9 DQ5 0.6

PE_DQ06 DQ9 PE_DQ09
DQ6 3.1
VCCQ
I 25 FC-89 BOARD (2/10) STRB_PHOTO_ON PE_DQ07 0.3 VSSQ
DQ8
0.6 PE_DQ08
C349 3.1 DQ7
22 FC-89 BOARD (2/10) STRB_AIN 0.1u VSS
0 VCC
PE_QDML NC
20 FC-89 BOARD (2/10) STRB_ON PE_XWE 3 DQML
DQMU 0 PE_QDMH
2.9 WE- 1.5 PE_QCLK

PE_XCAS CLK
2.9 CAS- 2.1
PE_XRAS CKE
RAS-
PE_XCS0 0 NC
XSTB_FULL
27 PE_AQ13 0 CS- 0
A11 PE_AQ11
FC-89 BOARD (9/10) TALLY
J STB_CHG
PE_AQ12 0.2 A13
A12
A9
0.1 PE_AQ09
PE_AQ10 0.3 0.2 PE_AQ08
A8
A10/AP
28 PE_AQ00 0.1
A7 0.2 PE_AQ07
FC-89 BOARD (10/10) ST_UNREG PE_AQ01 0.1 A0 0.2
SIGNAL PATH
A6 PE_AQ06
PE_AQ02 0.1 A1
0.2 PE_AQ05
A2
A5 VIDEO SIGNAL
29 PE_AQ03 0.2 A4 0.2 PE_AQ04
CAM_DD_ON A3
FC-89 BOARD (9/10) 3.1
VSS CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA
VCC
C350
K XX
REC
PB
63 8
05 FC-89 BOARD
(2/10) 9
FC-89 (3/10) 4-15 4-16

FC-89 (LENS DRIVE) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-43 for FC-89 printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FC-89 BOARD (4/10) R237

2200
A LENS DRIVE(LD BLOCK) IRIS_CONT1

IRIS_CONT2
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
0.5%
C210 24
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE 0.1u PE_DAC_LEVEL2
FC-89 BOARD
R202
R:REC MODE
100k
1k C195 R208 R212 PE_DAC_LEVEL1 (2/10)
R203 16k
P:PB MODE 0.5% 0.01u XX 180k
IC186 BH2221FV-E2
R204
R215
R211 180k
GND IC186
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1
2700 VSS
C190 1.1 AO2 R0/P0.2 EVR(D/A CONV.)
R196
2
0.033u AO3
B 100k R205 22k 1.1
AO1
R0.4/P3.1
HALL_AD
3
C189 AO4
C212
R213
0.022u
3300p HALL_REF 0.9 DI R0.4/P0.2
R206 180k CAM_SO
4
100k
C196 HALL_GAIN 1.2
AO5
CLK
3.1 36
0.9
0.9
XCAM_SCK
5
3.1 0.9 0.001u AO6 FC-89 BOARD
C194 HALL_OFFSET 1.7 0
0.022u LD DAC_STBY (5/10)
6
R0.3/ AO7
8 7 6 5 R0.8/P1.9 DO
P1.5
NJM12904V(TE2)
DAC_ENB
7
AO8
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
IN(-)
IN(+)
VCC
OUT
AO12
8
AO9
NJM12902V(TE2)
0.8
R0.4/P1.5
R0.4/P2.9
0.9
0.9
IN(+)
IN(+)
IN(-)
OUT
OUT
IN(-)
GND
AO11
9
AO10
3.1 3.1
VCC
10
VDD
C IC184 R240 0
L184
10uH
IRIS DRIVE IC185 Q189
C204 C205
IRIS DRIVE 10u XX
IC184
0.1u C209
IN(+)
HALL AMP
IN(-)
GND
OUT
6.3V XX
HALL BIAS CONTROL R232 6.3V
IN(+)
R233
IN(+)
IN(-)
HALL GAIN CONTROL
IN(-)
OUT
OUT
VCC
XX
IC185
XX
0.7
0.1
0.1
3.1
1 2 3 4 C206
XX
Q184 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0.9
0.9
Q181 R0.9/ 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO
2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO P0
1.2 Q190 32
GAIN CONTROL XX
0.9
0.9
R4.1/P4.9 IRIS DRIVE L183 CNT_C FC-89 BOARD
D CN184 20P
R0.9/ R191
1k
R194
100k 0.5 C198
10uH
10%
(3/10)
ZOOM_B 1 P0 0.01u
0.7
R0.2/
P0
ZOOM_A 2 C187
C188 0.1u R198
1u 47k
ZOOM_B 3 R189 0.1 R210
0.001u
R214 10k
R195
C197
10 C193 12k
ZOOM_A 4 10k 0.1u C201
1/16W 10u
C186 R201 R207 R209 C199
Z_SENS_GND 5 D182 0.022u R193 330 1200 1u C200 6.3V CAM_3.2V
22k
1SS401(TE85L) 4700 6.3V 0.01u
Z_SENS_RST 6 REG_GND
Z_SENS_VCC 7
E BIAS+
HALL+
8
9
37
LENS
UNIT BIAS- 10
FC-89 BOARD
(10/10)
HALL- 11
DRIVE+ 12
DRIVE- 13
L181
FOCUS_B 14 4.7uH
CAM_P_5V
FOCUS_A 15 L182 10uH
D_3.2V
F FOCUS_B
FOCUS_A
16
17
F_SENS_GND 18
F_SENS_RST 19
Q182
R199 C211
F_SENS_VCC 20 2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO 68k 1u
B+ SWITCH
3.1
R-0.1/
P0 R197 R216
R192 68k 0
3.1
4700
D181
G MA111-(K8).S0
H 3.1
0 0
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 C191
0.01u
R0.9/P0.2
R0.9/P0.3
4.9
R0.9/P0.3
R0.9/P0.3
R0.5/P0
R0.5/P0
VDD
PGND
B2_FB
VM2_3
B3_ZA
PGND
B4_ZB
EN4
IN4
EN3
IN3
B1_FA
UPD16877MA-6A5-E2
IC183
IC183
C192
FOCUS/ZOOM 33u
MOTOR DIRVER 10V
R0.8/P0.4
R0.8/P0.3
R0.8/P0.4
R0.8/P0.4
R0.6/P0
R2.7/P0
I
A3_ZA
A4_ZB
A2_FB
A1_FA
PGND
PGND
VM1
VM4
EN1
EN2
IN1
IN2
4.9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
4.9 0 0
3.1 0 0 0 0
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
VDD
PGND
B2_FB
VM2_3
B3_ZA
PGND
B4_ZB
EN4
IN4
EN3
IN3
B1_FA
4.9
3.1
3.1
K
UPD16877MA-6A5-E2
MSHUT_ON
PE_DIR0A
PE_DIR0B
PE_EN0
PE_DIR1A
PE_DIR1B
PE_EN1
XZM_RST_SENS
XFC_RST_SENS
XZM_RST_SENS
XFC_RST_SENS
XLENS_RST_LED
IC182
IC182
IRIS
(MECHA SHUTTER)
DRIVE
A3_ZA
A4_ZB
A2_FB
A1_FA
PGND
PGND
VM1
VM4
EN1
EN2
IN1
IN2
4.9
4.9
21 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
L 4.9 4.9
FC-89 BOARD (2/10) FC-89 BOARD (2/10)
05
4-17 4-18 FC-89 (4/10)

FC-89 (SH DSP) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-43 for FC-89 printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
FC-89 BOARD (5/10)

A SH DSP(SH BLOCK 1/2)
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
CCD_TEMP_AD
IRQ_FDC/CW
FDC_INT_ENB
HALL_AD
DREQ1
DREQ0
DRAK1
DRAK0
MS_DIO
MS_BS
MS_SCLK
USB_SUSPND
USB_VBUS
USB_TXENL
IC301FLD
XMC_CS
IRQ5
CAM_SI
HI_SO
XMC_CS
XCAM_SCK
CAM_SO
XCAM_SCK
CAM_SO
XHI_SCK
HI_SI
AU_LRCK
PAL/XNTSC
USB_XVDATA
D_1.8V
D_3.2V 40
L502
C536 FC-89 BOARD (10/10)
D502 10u 10uH
38 MA111-(K8).S0 6.3V 10%
FC-89 BOARD XRST_SYS REG_GND
(9/10)
B R515
R519
R520
R518
R517
47k
R582
MC_HCLK
R524
XX
XX
XX
47k
XX
XX
39 R522
47k MC_HCLK
FC-89 BOARD A_4.9V
(10/10) R521
R516
41
R523
100k
XX
D503
0
MA111-(K8).S0 C506 FLASHPASS_ON
0.1u FDD_LED_IN FC-89 BOARD (7/10)
CL515
MC_XCKSLEEP
IRQ4 0 MC_XCKSLEEP
XASEMDO
3
CL501 IRQ_FDC/CW
IRQ_FDC/CW
1k
3.1
1k
XASEBREAK
C512
C515
0.1u
FB502
2
CL502 FDC_RST/XCDR_RST
XX
R501 R573 R576 FDC_RST/XCDR_RST
3.1 3.1
R514
XTRST
R513
0 C531
C 0 1200
1
CL503 XX MOTOR_ON
C513
TCK MOTOR_ON
XX
CL504 IRQ5 DREQ1 42
IC502 C507 MC_DREQ1
R581 47
CL509
TDI XX FC-89 BOARD (8/10)
TC7SH00FU-TE85R
R525 0
CL505 XDACK1
TDO D501 MC_XDACK1
CL506 TLSU1002(TPX1,SONY)
IC502 MC_XCS5
MC_XCS5
C510
C511
TMS
0.1u
0.1u
(ACCESS LED(RED)) C518
CL507
NAND GATE XX MC_XRD
MC_XWE1
216 215 214 213 212 211 210 209 208 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 SYS_V
SYS_V
14
4.6 MC_CLK
MD4
MD3
IC301FLD FC-89 BOARD (2/10)
MSSCLK
SUSPND
VCCQ
VCCQ
VBUS
VSSQ
RDX2
RXD1
RXD0
VCCQ
VSSQ
VSS
DRAK1
DRAK0
VCC
VSS
XDREQ1
XDREQ0
CTS
AVSS
AVCC
AVSS
SCK2
TXD2
SCK1
TXD1
SCK0
TXD0
TCLK
TXENL
XVDATA
PTL7
PTL6
PTL5
PTL4
XRESETP
XIRQOUT
N.C
IRQ7
IRQ6
IRQ5
CKIO
N.C
D
MSBS/PTC2
STATUS1
STATUS0
IC301FLD
MSDIO/PTC1
XMSDIR/PTC0
AN3/PTL3
AN2/PTL2
AN1/PTL1
AN0/PTL0
0
Q501 R578
UN9213J-(K8).SO 0 IRQIMG
LED DRIVE IRQIMG
CL516 R580 IRQJPG
X501 IRQJPG
0 XX IRQAUDIO
109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162
R579 N.C IRQAUDIO
1
XX N.C C526 MC_XCS2

EXTAL XX
2
MC_XCS2
R528
MD1 R529
XX
XX MC_XCS6
XTAL MC_XCS6
3
MD2 C527
XX DRAK0
VCC MC_DRAK0
4
VCC-RTC DRAK1 16
VSS MC_DRAK1
5
XTAL2 C522 0.1u FC-89 BOARD (2/10)

E VSS
DREQ0
MC_DREQ0
6
EXTAL2 CL510
AUDCK/PTH6 C555
7
VSS-RTC 0.1u MC_HCLK

VCC-PLL2 MC_HCLK
8
SYS_V R503 NMI C523 2200p

XX CAP2 C557 MC_XRD
MC_XRD
9
R504 IRQ0 47u

IRQIMG XX MC_XWE0
VSS-PLL2 4V
54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
MC_XWE0
R505 IRQ1
IRQJPG XX MC_XWE1
VSS-PLL1 MC_XWE1
IRQAUDIO R506 IRQ2 19
XX CAP1 AU_LRCK
R507 IRQ3 AU_LRCK FC-89 BOARD (2/10)
IRQ4 XX C524 2200p
VCC-PLL1
IRQ4 USB_CLK VOUT_ON2
F USB_D+PULLUP
D31/PTB7
MD0
C556 0.1u
MC_XFLRST
VOUT_ON2
MC_XFLRST
USB_D-OUT
D30/PTB6
TXDMNS/PTF0
XMC_CS 43
MS_POWER_ON USB_D+OUT XMC_CS
TXDPLS/PTF1 FC-89 BOARD (9/10)
D29/PTB5 XMC_HELP
FLASHPASS_ON USB_D+IN XMC_HELP
DPLS/PTF2
D28/PTB4 PAL/XNTSC
MC_XCKSLEEP USB_D-IN PAL/XNTSC
DMNS/PTF3
D27/PTB3
FDC_INT_ENB TCK/PTF4 TCK HI_SO
HI_SO
D26/PTB2
TD1/PTF5 TDI HI_SI 44
HI_SI
MOTOR_ON VSSQ FC-89 BOARD (9/10)
TMS/PTF6 TMS XHI_SCK
XHI_SCK
R509 D25/PTB1
G 27k
C502 VCCQ
XTRST
CL511
XTRST
CCD_TEMP_AD
FDC_RST/XCDR_RST 0.1u AUDATA0 USB_CLK
CCD_TEMP_AD 2
D24/PTB0 X502 USB_CLK FC-89 BOARD (1/10)
VCC XX
D23/PTA7 MC_CLK
VOUT_ON2 CL512 C525 MC_CLK
AUDATA1 XX
DAC_ENB
D22/PTA6
D21/PTA5
IC501 VSS C534
XX
CAM_SO
CAM_SO
XEEPROM_RESET CL513 XCAM_SCK
MC CAM AUDATA2 R577 XCAM_SCK
D20/PTA4 SH DSP
AUDATA3
CL514 0
R536 C554 XTG_CS 11
R535 R537 XTG_CS
VSS IC501 XX XX XX FC-89 BOARD (1/10)
DAC_STBY HD6417197BT77 XX XCAM_RESET
UCLK XCAM_RESET
D19/PTA3
H C503 VCC
XASEBRKAK R532
47k
XIC102CS/XGCAM_CS
XIC102CS/XGCAM_CS
3
XX XASEMD0
D18/PTA2 DAC_STBY
DAC_STBY
2
PTG7
D17/PTA1 DAC_ENB
DAC_ENB
1
XCAM_RESET
D16/PTA0
XADTRG/PTH5 R527 C533 36
47k XX XCAM_SCK
R511 XRESETM IC509 FC-89 BOARD (4/10)
47k VSSQ XX CAM_SO
MC_D15 XWAIT
D15 HALL_AD
R533 47k XASEMDO HALL_AD
XBREQ
VCCQ
MC_D14 XBACK R530 XASEBREAK MC_A01
D14 47k MC_A01
I MC_D13
D13
TDO/PTE0 TDO MC_A02
MC_A02
MC_D12 PTE1 MC_A03
D12 MC_A03
MC_D11 PTE2 R534 MC_A04
D11 XX MC_A04
MC_D10 PTE3 MC_A05
D10 MC_A05
MC_D09 PTE6 MC_A06
D9 MC_A06
MC_D08 XDACK1 MC_A07
D8
XDACK1/PTD7
MC_A07 15
MC_D07 XDAC0/PTD5 MC_A08 FC-89 BOARD (2/10)
D7 MC_A08
MC_D06 PTJ5 MC_A09
D6 MC_A09
J VSSQ
PTJ4
XEEPROM_CS MC_A10
MC_A10
MC_D05 VCCQ MC_A11
D5 C530 MC_A11
PTJ3 0.1u XTG_CS MC_A12
VCCQ MC_A12
MC_D04 VSSQ MC_A13
D4 MC_A13
MC_D03 PTJ2 MC_XCAS MC_A14
D3 MC_A14
MC_D02 XIC102CS/XGCAM_CS
PTJ1
D2
MC_D01 PTJ0 MC_XRAS
D1
MC_D00 XCKE/PTK5 MC_CKE
D0
K MC_A01
XAUDSYNC/PTE7
N.C
MC_A01
N.C
MC_A02 46
MC_A02
XWE2/PTK6
XWE3/PTK7
FC-89 BOARD (8/10)

XBS/PTK4
MC_A03
MC_A03
XRDWR
VSSQ
VCCQ
VSSQ
VCCQ
VSSQ
VCCQ
XWE0
XWE1
VSSQ
XCS0
VCCQ
XCS2
XCS3
XCS4
XCS5
XCS6
PTE4
PTE5
N.C
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
VSS
A22
VCC
A23
A24
A25
XRD
N.C
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
18
55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 MC_D00-D15
MC_D00-D15 FC-89 BOARD (2/10)
SIGNAL PATH
45
CL508
L VIDEO SIGNAL MC_D00-D15

MC_D00-D15 FC-89 BOARD (8/10)
C516
XX
Y/CHROMA
C514
0.1u
R526
47k
REC
MC_RDXWR
PB
XMC_HELP
MC_XWE0
MC_XWE0
MC_XWE1
MC_XWE1
MC_XCS0
MC_XCS2
MC_XCS3
MC_XCS5
MC_XCS6
MC_XRD
MC_XRD
MC_A01
MC_A02
MC_A03
MC_A04
MC_A05
MC_A06
MC_A07
MC_A08
MC_A09
MC_A10
MC_A11
MC_A12
MC_A13
MC_A14
MC_A15
MC_A16
MC_A17
MC_A18
MC_A19
MC_A20
M MC_A01-A20
MC_A01-20
MC_D00-D15 64
MC_D00-D15
FC-89 BOARD (6/10)
05
1
FC-89 (5/10) 4-19 4-20

FC-89 (MEMORY, USB I/F, MS SOCKET) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-43 for FC-85 printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FC-89 BOARD (6/10)

A MEMORY(SH DSP),USB I/F,MS SOCKET(SH BLOCK 2/2,MSUSB BLOCK)
XX MARK:NO MOUNT D_3.2V
47
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE REG_GND
FC-89 BOARD (10/10)
R:REC MODE
P:PB MODE
IC505 FB503
XX
L505
10uH
MC_A17 16M FLASH
IC505 C546
10u
MR27T1602F-0H0TNZ04D 6.3V
R0.5/P0.1
B MC_A16 R2.4/P2.9 A16
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
1
R0.7/P0.1 A15
MC_A15 BYTE 3.1 C548
2
A14 0.1u
MC_A14 R0.7/P0.2 Vss
3
R0.8/P0.2 A13 R2/P2.8
MC_A13 DQ15/A1 MC_D15
4
R1.8/P2.3 A12 R1.7/P2.8
MC_A12 DQ7 MC_D07
5
R1.9/P2.3 A11 R2.2/P2.8
MC_A11 DQ14 MC_D14 USB_VBUS
6
R1.9/P2.3 A10 R1.9/P2.8
MC_A10 DQ6 MC_D06
R688
100k
R1.9/P2.3 A9 R2.1/P2.8
MC_A09 DQ13 MC_D13
Q683
8
A8 3.1
C MC_A20 0
DQ5 R2.1/P2.8 MC_D05 UN9113J-(K8).SO
9
SWITCH
A19 R2/P2.8 3.1
DQ12 MC_D12 USB_D+PULLUP
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
3 NC R2.1/P2.8
MC_XWE1 DQ4 MC_D04
WE~ USB_D+OUT R687
MC_XFLRST 3.2 Vcc 3.1 C549 1 150k
RESET~ XX USB_D-OUT
R2/P2.8 MC_D11 R684
DQ11 1500
NC R2/P2.8 IC681 PDIUSBP11APW,118
DQ3 MC_D03
NC R2/P2.8
DQ10 MC_D10 3.1
10 11 12 13 14
1
RY/BY~ MODE VCC CN682 6P
MC_A19 R0.1/P0 R2/P2.8 MC_D02 USB_TXENL 3.1 0 FB681 CN201 5P
DQ2 FB683
2
OE# VMO/FSEO 6 GND_GUARD
A18
D MC_A18 R0.7/P0.1 DQ9 R2.1/P2.9 MC_D09 USB_XVDATA 0 3.1 R685
XX 1 GND
3
RCV VPO 24 5 USB_D+
R2.2/P2.8 A17 R2.1/P2.9
MC_A08 DQ1 MC_D01 USB_D+IN 0 0.5 2 ID
USB
FP-335
4
A7 VP USB_D+ 4 USB_JACK_IN(VCC)
MC_A07 R0.9/P0.3 R2.2/P2.9 MC_D08 USB_D-IN 0 0.5 3 4 3 D+
DQ8
FLEXIBLE
5
VM USB_D- 3 USB_D-
R0.9/P0.3 A6 R2.1/P2.9 2 1
MC_A06 DQ0 MC_D00 USB_SUSPND 3.1 3.1 R686 4 D-
LF651
9
A5 SUSPND SPEED 24 2 GND
MC_A05 R1.9/P2.3 OE R2.2/P2.9 5 VCC
FB684 XX
8
GND (NC) 1 GND
R2.2/P2.8 A4 C684 C685
MC_A04 Vss 22u
6.3V 0.1u FB685
R2.3/P2.9 A3 R2/P2.9 C687
MC_A03 CE 0.1u
R2.3/P2.9 A2 R1.3/P0.8
MC_A02 A0
A1
E
VDR681
VDR682
30p
MC_A01 D682 D683
MC_XCS0
IC681 XX XX
USB I/F VDR683 D684

MC_XRD 1000p XX
49
L504 STATIC_GND1 FC-89 BOARD (10/10)
10uH
FB501 XX USB_VBUS 48
MS_BS FC-89 BOARD (9/10)
C544 IC506 GM72V161621ET-10KTR XMS_IN
10u MS_DIO
F C538
0.1u
6.3V 3.1 Vss
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
1
Vcc MS_SCLK
MC_D00 R2.1/P2.9 R2/P2.8 MC_D15
DQ15
2
R2.1/P2.9 DQ0 R2.2/P2.8

MC_D01 DQ14 MC_D14
3
DQ1
VssQ
4
R2/P2.8 VssQ R2.1/P2.8

MC_D02 DQ13 MC_D13
C691
5
R2.1/P2.8 DQ2 R2/P2.8 CN681 10P (MS Socket) XX

MC_D03 DQ12 MC_D12 3.1
6
DQ3 Q682
3.1 VccQ 3.1 1 VSS
R682 2 UMF5NTR
7
R2.1/P2.8 VccQ R2/P2.8 100k B+ SWITCH

MC_D04 DQ11 MC_D11 2 BS
8
DQ4 3.1 1 6 3.1 11

G MC_D05 R2.1/P2.8 DQ10 R2/P2.8 MC_D10 3 VCC
12
10
9
DQ5 0.1 3 4
MA2S111-(K8).SO
VssQ 4 DIO
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
VssQ R683
MC_D06 R1.9/P2.8 R2.1/P2.9 MC_D09 2200 5 N.C
DQ9
D681
R1.7/P2.8 DQ6 R2.2/P2.9 5 6 INT
MC_D07 DQ8 MC_D08
DQ7 2.9
C539 3.1 VccQ 3.1 7 N.C
1
XX VccQ MS_POWER_ON C682 C683 14
MC_XWE0 3 C550 4.7u 8 SCLK 13
DU 0.1u
DQML XX R681 6.3V
MC_RDXWR 3 DQMU 3 3300 9 VCC
R689 XX
C552 WE~ C686 C688
MC_XCAS 5p 3 CLK 1.5 0.1u 10 VSS
0.1u R691
C553 CAS~
H MC_XRAS 5p 3
RAS~
CKE 3.1 XX
R575
MC_XCS3 2.9
0
DU C692
MC_A12 CS~ XX
R1.8/P2.3 A9 R1.9/P2.3 MC_A10 VDR684 R692 D685 R690
A11(BA) 1000p 0 XX 0
MC_A11 R1.9/P2.3 R1.9/P2.3 MC_A09
A8
MC_A01 A10/AP
R1.3/P0.8 A7 R2.2/P2.8 MC_A08
MC_A02 A0
R2.3/P2.9 A6 R0.9/P0.3 MC_A07
MC_A03 R2.3/P2.9 A1 R0.9/P0.3
A5 MC_A06
MC_A04 A2
R2.2/P2.8 A4 R1.9/P2.3 MC_A05
A3
I 3.1
Vcc
Vss
C540
0.1u
IC506
16M SDRAM
MC_CKE
MC_HCLK
MC_XWE1
J MC_A01-A20
1 IC508 BR9016RFV-E2
SIGNAL PATH
XEEPROM_CS 3.1 VCC 3.1
1
CS R538
XCAM_SCK 3.1 N.C 100k VIDEO SIGNAL
2
SCK C547
64 CAM_SO 0.7 RST 3.1 0.1u
3
DI
XEEPROM_RESET
FC-89 BOARD (5/10) CAM_SI 2.9 GND Y/CHROMA

4
DO
K IC508 REC
EEP ROM
PB
05
MC_D00-D15
4-21 4-22 FC-89 (6/10)

FC-89 (FDD INTERFACE) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-43 for FC-89 printed wiring board. • See page 4-55 for waveform.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
FC-89 BOARD (7/10)

A FDD INTERFACE(FDC BLOCK 1/2)
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
INDEX
50 TRACK_00
FC-89 BOARD
(9/10) FDDRF_B
B 51
FDDRF_A
FC-89 BOARD (10/10) FDD_P_5V

52
DISK_IN
FC-89 BOARD (9/10)
R795
41 XX
FC-89 BOARD (5/10) FDD_LED_IN

Q705
C CN701 19P
XX
R725
XX
R729
DISK 19 33k
DISK R726 0
FPTS 18
FPTS
HDS 17 R730
HDS 100k
FDD_GND 16
FDD_GND
FDD_GND 15
CLOCK 14 CLOCK
D FDD_LED_IN 13
MC
C723
10V
MC 12 33u
INDEX
INDEX 11
R763
FDD_5V 10 2200
FDD_5V
FDD_5V 9
FDD_GND(E) R792
FDD_GND(E) 8 22k R746
TOSI(C) XX
TOS1(C) 7
STBY(K)
STBY(K) 6
R724
2200
R727 220 FDD_5V(A)
E FDD_5V(A) 5
PNB
R728
100k
R768
0
PNB 4
PNA
PNA 3 Q701-703
PB FDD 4.9V REG
PB 2
PA C720 C719
PA 1 33u XX Q701
C722 C718 2SB1581-T1
0.1u R794 XX 10V 10V
1500 5.1 8.3
BL_UNREG
R791 XX
R762
0
R747
R758 1k
R755 R751
C713 XX
47k
R757 0
0.001u
R760
C717
F FLOPPY
DISK
XX
0.5%
XX 0 0 7.7
DRIVE R756
R797
1SS367-T3SONY
UNIT XX
0.5% XX
X702 R752 7.3 Q702
5.1
5.1
5.1
4.8
5.1
4.5
5.1
5.1
4MHz 33k 2SB1462J-
5.1 5 0 5 0.5% QR(K8).SO 53
FC-89 BOARD
39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 5.2 7.3 (10/10)
Q703
R748
6 HN1C01FU-TE85R
FSET
DVCC
TST1
TST0
HDS
XFPTS
DISK
XMC
XIDXS
CPO
THOUT
H12
DGND
3 33k
0.5%
D701
2.1 5 2 2
FDD_4.9V
G R732
R796
0 R754
R753
22k 1.5
4 1
R750
R749
22k
0.2 2.5 XX 0.5%
33k
52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
MONB OSCO 4700 0.5%
0.5% 0.2
MONA
18 OSCI
2.4
REG_GND
CN702 5P 0 5.1
RF0 SVCC
SHIELD 1 R733 220k 0.5% 0
AGND PNA
ERASE 2 R734 680 0.5% 4.9 0
ED0 PA
R/W_B 3 R735 1800 0.5% 5
RW1B IC704 SGND
R/W_A 4 5 STEPPING MOTOR DRIVE 0.4 1
R731 RW1A PNB
H COMMON 5 5600
0.5%
C705 XX 5
ED1
IC704
TB6055AF(EL) PB
0.4
2
C714 XX 5 5.1
RW0B SVCC 3
CN703 5P 5 4.4 R761
RW0A STBY
R737 1800 0.5% 1k
SHIELD 5 5 5
AVCC T0SI 4
ERASE 4 R738 1500 0.5% 5 3.1
R736 WCH XRDYO 5
COMMON 3 680 R739 5 0.2
R742 0.5% 22k WCL XHDO 6
R/W_A 2 5600 0.5%
0.5% R740
R/W_B 1 1500 0.5%
I
XDSEL
XIDXO
XWPO
XMON
DGND
XISTP
XRDO
XDCO
XIDIR
XIWG
XIWD
XSS1
XT0O
Q706
XX R741
D702 22k
MA8075-TX 0.5%
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
0.3 0 3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.2
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
C715 65
XX
FC-89 BOARD
C716 (8/10)
10u
10V
1k
470
J
R745
SIGNAL PATH 7
R744
VIDEO SIGNAL 8
9
Y/CHROMA R743
2.2 10
11
REC
12
13
PB
14
K 15
16
R793 17
LND701 0 FB701
FDD_REG_GND GND
LND702
05
FDD_REG_GND
FC-89 (7/10) 4-23 4-24

FC-89 (FDD CONTROL) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-43 for FC-89 printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
FC-89 BOARD (8/10)

A FDD CONTROL(FDC BLOCK 2/2)
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
R765
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE 0
R:REC MODE 4
P:PB MODE FDC_CLK FC-89 BOARD
R764 0 (1/10)
IC703
TC7SHU04FU-TE85R
MC_DREQ1
IC703
B R714 10k
INVERTER 3.1 3.1
5 4
R715 10k C706
0.1u
R716 470k FDC_XCS
MC_XCS5
1 2 3 MC_XWE1
MC_XWE1
0 MC_XCKSLEEP
MC_XCKSLEEP
IRQ_FDC/CW
IRQ_FDC/CW
42
FDC_RST/XCDR_RST FC-89 BOARD
FDC_RST/XCDR_RST (5/10)
C
1.4
1.4
3.1
3.1
5.1
3.2 3 5 MC_XRD
MC_XRD
MOTOR_ON
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
C711 MOTOR_ON
XX MC_XDACK1
C712 MC_XDACK1
COM1
COM3
COM8
COM6
COM5
GND
COM9
COM7
COM4
COM0
GND
COM15
COM11
COM2
GND
COM14
COM13
COM12
COM10
TBO8
TBO7
TBO3
TBO6
TBO5
TBO4
X701 0.1u R712 MC_DREQ1
R711 R770 100k MC_DREQ1
XX 0
XX
R769
XX 3.1 3.1
75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
VDD VDD
XT2 TBO2
D C708
XX
C709
XX
1.5
XT1 CLKEN
0 MC_XCKSLEEP MC_A03
MC_A03 46
MC_A02 FC-89 BOARD
GND BUNRI MC_A02
3.1 (5/10)
MC_A01
EMB TEST MC_A01
3.1
WDATAB TBI38
3.1
WEB TBI37
FLTRB TBI36
3.1
STEPB TBI35 R713
3.1 47k
SIDEOUTB TBI34
E LCTB
IC702 TBO1
0 3.1 IRQ_FDC/CW
DIRB INT
1 FDD CONTROL 0
GND IC702 DMARQ
2 3 UPD65943GC-Y16-9EU-E2 3.1 MC_XDACK1
SHOCKB DMAAKB
3 3.1
RDATAB TC
3.1 3 R719 47k MC_XWE1
4 INDEXB WRB
3.1 R2.2/P2.9 MC_XRD
RDB
9
READYB
R722 R708 0 3.1 3.1 FDC_XCS
FLTB CSB
8
10k
F 3.1
TRK0B A2
R2.3/P2.9 MC_A03
7
3.1 R2.3/P2.9 MC_A02
A1
6
WPRTB
R1.3/P0.8 MC_A01
A0
5
R701 SIDEINB
5 100k
TBO9 TBO0
4
6
100k
100k
R705 100k
100k
100k
TBO10 GND 45
3
R717 MC_D00-15
0 0 FDC_RST/XCDR_RST
TBO11 RESET
2
MC_D00-15 FC-89 BOARD
R704
R706
R702
R703
3.1 3.1 (5/10)

VDD R718
1
R723 VCC
47k
10k
TBO14
SIGNAL PATH
TBO12
TBO13
65
GND
D13
D11
GND
100 GND
GND
D15
D14
D12
GND
D10
VDD
D8
D6
D4
D3
D0
D9
D7
D5
D2
D1
FC-89 BOARD
(7/10) VIDEO SIGNAL
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
R2/ R2.1/ Y/CHROMA
R2.2/P2.8
R2.1/P2.8
R2/P2.8
R2/P2.8
R2/P2.8
R2.1/P2.9
R2.2/P2.9
3.1
R1.7/P2.8
R1.9/P2.8
R2.1/P2.8
R2.1/P2.8
R2.1/P2.8
R2/P2.8
R2.1/P2.9
C704
XX P2.8 P2.9 C710
0.1u
REC
R720
H XX
L702 C703 PB
10uH 10u
7 6.3V
R721
0
8
MOTOR_ON
9
MC_D15
MC_D14
MC_D13
MC_D12
MC_D11
MC_D10
MC_D09
MC_D08
MC_D07
MC_D06
MC_D05
MC_D04
MC_D03
MC_D02
MC_D01
MC_D00
10
11
12
13
I 14
15
16
17
54
D_3.2V
FC-89 BOARD
GND REG_GND (10/10)
55
05 SHOCK_SENS FC-89 BOARD
(9/10)
4-25 4-26 FC-89 (8/10)

FC-89 (HI CONTROL) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-43 for FC-85 printed wiring board. • See page 4-55 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
FC-89 BOARD (9/10)

A HI CONTROL(HI BLOCK)
XX MARK:NO MOUNT FDDRF_B
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE FDDRF_A

50 FC-89 BOARD (7/10)
R:REC MODE INDEX
P:PB MODE TRACK_00
AU_CLK_ENV
MC_XFLRST
XCS_EEPROM
STB_CHG
ZOOM_SW_AD
FAST_CHARGE
XBATT_CHG_LED
KEY_AD2
KEY_AD1
CN803 22P
IC401
XX 1 FDDRF_B
2 FDDRF_A
B
GND
OUT
D401
56 MA111-(K8).S0 IN 3 INDEX
L402
FC-89 BOARD (10/10) BATT_UNREG 4 REG_GND
1 2 3 10uH R462 R465
10% 10k 10k 5 NC
R452
ACV_UNREG 470k 6 TRACK_00
D402 Q408
MA111-(K8).S0 UN9213J-(K8).SO 2.8 7 HSY
59 C405
LED DRIVE
C401 C402 22u 0 8 COM
FC-89 BOARD (10/10) 10u 0.1u 6.3V
R461 1k
R468 1k
R457 1k
R459 1k
R463 1k
R466 1k
16V R453 9 VG
C411 470k
0.1u R493 C422 10 HI_UNREG
1k
C REG_GND
XX LANC_IN
11 LANC_IN
0.5%
CPC
R494 1k
C423 LANC_OUT
XX (FOR CHECK)
12 LANC_OUT
C413
5 3.2 0.01u 13 MAKER_RECOG
4
470k
PF7
14 PF7
2
TXD
3.2 3.2 15 TXD
R474
3.2
3.1
3.1
1.4
3.2
3.2
3.1
3.1
3.2
5
47k
0 0 3.2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3.2 RXD
R476 16 RXD
R497 470k RESET
IC407 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 470k 0.5% 17 RESET
R496
XC66DS03XXPR
18 EVER_3.2V
EVF_DD_ON
XRST_FLASH
BEEP_ON
EVF_LED_ON
XCS_EEPROM
CHARGE_LED
STB_CHG
DD_CON_SENS
EVF_SENS
232C_SENS
ZOOM_SW
GND
BACK_UP_Vcc
BACK_UP_Vcc
XCS_LCD_DRV
KEY_AD5
KEY_AD4
KEY_AD3
KEY_AD2
KEY_AD1
KEY_AD0
BACK_UP_Vcc
BACK_UP_Vcc
FAST_CHARGE
LCD_COM_XDATA
D IC407
100k
470k
R423 470k
R426 470k
47k
47k
47k
19 NC
47k
R478
3.2V REG R420 R450 220k 20 NC
470k 470k 0.5%
R438
R454
R455
R439
R421
R422
21 NC
IC402 LANC_IN 0.3 3.2 R477
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75
1
XX LANC_IN BACK_UP_Vcc 220k 22 NC
LANC_OUT 0.3 0.5%
2
Vdd LANC_OUT GND
R481 1k
3
N.C. PAL/XNTSC 0 0
3
XRESET PAL/XNTSC FOCUS_B
C425 0.1u
4
Vss 2.6
PANEL_R-Y
4
(SIRCS_IN) ACV_SENS
3.1 2.5 C426 0.1u
PANEL_B-Y 33
5
XRIGHT_DOWN BATT_SENS FC-89 BOARD (3/10)
E 3.1 0
PANEL_Y
6
XLEFT_DOWN FOCUS_A
RTC_SCK 3.2 3.1 R482
1k
7
RTC_SCK XCPC_IN
RTC_SIO 3.2 0.1 USB_VBUS PANEL_V
23
8
RTC_SIO USB_JACK_IN FC-89 BOARD (2/10)
USB_VBUS XRST_SYS R431 1k 3.1 3.1 XMC_HELP HDO
48
9
USB_VBUS XRST_SYS XMC_DEAD_DET
3.2 R472 1M
FC-89 BOARD (6/10)
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
XMS_IN XLANC_ON N.C
XMS_IN D406 0 DC_PACK_SW D_3.2V
6 AU_CLK_ENV
AU_CLK_ENV XEEPROM_WE
1SS357-TPH3 BL_LED_ON
0
XEEPROM_WE
IC404 CHARGE_INH
SYS_V
3 R473 1k SYS_V PANEL_13.2V
FC-89 BOARD (1/10) HI CONTROL 2.9 DISK/XMS A_4.9V 60 FC-89 BOARD (10/10)
PAL/XNTSC GND DISK/XMS_SW
F TALLY
TALLY
XPWR_SW
XCAM/PB_SW
R433
R434
1k
1k
3.1
XPWR_SW
R0/P2.8
IC404
CXP921064A-059R-T6 Vdd(Don’t_USE)
3.2
3.2
R403
1k
0.2 XPOWER_LED PANEL_4.9V
BL_UNREG
27 XSTB_FULL XCAM/PB_SW BATT_IN
Q411
R435 1k 2.9 3.2 UN9213J- Q410-412 SHOCK_SENS 55 FC-89 BOARD (8/10)
FC-89 BOARD (3/10) XSTB_FULL XRS_ON2 (K8).SO LED DRIVE
STB_CHG XSHTR_SW POWER_LED
STB_CHG XRS_ON1 R436 1k 2.9 0 TALLY
XSHTR_LOCK_SW MELODY_ENV
VIDEO_OUT 35 FC-89 BOARD (3/10)
SYS_V 3 0 4
XMS_IN
13 FC-89 BOARD (2/10) SYS_V XMS_IN SELFTMR_LED
Q410
CN801 45P
3.2 R0.2/P4 XSTROBE_LED AV_JACK_IN
XLANC_PWR_ON XPANEL_PWM UN9213J- 1 AV_JACK_IN
31 FC-89 BOARD (3/10) PAL/XNTSC BATT/XEXT R488 1k 0 (K8).SO Q412 R432
BATT/XEXT STB_LED UN9213J-(K8).SO 2 VIDEO_GND
PAL/XNTSC R437 1k 0 R3.2/P0 10k
MOVIE/XSTILL_SW
PAL/XNTSC XSTILL/MOVIE_SW VOUT_ON 3 VIDEO_OUT
G 43 XMC_CS
XMC_CS
MC_XFLRST
0
TXD
0
GND
3.2
R401
0
4 VIDEO_GND
VOUT_ON
FC-89 BOARD (5/10) MC_XFLRST TRD 32KHz 5 BL_UNREG
XMC_HELP RTC_CS 0.1 1.2 VOUT_ON2
XMC_HELP RTC_CCS 32KHz 6 BL_UNREG
VOUT_ON2 CAM_DD_ON R3.2/P0 R402
VOUT_ON2 CAM_DD_ON BACK_UP_Vcc XX 7 REG_GND(UNREG_GND)
100k
20
100k
LANC_JACK_IN
3.2
XCS_LCD_D/A
XRST_SYS C802
INIT_CHARGE
XCS_EVF_D/A
BACKUP_VCC
R486 8 REG_GND(UNREG_GND)
SYS_DD_ON
LCD_DD_ON
38
AV_JACK_IN
20MHz_OUT
FC-89 BOARD (5/10) XRST_SYS R484 100k XX XX
XSTB_FUL
20MHz_IN
R429
XCS_SCK
BATT_SO
XHI_SCK
MELODY
9 SHOCK SENS
XCS_MC
XX
DISK_IN
BATT_SI
LCD_SO
XRESET
R430
R428
BL_ON
XRST_SYS XCS_EEPROM
HI_SO
17
HI_SI
FC-89 BOARD (2/10) 10 D_3.2V
GND
PF7
C432
3.2
3.2
3.2
2.7
2.7
3.3
3.2
1.6
1.6
3.2
2.8
2.5
2.8
3.2
0.4
0.2
2.7
PAL/XNTSC X402 XHI_SCK
0 0 0
IC405 27p
0.8
32.768kHz 11 PANEL_4.9V
H 34 FC-89 BOARD (3/10) VOUT_ON
VOUT_ON
R440
10k
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 TIMER CLOCK
4 3 2 1
1.1 HI_SO
12 A_4.9V
HI_SI
2.5
2.8
DISK_IN 3.2 13 PANEL_13.2V
52 FC-89 BOARD (7/10) DISK_IN 2.5
XOUT
VSS
0.9
CLK_OUT
XIN
4 3 2 1 14 PANEL_3.2V
19
S-3513BEFS-TB
R451
R444 470k R470 15 PANEL_3.2V
DO
CS
47k
SCK
DI
CN002 9P 1M C803
BATT_SIG 16 REG_GND
AK6440BL-L
XX
BATT_SIG 9 R445 470k R449
0 1k R821 17 REG_GND
BATT/XEXT Q406
BATT/XEXT 8 R446 100k 0
UN9213J-(K8).SO 18 HDO
FAST_CHARGE MODULATOR
FAST_CHARGE_ON 7 R447 100k X401
FU-159 BOARD INIT_CHARGE_ON 20MHz 19 PANEL_V
IC405
XSCK
I INIT_CHARGE_ON 6 0 R448 100k Q409 R816
SIO
VDD
CN003 DC_PACK_SW HN1L02FU(TE85R)
CS
0 20 REG_GND
IC406
THROUGH THE DC_PACK_SW 5 Q415 BATTERY CHANGE
3.1 3.2 DETECTOR 21 PANEL_Y
GND
RST
N.C
VCC
FU-056 HARNESS 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO C431
D_3.2V 4 R443 5 6 7 8
R490 1k
MODULATOR 4 XX
(SEE PAGE 4-38) ZOOM_SW_AD XX 1 0.1 3.1 22 PANEL_B-Y
R475 PK-61 BOARD (1/3)
ZOOM_SW_AD 3
XEEPROM_WE
XRS_ON2 0 R489 0.2 2 5 100k 5 6 7 8 23 PANEL_R-Y CN701
C409 R425 R427
3.2
3.2
XRS_ON2 2 10k C804
0.001u 4700 1k 0 3 R479 0 3.1 24 REG_GND THROUGH THE
XRS_ON1 10k XX
XRS_ON1 1 RTC_SIO FP-466 FLEXIBLE
R483 6 3 0.4 25 EVER_3.2V
R418 XX C417 C418 3.1 C433
RTC_SCK KEY_AD2 (SEE PAGE 4-31)
INIT_CHARGE_ON
0.1u
XCS_PANEL_D/A
1k 0.022u 0.1u D408 26 KEY_AD2

R471 MA111-(K8).S0 R480 RTC_CS KEY_AD1
100k R487 27 KEY_AD1
SYS_DD_ON
10k
LCD_DD_ON
AV_JACK_IN
XSTB_FULL
J R406 C410 C407 100k DISK/XMS

DISK_IN
8 XX
BATT_SIG
1u XX 28 DISK/XMS
XHI_SCK
CAM_DD_ON
XMC_CS
FC-89 BOARD (1/10) R485

D410
RESET
MOVIE/XSTILL_SW
HI_SO
HI_SI
CAM_DD_ON 1SS357-TPH3 270 29 MOVE/XSTILL

RXD
29 IC406
TXD
PF7
FC-89 BOARD (3/10) CAM_DD_ON XCAM/PB_SW

30 XCAM/PB_SW
LCD_DD_ON EEP ROM XPWR_SW
57 LCD_DD_ON L403 R416 31 XPWR_SW
SYS_DD_ON 100uH 12k
FC-89 BOARD (10/10) XSTROBE_LED
SYS_DD_ON 32 XSTROBE_LED
R413 15 Q416 XPOWER_LED
220k 2.4 HN1C01FU-TE85R 33 XPOWER_LED
AMP XBATT_CHG_LED
C435 6 3 34 XBATT_CHG_LED
1u 2.4 XCS_PANEL_D/A
2 5 HI_SO 35 XCS_LCD_D/A
K 2.9
C436
0.47u
44 HI_SO
XHI_SCK 36 HI_SO
SIGNAL PATH 2.3
1 4 FC-89 BOARD (5/10) XHI_SCK
HI_SI 37 XHI_SCK
C434 R414
68k 1.9 R424 HI_SI R822
2.2u R417 38 REG_GND
VIDEO SIGNAL 25V 2200 6800 0
39 BUZZER
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA 40 BATT
58 41 MAKER_RECOG
REC CAM_15V FC-89 BOARD (10/10) 42 HSY
43 PANEL_COM
L PB 44 VG
45 REG_GND
05
FC-89 (9/10) 4-27 4-28

FC-89 (DC/DC CONVERTER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-43 for FC-89 printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
FC-89 BOARD (10/10)

A DC/DC CONVERTER(DD BLOCK) ∗R004 ∗R005 28
XX MARK:NO MOUNT 20k:FD100:TYPE SO/ 3.6k:FD100:TYPE SO/
FD200 FD200 ST_UNREG FC-89 BOARD (3/10)
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE 24k:FD100:TYPE PA 5.1k:FD100:TYPE PA
SYS_DD_ON
57
FC-89 BOARD (9/10)
56 LCD_DD_ON
FC-89 BOARD (9/10) BATT_UNREG
59
ACV_UNREG
B CN001 12P
∗R007 REG_GND
FC-89 BOARD (9/10)
REG_GND 1 4.7k:FD100:TYPE SO/ C012 C015 C018 C022 51

FD200 4.7u 4.7u 4.7u 4.7u
REG_GND 2
5.6k:FD100:TYPE PA 10V 10V 10V 10V FDD_P_5V FC-89 BOARD (7/10)
REG_GND 3 58
REG_GND 4 CAM_15V FC-89 BOARD (9/10)
FU-159 BOARD
BATT_UNREG 5
CN004 R084 0 FDD_4.9V 53
THROUGH THE UNREG4 6
R004 R017 R083 BL_UNREG FC-89 BOARD (7/10)
FU-055 HARNESS UNREG4 7 ∗ 10k 0 Q004 Q032
R015 C013 L007 HN1A01FU-TE85R
(SEE PAGE 4-38) 0.5% XX 0.5% FP107-TL REG_GND
150k R028 22uH
C UNREG3 8
R005
∗ C011 R018
10k SWITCHING
2
5
1
∗R059 Q024,032 5
14.4
UNREG3 9 20k:FD100:TYPE SO/FD200 PANEL 13.2V REG
0.5% 0.022u 820 27k:FD100:TYPE PA BL_UNREG
UNREG2 10 0.5% 15.1 4 13.6
R016 C021 3
R007
10k R019 0.1u PANEL_13.2V 60
UNREG2 11 ∗ 9100 1
0.5% 0.5% R064 PANEL_4.9V FC-89 BOARD (9/10)
UNREG1 12 C034 C039 14.4 6
XX 100k 13.6
R008 8.4 3 4 5 4.7u A_4.9V
10V R059 13.9 2
39k R020
R091 8.3 ∗ D_3.2V
0uH 47k 0.5% 13.9 13.6
LND003 R009
(Note) 27k 6 3
FDD_REG_GND C031
R021 4.7u
68k 13.5 2 5 13.6
D LND002
R006
4700 R022 Q024
4700 1 4 HN1C01FU-TE85R
FDD_REG_GND R010
0.022u
R092 13.1
4700p
2200 R071
LND001 0uH 100k
R023 1k
(Note) C019 C023 C059
FDD_REG_GND 470p 470p 1u
Q010
C009
C016
Q001 EMARGENCY R094
2SB1122-ST-TD DETECT 0
R093
DC/DC CONV. 54
SWITCHING TRANS D_3.2V
2.5
1.8
1.5
2.5
2.5
1.9
7.1
8.4
LND004 0uH FC-89 BOARD (8/10)
2.5 5 1 8.2 L016 Q033
(Note) XX REG_GND
REG_GND 8.3 0 T001 220uH
4 1 Q023
5
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 R043 UN9213J-(K8).SO
E 3 2 Q010
UN9213J-
47k SWITCH R061
180k
CB1
CB2
CA1
D001 13.5
DTC B
SCP:A
DTC A
FB B
FB A
(K8).SO 5.1
+IN B
+IN A
LND005 0.5%
-IN B
-IN A
C025 XX D002 R049

0.001u 8 0
MA796-TX C049 100k
6
REG_GND 4.4 8.8 5.1
-2.5
CA2
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
SCP:B 4.7u
25V
49 VE A
0.1 3.2
STATIC_GND1 OSC IN 5 Q014 C055 47
FC-89 BOARD (6/10) OUT A 8.4 R029 220 0.22u D_3.2V
R001 2SD2216J- C061
7
R044 FC-89 BOARD (6/10)
10k 1.3 OSC FB 8.3 QR(K8).SO 10u
Vcc OUT C038 C047 22k REG_GND
0.5% CAM15V P5V XX 4.7u 0.5% SWITCH 16V
1.6 RT 8
C001 OUT B C042
180p CT IC001 C026 0.001u 4.7u
8
Note:Ferrite beads are mounted to the location 8.3 1.3
VE B
where R091-093 are printed. Vcc
F 2.5
V REF
2.5V
DC CONTROL
IC001
GND R030
680
R068
82k
R072
10k
C003 3.2 MB3785APFV-G-BND-ER 1.4 Q025
VE C R031
0.1u POW CONT 470 HN1A01FU- 0.5 R074
3.2
OUT C
8 TE85R ∗ ∗R074
4.9V 3.2V 1 4 0.5% 30k:FD100:TYPE SO/FD200
3.2 CTL B 7.9 33k:FD100:TYPE PA
OUT D C027
CTL 0.001u 2 5 -0.1
C004 0 C,D 1.4 Q016
VE D
0.068u CT UMF5NTR R075 ∗R075
2.5 SCP
8.1 R032 PANEL 4.9V 6 3 ∗ 2.2k:FD100:TYPE PA
CD2 470 L015 0.5%
SWITCH 22k:FD100:TYPE SO/FD200
SCP:C 4.7uH -11.4
+IN C
-IN C
DTC C
SCP:D
+IN D
-IN D
DTC D
-10.7
4.2 2
FB C
FB D
R047
CC1
CC2
CD1
-10.7
100k 2
0 0 R076
∗R076
L005 6 68k:FD100:TYPE SO/FD200
C028 4.9 R065 1 ∗
4.9 47uH
G 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
0.001u
2 1
1 6 5 5
82k
4 -7.6 0.5%
100k:FD100:TYPE PA
L012 3 4 3
2.5 6.5 3.1 -11.4
2.5
1.6
2.5
3.1
2.5
2.5
1.5
2.5
6.5
8.1
4.7uH R048 0.1

Q003 2200 Q018 Q031
FP107-TL 5
UN9113J-(K8).SO Q025,031 HN1C01FU-TE85R
0.022u
0.01u
SWITCHING R088 5 SWITCH CAM -7.5V REG -10.9

C033 L009 0
C007 8 4.7u XX 3.2
3 4 5
0.001u C020 C024
C010
C017
470p 470p 8.3 L017

4.7uH
C036 C040 C048
R011 C030 XX 10u 10u C052
4700 4.7u 10V 10V 10u
10V REG_GND
H R002
R024
2200 D_3.2V 37
270k FC-89 BOARD (4/10)
CAM_P_5V
R025
C006 R012 5600 CAM_3.2V
0.022u 10k 0.5%
0.5%
R013 R026
390 15k REG_GND
R003
0 0.5% 0.5%
Q002
CAM_-7.5V 7
C014 R027
4700 FP107-TL L004 L011 CAM_15V FC-89 BOARD (1/10)
XX 22uH 4.7uH
R014 0.5% R086 SWITCHING 3.2
C008 0
XX 10k 2 1
I 0.5%
R085
0
L010 4.7uH
CAM_3.2V 5
D_3.2V FC-89 BOARD (1/10)
L008
2.2uH 39
C032
7.9 3 4 4.7u R045 FC-89 BOARD (5/10) A_4.9V A_4.9V
5 XX
8.3 REG_GND REG_GND 30
C043 C045 40 FC-89 BOARD (3/10)
C037 10u 10u D_3.2V D_3.2V
C029 2.2u 10V 10V Q009 R046 FC-89 BOARD (5/10)
4.7u XX XX D_1.8V A_3.2V
J R033
REG_GND
12
Q006 A_3.2V
18k
0.5% 2SB1122-ST-TD FC-89 BOARD (2/10)
D_3.2V
3.1 1.8
D_1.8V
R036
100k
2.4
2.4 3.1
6 3
C041
Q005,006 1.8 2 5 1.8 2.2u
K D1.8V REG
Q005
1 4 HN1C01FU-TE85R
R034 1.2
47k R037
05 470
0.5%
4-29 4-30 FC-89 (10/10)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
SIGNAL PATH
PK-61 BOARD (1/3) D_3.2V
2
PK-61 BOARD (2/3)
VIDEO SIGNAL
FB789
VIDEO OUT

VDR782
MA8082-(K8).S0
30p PB
CN701 45P LND701 FB791

0
B AV_JACK_IN
VIDEO_GND
45
44
DUMMY VDR783
1000p
(Note) D785
XX
FLAME_GND
R704 XX
0.4
1 TRIP
10
1
0.4 1 R714
PK-61 BOARD (3/3) 22u AO 11k
9
C710 0.47u 0.5%
BI
8
R703 0 3 1.2 R718 S711
BO R715 S702 R722 R724
C
7
SHOCK SENS 37 OUT 120k 2700 4700 39k
VCC 1.2
6
D_3.2V 36 GND
L702 3.1 S701
C706 C711
R716
A_4.9V 34 1800 1
UP RIGHT
3 SET S709
32 SET S
LCD BACKLIGHT
PK-61 BOARD (2/3)
REG_GND 30 REG_GND
LEFT DOWN
D REG_GND 29
TLGU1002(TPX1,SONY)
TLYU1002(TPX1,SONY)
R710
(POWER LED(GREEN))
HDO 28
(FLASH LED(AMBER))
R705 R713 270
PANEL_V 27 680 680 R719 R717
2700 1800
D701
D703

THROUGH THE
FP-466 FLEXIBLE
VDR851
E EVER_3.2V 21
1000p
KEY_AD2 20 LND855
S703
DISK/XMS 18 LND856
POWER
ON/OFF(CHG)
MOVE/XSTILL 17 FLAME_GND
XCAM/PB_SW 16
XPWR_SW 15
(PLAY) (MOVIE)
F XPOWER_LED 13
FLAME_GND
XBATT_CHG_LED 12
HI_SO
6
HI_SO 10 FLAME_GND
PK-61 BOARD
R726
BUZZER
BATT 6 1 SP -
R727
MAKER_RECOG 5 33
1/10W
G HSY 4 HSY
BT701
REG_GND 1 PANEL_V
05 HDO
PK-61 (1/3) 4-31 4-32

PK-61 (LCD DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-47 for PK-61 printed wiring board. • See page 4-56, 57 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
PK-61 BOARD (2/3)

XX MARK:NO MOUNT
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
L903
PANEL_3.2V
47uH
IC903
L902 VREF AMP,VCO
100uH IC903
NJM062V(TE2)
C907
22u 7.1
VCC+
B
8
6.3V OUT1 R947 R951 D904
13.6 1SV290(TPL3)
PANEL_13.2V R945 470k 10k
R914 R916 R920 R923 39k OUT2
3 L901
7
10uH XX XX 82k 18k IN1- 3.3
R937 R949
PK-61 BOARD 10k 7.1 C924
R984 IN2- 47k R956 C928
6
(1/3) 0.01u
7.6
XX Q904 IN1+ 33k 0.001u
13.6 1.9
0.5% R927 R982 XP4601-TXE R953 L904
47k R946 IN2+ 10k 6.8uH
5
10k PSIG DRIVE 4 6
C901 C918 XX VCC-
C902 C919 1.9
R922
3.3u
4700
0.1u 7 10u
0
5 2
0
20V 6.3V XX
C925
R957 C927
4.7u
C923 R948 R950
7.6 0.1u C926 1k 56p
R928 27k
R910
68k
R913
7 PSIG 3300p
22k 3 1
13.6 6 4
C 7 C921
6.4
REG_GND 7 0.1u R987
2 5
R955 0
BRT_R
BRT_B
33k
PSIGG
R915 R917 R921 R924 R985 C935 VREF VCO

XX XX 56k 47k XX R952 R954 R958 R961
0.1u Q903 XX 0 0
0.5% 1 3 XX
XP4601-TXE
PSIG DRIVE
B_LIM
6.4 C922 P_XVD
PRG
FRP
SBLK
R930
10k 0.1u
C903
0.1u
1.2
1.4
1.4
2.2
1.3
1.5
1.1
3.1
2 0 7 13.6
C936
9 8
3.1
1.5
3.1
1.5
36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 2.2u 3.1 3 0 0 1.5 0
D
PRG/N.C
GAMMA2
GAMMA1
WHITE.LIMIT
FRP
RGBBLK
BLACK.LIMIT
VCC2
VREF/AVE_DET
PSIGGRAY
SUB.BRT.R
SUB.BRT.B
BRT 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
R905 7 5
6
HPOS1
HPOS0
XVD
SLSH2
RPD
GND
TEST
SLSH1
CKO/TEST
CKII
TEST/CKO
SLSH0
4700 C937
2.2u
R902 CN902 24P
27k
R911
100k 7 7
C938
2.2u
R931
100 VB 10 24 TESTL
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
B.OUT VCOM
PSIG.OUT C912 2.2u
TEST 0 7 23 COM
XTEST/N.C
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1.3 7 100 VG R941 22 VST
G.OUT XX 3.1 XHD VST/STH
BRIGHT 1.5
CONT C904 0.1u 2.2 7 C913 2.2u 21 VCK
G.DC.DET R933 3.1 HPOS2 VCK/XSTH
CONTRAST 2.8
E C905
R962 R963 XX
XX 0
PSIG.DET/N.C
IC901 4 ROUT
7
C914 2.2u
100
R939
VR R942
XX 3.1 XWIDE EN/CKH1
3.1
20 EN
1.6 7
HPOS3 DWN/CHK2 19 DWN
XX 220k D907 XX
R964
1.6
SUB.CONT.B
IC901
LCD DRIVE R.DC.DET
GND2 13.6
R943
0
NTSC 3.1
0 NT/PAL
IC904 TESTI/XSTV
3.1
18 VDD
R906 XX VCC1 IC904
SHA 0 1.3 COM DRIVE VDD TEST/STV 16 VDDG
SYNC.OUT/RGB AMP R999 7.2 6 C920 V_REV 3.1 CXD3510R-T4 0.2 R974 C929 D906 RD3.3UM-T1B
XX SHA/N.C XX 4 R944
SHB R907 0 2.9 7.2 150k 15 VSSG
0.1u 100k
XHDO 0.3 VREV WIDE/CKV2
0
0.33u
LCD901
SHG R908 XX 0 3 R998 14 CS

HDO HST/CKV1 COLOR
AGC.OUT/Gch DL ADJ

SHG/N.C
2 LCD
AGC.FL/Bch DL ADJ

R936 COMTST 0
SHR/N.C
F
REG.OUT/XRGB
C916 R940 C917 D903 12 HST

39k COMTST NC/ENB
H.FILTER.OUT
XX 22k 4.7u XX 3.1

H.FILTER.IN
16V XCLR NC/XPCG 11 REF

R/R-Y/CR
B/B-Y/CB
PICTURE
COLOR
10 SDUT
XRGB
HCK1/XCSV
R935
11
RGT/XCSH
HCK2/PCG
G/Y
XX 9 CRext
XCLP
SBLK
8 HCK2
GND
SHR
SHG
PRG
SHB
SHA
FRP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
7 HCK1
0.3 2 2.9 R965 PSIG
2.9
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.5
1.6
1.5
1.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 0 6 PSIG
3 XHDO VG
5 G
0.5
3.1
0.5
0.5
3.1
1.5
3.1
1.5
R988 3 0 1.5
0 P_XVD VR
G P_XHD VB
4 R
XCLP
R918 R991 R993 R995 R997

C934 1u
XX XX 3 B
XX XX XX
COLOR
2 RGT
COM
R919 R992 R994 R996 R929
XCLP
SHR
SHG
SHB
SHA
R975 R977
SBLK
PRG
FRP
470k 56k 1.6
1
R976
33k
H IC902
R986 C908
0 0.01u BRT 1.5 VSS
PANEL_V 4
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1
PANEL_Y BRIGHT HDO

COLOR 2 VDDA 2.9 PK-61 BOARD (1/3)
5 R989
2
C909 COLOR
0 0.01u BRT_R 1.4 3.2 EN PSIG
PANEL_R-Y EN
3
PK-61 BOARD (1/3) BRT_R

BRT_B 2.2 SO VG
4
PANEL_B-Y BRT_B
CONT 2.3 SI 2.6 SI
I
5
R990 C910
0 CONTRAST
0.01u B_LIM 1.1 SCK 2.8 SCK
6
B.LIMIT
VREF 1.3 COMTST 0 COMTST
7
P_GRAY
VCO 1.3 NTSC 3.1 NTSC
8
VCO
COM 1.1 V_REV 3.1 V_REV
7
9
COM
2.1 H_REV 3.1 H_REV
12 11 10

BL_LEV
PSIGG 1.1 VCC 3.1
BRT_TST
P_MUTE
VIDEO SIGNAL
2
C932 0.1u
SCK
XHI_SCK REC
6 EN
XCS_PANEL_D/A
PK-61 BOARD (1/3)
SI R925
05
HI_SO
15k PB
MAKER_RECOG
4-33 4-34 PK-61 (2/3)

PK-61 (BACK LIGHT DRIVE) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-47 for PK-61 printed wiring board. • See page 4-57 for waveform.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
PK-61 BOARD (3/3)

FP102-TL
T851
L851 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO 3 22uH 82uH
4 XX
BL_UNREG 5
7.7 1 R868
R857 1800 1
22k 8.2 1/10W
ND801
7.9 2 6 BACK
LIGHT
B C852
22u
16V C853
R856
560 7.7 C864
0.015u
3
C866
12p
CN851 10P
0.22u 3kV
5.1 5.1
1 C856
18p
R858
560
C859
27p -0.6
2 1 4 10 10 BL_HIGH
PK-61 BOARD (1/3) 3 5 9 N.C.

C861 C862
10u XX -0.6 8 N.C.
Q860 4
CPH5504-TL-E 7 N.C.
INVERTER DRIVE
BL_GND 6 N.C.
5 N.C.
D852
C Q852
UN9112J-(K8).SO XX
Q861
UN9112J-(K8).SO
R873
4 N.C.
SWITCH LED SWITCH 3 BL_LOW
4.9 4.9 120
PANEL_4.9V 2 LED
R860
R855 10k C860 1 LED_GND
120k 0.5% XX
R876 0.5%
68k 0 D901
(LED)
LND851
4.9
1.2
12 4.3 1
0.01u 4700
R864 R869
D Q851 1 2 3 4
47k 100k
UN9214J- R861
OUT
(K8).SO 1800
VCC
IC851 C857
FB
IN
SWITCH 0 0.5%
0.022u
TL5001CDR
2.1 Q857-859
DC/DC CONTROL
BL LEVEL
C851
0.01u
Q858
IC851
2SD2216J-
QR(K8).SO
IC852
GND
DTC
SCP
RT
Q857 1
E 2SD2216J-
QR(K8).SO 1
1
CURRENT DETECT
D853
4.9 MA111-(K8).S0
8 7 6 5 1.7
3
Q853
0.9
2.4
0 UN9213J-(K8).SO
2
0.7
R871 C865 R872
1
0 22k 0.1u 470
0.1
2.8 R862 R865 R866 IC852
3300 4700 1500 Q859 NJM2406F-TE2
R853 R854 C854 C855 Q855 R863 C863 R870

F 7
6800
0.5%
27k
0.5%
2.2u
6.3V
2.2u UN9213J-(K8).SO
SWITCH
1500 0.1u 6800
05
PK-61 (3/3) 4-35 4-36

FU-159 (DC IN) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-51 for FU-159 printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A CONTROL SWITCH
BLOCK
S001
(SHUTTER)
RV001
1 2
CN005 ZOOM
6P
3 4 W T
B
FU-159 BOARD 1
3
XRS_ON1
XRS_ON2
UNREG_GND
DC IN 4 D_3.2V
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
5 ZOOM_SW_AD
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE 6 UNREG_GND
C
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK is replaced as a block,
Q002,003,005 CN003
CHARGE CONTROL 9P so that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted.
C002 9 BATT_SIG
XX FB004
J001 CN001 XX 8 BATT/XEXT
DC IN 3P
7 FAST_CHARGE_ON
ACV_UNREG 1 FC-89 BOARD (9/10)
LF001 R020 6 INIT_CHARGE_ON
ACV_GND 2 R004 CN002
10 1k
1/8W 5 DC_PACK_SW THROUGH THE
BATT/XEXT 3
D FB001 C003
XX
FB005
XX
8.3
8.3
4
3
D_3.2V
ZOOM_SW_AD
FU-056 HARNESS
(SEE PAGE 4-27)
R001
1k Q001 2 XRS_ON2
SI4963DY-T1
R009 Q002
SWITCH 1 XRS_ON1
-1.1
XX R008 2SB1122-
LND001 2 G
(Note) ST-TD
7.8 8.3
STATIC_GND R002 R019
470k 8 S R005
8 6800 47k
CN004
LND002 1 7 D
5 12P
STATIC_GND 3 8.3
6 D 1 REG_GND
VDR002 Q003
XX UN9213J- 0
BT901 0
E BATTERY
TERMINAL VDR001
S
G
4
(K8).SO 2 REG_GND
VDR003 3 REG_GND
CN002 XX XX F004
4P D001 7.8 1.4A/32V 4 REG_GND
XX
BATT_UNREG 1 5 BATT_UNREG FC-89 BOARD (10/10)
FB002 D002
S BATT_SIG 2 1SS357-TPH3
F003
1.4A/32V 6 UNREG4 CN001
THROUGH THE
BATT_GND 3 7 UNREG4
FU-055 HARNESS
F002
DC_PACK_SW 4 1.4A/32V 8 UNREG3 (SEE PAGE 4-29)
FB003 C001 0.022u 0
9 UNREG3
R006
1M 2.8 F001
F R021
1.4A/32V 10 UNREG2
0 11 UNREG2
12 UNREG1
Q004 Q005
Note:Ferrite bead is mounted to SSM3K03FE(TPL3) F005
05 the location where R008 is printed. SSM3K03FE(TPL3) 1.4A/32V
SWITCH
4-37 4-38 FU-159


• Chip transistor
B E
4 5
3 1
CD-379 4-39 4-40


• Chip transistor
B E
1 2
3
4
5
4-41 4-42 CD-390

FC-89 (CAMERA PROCESS, CAMERA DSP, VIDEO, MEMORY, LENS DRIVE, SH DSP, USB I/F, MS SOCKET, FDD INTERFACE, FDD CONTROL, HI CONTROL, DC/DC CONVERTER) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

• FC-89 board is six-layer print board. However, the patterns of
• See page 4-58, 59 for printed parts location.
• Chip parts
Transistor
C 6 5 4
B E 1 2 3
Diode
3 4 1 (ACCESS)
5
2
4
2 1 E B 3
C
C 3 2 1
3
4
B E 2
5
4 5 1
18
E B
C
17
15
16
FC-89 4-43 4-44

19
20
9
1
11 8 7 2
3
10
5
6
12
13
14
4-45 4-46 FC-89

BT701
• For Printed Wiring Board. BATTERY,
• :Uses unleaded solder. LITHIUM SECONDARY
• PK-61 board is six-layer print board. However, the patterns of
• Chip transistor
C 6 5 4 2 1
B E 1 2 3 3 4 5
1
5
2
4
POWER 3
ON/OFF
(CHG)
5 1
12
6 10
PK-61 4-47 4-48

(CHARGE)
(POWER)
2 1
3 4 5
10
9 8
11
3 2 1
4 7
5
6
MS/FD
LCD BACKLIGHT
PLAY/STILL/MOVIE
(PLAY) (MOVIE)
MENU
(FLASH)

VIDEO OUT
FLASH
4-49 4-50 PK-61


• Chip transistor
C
B E
1 3 1 4
FU-159 4-51 4-52

4-4. WAVEFORMS
1 1 7.5 Vp-p
(FD200)
2.9 Vp-p
8.0 Vp-p
(FD100:
12.2 MHz TYPE SO)
100 µsec (FD200)
IC201 2 REC IC101 1, 2, 3 REC
2 2 7.5 Vp-p
(FD200)
480 mVp-p 8.0 Vp-p
(FD100:
TYPE SO)
IC201 4 REC IC101 4, 5, 6 REC
3 3 910 mVp-p
(FD200)
3.2 Vp-p 1.2 Vp-p
(FD100:
TYPE SO)
10.7 MHz
100 µsec (FD200)
IC201 7, 8 REC IC101 8 REC
4 4
7.8 Vp-p 2.9 Vp-p
18.4 MHz (FD200)

IC201 q;, qs, qd REC IC101 qf REC
5 5 4.0 Vp-p
(FD200)
7.8 Vp-p 3.3 Vp-p
(FD100:
TYPE SO)
17.1 MHz (FD200)
IC201 qa, qf, qg REC IC101 qg, qh REC
4-53
FC-89 BOARD (1/2)
1 6
4.2 Vp-p
(FD200)
3.5 Vp-p
3.6 Vp-p
(FD100)
18.4 MHz (FD200) 36.8 MHz (FD200)
12.2MHz (FD100) 24.5 MHz (FD100)
IC101 e; REC/PB IC651 4 REC/PB
2 7
3.1 Vp-p 3.5 Vp-p
16.4 MHz
V
IC101 ef REC IC651 9 REC/PB
3 8
3.1 Vp-p 3.5 Vp-p
25.8 MHz
H
IC101 eg REC IC651 qa REC /PB
4 9
3.0 Vp-p
3.2 Vp-p (FD200)
3.4 Vp-p
(FD100)
18.4 MHz (FD200) 48 MHz
12.2 MHz (FD100)
IC102 qh REC IC651 qh REC/PB
5 q;
3.4 Vp-p 410 mVp-p
48 MHz
H
IC651 2 (X651) REC/PB Q305 E REC/PB
4-54
FC-89 BOARD (2/2)
qa qh
410 mVp-p 2.0 Vp-p
H H
Q306 E REC/PB IC901 3 REC/PB
qs qj
410 mVp-p 400 mVp-p
H H
Q307 E REC/PB IC901 8 REC/PB
qd qk
180 mVp-p 3.5 Vp-p
4 MHz
H
Q308 E REC/PB IC704 wg (X702) REC/PB
qf ql
170 mVp-p 3.4 Vp-p
20 MHz
H
Q309 E REC/PB IC404 r; (X401) REC/PB
qg w;
410 mVp-p 3.1 Vp-p
32.768 MHz
H
IC901 1 REC/PB IC405 1 (X402) REC/PB
4-55
PK-61 BOARD (1/2)
1 6
410 mVp-p 7.9 Vp-p
H 2H
IC901 8 REC/PB IC901 wf REC/PB
2 7
160 mVp-p 5.0 Vp-p
H 2H
IC901 9 REC/PB IC901 ej REC/PB
3 8
180 mVp-p 3.3 Vp-p
11.7MHz
H
IC901 q; REC/PB IC904 wh REC/PB
4 9
7.9 Vp-p 3.2 Vp-p
2H V
IC901 w; REC/PB IC904 ef REC/PB
5 q;
7.9 Vp-p 3.1 Vp-p
2H H
IC901 ws REC/PB IC904 ej REC/PB
4-56
PK-61 BOARD (2/2)
qa
3.3 Vp-p
H
IC904 rg REC/PB
qs
6.2 Vp-p
496 kHz
IC851 1 REC/PB
4-57
4-5. PARTS LOCATION
no mark : SIDE A
* mark : SIDE B
CD-379 BOARD CD-390 BOARD FC-89 BOARD
C201 A-2 C101 A-1 C001 A-5 * C191 G-1 * C653 F-3 * FB701 A-1 * Q105 E-2
C202 B-2 C102 B-2 C003 A-4 C192 E-2 * C654 F-2 Q181 E-1
C203 A-1 C103 B-1 C004 A-4 C193 F-1 * C655 F-2 IC001 A-4 Q182 G-1
C204 A-1 C105 B-1 C006 A-4 C194 F-2 * C656 F-2 * IC101 F-2 Q184 F-1
C206 A-2 C106 A-1 C007 A-4 C195 F-1 * C657 F-2 * IC102 E-1 * Q302 E-3
C207 B-2 C107 B-1 C009 A-5 C196 G-1 C682 E-3 IC182 E-2 * Q303 G-4
C208 B-1 C108 A-2 C010 A-4 C197 F-1 C683 F-3 * IC183 G-1 * Q304 G-4
C209 B-2 C109 B-2 C011 A-5 C198 F-1 * C684 G-6 IC184 E-1 * Q305 F-4
C210 B-2 C110 B-2 * C012 A-4 C199 F-1 * C685 F-6 IC185 F-2 * Q306 F-4
C211 B-2 C111 B-2 * C015 A-3 C200 F-1 C686 E-3 IC186 E-2 * Q307 G-4
C212 B-2 C112 A-2 C016 B-5 C201 E-1 C687 G-6 * IC301 E-3 * Q308 G-4
C214 A-2 C113 B-2 C017 B-4 C204 F-2 C688 F-3 * IC303 D-2 * Q309 G-4
* C018 A-4 C205 E-2 * C703 C-2 * IC404 C-6 * Q310 F-4
CN201 C-2 CN101 C-2 C019 B-5 C210 G-2 * C706 D-1 * IC405 D-6 * Q311 G-4
C020 B-4 C211 G-1 * C710 C-2 * IC406 D-7 * Q312 F-4
D201 B-2 D101 B-2 C021 B-5 C212 F-2 * C712 B-1 * IC407 B-7 * Q317 B-2
* C022 A-4 * C304 E-3 C716 C-1 * IC501 F-5 * Q318 B-2
FB201 A-2 FB101 C-1 C023 B-5 * C305 E-3 C717 C-2 * IC502 E-6 Q406 C-7
FB202 A-1 C024 B-4 * C306 E-3 C720 B-2 * IC506 E-5 * Q408 C-5
L101 B-2 C025 B-5 * C308 E-3 C722 C-2 * IC508 F-7 * Q409 D-7
L201 A-1 C026 B-5 * C317 E-2 C723 B-1 * IC651 F-2 * Q410 D-6
Q101 B-1 C027 B-4 * C318 C-3 C901 G-3 * IC681 F-7 * Q411 D-6
Q201 B-2 Q102 A-2 C028 B-4 * C323 F-4 C902 G-2 * IC702 C-1 * Q412 D-7
Q202 A-2 C029 B-5 * C324 F-4 C903 F-3 * IC703 D-1 Q415 C-7
R102 B-1 C030 B-4 * C325 F-4 C904 F-3 IC704 D-2 * Q416 E-7
R202 A-2 R103 B-1 C031 B-3 * C328 F-3 C906 G-3 IC901 F-3 * Q501 E-6
R203 B-2 R104 B-1 C032 B-5 * C329 F-3 C907 G-3 Q682 E-3
R204 C-2 R105 B-1 C033 C-4 * C330 F-3 C909 F-3 L004 C-5 * Q683 F-6
R205 B-1 R106 B-2 C034 C-3 * C334 D-4 C910 F-3 L005 C-4 Q701 B-2
R206 B-1 R107 A-2 C037 C-5 * C336 D-4 L007 C-3 Q702 C-2
R207 B-2 R108 A-2 C040 D-3 * C337 G-4 CN001 A-4 L008 C-5 Q703 C-2
R208 B-2 R109 A-2 C041 D-5 * C338 G-4 CN002 A-5 L010 C-5 Q903 F-3
R209 A-2 R110 B-2 C042 C-5 * C339 G-4 CN101 E-1 L011 C-5
R210 A-2 C043 C-5 * C345 E-3 CN184 G-1 L012 C-3 R001 A-5
* TH101 B-2 C045 C-5 * C346 D-4 * CN301 B-2 L015 C-4 R002 A-4
* TH201 B-2 C047 C-5 * C349 C-2 CN681 F-5 L016 D-5 R003 A-4
C048 D-4 * C351 E-2 CN682 G-6 L017 D-4 R004 A-5
C049 C-4 * C401 B-6 CN701 B-1 * L101 E-2 R005 A-5
C052 D-4 * C402 B-6 CN702 C-1 * L102 D-1 R006 A-5
C055 D-5 * C405 B-7 CN703 D-1 L181 F-2 R007 A-5
C059 D-5 C409 C-7 CN801 G-4 L182 G-1 R008 A-5
C061 B-5 C410 C-7 CN803 G-6 L183 E-1 R009 A-5
* C101 E-1 * C411 C-7 L184 F-2 R010 A-5
* C102 F-1 * C413 C-5 D002 C-5 * L301 E-2 R011 A-4
* C103 F-1 * C417 C-7 D181 G-1 * L302 C-3 R012 A-4
* C104 F-2 * C418 C-7 D182 E-1 * L303 F-3 R013 A-4
* C106 F-1 * C425 D-6 * D401 B-5 * L304 D-4 R014 A-4
* C108 E-1 * C426 D-6 * D402 B-5 * L305 G-4 R015 A-5
* C109 E-1 * C432 D-6 * D406 C-7 * L402 B-7 R016 A-5
* C110 E-1 * C433 E-7 * D408 D-7 * L403 E-6 R017 A-5
* C111 E-1 * C434 E-6 * D410 D-6 * L502 F-5 R018 A-5
* C112 E-1 * C435 E-7 D501 B-6 * L504 D-4 R019 A-5
* C113 E-1 * C436 E-6 * D502 F-6 * L505 C-3 R020 B-5
* C114 D-1 * C502 E-6 * D503 G-5 * L651 G-3 R021 B-5
* C115 D-1 * C506 E-6 D681 E-3 * L702 B-2 R022 A-5
* C117 F-2 * C510 F-7 D701 D-3 L902 F-3 R023 A-5
* C118 F-1 * C511 F-6 D702 C-1 R024 B-4
* C119 D-1 * C512 F-6 * LF651 G-7 R025 B-4
* C120 D-1 * C514 F-5 * FB101 F-1 R026 B-4
* C121 D-1 * C522 G-6 * FB103 E-1 Q001 B-4 R027 A-4
* C122 D-1 * C523 G-6 * FB105 F-1 Q002 B-5 R028 B-5
* C123 F-1 * C524 G-6 * FB107 F-1 Q003 C-3 R029 B-5
* C124 E-1 * C530 G-5 * FB109 F-2 Q004 C-3 R030 B-4
* C125 E-1 * C536 F-5 * FB110 E-1 Q005 D-6 R031 B-4
* C126 F-2 * C538 D-4 * FB111 F-2 Q006 D-5 R032 B-4
* C127 G-2 * C540 D-5 * FB301 E-2 Q010 D-4 R033 D-6
* C128 F-1 * C544 D-5 * FB302 D-4 Q014 D-4 R034 D-6
* C129 F-2 * C546 C-3 * FB502 F-6 Q016 D-4 R036 D-5
* C130 G-2 * C547 F-7 * FB651 F-3 Q018 D-5 R037 D-6
* C131 D-1 * C548 C-3 * FB652 F-3 Q023 D-5 R043 D-4
* C134 E-1 * C552 D-5 * FB653 F-3 Q024 D-5 R044 D-4
* C135 E-2 * C553 D-5 * FB654 F-3 Q025 B-6 R047 D-5
C186 E-1 * C555 G-6 * FB655 F-3 Q031 B-6 R048 D-5
C187 E-1 * C556 G-6 * FB656 F-2 Q032 D-6 R049 D-5
C188 E-1 * C557 G-5 * FB657 G-3 * Q102 E-2 R059 D-5
C189 E-2 * C651 G-3 * FB681 G-6 * Q103 E-2 R061 D-5
C190 E-2 * C652 F-3 FB685 G-5 * Q104 E-2 R064 D-6
4-58
PK-61 BOARD
R065 B-6 * R316 F-4 * R470 C-7 * R714 B-1 BT701 A-3 L702 G-5 * R928 D-4
R068 C-6 * R317 G-4 * R471 D-7 * R715 B-1 L851 A-4 * R930 D-5
R071 D-5 * R318 G-4 * R472 D-6 * R716 B-1 C705 G-6 L852 B-5 * R931 D-4
R072 B-6 * R319 G-4 * R473 D-6 * R717 C-2 C706 G-6 L853 B-6 * R932 D-4
R074 B-6 * R320 F-4 * R474 D-5 * R718 C-2 C710 G-6 * L901 D-3 * R933 D-4
R075 B-6 * R321 F-4 * R475 D-7 * R719 C-1 C711 G-6 * L902 D-4 R936 C-5
R076 B-6 * R322 G-4 * R476 D-6 R721 D-2 * C851 B-5 L903 A-3 * R937 D-5
R083 A-5 * R323 G-4 * R477 D-5 * R722 B-2 C852 A-5 * L904 B-2 * R938 C-4
R084 B-5 * R324 G-4 * R478 D-6 * R723 B-1 C853 B-4 * R939 C-4
R085 A-4 * R325 G-4 * R479 D-6 R724 B-1 * C854 B-5 Q851 B-4 * R940 C-4
R086 A-4 * R326 G-4 * R480 D-6 R726 C-1 * C855 B-4 Q852 C-5 * R943 C-3
R088 D-4 * R327 G-4 * R481 D-5 R727 B-1 C856 B-4 * Q853 B-5 * R944 C-3
R091 G-2 * R328 E-2 * R482 D-6 R728 B-1 * C857 B-5 Q854 B-4 R945 B-3
R092 B-6 * R329 G-4 * R484 D-7 R729 C-1 * C858 B-5 * Q855 B-5 R947 B-2
* R093 C-7 * R330 E-2 * R485 D-6 R730 C-1 C859 B-4 Q856 B-5 R948 B-2
R094 D-5 * R333 F-4 * R487 E-7 R731 D-1 * C861 A-5 Q857 B-5 R949 B-2
* R103 E-1 * R334 E-2 * R488 B-6 R732 D-1 * C863 C-5 Q858 B-5 R950 B-2
* R104 F-2 * R336 E-2 R489 C-7 R733 C-1 * C864 B-6 Q859 B-5 * R951 B-3
* R107 D-1 * R337 E-2 * R490 C-7 R734 D-1 C865 C-5 * Q860 B-6 * R953 B-3
* R114 F-2 * R339 F-4 * R493 C-5 R735 D-1 C866 D-6 Q861 C-5 * R955 B-3
* R115 E-1 * R340 F-4 * R494 C-5 R736 D-1 * C901 D-3 * Q903 D-5 * R956 B-2
* R116 E-1 * R342 G-4 * R496 D-5 R737 D-1 * C902 D-3 * Q904 D-5 * R957 B-2
* R117 E-1 * R345 B-3 R497 D-6 R738 D-1 * C903 D-3 * Q905 C-5 * R958 B-2
* R119 D-1 * R346 F-3 * R501 E-6 R739 D-1 * C904 D-3 * Q908 D-2 * R961 B-2
* R120 F-2 * R348 E-3 * R509 E-6 R740 D-1 * C907 D-4 * R965 C-2
* R121 F-2 * R349 F-4 * R511 E-5 R741 D-1 C908 C-4 R703 G-6 R974 D-2
* R124 D-1 R350 E-3 * R513 F-6 R742 C-1 C909 C-4 * R705 F-6 R975 D-2
* R125 D-1 * R351 F-3 * R514 F-6 R743 C-1 C910 C-4 * R710 A-1 * R976 D-2
* R128 D-1 * R352 E-2 * R515 F-6 R744 D-2 * C912 D-5 * R713 A-1 R977 D-2
* R129 D-1 * R353 E-4 * R516 F-6 R745 D-2 * C913 D-5 R714 F-6 * R982 D-4
* R133 F-1 R401 C-6 * R521 F-6 R747 C-2 * C914 D-5 R715 G-6 R986 C-4
* R140 F-1 R403 D-6 * R522 F-6 R748 C-1 * C917 C-4 * R716 F-2 R987 B-3
* R141 F-1 * R413 E-7 * R525 G-6 R749 C-1 C918 B-3 * R717 F-2 R988 C-4
* R149 E-2 * R414 E-7 * R526 F-5 R750 C-2 * C920 C-3 * R718 G-3 R989 C-4
* R150 F-1 * R416 E-7 * R527 G-5 R751 C-1 C921 A-2 * R719 F-2 R990 C-4
* R151 F-1 * R417 E-7 * R530 F-5 R752 C-2 * C922 B-3 * R721 G-4
R189 E-1 R418 C-7 * R532 G-5 R753 C-2 C923 A-3 * R722 G-5 * S701 G-2
R191 E-1 * R420 B-6 * R533 G-5 R757 C-2 * C924 B-3 * R723 G-4 * S702 G-3
R192 G-1 * R421 B-6 * R538 F-7 R758 C-2 * C925 B-3 * R724 G-5 S703 C-1
R193 E-1 * R422 B-6 R573 B-6 * R761 B-2 * C926 B-3 * R725 E-6 * S705 G-6
R194 E-1 * R423 B-6 * R575 E-5 R762 B-2 * C927 B-2 * R726 F-4 * S707 G-4
R195 E-1 * R424 E-6 * R576 F-4 R763 B-1 * C928 B-2 * R727 A-3 * S708 F-5
R196 E-2 R425 C-7 * R577 G-5 * R764 C-1 C929 D-2 R782 F-7 * S709 F-6
R197 G-1 * R426 B-6 * R578 G-6 * R765 C-1 C931 D-2 * R853 C-4 * S710 F-2
R198 E-1 R427 C-7 * R580 E-6 R768 C-1 C932 C-4 * R854 B-4 * S711 G-5
R199 G-1 * R428 B-7 * R581 F-6 * R770 B-1 * C934 C-4 * R855 B-5 * S712 F-1
R201 F-1 R430 B-6 * R582 F-7 R792 C-2 * C935 D-4 R856 B-4
R202 F-2 R431 C-6 * R651 F-3 * R793 A-1 * C936 D-5 R857 B-4 SE701 G-6
R203 F-2 R432 C-6 * R652 F-3 R794 C-2 * C937 D-5 R858 B-4
R204 F-1 * R433 B-6 * R653 F-3 R796 C-3 * C938 D-5 * R859 B-5 T851 C-6
R205 F-2 * R434 B-6 * R654 F-2 R816 G-3 R860 B-5
R206 F-2 * R435 B-6 * R655 F-2 R821 G-3 CN701 D-4 * R861 B-5 * VDR782 F-7
R207 F-1 * R436 B-6 * R656 F-2 R822 G-5 CN702 D-1 * R862 B-5 * VDR783 F-7
R209 F-1 * R437 B-7 * R657 F-3 R902 G-3 CN851 E-6 R863 B-5 VDR851 A-2
R210 F-1 * R438 B-5 * R658 F-2 R905 F-3 CN902 D-2 R864 B-5
R211 G-1 R439 C-6 * R660 F-2 R906 G-3 R865 B-5
R212 G-2 R440 C-7 * R661 F-1 R907 F-3 * D701 G-6 R866 B-5
R213 G-1 * R444 C-7 * R662 F-1 R908 F-2 * D702 A-1 * R868 B-6
R214 F-1 * R445 C-7 R681 E-3 R909 F-3 * D703 A-1 R869 C-5
R215 G-2 * R446 C-7 R682 E-3 * D786 F-7 * R870 C-5
R216 E-2 * R447 C-7 R683 E-3 T001 C-4 D853 C-5 R871 C-5
R237 G-2 * R448 D-7 * R684 F-6 * D904 B-2 R872 C-5
R240 F-2 * R449 C-7 * R685 G-7 * VDR68 G-7 D906 D-2 R873 C-5
* R300 F-4 * R450 C-7 * R686 G-7 * VDR68 G-7 R876 C-5
* R302 E-3 * R451 C-7 R687 G-6 * VDR68 G-6 FB788 G-7 * R902 D-3
* R303 F-4 * R452 C-5 R688 G-6 * VDR68 G-7 FB789 G-6 * R905 D-3
* R304 F-4 * R453 C-5 R690 D-7 * FB791 F-7 * R910 D-3
* R305 F-4 R454 C-6 R692 E-3 * X401 C-7 * R911 D-3
* R306 F-4 R455 C-6 * R701 B-2 * X402 E-6 IC702 G-6 * R913 D-3
* R307 F-4 * R457 C-5 * R702 B-2 * X651 G-3 IC851 B-5 * R919 C-4
* R308 F-4 * R459 C-5 * R703 B-2 X702 D-3 IC852 C-5 * R920 D-3
* R309 F-4 * R461 C-5 * R704 B-2 * IC901 D-4 * R921 D-3
* R310 F-4 * R462 D-5 * R705 B-1 IC902 B-4 * R922 D-3
* R311 E-4 * R463 D-5 * R706 B-1 IC903 B-3 * R923 D-3
* R313 E-2 * R465 D-5 * R708 B-2 * IC904 C-2 * R924 D-3
* R314 E-3 * R466 D-5 * R712 C-1 R925 C-3
* R315 E-3 * R468 D-5 * R713 D-1 * J781 G-7 * R927 D-4
4-59
FU-159 BOARD
C001 E-2
CN001 E-1
CN002 E-2
CN003 A-3
CN004 A-2
CN005 C-2
* D002 B-2
F001 A-2
F002 A-2
F003 A-2
F004 A-2
F005 A-2
* FB002 E-2
* FB003 E-2
LF001 D-1
Q001 D-2
* Q002 B-2
* Q003 C-2
Q004 D-2
* Q005 C-2
R001 E-2
R002 E-2
* R004 B-2
* R005 C-2
R006 C-2
* R008 E-1
* R019 C-2
* R020 B-2
* R021 C-2
4-60
4-60E
SECTION 5
ADJUSTMENTS
Before starting adjustment
EVR Data Re-writing Procedure When Replacing Board

The data that is stored in the repair board, is not necessarily correct.
Perform either procedure 1 or procedure 2 or procedure 3 when replacing board.
Procedure 1
Save the EVR data of the machine in which a board is going to be replaced. Download the saved data after a
board is replaced.
(Machine before starting repair) PC PC (Machine after a board is replaced)
Save the EVR data Download the saved

to a personal computer. data to a machine.
Procedure 2
Remove the EEPROM from the board of the machine that is going to be repaired. Install the removed EEPROM
to the replaced board.
Remove the EEPROM and install it.
(Former board) (New board)
Procedure 3
When the data cannot be saved due to defective EEPROM, or when the EEPROM cannot be removed or in-
stalled, save the data from the same model of the same destination, and download it.
(Machine to be repaired) PC (Machine to be repaired)
Download the data.
Save the data.
(The same model of the same destination)
After the EVR data is saved and downloaded, check the

respective items of the EVR data.
(Refer to page 5-2 for the items to be checked.)
5-1
1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards

When replacing main parts and boards, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table.
Replaced parts
Block Mounted parts Board
replacement replacement replacement
(CCD imager) (FD100: TYPE SO/FD200)

(CCD imager) (FD100: TYPE PA)
(LCD Timing generator)

(S/H, AGC, A/D)
(CAMERA DSP)
(Back light unit)
(VIDEO AMP)
(LCD panel)
(LCD drive)
EEPROM
EEPROM
(EVR)
(EVR)
(COMPLETE)
(COMPLETE)
Adjustment section Adjustment
LCD901
ND801
RadarW
IC201
IC101
IC102
IC186
IC301
IC901
IC901
IC904
IC902
IC508
IC406
Control switch block
CD-379 board
CD-390 board
PK-61 board
PK-61 board
PK-61 board
PK-61 board
FC-89 board
FC-89 board
FC-89 board
FC-89 board
FC-89 board
FC-89 board
FC-89 board
Lens device
LCD block
LCD block
Supporting
Flash unit
FDD unit
Initialization of Initialization of D page data z z

7, 9, B, D, E, F, page data Initialization of 7, 9, B, E, F page data z z
Video Video sync level adj. z z z z z
Video burst level adj. z z z z z
Camera Hall adj. z z z z z z z
Flange back adj. z z z z z z
F No. compensation z z z z z z
Mechanical shutter adj. z z z z z z
Light value adj. z z z z z z z
Mixed color cancel adj. z z z z z z z
Auto white balance standard data input z z z z z z z
Auto white balance adj. z z z z z z z
Color reproduction adj. z z z z z z z
CCD (white and black) defect
z z z z z
compensation
Strobe white balance adj. z z z z z z z z
CCD linearity check z z z
LCD LCD initial data input z z z
VCO adj. z z z z z
Black limit adj. z z z z z
Bright adj. z z z z z
Contrast adj. z z z z z
VG center adj. z z z z z
P-SIG level adj. z z z z z
V-COM adj. z z z z z z
White balance adj. z z z z z z z
System control Battery down adj. z z z
Zoom center adj. z z z
Alignment check (FDD unit) z z
Table 5-1-1
5-2
5-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENTS

1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT
1-1-1. List of service tools
• Oscilloscope • Regulated power supply • AC power adaptor (AC-L10A)
• Digital voltmeter • Vectorscope • Color monitor
Ref. No. Name Parts Code Usage
J-1 Filter for color temperature correction (C14) J-6080-058-A Auto white balance adjustment/check
White balance adjustment/check
J-2 Pattern box PTB-450 J-6082-200-A
J-3 Color bar chart for pattern box J-6020-250-A
J-4 Siemens star J-6080-875-A For checking the flange back
J-5 Adjusting remote commander (RM-95 upgraded) (Note2) J-6082-053-B
J-6 Clear chart for pattern box J-6080-621-A
J-7 CPC-12 jig J-6082-436-A For connecting the adjustment remote commander
For adjusting the LCD block
J-8 Alignment disk (Two disks as a pair) TFD2-1(+) 8-967-990-01 Dynamic inspection disk with LCD adjustment signal
TFD2-2(–) 8-967-990-11
J-9 Cleaning disk (OR-D29WA) 8-960-009-39 FDD head cleaning (Note 1)
Cleaning disk Available on market
J-10 Mini pattern box J-6082-353-B For adjusting the flange back
J-11 Power supply cord (DC) J-6082-223-A For the battery down adjustment
Note 1: Usage and operating note Note 2: If the microprocessor IC in the adjusting remote
One or two seconds of momentary use of cleaning disk is commander is not the new microprocessor (UPD7503G-
sufficient such that FD is accessed momentarily by system C56-12), the pages cannot be switched.
control when the main power is turned on. After cleaning, In this case, replace with the new microprocessor (8-759-
insert a FD for playback. When cleaning is insufficient, 148-35).
use a cleaning disk again.
Caution: Avoid using a cleaning disk excessively. Head
can be broken.
J-1 J-2 J-3 J-4 J-5
J-6 J-7 J-8 J-9 J-10
J-11
Fig. 5-1-1
5-3
1-1-2. Preparations
Note 1: For details of how remove the cabinet and boards, refer
to “2. DISASSEMBLY”. Pattern box
Note 2: When performing only the adjustments, the lens block
and boards need not be disassemble.
1) Connect the equipment for adjustments according to Fig. 5-1-

6. Front side of the lens
2) Connect the Adjusting remote commander to FC-89 board L
CN803 via CPC-12 jig (J-6082-436-A). (See Fig. 5-1-3)
Note 3: Setting the “Forced CAMERA mode power ON” Mode

mander. L=About 30cm
The Above procedure will enable the camera power
to be turned on. After completing adjustments, be
sure to exit the “Forced CAMERA mode power ON
Mode”. Fig. 5-1-2
Note 4: Exiting the “Forced CAMERA mode power ON Mode”

mander.
1-1-3. Discharging of the Flashlight Power Supply

The capacitor which is used as power supply of flashlight is charged
with 200 V to 300 V voltage. Discharge this voltage before start-
ing adjustments in order to protect service engineers from electric
shock during adjustment.
Discharge procedure
1. Press the FLASH button (PK-61 board S705) and turn off the
FLASH LED (PK-61 board D701).
2. Fabricate the discharging jig as shown in Fig. 5-1-5 locally by
yourself. Connect the discharging jig to the positive (+) and
negative (–) terminal of the flash voltage charge capacitor. Al-
low ten seconds to discharge the voltage.
CPC cover
R: 1 kΩ/1 W 22
(Part code: 1
1-215-869-11) CPC-12 jig
FC-89 board
CN803 (J-6082-436-A)
Fig. 5-1-3
Capacitor
1 kΩ/1 W
Fig. 5-1-5
Fig. 5-1-4
5-4
AC power adaptor
Need not connected
AC IN
FU-159 BOARD
CN001
CN002
CN005
CN003
CN004
FDD UNIT
FLASH
UNIT
ZOOM SHUTTER
CN001
CN002
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
CN301
Adjusting Remote
CN701
Commander
LENS UNIT CN702

CN703
FC-89 BOARD
CD-379/390
CN101
BOARD
CN184 CN682
CN801 CN803
CN101: FD100: TYPE SO/FD200

CN201: FD100: TYPE PA
Terminated VIDEO OUT

75 Ω Need not
jack
connected
CN851 CN902
BUZZER
Video CN702
Vectorscope Color monitor
CPC-12 jig
CN701 (J-6082-436-A)
PK-61 BOARD
LCD PANEL
Note: Connect the GND terminal to Floppy disk drive

unit frame when check the RF signals waveform. BACK LIGHT
Fig. 5-1-6
5-5
1-1-4. Precautions
1. Setting the Switch
Unless otherwise specified, set the switches as follows and per-
form adjustments.
1. PLAY/STILL/MOVIE switch
(PK-61 board S708, S710) .................................... STILL
2. PROGRAM AE button (PK-61 board S707)
...................................... AUTO (No mark indicated on LCD)
3. DISPLAY button (PK-61 board S702) .................. OSD OFF
4. P.EFFECT (Menu display) .................................... OFF
5. DEMO (Menu display) .......................................... OFF
2. Order of Adjustments
Basically carry out adjustments in the order given.
Color bar chart (Color bar standard picture frame)
Electronic beam scanning frame

H
Yellow
Magenta
White
Cyan
Green
C C=D D
Red
Blue
Magenta
Yellow
Green
White
Cyan
Blue
Red
Monitor TV or
LCD picture frame
V
A B A=B B A
Fig. b (Picture on monitor TV or LCD)
Enlargement
Difference in level
Adjust the camera zoom and direction to

B A obtain the output waveform shown in Fig a
and the monitor TV display shown in Fig. b.
Fig. 5-1-7
3. Subjects
1) Color bar chart (Standard picture frame).
When performing adjustments using the color bar chart, ad-
just the picture frame as shown in Fig. 5-1-7. (Standard pic-
ture frame)
2) Clear chart (Standard picture frame)
Remove the color bar chart from the pattern box and insert a White
clear chart in its place. (Do not perform zoom operations dur- 841 mm
ing this time) Black
3) Chart for flange back adjustment
Join together a piece of white A0 size paper (1189mm × 841
mm) and a piece of black paper to make the chart shown in
Fig. 5-1-8. 1189 mm
Note: Use a non-reflecting and non-glazing vellum paper. The Fig. 5-1-8
size must be A0 or larger and the joint between the white
and black paper must not have any undulations.
5-6
4. Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box

A dark room is required to provide an accurate flash adjustment.
If it is not available, prepare the flash adjustment box as given
below;
1) Provide woody board A, B and C of 15 mm thickness.
woody board A (2) woody board B (2) woody board C (1)
530 mm 500 mm 1000 mm
1026 mm 1026 mm 1000 mm
1030 mm 1000 mm
Fig. 5-1-9
2) Apply black mat paint to one side of woody board A and B.

3) Attach background paper (J-2501-130-A) to woody board C.
4) Assemble so that the black sides and the background paper
side of woody board A, B and C are internal. (Fig 5-1-10)
woody board A
woody board B
woody board A
woody board B
woody board C
Fig. 5-1-10
5-7
1-2. INITIALIZATION OF B, D, E, F, 7, 9 PAGE DATA

1-2-1. Initialization of D Page Data
1. Initializing D Page Data
Note: If the D page data has been initialized, the following
1) Modification of D page data
2) LCD system adjustments
Adjusting page D
Adjusting Address 10 to EF
Initializing Method:
1 0 01 01
2 2 03 → 00 (FD100), 01 (FD200)
3 2 00 2D
4 2 01 2D Press PAUSE button.
6 2 FF Check the data “01”.
Perform “Modification of D
7 page Data”.
2. Modification of D Page Data

If the D page data has been initialized, change the data of the “Fixed
data-2” address shown in the following table by manual input.
Modifying Method:
1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set
data: 01.
they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy
the data built in the same model.
camcorder may not operate.
3) When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the
adjustment remote commander each time when setting new
If not, change the data to the initial value.
Processing after Completing Modification of D Page Data:

1 2 00 29
5-8
3. D Page Table
(Refer to “1. Initializing of D Page Data”)
Note 2: Fixed data-2: Modified data.
(Refer to “2. Modification of D Page Data”)

00 to 0F
10 00 Test mode
Fixed data-2 (FD100)
19
Fixed data 1 (Initialized data) (FD200)
60 Fixed data-2
61 Fixed data-2
62 Fixed data-2
63 Fixed data-2
89 80 Zoom center adj.
90 90
91 98
92 A7 Battery down adj.
93 BC
94 C7
99 Fixed data-2
9A Fixed data-2
9B Fixed data-2
9C Fixed data-2
9D to CF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
D0 82 Bright adj.
D1 Fixed data 2
D2 80
White balance adj.
D3 B8
D4 CC Contrast adj.
D5 5E Black limit adj.
D6 80 VG center adj.
D7 78 VCO adj. (NTSC)
D8 60 V-COM adj.
D9 Fixed data 2
DA 64 P-SIG level adj.
DB Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
DC Fixed data 2
DD 70 VCO adj. (PAL)
DE Fixed data-2
DF Fixed data-2
E0 to EF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
5-9
1-2-2. Initialization of B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data 2. Modification of B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data

1. Initializing B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data If the B, E, F, 7, 9 Page data has been initialized, change the data
Note: If the B, E, F, 7, 9 Page data has been initialized, of the “Fixed data-2” address shown in the following tables by
“Modification of B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data” and following manual input.
1) Modification of B, E, F, 7, 9 page data Modifying Method:
2) Video system adjustments 1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set
3) Camera system adjustments data: 01.
Adjusting page B they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy
Adjusting Address 00 to FF the data built in the same model.
Adjusting page E camcorder may not operate.
Adjusting Address 00 to FF 3) When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the
Adjusting page F adjustment remote commander each time when setting new
Adjusting page 7 If not, change the data to the initial value.
Processing after Completing Modification of B, E, F, 7, 9 Page
Adjusting page 9
data
Initializing Method: 1 2 00 29
1 0 01 01
3. B Page Table
2 6 00 FF
3 6 01 FF Press PAUSE button. (Refer to “1. Initializing B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data”)
4 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. Note 2: Fixed data-2: Modified data.
Set the following data, and (Refer to “2. Modification of B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data”)
press PAUSE button. Address Initial value Remark
FD100 (Note)
5 6 03 → 15: TYPE PA
17: TYPE SO 75 Fixed data-2
FD200 76 to FF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
16
6 6 00 2D
7 6 01 2D Press PAUSE button. 4. E Page Table
8 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. Note 1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data.
(Refer to “1. Initializing B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data”)
Perform “Modification of B,
9 Note 2: Fixed data-2: Modified data.
E, F, 7, 9 page Data”.
Note: Type of CCD imager is different according to the CD board Address Initial value Remark
in MVC-FD100.
Refer to page 7 to discriminate the type of CCD. 00 to AD Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
(FD100: TYPE PA/FD200)
AE
Fixed data-2 (FD100: TYPE SO)
(Note 3)
AF to FF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)

board in MVC-FD100.
5-10
5. F Page Table
Note 1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing of B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data”)
Note 2: Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data”)
Initial value Initial value
Address Remark Address Remark
FD100 FD200 FD100 FD200
10 to 13 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 45 D5 D5
14 14 14 46 FE FE
15 40 40 47 73 73
16 21 21 48 45 45
17 23 23 49 to 4C Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
18 12 12 4D 28 28
Strobe white balance adj.
19 AC AC 4E 6E 6E
1A 00 00 4F to 58 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
1B 00 00 59 00 00 Auto white balance standard data input
1C 00 00 5A 14 14 Mechanical shutter adj.
1D 00 00 Flange back adj. 5B Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
1E 68 68 5C 63 63
1F 00 00 5D 83 83
20 20 20 5E 03 03
21 20 20 5F E9 E9
23 40 40 64 10 10 Strobe white balance adj.
24 0A 0A 65 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
25 00 00 66 61 61 Video burst level adj.
26 FB FC 67, 68 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
27 7D 85 Light value adj. 69 02 02
28 27 36 6A 79 79 Strobe white balance adj.
29 00 00 6B F8 F8
2A 00 00 6C 0B 09
2B 00 00 F No. compensation 6D 14 77
2C 00 00 6E 07 06
2D 00 00 6F 09 81
2E 65 65 70 05 05
Hall adj.
2F 7D 7D 71 15 89
30 to 33 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 72 02 04
34 14 14 73 53 C1
Hall adj.
35 79 79 74 00 00
36, 37 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 75 00 00
Mechanical shutter adj.
38 Fixed data-2 76 01 01
39 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 77 01 01
3A 2F 2F 78 01 01
3B 37 37 79 01 01
Auto white balance standard data input
3C 40 40 7A 00 00
3D D0 D0 7B 27 29
3E Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 7C 3C 2A
3F B5 B5 7D 33 33
40 43 43 7E 33 33
41 03 03 7F 00 00
42 E9 E9 80 00 00 Auto white balance adj.
43 63 63 81 5A 5A Video sync level adj.
5-11
Initial value
Address Remark
FD100 FD200
87 FF FF Flange back adj.
88, 89 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
8A 00 00
Flange back adj.
8B 20 20
8C to 9F Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
A0 00 00
A1 00 00
Mixed color cancel adj.
A2 00 00
A3 00 00
A4 to A8 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
A9 00 00
AA 00 00
AB to C4 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
C8 to FF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)

board in MVC-FD100.
5-12
6. 7 Page Table
Note 1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data”)
Note 2: Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modified of B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data”)

00 to 5F Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 8F FF
60 0F 90 0F
61 FF 91 FF
62 0F 92 0F
63 FF 93 FF
64 0F 94 0F
65 FF 95 FF
66 0F 96 0F
67 FF 97 FF
68 0F 98 0F
69 FF 99 FF
6A 0F 9A 0F
6B FF 9B FF
6C 0F 9C 0F
6D FF 9D FF
6E 0F 9E 0F
6F FF 9F FF
70 0F A0 0F
71 FF A1 FF
72 0F A2 0F
CCD black defect compensation
73 FF A3 FF
74 0F A4 0F
75 FF A5 FF
76 0F A6 0F
77 FF A7 FF
78 0F A8 0F
79 FF A9 FF
7A 0F AA 0F
7B FF AB FF
7C 0F AC 0F
7D FF AD FF
7E 0F AE 0F
7F FF AF FF
80 0F B0 0F
81 FF B1 FF
82 0F B2 0F
83 FF B3 FF
84 0F B4 0F
85 FF B5 FF
86 0F B6 0F
87 FF B7 FF
88 0F B8 0F
89 FF B9 FF
8A 0F BA 0F
8B FF CCD white defect compensation BB FF
8C 0F BC 0F
8D FF BD FF
8E 0F BE 0F
5-13

BF FF F1 FF
C0 0F F2 0F
C1 FF F3 FF
C2 0F F4 0F
C3 FF F5 FF
C4 0F F6 0F
C5 FF F7 FF
C6 0F F8 0F CCD white defect compensation
C7 FF F9 FF
C8 0F FA 0F
C9 FF FB FF
CA 0F FC 0F
CB FF FD FF
CC 0F FE 0F
CD FF FF FF
CE 0F
CF FF
7. 9 Page Table
D0 0F Note 1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data.
D1 FF (Refer to “1. Initializing the B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data”)
D2 0F Note 2: Fixed data-2: Modified data.
D3 FF
D4 0F
00 to 5C Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
D5 FF
5D Fixed data-2
D6 0F
5E Fixed data-2
D7 FF
5F to FF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)
D8 0F
D9 FF
DA 0F
DB FF
DC 0F
DD FF
DE 0F
DF FF
E0 0F
E1 FF
E2 0F
E3 FF
E4 0F
E5 FF
E6 0F
E7 FF
E8 0F
E9 FF
EA 0F
EB FF
EC 0F
ED FF
EE 0F
EF FF
F0 0F
5-14
1-3. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS 2. Video Burst Level Adjustment

1. Video Sync Level Adjustment Adjust the burst level of the composite video signal output.
Adjust the sync level of the composite video signal output.
Mode PLAY
Mode PLAY Signal Arbitrary
Signal Arbitrary Measurement Point Video terminal of VIDEO OUT
Measurement Point Video terminal of VIDEO OUT jack (75 Ω terminated)
jack (75 Ω terminated) Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address 66
Adjustment Address 81 Specified Value A = 286 ± 10 mVp-p (NTSC)
Specified Value A = 286 ± 10 mVp-p (NTSC) A = 300 ± 12 mVp-p (PAL)
A = 300 ± 12 mVp-p (PAL) Note: Perform “Video Sync Level Adjustment” before this ad-
justment.
Adjusting method:
Adjusting method:
1 0 01 01 Order Page Address Data Procedure
2 5 F1 04 1 0 01 01
Change the data and set the 2 5 F1 04
3 F 81 sync level (A) to the specified Change the data and set the
value. 3 F 66 burst level (A) to the
4 F 81 Press PAUSE button specified value.
4 F 66 Press PAUSE button
Order Page Address Data Procedure Processing after Completing Adjustments:
1 5 F1 00 Order Page Address Data Procedure
2 0 01 00 1 5 F1 00
2 0 01 00
A
A
H H
Fig. 5-1-11 Fig. 5-1-12
5-15
1-4. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS After completing the camera system adjustments,
Before perform the camera system adjustments, check that the release the data setting:
specified values of “VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS” are sat-
isfied.
Note: For “CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS”, perform in 1 5 F1 00
order of item numbers. 2 6 6C 00
Data setting during camera system adjustments
Perform the following data setting before the camera system ad- 4 D 10 00 Press PAUSE button.
justments. Set the bit value of bit 6 is
It is not necessary to perform the following data setting everytime 5 D 63 “0”, and press PAUSE
when you perform some items of camera system adjustments con- button. (Note 1)
tinuously unless the power is turned off. Only when the power is 6 0 01 00
turned off during this adjustments, perform the data setting again,
then continue the adjustments.
Set up setting:
1) VIDEO OUT of SET UP setting............... NTSC (NTSC mode)
(This adjustment must be performed in NTSC mode, so don't
set the SET UP setting to “PAL”)
Data setting method:

1 0 01 01
2 D 63 Note down the data.
Set the bit value of bit 6 is
3 D 63 “1”, and press PAUSE
button. (Note 1)
4 D 10 81 Press PAUSE button.
5 6 C1
“02”.
6 5 F1 FF
7 6 6C 01
9 F 38 B1 Press PAUSE button.
Press PAUSE button.
10 F C5 40 (FD100: TYPE PA only)
(Note 3)
Press PAUSE button.
(Note 3)
Press PAUSE button.
(Note 3)
Press PAUSE button.
14 E AE F9 (FD100: TYPE SO only)
(Note 3)
15 9 5D 82 Press PAUSE button.
16 9 5E 22 Press PAUSE button.
Note 1: For the bit values, refer to “5-2. SERVICE MODE”,
“2-3. 2. Bit value discrimination”.
Note 2: Repeat the “Data setting method”, if the power was turned
off and on during the “CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUST-
MENTS”.
board in MVC-FD100.
5-16
Picture Frame Setting How to reset the zoom and focus when they deviated:
Mode CAMERA Order Page Address Data Procedure
Subject Color bar chart 1 6 2C 01
3 6 91 00
jack (75 Ω terminated) 4 6 92 YL (Note 2)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope and monitor TV 5 6 93 YH (Note 2)
Specified Value A=B, C=D, E=F 6 6 01 79 Press PAUSE button.
Note 1: Displayed data of the page 1 of adjusting remote com- Check the data changes to
7 6 07
mander. “01”.
1:XX:XX 8 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button.
YL data Note 2: The data noted down at step 7 of “Setting method”.
YH data
Check on the oscilloscope
Switch setting
1) FOCUS ............................. MACRO 1. Horizontal period
Setting method: A=B C=D

B C
Shoot the color bar chart
1 A D
with the zoom WIDE end.
Enter the output of VIDEO
OUT to the monitor TV, and
2
move the position as shown
in Fig. 5-1-15.
Horizontal width of one color
(B, C) and that of black (A,
3 D) on the color bar chart
should be same. (See Fig. 5-
1-13)
With vertical width of black
(E, F) set in same, the color
4 bar chart should come to the
center of monitor TV. (See
Fig. 5-1-14)
Check that the color bar on Fig. 5-1-13
5
the monitor TV is focused.
6 0 03 22 2. Vertical period
Note down the YH and YL
7 1
data. (Note 1) E E=F F

1 0 03 00 V
Fig. 5-1-14
Check on the monitor TV
Color bar chart picture frame Monitor TV picture frame
Fig. 5-1-15
5-17
1. HALL Adjustment
RadarW
RadarW
Mode CAMERA
Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 1
(Note 2)
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 2E, 2F, 34, 35
Specified value 10 to 18 during IRIS OPEN
75 to 7D during IRIS CLOSE
Note 2: The right two digits of the page: 1 displayed data of the
1:00:XX
Displayed data
Adjusting method:
2 6 94 14
3 6 95 79
Press PAUSE button.
4 6 01 6D
(Note 3)
5 6 02
“01”.
7 0 03 03
9 1 (Note 2) during IRIS OPEN
11 1 (Note 2) during IRIS CLOSE
F, address: 2E, 2F, 34 and 35.

2 6 94 00
3 6 95 00
4 0 03 00
5-18
2. Flange Back Adjustment Adjusting method:

(Using the minipattern box) RadarW
The inner focus lens flange back adjustment is carried out auto-
matically. In whichever case, the focus will be deviated during Perform “Data setting during
auto focusing/manual focusing. 1 camera system adjustment”.
Mode CAMERA
Subject Siemens star chart with ND filter
for minipattern box (Note 1) Press PAUSE button.
3 6 01 27
(Note 4)
Measuring Instrument 4 6 02
“01”.
Adjustment Page F Check the data.
Adjustment Address 14 to 25, 87, 8A, 8B 5 F 87 00: Normal
Note 1: Dark Siemens star chart. 01 to FF: Defective
Note 2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. Note 4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page:
If not, turn the power of unit OFF/ON. F, address: 14 to 25, 87, 8A and 8B.
Preparations before adjustments: Processing after Completing Adjustment:

1) The minipattern box is installed as shown in the following fig-
ure.
Note 3: The attachment lenses are not used. 1 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button.
2) Install the minipattern box so that the distance between it and Release the data setting
the front of lens of camera is less than 3 cm. 2 performed at step 1.
3) Make the height of minipattern box and the camera equal. (Refer to page 5-16)
4) Check the output voltage of the regulated power supply is the
specified voltage ± 0.01 Vdc. 3
Check”.
5) Check that the center of Siemens star chart meets the center of
shot image screen with the zoom lens at TELE end and WIDE
end respectively.
Specified voltage: The specified voltage varies according to the

minipattern box, so adjustment the power sup-
ply output voltage to the specified voltage writ-
ten on the sheet which is supplied with the mini-
pattern box.
Below 3 cm
Minipattern box
Camera
Camera
table

Output voltage : Specified voltage ± 0.01 Vdc
Output current : more than 3.5 A
Red (+)
Black (–)
Yellow (SENS +)
White (SENS –) Need not connected

Black (GND)
Fig. 5-1-16
5-19
RadarW 3-2. Flange Back Adjustment (2)

3. Flange Back Adjustment RadarW Perform this adjustment after performing “Flange Back Adjust-
(Using the flange back adjustment chart and ment (1)”.
Subject More than 500 m Away)
The inner focus lens flange back adjustment is carried out auto- Mode CAMERA
matically. In whichever case, the focus will be deviated during Subject Subject more than 500 m away
auto focusing/manual focusing. (Subject with clear contrast such
as buildings, etc.)
3-1. Flange Back Adjustment (1)
Mode CAMERA Measuring Instrument
Subject Flange back adjustment chart Adjustment Page F
(2.0 m from the front of lens)
(Luminance: 300 to 400 lux) Adjustment Address 14 to 25, 87, 8A, 8B

Adjusting method:
Adjustment Page F
Set the zoom lens to the
Adjustment Address 14 to 25, 87, 8A, 8B
TELE end and expose a
Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. 1
subject that is more than 500
If not, turn the power of unit OFF/ON. m away. (Note 1)
Preparations before adjustments:
1) Place the Flange back adjustment chart 2.0 m from the front
of the lens.
2) Check that the center of Flange back adjustment chart meets 3 6 01 13 Press PAUSE button.
the center of shot image screen with the zoom lens at TELE Place ND filter on the lens so
end and WIDE end respectively. 4 that the optimum image is
obtain.
Adjusting method:
Press PAUSE button.
5 6 01 29
Order Page Address Data Procedure (Note 2)
Perform “Data setting during Check the data changes to
6 6 02
1 camera system adjustment”. “01”.
(Refer to page 5-16) Check the data.
2 6 01 13 Press PAUSE button. 7 F 87 00: Normal
Press PAUSE button. 01 to FF: Defective
3 6 01 15
(Note 2) Note 1: Subject with clear contrast such as building, etc.
Check the data changes to Nearby subjects less than 500 m away should not be in
4 6 02 the screen.
“01”.
Check the data. F, address: 14 to 25, 87, 8A and 8B.
5 F 87 00: Normal
01 to FF: Defective Processing after Completing Adjustment:
F, address: 14 to 25, 87, 8A and 8B.
Processing after Completing Adjustment: Release the data setting
Order Page Address Data Procedure 2 performed at step 2.
Release the data setting 3
Check”.
3
Adjustment (2)”.
5-20
4. Flange Back Check

Mode CAMERA
Subject Siemens star
(1.0 m from the front of the lens)
(Luminance: 200 to 400 lux)
Specified value Focused at the TELE end and
WIDE end
Checking method:
Place the Siemens star 1.0 m
1
from the front of the lens.
To open the IRIS , decrease
the luminous intensity to the
2 Siemens star up to a point
before noise appear on the
image.
4 B 3D Note down the data.
5 B 3D 64 Press PAUSE button.
Shoot the Siemens star with
6
the zoom TELE end.
7 Turn on the auto focus.
Check that the lens is
8
focused.
9 6 2C 01
While observe the TV
monitor, change the zoom to
10
the WIDE end and check that
the lens is focused.

1 6 2C 00
2 B 3D
5-21
5. F No. Compensation RadarW 6. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment RadarW

Compensate the unevenness of the iris meter sensitivity. Adjust the period which the mechanical shutter is closed, and com-
pensate the exposure.
Mode CAMERA
Subject Clear chart Mode CAMERA
(Standard picture frame with the Subject Clear chart
zoom lens at WIDE end) (Standard picture frame with the
Adjustment Page F zoom lens at WIDE end)
Adjustment Address 29 to 2D Adjustment Page F
Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. Adjustment Address 5A, 6C to 7F
If not, turn the power of unit OFF/ON. Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”.
Adjusting method:
Adjusting method:
Perform “Data setting during Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 camera system adjustment”. Perform “Data setting during
(Refer to page 5-16) 1 camera system adjustment”.
Perform “Picture Frame (Refer to page 5-16)
2 setting”. Perform “Picture Frame
(Refer to page 5-17) 2 setting”.
Press PAUSE button. (Refer to page 5-17)
3 6 01 BB
(Note 2) Press PAUSE button.
3 6 01 AD
Check the data changes to (Note 2)
4 6 02
“01”. Check the data changes to
4 6 02
Note 2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: “01”.
F, address: 29 to 2D. 5 6 AB Check the data is “00”.
Processing after Completing Adjustment: F, address: 5A, 6C to 7F.
Release the data setting Order Page Address Data Procedure
2 performed at step 1. 1 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button.
(Refer to page 5-16) Release the data setting
5-22
RadarW
7. Light Value Adjustment
Adjust the standard LV value. Order Page Address Data Procedure
Mode CAMERA 1 0 03 00
Subject Clear chart 2 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button.
(Standard picture frame with the Release the data setting
zoom lens at WIDE end) 3 performed at step 1.
Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 1 (Note (Refer to page 5-16)
2) and page: F, address: 28
Adjustment Page F
Specified Value FD100 (Note 3):
TYPE PA:
TYPE SO:
FD200:
1:XX:XX
Displayed data
board in MVC-FD100.
Adjusting method:
2 setting”.
Press PAUSE button.
3 6 01 0D
(Note 4)
4 6 02
“01”.
5 0 03 06
6 1 (Note 2) satisfies the AE
level 1 specified value.
7 F 28 satisfies the AE level 2
specified value.
F, address: 26 to 28.
5-23
8. Mixed Color Cancel Adjustment RadarW 9. Auto White Balance Standard Data Input RadarW
To perform mixed color cancel adjustment based on data of each Adjust the white balance standard data at 3200K.
color in color bar.
Mode CAMERA
Mode CAMERA
Subject Clear chart
Subject Color bar chart (Standard picture frame with the
(Standard picture frame with the zoom lens at WIDE end)
Adjustment Page F
Measurement Point Displayed data of page: F,
Adjustment Address 3A to 3D, 59
address :A0 (Note 2)
Measurering Instrument Adjusting remote commander Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”.
Adjustment Page F Note 2: “Auto White Balance Standard Data Input” is available
Adjustment Address A0 to A3 only once after the power is turned on. Turn the power
Specified Value Check data : Except 3. (Note 2) off, then on again if the adjustment is retried.
Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. Adjusting method:
Note 2: Displayed data of page: F, address: A0 of the adjusting Order Page Address Data Procedure
remote commander. Perform “Data setting during
F:XX:A0 1 camera system adjustment”.
Check data (Refer to page 5-16)
Adjusting method:
2 setting”.
Order Page Address Data Procedure (Refer to page 5-17)
Perform “Data setting during 3 6 01 11 Press PAUSE button.
1 camera system adjustment”. Press PAUSE button.
(Refer to page 5-16) 4 6 01 0B
(Note 3)
Perform “Picture Frame Check the data changes to
2 setting”. 5 6 02
“01”.
3 6 01 D7 Press PAUSE button. F, address: 3A to 3D and 59.
Press PAUSE button.
4 6 01 D5
(Note 3) Processing after Completing Adjustment:
Check the data changes to Order Page Address Data Procedure
5 6 02
“01”.
Check that the check data
6 F A0 satisfies the specified value.
(Note 2)
F, address: A0 and A3.

3 0 01 00
5-24
10. Auto White Balance Adjustment RadarW Adjusting method:

Adjust the white balance standard data at 5800K. Order Page Address Data Procedure
Mode CAMERA 1 Place the C14 filter on the lens.
Subject Clear chart Perform “Data setting during
(Standard picture frame with the 2 camera system adjustment”.
zoom lens at WIDE end) (Refer to page 5-16)
Filter Filter C14 for color temperature Perform “Picture Frame
correction 3 setting”.
Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 1 (Note 3) (Refer to page 5-17)
Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander 4 6 01 A7 Press PAUSE button.
Adjustment Page F 49
4A
Adjustment Address 3F, 40, 80, A9, AA 5 F Note down the data.
4B
Specified Value FD100 (Note 5): 4C
TYPE PA: 49
R ratio: 2921 to 2AA1 4A Set the data (Note 6)
B ratio: 5EE0 to 6060 6 F →
4B Press PAUSE button.
TYPE SO: 4C
R ratio: 25C4 to 2744
B ratio: 604B to 61CB 7 Wait for 2 seconds.
FD200: 8 6 01 A5 Press PAUSE button. (Note 7)
R ratio: 25F1 to 2771 Check the data changes to
B ratio: 6610 to 6790 9 6 02
“01”.
Note 1: Perform “Auto White Balance Standard Data Input” 10 6 01 3F Press PAUSE button.
Note 2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. 11 Wait for 2 seconds.
If not, turn the power of unit OFF/ON. 12 0 03 04
Note 3: The right 4 digits of the page: 1 displayed data of the Check that the displayed data
adjusting remote commander. 13 1 (Note 3) satisfied the R ratio
1:XX:XX specified value.
Displayed data
Note 4: “Auto White Balance Adjustment” is available only once 14 0 03 05
after the power is turned on. Turn the power off, then on Check that the displayed data
again if the adjustment is retried. 15 1 (Note 3) satisfied the B ratio
Note 5: Type of CCD imager is different according to the CD specified value.
board in MVC-FD100. Note 7: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page:
Refer to page 7 to discriminate the type of CCD. F, address: 3F, 40, 80, A9 and AA.
Note 6: Check the CCD TYPE and input the following data in
page: F, address: 49 to 4C. Processing after Completing Adjustment:
FD100 Order Page Address Data Procedure

Address FD200 1 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button.
TYPE PA TYPE SO
49 29 26 26 2 0 03 00
4A E1 84 B1 3 6 13 00
4B 5F 61 66 49
Set the data noted down at
4A
4C A0 0B D0 4 F step 5, and press PAUSE
4B
button.
4C
6
lens.
5-25

RadarW
RadarW FD100 :
Mode CAMERA R-Y
Subject Clear chart 0.5 mm

B-Y
Filter Filter C14 for color temperature 3 mm
correction 6 mm
Measurement Point Displayed data of Video terminal of
Page: 1 (Note 2) VIDEO OUT jack
(75 Ω terminated)
Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote Vectorscope 6 mm
commander
Specified Value Fig. 5-1-17
If not, turn the power of unit OFF/ON. FD200 :
R-Y
1:XX:XX 0.5 mm
Displayed data
B-Y
Checking method: 3 mm
Order Page Address Data Procedure 6 mm

Place the C14 filter on the
1
lens.
2 camera system adjustment”. 6 mm
3 setting”. Fig. 5-1-17

2 E 52
4
lens.
5-26
RadarW
Mode CAMERA
Subject Clear chart
zoom lens at WIDE end) Set data noted down at step
3 E 52
Measurement Point Displayed data Video terminal of 3, and press PAUSE button.
of Page: 1 VIDEO OUT jack Release the data setting
(Note 2) (75 Ω terminated) 4 performed at step 1.
Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote Vectorscope (Refer to page 5-16)
commander
Specified Value R ratio: Fig. 5-1-18
R-Y
3E00 to 4200
B ratio:
3E00 to 4200
B-Y
Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. 4mm
adjusting remote commander. 4mm
1:XX:XX
Displayed data Fig. 5-1-18
Checking method:
2 setting”.
6 0 03 04
specified value.
8 0 03 05
specified value.
5-27
13. Color Reproduction Adjustment RadarW

Adjust the color separation matrix coefficient so that proper color
reproduction is produced.
Mode CAMERA
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 41 to 48, 5C to 5F
Note 2: “Color Reproduction Adjustment” is available only once
after the power is turned on. Turn the power off, then on
again if the adjustment is retried.
Adjusting method:
2 setting”.
3 6 01 AB Press PAUSE button.
4 6 12 80
6 6 12 00
7 Wait for 2 seconds.
Press PAUSE button.
8 6 01 A9
(Note 3)
9 6 02
“01”.
F, address: 41 to 48 and 5C to 5F.

5-28
14. Color Reproduction Check RadarW For NTSC mode

R-Y
Mode CAMERA
(Standard picture frame with the MG
zoom lens at WIDE end) R
jack (75 Ω terminated)
Measuring Instrument Vectorscope
YE
Specified Value All color luminance points
should settle within each color B-Y
reproduction frame. B
Menu setting:
................................ NTSC (NTSC mode)
................................ PAL (PAL mode) G
CY
Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. Burst position
Fig. 5-1-19
Checking method:
Perform “Data setting during For PAL mode
1 camera system adjustment”. R-Y
(Refer to page 5-16) Burst position

2 setting”. MG
R
3 6 10 01
Set the following data, and YE
press PAUSE button.
B-Y
FD100 (Note 2)
B
5 E 52 → 0A: TYPE PA
08: TYPE SO
FD200
07
7 6 12 80 G
CY
9 6 12 00
10 Wait for 2 seconds. Fig. 5-1-20
Check the each color
11 luminance point is in each
color reproduction frame.
board in MVC-FD100.
Refer to page 7 to discriminate the type od CCD.

2 6 10 00
3 E 52
5-29
15. CCD White Defect Compensation

RadarW
RadarW
Mode CAMERA
Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 6,
address: 55
Adjustment Page 7
Adjustment Address 88 to FF
Note 2: The“CCD White Defect Compensation” should be made
when the set warms up at certain duration after the power
was turned on, as it is affected with the temperature.
Adjusting method:
2 F DE Note down the data.
3 F DE 1E Press PAUSE button.
4 F E3 Note down the data.
5 F E3 0E Press PAUSE button.
Press PAUSE button.
6 6 01 8B
(Note 3)
7 6 02
“01”.
Check the data.
8 6 55 00 to 7F: Normal
80 to FF: Defective
10 F DE 0F Press PAUSE button.
11 F E3 60 Press PAUSE button.
13 6 02
“01”.
Check the data.
14 6 55 00: Normal
01 to FF: Defective
7, address: 88 to FF.

2 F DE
3 F E3
5-30
RadarW
16. CCD Black Defect Compensation
Mode CAMERA
Subject Clear chart
(Standard picture frame with the 2 6 2C 00
zoom lens at WIDE end) 3 6 30 00
Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 6, 4 6 91 00
address: 55 Set data noted down at step
5 F DF
Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander 2, and press PAUSE button.
Adjustment Page 7 Release the data setting
Adjustment Address 60 to 87 6 performed at step 1. (Refer to
page 5-16)
Note 2: Check that there are no dust, no dirt and reflection of the
clear chart.
Note 3: Any subject other than the clear chart should be in the
screen.
Adjusting method:
2 F DF Note down the data.
3 F DF 4C Press PAUSE button.
4 6 2C 01
5 6 90 00
6 6 91 03
7 6 92 00
8 6 93 00
10 6 30 01
11 6 07
“01”.
Press PAUSE button.
12 6 01 8D
(Note 4)
13 6 02
“01”.
Check the data.
14 6 55 00 to 0A : Normal
0B to FF : Defective
16 F DF 5A Press PAUSE button.
18 6 02
“01”.
Check the data.
19 6 55 00: Normal
01 to FF: Defective
7, address: 60 to 87.
5-31
17. Strobe White Balance Adjustment RadarW

Adjust the white balance when the strobe light flashed. 16 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”.
Mode CAMERA 17 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button.
Subject Flash adjustment box (Note 3) Press PAUSE button.
18 7 03 05
(1 m from the front of lens) FD100: TYPE SO only (Note 8)
Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 1 (Note 19 6 01 B9 Press PAUSE button. (Note 7)
4) and page: F, address: 64 20 Check the flashing.
Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander 21 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”.
Adjustment Page F 22 Wait for 3 seconds.
Adjustment Address 4D, 4E, 64, 69 to 6B 23 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button.
Specified Value Y level data: 60 to 94 (Note 5) Press PAUSE button.
R-Y level data: 24 7 03 04
FD100: TYPE SO only (Note 8)
FA to FF or 00 to 06 (Note 4) 25 6 01 67 Press PAUSE button.
B-Y level data:
FA to FF or 00 to 06 (Note 4) 26 Check the flashing.
Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. 27 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”.
If not, turn the power of unit OFF/ON. Check that the data satisfies
Note 2: Perform this adjustment in the Flash adjustment box. 28 F 64 the Y level data satisfied
Do not block the photocell window for flash. value. (Note 5)
Restrict external light to enter the photocell window for 29 0 03 02
flash as less as possible.
Note 3: Refer to “4. Preparing the Flash adjustment box”. Check that the R-Y, B-Y
(See page 5-7) 30 1 level data (Note 4) satisfies
Note 4: The right four digits of the page: 1 displayed data of the the specified value.
adjusting remote commander. Note 7: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page:
1:XX:XX F, address: 4D, 4E, 64 and 69 to 6B.
B-Y level data Note 8: Type of CCD imager is different according to the CD
R-Y level data board in MVC-FD100.
Note 5: Displayed data of page: F, address: 64 of the adjusting Refer to page 7 to discriminate the type of CCD.
remote commander.
F:XX:64 Processing after Completing Adjustment:
 Y level data
Note 6: “Strobe White Balance Adjustment” is available only
once after the power is turned on. Turn the power off, 1 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button.
then on again if the adjustment is retried. 2 6 2C 00
3 6 6C 00
Switch setting:
1) FLASH (Control button) .............. ON 4 6 92 00
5 6 93 00
Adjusting method: 6 0 03 00
Order Page Address Data Procedure Release the data setting
Perform “Data setting during 7 performed at step 1.
1 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-16)
2 6 90 00
3 6 91 00
4 6 92 FF
5 6 93 FF
6 6 6C 01
7 6 2C 01
5-32
18. CCD Linearity Check RadarW

Check that CCD output keeps being straight even ISO sensitivity Check that the displayed data
is changed. 17 1 (Note 1) satisfied the B ratio
specified value.
Mode CAMERA
Subject Clear chart
zoom lens at WIDE end) Order Page Address Data Procedure
Measurement Point Displayed data of Page: 1 (Note 1) 1 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button.
Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander Set data noted down step 11,
2 6 12
Specified Value FD100 (Note 2): and press PAUSE button.
TYPE PA: Set data noted down step 4,
3 6 14
R ratio: 3D00 to 4300 and press PAUSE button.
B ratio: 3D00 to 4300 4 0 03 00
TYPE SO:
R ratio: 3900 to 4700 Release the data setting
B ratio: 3900 to 4700 5 performed at step 1.
FD200: (Refer to page 5-16)
R ratio: 3D00 to 4300
B ratio: 3D00 to 4300
1:XX:XX
Displayed data
board in MVC-FD100.
Checking method:
2 setting”.
5 6 14 8B
6 0 03 04
specified value.
8 0 03 05
specified value.
10 6 14 90
Set the following data, and
press PAUSE button.
12 6 12
FD100: 9E
FD200: 9D
14 0 03 04
specified value.
16 0 03 05
5-33
1-5. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS [Adjusting connector]

Before perform the LCD system adjustments, check that the Most of the measuring points for adjusting the LCD system are
specified values of “VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS” are sat- concentrated in CN803 of the FC-89 board.
isfied. Connect the Measuring Instruments via the CPC-12 jig (J-6082-
436-A).
Note 1: The back light (fluorescent tube) is driven with high volt- The following table shows the Pin No. and signal name of CN803.
age AC power. Therefore, do not touch the back light
directly, otherwise you will feel an electric shock. Pin No. Signal Name Pin No. Signal Name
Note 2: Taken an extreme care not to destroy the liquid crystal 1 FDDRF_B 12 LANC_OUT
display module by static electricity when replacing it.
2 FDDRF_A 13 MAKER_RECOG
Note 3: Set the LCD BRIGHT (Menu display) to the center.
3 INDEX 14 PF7
4 REG_GND 15 TXD
5 N. C. 16 RXD
6 TRACK_00 17 RESET
7 HSY 18 EVER_3.2 V
8 COM 19 N.C.
9 VG 20 N.C.
10 HI_UNREG 21 N.C.
11 LANC_IN 22 N.C.
22
1
CPC cover
1
22
FC-89 board
CN803
CPC-12 jig
(J-6082-436-A)
Fig. 5-1-21
5-34
1. LCD Initial Data Input
Mode PLAY
Signal Arbitrary
Adjustment Page D
Adjustment Address D0 to DF
Adjusting method:
2) Select page: D, and enter the data given in the following table.
Note: Press the PAUSE button each time the data are set, as the
data are written to non-volatile memory (EEPROM).
Address Data Remark

D0 82 Bright Adjustment
D1 AB Fixed value
D2 80
White Balance Adjustment
D3 B8
D4 CC Contrast Adjustment
D5 5E Black Limit Adjustment
D6 80 VG Center Adjustment
D7 78 VCO Adjustment (NTSC)
D8 60 V-COM Adjustment
D9 6C Fixed value
DA 64 P-SIG Level Adjustment
DB 00
Fixed value
DC AA
DD 84 VCO Adjustment (PAL)
DE 44
Fixed value
DF 00

5-35
2. VCO Adjustment (PK-61 Board)

Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the LCD screen will
be blurred.
Mode PLAY
Signal Arbitrary CH1
Measurement Point CH1: Pin 7 of CN803 on FC-89
board (HSY)
CH2: Video terminal of VIDEO
CH2
OUT jack
(75 Ω terminated)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope H
Adjustment Page D
magnified
Adjustment Address D7 (NTSC)
DD (PAL)
Specified Value NTSC: T = 2.05 ± 0.1 µs
PAL: T = 3.15 ± 0.1 µs
Menu setting:
.................................. NTSC (NTSC mode)
(This adjustment must be performed in NTSC mode, so don’t CH1
set the menu setting to “PAL” )
Adjusting method:
CH2
1 0 01 01
T
2 D D7 phase difference (T) to the
NTSC specified value. T: Between the center of HSY signal rising and
3 D D7 Press PAUSE button. VIDEO SYNC signal rising

4 D DD Fig. 5-1-22
phase difference (T) to the
PAL specified value.
5 D DD Press PAUSE button.

1 0 01 00
5-36
3. Black Limit Adjustment (PK-61 Board) 4. Bright Adjustment (PK-61 Board)

Set the maximum amplitude of the RGB decoder for driving the Set the amplitude of the RGB decoder for driving the LCD to the
LCD to the specified value. specified value.
If deviated, the LCD screen image will be blackish or saturated If deviated, the LCD screen image will be blackish or saturated
(whitish). (whitish).
Mode PLAY Mode PLAY

Signal Arbitrary Signal Arbitrary
Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN803 on FC-89 board Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN803 on FC-89 board
(VG) (VG)
External trigger: Pin 8 of CN803 External trigger: Pin 8 of CN803
on FC-89 board (COM) on FC-89 board (COM)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Adjustment Page D Adjustment Page D
Adjustment Address D5 Adjustment Address D0
Specified Value A = 8.20 ± 0.1 Vp-p Specified Value A = 7.80 ± 0.1 Vp-p
Adjusting method: Adjusting method:

Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 0 01 01 1 0 01 01
2 5 F1 03 2 5 F1 03
Set the data. Change the data and set the
3 D D0 20 (Don't press PAUSE button.) 3 D D0 voltage (A) to the specified
Change the data and set the value.
4 D D5 voltage (A) to the specified 4 D D0 Press PAUSE button.
value.
5 D D5 Press PAUSE button. Processing after Completing Adjustments:
1 5 F1 00
Order Page Address Data Procedure 2 0 01 00
1 5 F1 00
2 0 01 00
Pedestal
A
A
Pedestal
2H 2H
A: Between the reversed waveform peak and non-reversed A: Between the reversed waveform pedestal and non-reversed
waveform peak waveform pedestal
Fig. 5-1-23 Fig. 5-1-24
5-37
5. Contrast Adjustment (PK-61 Board) 6. VG Center Adjustment (PK-61 Board)

Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the Set the center of VG signal for driving the LCD to the specified
specified value. value.
If deviated, the LCD screen image will be blackish or saturated
(whitish). Mode PLAY
Signal Arbitrary
Mode PLAY
Signal Arbitrary (VG)
Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN803 on FC-89 board Measuring Instrument Digital voltmeter
(VG)
External trigger: Pin 8 of CN803 Adjustment Page D
on FC-89 board (COM) Adjustment Address D6
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Specified Value A = 7.00 ± 0.05 V
Adjustment Page D
Adjusting method:
Adjustment Address D4
Specified Value A = 2.45 ± 0.05 Vp-p
1 0 01 01
Adjusting method: 2 5 F1 02
Order Page Address Data Procedure Change the data and set the
3 D D6 DC voltage (A) to the
1 0 01 01
specified value.
2 5 F1 03
4 D D6 Press PAUSE button.
3 D D4 voltage (A) to the specified
value. Processing after Completing Adjustments:
4 D D4 Press PAUSE button. Order Page Address Data Procedure

1 5 F1 00
Processing after Completing Adjustments: 2 0 01 00
1 5 F1 00
2 0 01 00
10 steps peak
Pedestal
2H
A: Between the pedestal and 10 setps peak
Fig. 5-1-25
5-38
7. P-SIG Level Adjustment (PK-61 Board)

This adjustment sets correctly the V-COM drive signal level of the
LCD panel.
Mode PLAY
Signal Arbitrary
(COM)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Adjustment Page D
Adjustment Address DA
Specified Value A=5.0 ± 0.1 Vp-p
Adjusting method:
1 0 01 01
2 D DA voltage (A) to the specified
value.
3 D DA Press PAUSE button.

1 0 01 00
2H
Fig. 5-1-26
5-39
8. V-COM Adjustment (PK-61 Board)

Set the DC bias of the common electrode drive signal of LCD to
the specified value. B A
If deviated, the LCD display will be move, producing flicker and
conspicuous vertical lines. A B
Mode PLAY
Signal Arbitrary B A
Measurement Point
Measuring Instrument A B
Adjustment Page D
Adjustment Address D8 Fig. 5-1-27
Specified Value The brightness difference
between the section-A and
section-B is minimum
Note 1: Perform “Bright Adjustment” and “Contrast Adjustment”
Adjusting method:
1 0 01 01
2 5 F1 02
3 2 10 02
Change the data so that
4 D D8 brightness of the section A
and section B is equal.
Read the data and this data is
5 D D8 named Dref
Convert Dref to decimal
6 notation, and obtain Dref’
(Note 2)
Calculate DD8’ using
7 following equations
(decimal calculation)
8 DD8’ = Dref’ – 9
Convert DD8’ to a hexadeci-
9 mal number, and obtain DD8
(Note 2)
10 D D8 DD8 Press PAUSE button.
Note 2: Refer to table 5-2-2. “Hexadecimal-decimal conversion
table”

1 5 F1 00
2 2 10 00
3 0 01 00
5-40
9. White Balance Adjustment (PK-61 Board)

Correct the white balance.
If deviated, the LCD screen color cannot be reproduced.
Mode PLAY
Signal Arbitrary
Measurement Point
Adjustment Page D
Adjustment Address D2, D3
Specified Value LCD screen must not be colored
Note 1: Check the white balance only when replacing the fol-
lowing parts. If necessary, adjust them.
1. LCD panel
2. Light induction plate
3. IC901
Adjusting method:
1 0 01 01
2 5 F1 02
D2 80 Press PAUSE button.
3 D D3 B8 (Initial value)
Check that the LCD screen is
not colored. If not colored,
4
proceed to “Processing after
Completing Adjustments”.
D2 Change the data so that the
5 D LCD screen is not colored.
D3 (Note 2)
Note 2: To write in the non-volatile memory (EEPROM), press
the PAUSE button each time to set the data.

1 5 F1 00
2 0 01 00
5-41
1-6. SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS Adjusting method:

1. Battery Down Adjustment
Set the battery end voltage.
If the voltage is incorrect, the life of battery will shorten. 1 0 01 01
The image at the battery end will also be rough. Decrease the output voltage
2 of the regulated power supply
Mode CAMERA so that digital voltmeter
Subject Arbitrary display is 5.55 ± 0.01 Vdc.
Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 2, Read the data and this data is
3 2 52 named Dref
address: 52
Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander 4 D 90 Dref Press PAUSE button.
Adjustment Page D Convert Dref to decimal
5 notation and obtain Dref’.
(Note)
Calculate D91’, D92’, D93’and
Connection:
D94’using following equa-
1) Connect the regulated power supply and the digital voltmeter
tions (decimal calculation).
to the battery terminal as shown in Fig. 5-1-28.
6 D91’= Dref’ + 5
D92’= Dref’ + 23
Preparations before adjustment:
D93’= Dref’ + 44
1) Adjust the output voltage of the regulated power supply so
D94’= Dref’ + 55
that the digital voltmeter display is 6.1 ± 0.1 Vdc.
2) Turn on the HOLD switch of the adjusting remote commander. Convert D91’, D92’, D93’and
3) Turn on the power supply. 7 D94’to a hexadecimal number,
4) Set the CAMERA mode. and obtain D91, D92, D93 and
D94. (Note)
Note: Refer to table 5-2-2 “Hexadecimal-decimal conversion
table”.

1 0 01 00

5.55 ± 0.01 Vdc Digital voltmeter
Power cord
(J-6082-223-A)
Fig. 5-1-28
5-42
2. ZOOM Center Adjustment 3. Alignment Check (FDD Unit)

Set normal position (center value) of ZOOM lever. Confirm that the FDD alignment is within the specifications. If
deviated, reading and writing data from and to floppy disk be-
Mode CAMERA come impossible.
Subject Arbitrary Or compatibility of floppy disk with other machines can be lost.
Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 2 Mode PLAY
address: 5C (Note 2)
Signal Alignment disks (TFD2-1 (+))
Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander and (TFD2-2 (–)):
Adjustment Page D Arbitrary signal
Adjustment Address 89 Measurement Point
Check on LCD screen
Note 1: Before adjustment, make sure that the ZOOM lever is in Measuring Instrument
mechanical center position. Specified Value The playback pictures should be
Note 2: Displayed data of page: 2, address: 5C of the adjusting normal
remote commander.
2:XX:5C
 Displayed data Checking method:
1) Disconnect the adjusting remote commander.
2) Insert the alignment disk TFD2-1 (+) (+17.5 um).
Adjusting method: 3) Playback arbitrary signal and check that the playback picture
is normal.
Order Page Address Data Procedure 4) Insert the alignment disk TFD2-2 (–) (–17.5 um).
1 0 01 01 5) Playback arbitrary signal and check that the playback picture
is normal.
Check the data
5D to 99: Normal
2 2 5C Alignment disk (Disk-1, Disk-2)
00 to 5C or 9A to FF:
(A set of alignment disks consists of two disks as a pair.)
Defective
Disk-1: 8-967-990-01
Read the data and this data is (TFD2-1 (+)) (+17.5 µm)
3 2 5C named Dref Disk-2: 8-967-990-11
From Table 5-1-2, obtain D89 (TFD2-2 (–)) (–17.5 µm)
4 that correspond to Dref.
[Common signals in the disks]
Data Code Signal
Dref D89 MVC-001C.JPG Color bars
5D to 6B 6C MVC-002M.JPG Monoscope
6C to 8A Dref MVC-003V.JPG V. COM adjustment signal
8B to 99 8A MVC-004W.JPG 100% white
Table 5-1-2 MVC-005H.JPG 50% white
MVC-006T.JPG Stair-step signal of 10 steps
Processing after Completing Adjustments: MVC-007R.JPG Red single color
Order Page Address Data Procedure MVC-008G.JPG Green single color
1 0 01 00 MVC-009B.JPG Blue single color
MVC-010D.JPG Camera color bars
MVC-011N.JPG Camera monoscope

(Common signal) + (+17.5 µm alignment)
(Common signal) + (–17.5 µm alignment)
5-43
5-2. SERVICE MODE • Changing the address

2-1. ADJUSTING REMOTE COMMANDER The address increases when the FF (M) button is pressed,
The adjusting remote commander is used for changing the calcu- and decreases when the REW (M) button is pressed. There
lation coefficient in signal processing, EVR data, etc. The adjust- are altogether 256 addresses, from 00 to FF.
ing remote commander performs bi-directional communication • Changing the data (Data setting)
with the unit using the remote commander signal line (LANC). The data increases when the PLAY (N) button is pressed,
The resultant data of this bi-directional communication is written and decreases when the STOP (x) button is pressed. There
in the non-volatile memory. are altogether 256 data, from 00 to FF.
• Writing the adjustment data
1. Used the Adjusting Remote Commander The PAUSE button must be pressed to write the adjustment
1) Connect the adjusting remote commander to the CN803 on data in the nonvolatile memory. (The new adjustment data
the FC-89 board via CPC-12 jig (J-6082-436-A). will not be recorded in the nonvolatile memory if this step is
2) Adjust the HOLD switch of the adjusting remote commander not performed)
to “HOLD” (SERVICE position).
3) Turn on the power with the POWER switch of the unit. 2. Precautions upon Using the Adjusting Remote
If it has been properly connected, the LCD on the adjusting re- Commander
mote commander will display as shown in Fig. 5-2-1. Mishandling of the adjusting remote commander may erase the
correct adjustment data at times. To prevent this, it is recommended
that all adjustment data be noted down before beginning adjust-
ments and new adjustment data after each adjustment.
0 : 00 : 00
Page Data Address
Fig. 5-2-1
4) Operate the adjusting remote commander as follows.
• Changing the page
The page increases when the EDIT SEARCH + button is
pressed, and decreases when the EDIT SEARCH – button is
pressed. There are altogether 16 pages, from 0 to F.
Hexadecimal
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 AB C D E F
notation
LCD Display 01 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A b c d E F
Decimal notation
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 13 1415
conversion value
Table 5-2-1
5-44
2-2. DATA PROCESS

The calculation of the adjusting remote commander display data
(hexadecimal notation) are required for obtaining the adjustment
data of some adjustment items. In this case, after converting the
hexadecimal notation to decimal notation, calculate and convert
the result to hexadecimal notation, and use it as the adjustment
data. Table 5-2-2. indicates the hexadecimal notation- the deci-
mal notation, calculation table.
Hexadecimal notation-Decimal notation 2

↓
The lower digits of the 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
The upper digits of the (A) (b) (c) (d) (E) (F)
0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
2 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
3 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
4 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79
5 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95
6 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111
7 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127
8 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143
9 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159
A (A) 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175
1→ B (b) 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191
C (c) 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207
D (d) 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223
E (E) 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239
F (F) 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255
Note : ( ) indicate the adjusting remote control unit display.
(Example) In the case that the adjusting remote control unit display are BD (bd).
As the upper digit of the hexadecimal notation is B (b), and the lower digit is D (d), the intersection “189” of
the1 and 2 in the above table is the decimal notation to be calculated.
Table 5-2-2
5-45
2-3. SERVICE MODE 3. Switch Check (1)

1. Setting the Test Mode
Page 2 Address 43
Page D Address 10
Bit Function When bit value=1 When bit value=0
Data Function XPOWER SW
0 OFF ON
00 Normal (PK-61 board S703)
01 Forced CAMERA mode power ON 1 XCAM/PLAY SW PLAY CAMERA
(PK-61 board S708)
02 Forced PLAY mode power ON
SHUTTR SW
03 Forced MOVIE mode power ON
• Before setting the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: BLOCK S001)
01.
XSHUTTER LOCK SW
• For page D, the data set is recorded in the non-volatile memory
by pressing the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote com-
BLOCK S001)
mander. In this case, take note that the test mode will not be
exited even when the main power is turned off. 4 MEMORY STICK IN SW OUT IN
• After completing adjustments/repairs, be sure to return the data (MS Socket)
of this address to “00”, and press the PAUSE button of the ad- 5
justing remote commander.
6
Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
XSTILL/MOVIE SW
7 MOVIE STILL
2. Bit Value Discrimination (PK-61 board S710)
Bit values must be discriminated using the display data of the ad-
justing remote commander for following items. Use the table be- Using method:
low to discriminate if the bit value is “1” or “0” 1) Select page: 2, address: 43
2) By discriminating the bit value of display data, the state of the
Display on the adjustilng remote commander switches can be discriminated.
0 : 00 : 00 4. Switch Check (2)
Page 2 Address 48
Address Bit Function When bit value=1 When bit value=0

Page
bit3 to bit0 discrimination DISK/XMS SW MEMORY
bit7 to bit4 discrimination 0 FLOPPY DISK
(PK-61 board S712) STICK
Display on the Bit values
Using method:
Adjusting bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 1) Select page: 2, address: 48
remote or or or or 2) By discriminating the bit value of display data, the state of the
commander bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 switches can be discriminated.
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
A 8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
A (A) 1 0 1 0
B (b) 1 0 1 1
C (c) 1 1 0 0
D (d) 1 1 0 1
B E (E) 1 1 1 0
F (F) 1 1 1 1
Example: If “8E” is displayed on the adjusting remote com-
mander, the bit values for bit7 to bit4 are shown in the
A column, and the bit values for bit3 to bit0 are shown
in the B column.
5-46
5. Switch Check (3)
Page 2 Addresses 55, 56
Using method:
1) Select page: 2, addresses: 55, 56.
2) By discriminating the display data, the pressed key can be
discriminated.
Data
Address
00 to 12 13 to 3A 3B to 62 63 to 87 88 to B3 B4 to E0 E1 to FF
55 CONTROL DOWN CONTROL UP DISPLAY FOCUS
(KEY AD1) (PK-61 board) (PK-61 board) (PK-61 board) (PK-61 board) No key input
(IC404 ul) (S701) (S701) (S702) (S711)
56 CONTROL RIGHT CONTROL LEFT CONTROL SET FLASH PROGRAM AE LCD BACK LIGHT (OFF) LCD BACK LIGHT (ON)
(KEY AD2) (PK-61 board) (PK-61 board) (PK-61 board) (PK-61 board) (PK-61 board) (PK-61 board) (PK-61 board)
(IC404 i;) (S701) (S701) (S701) (S705) (S707) (S709) (S709)
6. LED Check
Page 2 Address 06 Data 02
Using method:
2) Check that all LED except for the ACCESS LED are lit.
7. Self Diagnosis Code

power then back on.
C:13:01
is inserted.
Flash LED
flash unit charged.
Flashing at 3.2 Hz
E:61:00
E61:10
5-47
5-47E
SECTION 6
REPAIR PARTS LIST
6-1. EXPLODED VIEWS The components identified by mark
0 or dotted line with mark 0 are
NOTE: critical for safety.
• -XX and -X mean standardized parts, so they may • The mechanical parts with no reference number in Replace only with part number speci-
have some difference from the original one. the exploded views are not supplied. fied.
• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they are • Accessories are given in the last of the electrical Les composants identifiés par une
seldom required for routine service. Some delay parts list. marque 0 sont critiquens pour la
should be anticipated when ordering these items. sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une pièce
portant le numéro spécifié.
Cabinet (rear) section

(See page 6-4.)
8
10
9
11
2
7
BT901
6
4
2
10
10
2
5 10
FDD block section
2 (See page 6-3.)
2
Lens block section
(See page 6-6.)
10 1
Cabinet (front) assembly J001
(See page 6-2.)
1 3-073-018-01 RETAINER, DC 8 1-961-478-11 HARNESS (FU-055)
2 3-948-339-61 TAPPING 9 1-961-479-11 HARNESS (FU-056)
03 1-418-995-11 FLASH UNIT 10 3-968-729-31 SCREW (M2), LOCK ACE, P2
* 4 3-058-801-01 SHEET, ST INSULATING * 11 3-061-228-01 RETAINER, HARNESS
5 A-7078-139-A FU-159 BOARD, COMPLETE BT901 1-694-297-21 TERMINAL BOARD, BATTERY
6 1-418-894-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL J001 1-794-045-21 CONNECTOR, DC-IN

7 3-073-019-01 HOLDER, SW
6-1
6-1-2. CABINET (FRONT) ASSEMBLY
64 62
51 63
64
70 61
65
59
58
69 60
64 66
64
67
68
54
53
57
52
56
55
51 X-3952-208-1 CABINET (FRONT) ASSY (FD100) 60 3-066-772-01 PLATE, HINGE
51 X-3952-212-1 CABINET (FRONT) ASSY (FD200) 61 3-066-778-01 SPRING, BT TORSION
52 X-3952-207-1 LABEL ASSY, LENS 62 3-066-773-01 HOLDER, BATTERY
53 3-073-008-01 SCREW, FILTER 63 3-969-380-01 SPRING, BATTERY
54 3-073-005-01 RING, ORNAMENTAL 64 3-948-339-01 SCREW, TAPPING
55 3-073-006-01 LID, BATTERY (FD100) 65 3-066-774-01 SHAFT, HINGE

55 3-073-006-11 LID, BATTERY (FD200) 66 3-052-574-01 CLAW, BT LOCK
56 3-719-381-01 SCREW (M2X4) 67 3-058-755-01 SCREW, TRIPOD
57 3-072-999-01 COVER, DC (FD100) 68 3-713-791-41 SCREW (M1.7X5), TAPPING, P2
57 3-072-999-11 COVER, DC (FD200) 69 3-073-010-01 KNOB, ZOOM (FD100)
58 3-073-013-01 SHEET METAL (L), STRAP 69 3-073-010-11 KNOB, ZOOM (FD200)

59 3-066-775-01 SPRING, BT PLATE 70 3-073-011-01 SLIDER, ZOOM
6-2
6-1-3. FDD BLOCK SECTION

ns: not supplied
106
(Note 2)
105
104
108
104
107
ns
CN201
104
103
101
(Note 1)
102
104
(Note 1) Be sure to read “2-9. THE WAY OF DISASSEMBLING


101 1-772-563-11 DRIVE, FLOPPY DISK (Note 1) 106 A-7078-111-A FC-89 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE)
102 3-066-799-01 BRACKET, USB (FD100: TYPE PA) (Note 2)
103 1-680-234-11 FP-335 FLEXIBLE BOARD 106 A-7078-112-A FC-89 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE) (FD200)
104 3-964-010-31 SCREW (M2), 0 PART-NO. P2 MAIN 107 1-683-379-11 FP-465 FLEXIBLE BOARD
105 3-066-780-01 BRACKET, FC * 108 3-061-228-01 RETAINER, HARNESS
CN201 1-794-962-11 CONNECTOR, SQUARE TYPE (USB 5P)
106 A-7078-110-A FC-89 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE)
(FD100: TYPE SO) (Note 2)
6-3
156
Cabinet (rear) assembly

(See page 6-5.)
157
LCD901
BZ901
ND801
153
@
153
154
155 151
153
153 153
152
! : Board
BT701 (BATTERY, LITHIUM SECONDARY)
on the mount position. (See page 4-48.)

151 X-3952-209-1 CASE ASSY, PK SHIELD 156 3-068-458-01 WINDOW, SOLAR
152 1-683-380-11 FP-466 FLEXIBLE BOARD 157 3-066-764-01 SHEET (BUZZER), ADHESIVE
153 3-948-339-61 TAPPING BZ901 1-529-739-11 BUZZER, PIEZOELECTRIC
154 A-7078-140-A PK-61 BOARD, COMPLETE LCD901 8-753-050-80 ACX307AKC-1
155 3-073-075-01 RETAINER, BL 0 ND801 1-517-787-71 TUBE, FLUORESCENT, COLD CATHODE
6-4

ns: not supplied
213
211
214
ns
210 212 215

204
217
ns 208
(Note 3)
207
210 218
ns 220
202
210 ns 205
(Note 3) 206
209
219
201 221 203
216
(Note 3) The eject mechanism portion is a mechanical unit which

has completely been adjusted in the factory. So never
disassemble the eject mechanism portion.
203 3-051-124-01 FOOT, RUBBER 215 3-058-785-01 SPRING, LOCK BUTTON
205 3-073-033-01 RETAINER, P KNOB 217 3-066-805-21 LID, CPC (FD100)
206 3-053-141-01 SPRING, POWER 217 3-066-805-31 LID, CPC (FD200)
207 3-355-424-21 SCREW, TAPPING 218 3-073-034-01 KNOB, MODE SELECTION (FD100)
208 3-073-030-01 KNOB, MS 218 3-073-034-11 KNOB, MODE SELECTION (FD200)

209 3-073-031-01 RETAINER, MS KNOB 219 3-073-035-01 RETAINER, MODE SELECTION
210 3-948-339-61 TAPPING 220 3-073-039-01 KNOB, LCD (FD100)
211 3-058-770-01 SHEET METAL (R), STRAP 220 3-073-039-11 KNOB, LCD (FD200)
212 3-058-784-01 RETAINER, LOCK BUTTON 221 3-073-040-01 RETAINER, LCD KNOB
6-5
257
256
255
259
258
(Note 2)
251
IC101, 201
(Note 2, 4)
253
254
252 253

(Note 4) Be sure to read “Precuations for Replacement of CCD

Imager” on page 4-8, 10 when changing the CCD
imager.
251 1-758-620-11 LENS, ZOOM (DE01) 258 A-7078-141-A CD-379 BOARD, COMPLETE (FD100: TYPE PA)
252 3-073-016-01 FRAME, LENS (Note 2)
253 3-713-791-41 SCREW (M1.7X5), TAPPING, P2 258 A-7078-144-A CD-390 BOARD, COMPLETE (FD200)
254 1-683-378-11 FP-464 FLEXIBLE BOARD 259 3-073-017-01 SHEET, LENS
255 1-758-571-11 FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL (FD100) IC101 A-7095-017-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) (FD100: SO)
(Note 2, 4)
255 1-758-572-11 FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL (FD200) IC101 A-7095-033-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) (FD200)
256 3-068-558-01 CCD SEAL RUBBER
257 3-318-203-11 SCREW (B1.7X6), TAPPING IC201 A-7095-023-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) (FD100: PA)
258 A-7078-137-A CD-390 BOARD, COMPLETE (FD100: TYPE SO) (Note 2, 4)
(Note 2)
6-6
CD-379 CD-390

NOTE:
• Due to standardization, replacements in the • Items marked “*” are not stocked since they The components identified by
parts list may be different from the parts speci- are seldom required for routine service. mark 0 or dotted line with mark
0 are critical for safety.
fied in the diagrams or the components used Some delay should be anticipated when order- Replace only with part number
on the set. ing these items. specified.
• -XX and -X mean standardized parts, so they • SEMICONDUCTORS
Les composants identifiés par une
may have some difference from the original In each case, u: µ, for example: marque 0 sont critiquens pour la
one. uA. . : µA. . uPA. . : µPA. . sécurité.
• RESISTORS uPB. . : µPB. . uPC. . : µPC. . Ne les remplacer que par une pièce
All resistors are in ohms. uPD. . : µPD. . portant le numéro spécifié.
METAL: Metal-film resistor. • CAPACITORS
METAL OXIDE: Metal oxide-film resistor. uF: µF When indicating parts by reference
F: nonflammable • COILS number, please include the board.
uH: µH
• Abbreviation About FC-89 board, CD-379/390 board and CCD
AUS : Australian model imager, discriminate CCD type on the machine
CND : Canadian model referring to page 7, and replace the same type.
J : Japanese model
A-7078-141-A CD-379 BOARD, COMPLETE (FD100:TYPE PA) < RESISTOR >
***********************
(IC201 is not included in this complete board) R202 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W
R203 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W
< CAPACITOR > R204 1-218-944-11 RES-CHIP 180 5% 1/16W
R205 1-218-935-11 RES-CHIP 33 5% 1/16W
C201 1-125-827-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 25V R206 1-218-935-11 RES-CHIP 33 5% 1/16W
C202 1-113-992-11 TANTAL. CHIP 3.3uF 20% 35V
C203 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 16V R207 1-218-959-11 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W
C204 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V R208 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W
C206 1-104-329-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 50V R209 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W
R210 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W
C208 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V < THERMISTOR >
C209 1-164-850-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10PF 0.5PF 50V
C210 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V TH201 1-810-816-11 THERMISTOR, NTC (1608)
C212 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V A-7078-137-A CD-390 BOARD, COMPLETE (FD100: TYPE SO)
C214 1-162-964-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V A-7078-144-A CD-390 BOARD, COMPLETE (FD200)
***********************
< CONNECTOR > (IC101 is not included in this complete board)
CN201 1-691-358-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 20P < CAPACITOR >
< DIODE > C101 1-125-827-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 25V
C102 1-113-992-11 TANTAL. CHIP 3.3uF 20% 35V
D201 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111- (K8).S0 C103 1-104-913-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 16V
< IC > C110 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V
IC201 A-7095-023-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (Note) (FD100: TYPE SO)
< COIL > C112 1-164-850-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10PF 0.5PF 50V
L201 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH (FD200)
< TRANSISTOR > < CONNECTOR >
Q201 8-729-117-73 TRANSISTOR 2SC4178-F14 CN101 1-691-358-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 20P

CCD imager.
6-7
CD-390
< DIODE >
D101 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111- (K8).S0
< FERRITE BEAD >
FB101 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH
< IC >
IC101 A-7095-017-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (FD100: TYPE SO) (Note)

IC101 A-7095-033-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (FD200) (Note)
< COIL >
L101 1-469-528-91 INDUCTOR 100uH
< TRANSISTOR >

Q102 8-729-117-73 TRANSISTOR 2SC4178-F14
< RESISTOR >
R102 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W

R103 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W
(FD200)
R103 1-218-944-11 RES-CHIP 180 5% 1/16W
(FD100: TYPE SO)
R104 1-208-635-11 RES-CHIP 10 5% 1/16W
(FD200)
R104 1-218-935-11 RES-CHIP 33 5% 1/16W
(FD100: TYPE SO)
R105 1-218-931-11 RES-CHIP 15 5% 1/16W

(FD200)
R105 1-218-935-11 RES-CHIP 33 5% 1/16W
(FD100: TYPE SO)
R106 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W
(FD200)
R106 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W
(FD100: TYPE SO)
R107 1-208-643-11 RES-CHIP 22 5% 1/16W
(FD200)
R107 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W

(FD100: TYPE SO)
R108 1-218-981-11 RES-CHIP 220K 5% 1/16W
(FD200)
R108 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W
(FD100: TYPE SO)
R109 1-218-959-11 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W
R110 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W
< THERMISTOR >
TH101 1-810-816-11 THERMISTOR, NTC (1608)

CCD imager.
6-8
FC-89
A-7078-110-A FC-89 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE) C111 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V
(FD100: TYPE SO) (FD100: TYPE PA)
A-7078-111-A FC-89 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE) C111 1-162-918-11 CERAMIC CHIP 18PF 5% 50V
(FD100: TYPE PA) (FD100: TYPE SO/FD200)
A-7078-112-A FC-89 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE) (FD200) C112 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V
********************* (FD100: TYPE PA)
< CAPACITOR > (FD100: TYPE SO/FD200)
C001 1-164-880-11 CERAMIC CHIP 180PF 5% 16V C113 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V
C003 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V (FD100: TYPE PA)
C004 1-110-563-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.068uF 10% 16V C113 1-162-928-11 CERAMIC CHIP 120PF 5% 50V
C006 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V (FD100: TYPE SO/FD200)
C007 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V C114 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
C012 1-117-720-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10V C119 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
C015 1-117-720-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10V C120 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V
C019 1-164-935-11 CERAMIC CHIP 470PF 10% 50V C124 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
C020 1-164-935-11 CERAMIC CHIP 470PF 10% 50V C125 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V
C126 1-110-569-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V
C024 1-164-935-11 CERAMIC CHIP 470PF 10% 50V C129 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V
C131 1-104-852-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V
C026 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V C134 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V
C028 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V C135 1-164-346-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 16V
C037 1-125-838-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 6.3V C192 1-113-682-11 TANTAL. CHIP 33uF 20% 10V
C040 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V C194 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V
C041 1-125-838-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 6.3V
C047 1-164-506-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 16V C199 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V
C048 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V
C049 1-113-987-11 TANTAL. CHIP 4.7uF 20% 25V C200 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V
C052 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V C201 1-135-259-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V
C205 1-135-259-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V
C059 1-127-573-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 16V C210 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
C061 1-104-913-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 16V
C101 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C211 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V
C103 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V C304 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
C305 1-119-750-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V
C108 1-115-156-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10V C308 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V
C109 1-115-156-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10V C317 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
C110 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C318 1-135-259-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V
(FD100: TYPE SO/FD200) C323 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
(FD100: TYPE PA) C325 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
6-9
FC-89
C328 1-135-259-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V C685 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
C339 1-164-846-11 CERAMIC CHIP 6PF 0.5PF 50V C712 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
C345 1-135-201-11 TANTALUM CHIP 10uF 20% 4V C716 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V
C401 1-104-913-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 16V C723 1-113-682-11 TANTAL. CHIP 33uF 20% 10V
C405 1-119-750-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V C902 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V
C410 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V C904 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V
C426 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V < CONNECTOR >
CN001 1-770-629-21 PIN, CONNECTOR 12P
C433 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V CN002 1-770-626-21 PIN, CONNECTOR 9P
C434 1-113-986-11 TANTAL. CHIP 2.2uF 20% 25V CN101 1-691-358-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 20P
C435 1-109-982-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V CN184 1-766-350-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 20P
C436 1-107-823-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 10% 16V CN301 1-770-627-21 PIN, CONNECTOR 10P
CN681 1-815-452-21 CONNECTOR, MEMORY STICK (MS SOCKET)
C506 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V CN682 1-779-327-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 6P
CN801 1-774-054-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 45P
C524 1-164-939-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 50V < DIODE >
C536 1-135-259-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V D002 8-719-027-77 DIODE MA796
D181 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111- (K8).S0
C538 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V D182 8-719-075-62 DIODE 1SS401 (TE85L)
C540 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V D401 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111- (K8).S0
C544 1-135-259-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V D402 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111- (K8).S0
C546 1-135-259-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V
C547 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V D406 8-719-027-76 DIODE
1SS357-TPH3
D408 8-719-073-01 DIODE
MA111- (K8).S0
C548 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V D410 8-719-027-76 DIODE
1SS357-TPH3
C552 1-164-845-11 CERAMIC CHIP 5PF 0.25PF 50V D501 8-719-061-82 DIODE
TLSU1002 (TPX1, SONY)
C553 1-164-845-11 CERAMIC CHIP 5PF 0.25PF 50V (ACCESS LED)
C555 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V D502 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111- (K8).S0
D503 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111- (K8).S0
C557 1-131-862-91 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 4V D681 8-719-056-23 DIODE MA2S111- (K8).SO
C651 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V D701 8-719-049-09 DIODE 1SS367-T3SONY
C652 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V D702 8-719-422-70 DIODE MA8075
C654 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V < FERRITE BEAD >
C655 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V * FB101 1-500-282-11 FERRITE 0uH (FD200)
C656 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V FB101 1-500-283-11 FERRITE 0uH (FD100)
C657 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V * FB103 1-500-282-11 FERRITE 0uH
C682 1-135-210-11 TANTALUM CHIP 4.7uF 20% 10V (FD100: TYPE SO/FD200)
C683 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V FB103 1-500-283-11 FERRITE 0uH (FD100: TYPE PA)
* FB105 1-500-282-11 FERRITE 0uH (FD200)
C684 1-119-750-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V
6-10
FC-89
FB105 1-500-283-11 FERRITE 0uH (FD100) L017 1-469-524-91 INDUCTOR 4.7uH
FB107 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH
FB109 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH L101 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH (FD200)
FB110 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH L101 1-469-527-91 INDUCTOR 47uH (FD100)
FB111 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH L102 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH
L181 1-414-753-91 INDUCTOR 4.7uH
FB302 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH
L302 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH
FB654 1-500-283-11 FERRITE 0uH
L403 1-414-757-11 INDUCTOR 100uH
FB685 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH
L505 1-414-754-11 INDUCTOR 10uH
< IC > L651 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH
L702 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH
IC001 8-759-060-94 IC MB3785APFV-G-BND-ER L902 1-414-754-11 INDUCTOR 10uH
IC101 8-752-397-43 IC CXD2470R-T4
IC102 8-759-654-31 IC VSP2202Y/2K (FD100: TYPE SO/FD200) < LINE FILTER >
IC102 8-759-833-25 IC AD80027AJSTRL (FD100: TYPE PA)
IC182 8-759-637-96 IC uPD16877MA-6A5-E2 LF651 1-419-100-21 INDUCTOR 0uH
IC183 8-759-637-96 IC uPD16877MA-6A5-E2 < TRANSISTOR >

IC184 8-759-693-13 IC NJM12904V (TE2)
IC185 8-759-681-42 IC NJM12902V (TE2) Q001 8-729-804-41 TRANSISTOR 2SB1122-S
IC186 8-759-831-77 IC BH2221FV-E2 Q002 8-729-033-14 TRANSISTOR FP107-TL
IC301 8-759-654-55 IC MB87J4030LGA-G-TJ-ER Q003 8-729-033-14 TRANSISTOR FP107-TL
Q004 8-729-033-14 TRANSISTOR FP107-TL
IC303 8-759-678-85 IC MB81F641642D-10 Q005 8-729-427-72 TRANSISTOR XP4501
IC404 8-752-929-73 IC CXP921064A-059R-T6
IC405 8-759-538-14 IC S-3513BEFS-TB Q006 8-729-804-41 TRANSISTOR 2SB1122-S
IC406 8-759-693-07 IC AK6440BL-L Q010 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (TX).SO
IC407 6-701-629-01 IC XC66DS03XXPR Q014 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR (TX)
Q016 6-550-016-01 TRANSISTOR UMF5NTR
IC501 8-759-669-63 IC HD6417197BT77 Q018 8-729-037-61 TRANSISTOR UN9113J- (TX).SO
IC502 8-759-196-93 IC TC7SH00FU-TE85R
IC505 (Note) IC MR27T1602F-0H0TNZ04D Q023 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (TX).SO
IC506 8-759-644-56 IC GM72V161621ET-10KTR Q024 8-729-427-72 TRANSISTOR XP4501
IC508 8-759-640-87 IC BR9016RFV-E2 Q025 8-729-427-70 TRANSISTOR XP4401
Q031 8-729-427-72 TRANSISTOR XP4501
IC651 6-701-044-01 IC IMIC6014ATD (FD100: TYPE PA) Q032 8-729-427-70 TRANSISTOR XP4401
IC651 8-759-831-79 IC IMIC6004ATD (FD100: TYPE SO/FD200)
IC681 8-759-657-69 IC PDIUSBP11APW, 118 Q102 8-729-037-61 TRANSISTOR UN9113J- (TX).SO
IC702 8-759-668-53 IC uPD65943GC-Y16-9EU-E2 Q103 8-729-037-61 TRANSISTOR UN9113J- (TX).SO
IC703 8-759-271-88 IC TC7SHU04FU Q104 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (TX).SO
IC704 8-759-656-25 IC TB6055AF (EL) Q181 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR (TX)
IC901 8-759-688-19 IC NJM2274R (TE2)
Q182 8-729-042-26 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR (K8).SO
< COIL > Q184 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR (TX)
Q302 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR (TX)
L004 1-419-354-21 INDUCTOR 22uH Q303 8-729-042-72 TRANSISTOR UN9214J- (K8).SO
L005 1-416-511-11 INDUCTOR 47uH Q304 8-729-042-72 TRANSISTOR UN9214J- (K8).SO
L007 1-419-354-21 INDUCTOR 22uH
L008 1-469-523-91 INDUCTOR 2.2uH Q305 8-729-042-26 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR (K8).SO
Q307 8-729-042-26 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR (K8).SO
L015 1-469-524-91 INDUCTOR 4.7uH
L016 1-414-406-11 INDUCTOR 220uH Q310 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR (TX)
(Note) Part number is not fixed yet.

It will be notified by Supplement of Service
Manual when it is fixed.
6-11
FC-89
Q311 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR (TX) R030 1-218-951-11 RES-CHIP 680 5% 1/16W
Q312 8-729-042-26 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR (K8).SO R031 1-218-949-11 RES-CHIP 470 5% 1/16W
Q317 8-729-037-61 TRANSISTOR UN9113J- (TX).SO R032 1-218-949-11 RES-CHIP 470 5% 1/16W
R033 1-208-713-11 METAL CHIP 18K 0.5% 1/16W
Q406 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (TX).SO R034 1-208-927-11 METAL CHIP 47K 0.5% 1/16W
Q409 8-729-041-43 TRANSISTOR HN1L02FU (TE85R) R037 1-218-949-11 RES-CHIP 470 5% 1/16W
R044 1-208-715-11 METAL CHIP 22K 0.5% 1/16W
Q415 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR (TX) R048 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W
Q682 6-550-016-01 TRANSISTOR UMF5NTR (FD100: TYPE SO/FD200)
Q701 8-729-017-61 TRANSISTOR 2SB1581 (FD100: TYPE PA)
Q702 8-729-042-26 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR (K8).SO R061 1-208-941-11 METAL CHIP 180K 0.5% 1/16W
Q903 8-729-042-26 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR (K8).SO R065 1-218-976-11 RES-CHIP 82K 5% 1/16W
R068 1-218-976-11 RES-CHIP 82K 5% 1/16W
< RESISTOR >
R071 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W
R002 1-218-982-11 RES-CHIP 270K 5% 1/16W R074 1-208-719-11 METAL CHIP 33K 0.5% 1/16W
R003 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (FD100: TYPE PA)
R004 1-208-920-81 METAL CHIP 24K 0.5% 1/16W R074 1-208-922-11 METAL CHIP 30K 0.5% 1/16W
R004 1-218-878-11 METAL CHIP 20K 0.5% 1/16W R075 1-208-895-91 METAL CHIP 2.2K 0.5% 1/16W
(FD100: TYPE SO/FD200) (FD100: TYPE PA)
R005 1-208-696-11 METAL CHIP 3.6K 0.5% 1/16W R075 1-208-715-11 METAL CHIP 22K 0.5% 1/16W
(FD100: TYPE SO/FD200) (FD100: TYPE SO/FD200)
R005 1-218-864-11 METAL CHIP 5.1K 0.5% 1/16W R076 1-208-931-11 METAL CHIP 68K 0.5% 1/16W
R006 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R076 1-208-935-11 METAL CHIP 100K 0.5% 1/16W
R007 1-208-699-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 0.5% 1/16W (FD100: TYPE PA)
(FD100: TYPE SO/FD200) R083 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
R007 1-208-701-11 METAL CHIP 5.6K 0.5% 1/16W R084 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
(FD100: TYPE PA)
R085 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
R008 1-218-972-11 RES-CHIP 39K 5% 1/16W R086 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
R010 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R091 1-414-226-21 FERRITE 0uH (Note)
R011 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R092 1-414-226-21 FERRITE 0uH (Note)
R012 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W
R093 1-414-226-21 FERRITE 0uH (Note)
R013 1-218-948-11 METAL CHIP 390 0.5% 1/16W R094 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
R014 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W R103 1-218-935-11 RES-CHIP 33 5% 1/16W
R015 1-218-979-11 RES-CHIP 150K 5% 1/16W (FD200)
R016 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R103 1-218-940-11 RES-CHIP 82 5% 1/16W
R017 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W (FD100: TYPE SO)
R103 1-218-941-81 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W
R018 1-208-885-11 METAL CHIP 820 0.5% 1/16W (FD100: TYPE PA)
R019 1-208-910-11 METAL CHIP 9.1K 0.5% 1/16W
R022 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R114 1-218-941-81 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W
(FD200)
R024 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W (FD100)
R025 1-208-701-11 METAL CHIP 5.6K 0.5% 1/16W R115 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W
R026 1-208-711-11 METAL CHIP 15K 0.5% 1/16W (FD100: TYPE PA)
R027 1-208-699-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 0.5% 1/16W
R115 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (FD100: TYPE SO/FD200)
R028 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R116 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W
R029 1-218-945-11 RES-CHIP 220 5% 1/16W (FD100: TYPE SO/FD200)
(Note) Ferrite beads are mounted to the location

where R091 – 093 are printed.
6-12
FC-89
R117 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (FD100: TYPE PA) R317 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W
R119 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (FD100: TYPE SO/FD200) R318 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
(FD100: TYPE PA) R320 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
R321 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W
R120 1-218-945-11 RES-CHIP 220 5% 1/16W
R121 1-218-945-11 RES-CHIP 220 5% 1/16W R322 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
R125 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R324 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
(FD100: TYPE PA) R326 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
R128 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (FD100: TYPE SO/FD200) R327 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W
R129 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R328 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (FD200)
R133 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R329 1-218-941-11 METAL CHIP 100 0.5% 1/16W
R140 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R330 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
R141 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R333 1-208-699-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 0.5% 1/16W
R149 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R334 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (FD100)

R150 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R336 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
R151 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R337 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
R189 1-208-635-11 RES-CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R339 1-218-849-11 METAL CHIP 1.2K 0.5% 1/16W
R191 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R340 1-208-885-11 METAL CHIP 820 0.5% 1/16W
R192 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R342 1-218-941-11 METAL CHIP 100 0.5% 1/16W

R202 1-208-683-11 METAL CHIP 1K 0.5% 1/16W R401 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0

R240 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R428 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W
R300 1-208-663-11 METAL CHIP 150 0.5% 1/16W R430 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W
R303 1-218-945-11 METAL CHIP 220

MVC-FD100-FD200 L 2 e L3 Ver 1.4

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MVC-FD100-FD200 L 2 e L3 Ver 1.4

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MVC-FD100/FD100H/FD200/FD200H

SERVICE MANUAL US Model

This service manual contains information for Japanese model as well.

When the machine needs to be repaired,

On the FC-89 board FC-89 board

System Flash Operating temperature Storage temperature Dimensions (Approx.)

SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT

• Floppy disk that can be used by the MVC-FD100/FD200

Table for differences of function

Self-diagnosis Display .......................................................... 8

Section Title Page

6. REPAIR PARTS LIST

6-1. Exploded Views ............................................................. 6-1

* The color reproduction frame is shown on page 151.

When installing a connector, don’t press down at wire of connector.

Cut and remove the part of gilt

[Discharging of the FLASH unit’s charging capacitor] Discharging the Capacitor

Preparing the Short Jig

Wrap insulating tape.

[CCD type discrimination] (MVC-FD100 only)

Note: About CD board, FC-89 board and CCD imager, discrimi-

Checking method: – CD-379 Board (Side A) –

Data CCD Type

– CD-390 Board (Side A) –

[Description on Self-diagnosis Display]

Note : The “Self-diagnosis” data is backed up by the coin lithiumbattery.

Display Code Countermeasure Cause Caution Display During Error

[Power supplying Method]

Be sure to read the following

Identifying the parts w;

Preparing the power supply Charging the battery pack

Your camera operates only with the NP-F330 (supplied)/F550 (optional)

1 Open the battery cover. 3

2 Install the battery pack.

After charging the battery pack

Battery eject lever Battery remaining indicator

Charging time NP-F330 (supplied) NP-F550

Using the AC power adaptor Setting the date and time

Using your camera abroad

EFFECT FILE CAMERA SETUP

VIDEO OUT CLOCK SET Y/M/D

Select from [Y/M/D] (year/month/day), [M/D/Y] M/D/Y

(month/day/year), or [D/M/Y] (day/month/year). 2002 / 1 / 1 12 : 00 AM ENTER 2

6 Select the year, month, day, hour or minute

2002 / 1 / 1 12 : 00 AM ENTER EJECT lock DISK EJECT lever 1

8 Select [ENTER] with B on the control button,

The date and time are entered. M/D/Y

Removing the floppy disk

Basic operations B Recording

Inserting a “Memory Stick” Recording still images

“Memory Stick” cover

To turn off the LCD backlight

For the number of images you can record on a floppy disk or a

To cancel the self-timer

The indicators on the LCD screen during recording

Recording moving images Playing back still images

Access lamp INDEX DELETE FILE TOOL SETUP

4 Select the desired moving image with the "b/B"

Step 1 Installing the USB driver to the computer

Step 2 Connecting your camera to your computer using the USB

1 Insert a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick” in your computer and set

2 Select an image file to be viewed from the folder and double-click

5 Perform operations such as disconnecting the USB cable. Caution